WO2003104961A1 - Foldable keyboard - Google Patents

Foldable keyboard Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2003104961A1
WO2003104961A1 PCT/JP2003/007028 JP0307028W WO03104961A1 WO 2003104961 A1 WO2003104961 A1 WO 2003104961A1 JP 0307028 W JP0307028 W JP 0307028W WO 03104961 A1 WO03104961 A1 WO 03104961A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
keyboard
unit
base plate
key
support plate
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2003/007028
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
望月　勲
高木　猛行
Original Assignee
ブラザー工業株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2002163440A external-priority patent/JP2004013351A/en
Priority claimed from JP2002169724A external-priority patent/JP3972739B2/en
Priority claimed from JP2002172691A external-priority patent/JP2004021395A/en
Priority claimed from JP2002172841A external-priority patent/JP2004021405A/en
Application filed by ブラザー工業株式会社 filed Critical ブラザー工業株式会社
Priority to AU2003241974A priority Critical patent/AU2003241974A1/en
Priority to US10/508,490 priority patent/US20050212772A1/en
Priority to EP03730804A priority patent/EP1510909A4/en
Publication of WO2003104961A1 publication Critical patent/WO2003104961A1/en
Priority to US11/003,685 priority patent/US20050099396A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00—Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/16—Constructional details or arrangements
    • G06F1/1613—Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers
    • G06F1/1626—Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers with a single-body enclosure integrating a flat display, e.g. Personal Digital Assistants [PDAs]
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00—Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/16—Constructional details or arrangements
    • G06F1/1613—Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers
    • G06F1/1632—External expansion units, e.g. docking stations
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/02—Input arrangements using manually operated switches, e.g. using keyboards or dials
    • G06F3/0202—Constructional details or processes of manufacture of the input device
    • G06F3/0216—Arrangements for ergonomically adjusting the disposition of keys of a keyboard
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/02—Input arrangements using manually operated switches, e.g. using keyboards or dials
    • G06F3/0202—Constructional details or processes of manufacture of the input device
    • G06F3/0221—Arrangements for reducing keyboard size for transport or storage, e.g. foldable keyboards, keyboards with collapsible keys
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01H—ELECTRIC SWITCHES; RELAYS; SELECTORS; EMERGENCY PROTECTIVE DEVICES
    • H01H13/00—Switches having rectilinearly-movable operating part or parts adapted for pushing or pulling in one direction only, e.g. push-button switch
    • H01H13/70—Switches having rectilinearly-movable operating part or parts adapted for pushing or pulling in one direction only, e.g. push-button switch having a plurality of operating members associated with different sets of contacts, e.g. keyboard
    • H01H13/86—Switches having rectilinearly-movable operating part or parts adapted for pushing or pulling in one direction only, e.g. push-button switch having a plurality of operating members associated with different sets of contacts, e.g. keyboard characterised by the casing, e.g. sealed casings or casings reducible in size
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01H—ELECTRIC SWITCHES; RELAYS; SELECTORS; EMERGENCY PROTECTIVE DEVICES
    • H01H2223/00—Casings
    • H01H2223/046—Casings convertible
    • H01H2223/05—Casings convertible composed of hingedly connected sections

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a foldable keyboard that is excellent in portability and has good operability during operation.In particular, each keyboard unit can be operated by extremely simple operation after opening the folded state of two keyboard units.
  • the present invention relates to a foldable keyboard that can be arranged in a desired operation state. Background technology ''
  • each keyboard unit has been rotatably connected to each other.
  • each keyboard unit has been folded down to make it compact and easy to carry.
  • various foldable keyboards have been proposed in which each keyboard unit is released from a folded state when used to achieve the same operability as a normal keyboard.
  • Japanese Patent No. 3210456 Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. Hei 9-341 612
  • Japanese Patent No. 3254648 Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-34661
  • the keyboard and the enclosure are divided into two parts at the center in the longitudinal direction, and each of the divided keyboard and the enclosure is foldable via a connecting arm which is rotationally engaged with each other.
  • the composed foldable keyboard is described.
  • Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-56904 discloses that at least one of two divided keyboards is slidably supported on a support plate, and each of the divided keyboards is attached to a back plate. A foldable keyboard which is rotatably connected via support plates on both sides is described.
  • each keyboard unit is rotatably connected to each other, so that when not in use, each keyboard unit is folded down in a compact state to improve portability.
  • each keyboard unit is pivoted outward from the folded state to open, and the same as a normal keyboard. It is possible to operate with operability.
  • keyboard operation is performed in the same posture, and eyes and body become tired if the operation is continued for a long time. Relationships are being reviewed. For example, considering the structure of the keyboard ergonomically, the users of the keyboard have different finger lengths, shapes, etc., so when considering the key top arrangement on the keyboard, etc. An arrangement that is the easiest to use for each user is desirable.
  • Patent No. 3210456 Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-34612
  • Patent No. 3254658 Japanese Patent Application No. In each of the keyboards described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 6111
  • the two keyboard units are used as they are when the keyboard units are released from the folded state, and the arrangement relationship between the two keyboard units is determined. It cannot be changed according to the desired use form of the user.
  • each keyboard unit when two keyboard units are put into use, each keyboard unit is turned outward from the folded state. Then, one keyboard unit slidably supported on the support plate is slid toward the other keyboard unit so that the two keyboard units are in close use. Although it is arranged, it is the same as the above case in that the arrangement relationship between the two keyboard units in such a state cannot be changed according to the user's desired use form.
  • US Pat. No. 5,574,481 discloses that a keyboard is divided into two keyboard units so that the keyboard units can be moved toward and away from each other. And a foldable keyboard in which each keyboard unit is configured to be rotatable in a horizontal direction parallel to the installation surface of the keyboard.
  • the keyboard units when the keyboard units are arranged in contact with each other, the keyboard units can be used in a normal state, and when the keyboard units are rotated, the keyboard units are used. It can be used with each key unit inclining with respect to the user's operation surface.
  • each keyboard unit is configured to be rotatable relative to each other, each key unit is rotated. —The rotation of the bodunit must be performed away from the installation surface. Therefore, in order to arrange each keyboard unit at an angle with respect to the operation surface side so that each keyboard unit is optimal for the user, hold one keyboard unit with the left hand and the other with the right hand. While holding the keyboard unit, each keyboard donut must be turned to the desired tilt state. Such operations are very cumbersome, and subtle adjustments are very difficult.
  • each keyboard unit After releasing the folded state of two keyboard units, each keyboard unit is arranged in a desired operation state by a very simple operation. It is intended to provide a foldable keyboard that can be operated. Disclosure of the invention
  • the foldable keyboard according to the first invention is provided with a rotation connecting portion between the first keyboard unit and the second keyboard unit, and when the keyboard is used, Both units are pivoted in the direction separating from each other via the pivotal connection, and become horizontal, and when the keyboard is not used, both units are pivoted in the direction approaching via the pivotal connection to overlap.
  • the first keyboard unit is provided on a first base plate and a first support plate disposed on the first base plate so as to be rotatable in a horizontal direction.
  • the second keyboard unit includes a second base plate and a second support plate disposed on the second base plate so as to be rotatable in a horizontal direction.
  • the second key in which multiple key switches are arranged
  • the rotation connecting portion has a support shaft rotatably supporting the first base plate and the second base plate, and is provided on one side of the first support plate.
  • a first gear member having a predetermined arc surface formed thereon and a first gear tooth portion formed on the arc surface; and a first arc member disposed on one side of the second support plate and having a predetermined arc shape.
  • a second gear member having a surface formed, and a second gear tooth portion formed on the arc surface of the first gear tooth portion.
  • the foldable keyboard according to the first invention is provided between the first base plate and the first key unit or between the second base plate and the second key unit.
  • 1 be A lock mechanism for locking the first key unit or the second key unit at a desired rotation position with respect to the base plate or the second base plate.
  • the lock mechanism includes: an opening formed in an arc surface of the first gear member or the second gear member; a groove; and the first base plate. Alternatively, it is characterized by comprising a hook piece provided on the second base plate and locked in a hook groove. .
  • the first support plate of the first key unit is rotatably disposed on the first pace plate at a predetermined rotation fulcrum, and the first support plate is rotatable.
  • An arcuate surface is formed on one side of the holding plate, the arcuate surface conforming to the radius of rotation about the pivot point, and the arcuate surface of the first gear member has the same radius of curvature as the arcuate surface of the first support plate.
  • the second support plate of the second key unit is rotatably disposed on a second base plate at a predetermined rotation fulcrum, and a rotation fulcrum is provided on one side of the second support plate.
  • An arc surface that matches a rotation radius around the center is formed, and the arc surface of the second gear member has the same radius of curvature as the arc surface of the second support plate.
  • the first gear tooth portion formed on the first gear member includes a lower gear located below an upper surface of the first gear member and the first gear member.
  • a plurality of first gear teeth formed of upper teeth located above the upper surface of the second gear member, and a second gear tooth portion formed on the second gear member is located below the upper surface of the second gear member.
  • the plurality of first gear teeth and the second gear teeth are respectively upper teeth. And are connected to each other via lower teeth.
  • the first pace plate of the first keyboard unit and the second base plate of the second keyboard unit are connected via the support shaft of the rotary connecting portion.
  • the units When the keyboard is in use, the units are turned in a direction away from each other via the support shaft to be horizontal, and when the keyboard is not in use, both units are in a horizontal state. Are rotated in the direction approaching each other via the support shaft, and are in an overlapped state.
  • the first key unit of the first keyboard unit is rotatably disposed on the first base plate
  • the second key unit of the second keyboard unit is provided.
  • a unit is rotatably disposed on the second base plate, and a first gear tooth formed on an arc surface of a first gear member disposed on one side of the first support plate.
  • a lock mechanism for locking the first key unit or the second unit at a desired rotation position is provided between the first base plate and the first key unit or between the second pace plate and the second key unit. Since the first key unit and the second key unit are synchronized with each other and turned to a desired turning position, the first and second key units are locked at the turning position. Thus, the keyboard operation can be stably performed in a state where the operation mode is optimal for each user.
  • the lock mechanism includes a lock groove formed on the arc surface of the first gear member or the second gear member, and a lock piece provided on the first base plate or the second base plate and locked in the lock groove. Since the configuration is simple, the lock mechanisms of the first and second units can be realized at low cost. Further, since the lock groove is formed on the arcuate surface of the first gear member or the second gear member on which the second gear tooth portion is formed, it is possible to form the lock groove simultaneously with the formation of the second gear tooth portion. This makes it possible to reduce costs.
  • the arc surface of the first gear tooth portion and the arc surface of the support plate in the first key unit have the same radius of curvature
  • the arc surface of the second gear tooth portion and the second cutout have the same curvature radius
  • the arc surface of the support plate has the same radius of curvature as the arc surface of the first gear tooth portion in the first key unit, the arc surface of the support plate, and the second surface in the second key unit.
  • the arcuate surface of the gear tooth and the arcuate surface of the support plate coincide with each other, so that there is no deviation between the two arcuate surfaces, so that the first unit and the second unit are not shifted. Can be configured to look good.
  • first gear tooth portion is provided with the lower gear and the first gear located below the upper surface of the first gear member.
  • a plurality of first gear teeth formed of upper teeth positioned above the upper surface of the second gear member, and the second gear teeth formed on the second gear member are lower than the upper surface of the second gear member.
  • It has a plurality of second gear teeth consisting of lower teeth to be located at the side position and upper teeth located above the upper surface of the second gear member, and a plurality of the first gear teeth and the second gear teeth are respectively provided. Since the configuration is such that the upper teeth and the lower teeth are engaged with each other, the engagement between the plurality of first gear teeth and the second gear teeth can be changed by the cooperation of the lower teeth and the upper teeth in each case. Even when the first keyboard unit and the second keyboard unit are rotated between the folded state and the horizontal state, they can be always held without being released.o
  • the foldable keyboard according to the second invention is provided with a rotation connecting portion between the first keyboard unit and the second keyboard unit, and the turning connection portion when the keyboard is used.
  • the two units are pivoted in the direction away from each other and become horizontal when the keyboard is not used.
  • the first keyboard unit includes a first base plate and a plurality of key switches arranged on a first support plate that is rotatably arranged on the first base plate in a horizontal direction.
  • a first key unit, wherein the second keyboard unit is provided with a plurality of key switches on a second base plate and a second support plate disposed on the second pace plate so as to be rotatable in a horizontal direction.
  • a support shaft that rotatably supports the first base plate and the second base plate, and the rotation connection portion is slidably inserted into the support shaft.
  • a sliding member having a gear tooth portion formed thereon, which is disposed on one side of the first support plate, and has a predetermined arc surface formed thereon, and the arc surface engages with the gear tooth portion.
  • a first gear member having first gear teeth formed thereon, and a second gear disposed on one side of the second support plate and having a predetermined arc surface formed thereon, the second gear engaging with the gear tooth portion on the arc surface.
  • a second gear member having teeth formed thereon.
  • the foldable key board according to the second invention is provided between the first base plate and the first key unit or between the second base plate and the second key unit, A lock mechanism for locking the first unit or the second unit at a desired rotation position with respect to the base plate or the second pace plate is provided.
  • the lock mechanism includes: a lock groove formed in an arc surface of the first gear member or the second gear member; and a first base plate or a second pace. And a hook piece provided on the plate and locked in the lock groove.
  • the first support plate of the first key unit is rotatably disposed on the first base plate at a predetermined rotation fulcrum, and the first support unit is provided with a first support plate.
  • an arc surface is formed that matches the radius of rotation about the pivot point, and the arc surface of the first gear member has the same radius of curvature as the arc surface of the first support plate.
  • the second support plate of the second key unit is rotatably arranged on the second base plate at a predetermined rotation fulcrum, and one side of the second support plate has a rotation fulcrum as a center.
  • An arc surface conforming to the rotating radius of the second gear member is formed, and the arc surface of the second gear member has the same radius of curvature as the arc surface of the second support plate.
  • the first base plate of the first keyboard unit and the second base plate of the second keyboard unit are connected to each other via the support shaft of the rotation connecting portion.
  • the units When the keyboard is in use, the units are turned in a direction away from each other via the support shaft to be horizontal, and when the keyboard is not in use, both units are in a horizontal state. Are rotated in the direction approaching each other via the support shaft, and are in an overlapped state.
  • the first key unit of the first keyboard unit is rotatably disposed on the first base plate, and the second key unit of the second keyboard unit is connected to the second key unit.
  • the first gear teeth formed on the base plate so as to be rotatable, and the first gear teeth formed on the arc surface of the first gear member provided on one side of the first support plate slide on the support shaft.
  • the second gear teeth formed on the arcuate surface of the second gear member disposed on one side of the second support plate are fitted with the gear teeth of the sliding member fitted as much as possible. Since it is engaged with the gear teeth of the member, when the user uses the keyboard, one of the two key units is turned horizontally on the first base plate or the second base plate. The other of the two units can be rotated in synchronization with one of the units.
  • the keyboard units can be arranged in a desired operation state by an extremely simple operation, and the keyboard operation can be performed in an operation mode optimal for each user. 8
  • the first key is provided between the first base plate and the first keyboard or between the second base plate and the second keyboard. Since the lock mechanism for locking the unit or the second key unit at a desired rotation position is provided, the first key unit and the second key unit are synchronized with each other to rotate to the desired rotation position. After that, the first and second key units can be opened by the lock mechanism at the rotation position, and the keyboard operation can be stably performed in a state where the operation mode is optimal for each user. it can.
  • the lock mechanism is provided in the lock groove formed in the arc surface of the first gear member or the second gear member, and in the first base plate or the second base plate. Since the lock mechanism is simply composed of the lock piece that locks in the lock groove, the lock mechanism of the first and second key units can be realized at low cost. Further, since the notch groove is formed on an arc surface of the first gear member on which the first gear teeth are formed or the second gear member on which the second gear teeth are formed, the first gear teeth and the second gear teeth are formed. The lock groove can be formed at the same time as the formation of the gear teeth, so that the cost can be reduced.
  • the arc surface of the first gear tooth and the arc surface of the support plate in the first key unit have the same radius of curvature, and the arc of the second gear tooth. Since the surface and the arc surface of the support plate in the second key unit have the same radius of curvature, the arc surface of the first gear tooth in the first key unit and the arc surface of the support plate, and the second key unit have the same curvature radius.
  • the arc surface of the 2 gear teeth and the arc surface of the support plate coincide with each other, so that the first key unit and the second unit are formed with a good appearance without any deviation between the two arc surfaces. be able to.
  • the foldable keyboard according to the third invention is provided with a rotation connecting portion between the first keyboard unit and the second keyboard unit, and the keyboard is rotated when the keyboard is used. Both units are pivoted in the direction of separation via the connecting part and become horizontal, and when the keyboard is not in use, both units are pivoted in the direction of approaching via the rotating connecting part and overlap.
  • the first key unit is horizontally rotated on the first base plate and the first base plate.
  • a first keyboard in which a plurality of switches are arranged on a first support plate movably disposed, wherein the second keyboard unit includes a second base plate;
  • a second key unit in which a plurality of key switches are arranged on a second support plate arranged rotatably in a horizontal direction on the base plate, wherein the rotation connection portion is provided with the first base plate and the second base plate;
  • (2) a support shaft rotatably supporting the base plate, and a sliding member slidably fitted to the support shaft, and disposed on one side of the first support plate;
  • a link mechanism having a second link member that links the second support member.
  • the foldable keyboard according to the third invention is provided between the first pace board and the first unit, or between the second pace board and the second key unit, A lock mechanism is provided for locking the first key unit or the second key unit at a desired rotation position with respect to the first base plate or the second base plate.
  • the lock mechanism includes: a lock groove formed in an arc surface of the first support member or the second support member; and the first base plate or the second base. And a hook piece provided on the plate and locked in the lock groove.
  • the first support plate of the first key unit is rotatably arranged on the first base plate at a predetermined rotation fulcrum, and An arc surface is formed on one side of the support plate so as to conform to a radius of rotation about the pivot point, and the first support member has an arc having the same radius of curvature as the arc surface of the first support plate.
  • a second support plate of the second key unit is rotatably disposed on a second base plate at a predetermined rotation fulcrum, and is provided on one side of the second support plate.
  • An arc surface conforming to a rotation radius centered on the rotation fulcrum is formed, and the second support member has an arc surface having the same radius of curvature as the arc surface of the second support plate. It is characterized by
  • the first base plate of the first keyboard unit and the second base plate of the second keyboard unit are turned via the support shaft of the rotary connecting portion. Movably supported so that when using the keyboard The units are pivoted away from each other via the support shaft to be horizontal, and when the keyboard is not used, both units are pivoted toward each other via the support shaft. It will be in a superimposed state.
  • the first key unit of the first keyboard unit is rotatably disposed on the first base plate, and the second key unit of the second keyboard unit is mounted on the second base plate.
  • a first support member provided on one side of the first support plate is provided with a first link on a slide member slidably fitted on the support shaft.
  • the user uses the keyboard because the second support member linked via the member and disposed on one side of the second support plate is linked to the sliding member via the second link member.
  • the other of the two key units can be rotated synchronously with the one key unit. It becomes possible.
  • the keyboard units can be arranged in a desired operation state by a very simple operation, and the keyboard operation can be performed in an operation mode most suitable for each user.
  • first cut or the second cut is placed between the first base plate and the first key unit or between the second base plate and the second unit. Since the lock mechanism that locks at the desired rotation position is provided, the first cut and the second cut are synchronized with each other to rotate to the desired rotation position. After that, the first and second kits can be locked by the lock mechanism at the rotation position, and the keyboard is fixed in an optimal operation form for each user. Operation can be performed stably. Further, a lock mechanism is provided on the arc groove surface of the first support member or the second support member, and is provided on the first base plate or the second base plate, and is engaged with the lock groove. Since the lock mechanism is simply composed of the lock pieces, the lock mechanisms of the first and second key units can be realized at low cost. In addition, since the lock groove is formed on the arc surface of the first support member or the second support member, it is possible to form the lock groove simultaneously with the formation of the arc surface, which also reduces costs. Can be achieved.
  • the arc surface of the first support member and the arc surface of the support plate in the first cutout have the same radius of curvature, and the arc surface of the second support member and the support in the second key unit. Since the arc surface of the plate is configured to have the same radius of curvature, the first key The arc surface of the first support member and the arc surface of the support plate in the unit, and the arc surface of the second support member and the arc surface of the support plate in the second key unit coincide with each other.
  • the first key unit and the second key unit can be configured to look good without causing a displacement between the two arc surfaces.
  • the foldable key board according to the fourth invention is provided with a rotary connecting portion between the first keyboard unit and the second keyboard unit, and the rotary connecting portion is used when the keyboard is used.
  • the two units are rotated in the direction in which they are separated from each other and become horizontal, and when the keyboard is not in use, both units are rotated in the direction in which they come close to each other via the rotary connection part and are superimposed.
  • the first keyboard unit comprises a first base plate and a plurality of key switches mounted on a first support plate disposed on the first base plate so as to be rotatable in a horizontal direction.
  • a second key board unit wherein the second keyboard unit is provided on a second base plate and a second support plate disposed on the second base plate so as to be rotatable in a horizontal direction.
  • 2nd key with multiple key switches A rotating shaft, the rotating connecting portion having a support shaft rotatably supporting the first base plate and the second base plate, and a support shaft between the first base plate and the first key unit.
  • the first cut and the second key unit are independent of each other with respect to the first base plate and the second base plate.
  • a holding mechanism for holding at a desired rotation position.
  • the holding mechanism is provided on one side of the first support plate and has a predetermined circular surface, and the plurality of first circular surfaces are formed on the circular surface.
  • a first support member provided with an opening groove, a first lock piece provided on the first base plate and locked in the first groove, and a lock member disposed on one side of the second support plate;
  • a second support member having a predetermined arc surface formed thereon and a plurality of second lock grooves formed in the arc surface, the second support member being provided on the second base plate, and engaging with the second lock groove.
  • a second lock piece for stopping is provided on one side of the first support plate and has a predetermined circular surface, and the plurality of first circular surfaces are formed on the circular surface.
  • the first support member is provided with a scale at a position corresponding to each of the first opening grooves
  • the second support member is provided with the second opening.
  • the scale is provided at a position corresponding to the lock groove.
  • the foldable keyboard according to the fourth invention is characterized in that the first support of the first kite is provided.
  • the holding plate is rotatably arranged on the first base plate at a predetermined rotation fulcrum, and an arcuate surface is formed on one side of the first support plate that matches the radius of rotation about the rotation fulcrum.
  • the arc surface of the first support member has the same radius of curvature as the arc surface of the first support plate, and the second support plate of the second kit has a predetermined rotation.
  • the second support member is rotatably disposed on the second base plate at a fulcrum, and an arcuate surface is formed on one side of the second support plate so as to match a radius of rotation about the rotation fulcrum.
  • the arc surface has the same radius of curvature as the arc surface of the second support plate.
  • the foldable keyboard includes: a first support member provided on one side of the first support plate and having a predetermined arc surface formed thereon; A first braking member provided on the base plate and in contact with an arc surface of the first support plate; and a second support member provided on one side of the second support plate and having a predetermined arc surface formed thereon. A second braking member provided on the second base plate and in contact with an arc surface of the second support plate.
  • the pivotable connecting portion is provided between the first keyboard unit and the second keyboard unit, and the keyboard is used via the pivotal connecting portion when the keyboard is used.
  • both units are rotated in the direction of approach through the rotation connection part to be in a superimposed state, while the units are pivoted away from each other.
  • the rotation connecting portion has a support shaft rotatably supporting the first base plate and the second pace plate
  • the first key board unit includes a first base plate, A first support plate disposed on the first pace plate so as to be rotatable in a horizontal direction, and a first unit in which a plurality of keys are arranged
  • the second keyboard unit includes: (2) Base and horizontal rotation on the second base A second key unit in which a plurality of key switches are arranged on a second support plate disposed on the first support plate, wherein the first support plate is provided with a first rotating shaft disposed on a first base plate. And the second support plate is horizontally rotated via a second rotation shaft provided on the second base plate.
  • the first base plate of the first keyboard unit and the second base plate of the second keyboard unit are connected via the support shaft of the rotary connecting portion. Pivotally supported so that when using the keyboard, The units are pivoted away from each other via the support shaft to be horizontal, and when the keyboard is not used, both units are pivoted toward each other via the support shaft. It will be in a superimposed state.
  • the first key unit of the first keyboard unit is rotatably disposed on the first pace plate, and the second key unit of the second keyboard unit is rotated on the second base plate.
  • the first base plate and the second base plate are located between the first base plate and the first key unit and between the second base plate and the second key unit. Therefore, a holding mechanism for holding the first key unit and the second key unit at desired rotation positions independently of each other is provided, so that when the user uses the keyboard, the first key unit is moved to the first key unit.
  • the first key unit can be held by the holding mechanism at the rotation position by rotating the key unit in the horizontal direction on the base plate, and the second key unit can be turned in the horizontal direction on the second pace plate by the holding mechanism.
  • the second key It is possible to hold the door.
  • the first unit and the second unit can be held independently of each other at the desired rotation position via the holding mechanism, and each keyboard unit can be independently held by an extremely simple operation.
  • the keyboard operation can be stably performed in a state where the operation mode is optimal for each user.
  • the first lock piece provided on the first base plate is engaged with the first lock groove of the first support member provided on the first support plate.
  • the second lock piece provided on the second base plate is locked with the second locking groove of the second support member. Since the locking mechanism is locked by locking the first and second key units, the locking mechanism of the first and second key units can be realized at low cost. Further, since the first lock groove is formed on the arc surface of the first support member, and the second lock groove is formed on the arc surface of the second support member, the arc of the first support member and the second support member is formed. The opening groove can be formed at the same time as the formation of the surface, so that the cost can be reduced.
  • first support member is provided with a scale at a position corresponding to each first lock groove
  • second support member is provided with a scale at a position corresponding to each second lock groove.
  • the arc surface of the first support member and the arc surface of the first support plate in the first unit have the same radius of curvature, and the arc surface of the second support member and the second support plate in the second key unit. And the arc surface of the first support member in the first unit, the arc surface of the first support plate, and the second support member in the second unit.
  • the arc surface and the arc surface of the second support plate coincide with each other, so that the first cut unit and the second key unit can be configured to have a good appearance without any deviation between the two arc surfaces. can do.
  • the first braking member provided on the first base plate is held by abutting against an arc surface of the first support member, and the second key unit is held.
  • Is held at a desired rotational position by holding a second braking member provided on the second base plate in contact with an arc surface of the second support plate, and the first braking member and the first support member are held.
  • the contact position between the second braking member and the second support member and the second support member can be moved steplessly. Therefore, when the first key unit and the second key unit are held independently of each other at a desired rotation position, the rotation position can be freely selected, and a more optimal operation for each user can be performed.
  • the keyboard operation can be performed stably in a state where the keyboard is fixed in the form.
  • the holding mechanism in the first and second key units is simply constituted by the braking member and the arc surface of the supporting member, the holding mechanism of the first and second key units is low. It can be realized at cost.
  • first support plate is horizontally rotated via a first rotation shaft provided on the first base plate
  • second support plate is provided on the second base plate. Since the first rotary shaft is configured to be horizontally rotated via the second rotary shaft, the first rotary shaft is disposed inside the first key unit, and the second rotary shaft is connected to the second rotary shaft.
  • the first pivot and the second pivot are disposed inside the key unit, as compared with the case where the first and second pivots are provided outside each key unit. It is possible to reliably prevent foreign matter from colliding or entering the shaft. As a result, on the first base plate and the second base plate, T JP03 / 07028
  • first key unit and the second key unit can be stably rotated and supported.
  • first and second rotating shafts inside each key unit so as not to protrude outside each key unit, the size of each keyboard unit can be reduced.
  • FIGS. 1 to 13 are views for explaining a foldable keyboard according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 1 schematically shows the foldable keyboard according to the first embodiment.
  • Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view
  • Fig. 2 is an enlarged explanatory view showing a synchronizing mechanism for synchronizing the rotation of the first support plate and the second support plate
  • Fig. 3 is a diagram showing the rotation of the first support plate and the second support plate.
  • FIGS. 3A and 3B are explanatory diagrams showing a series of states from a state in which they are not moved to a state in which they are rotated to a maximum rotation position.
  • FIG. 3A is a state in which they are not rotated
  • FIG. 3 (C) shows a state in which the keyboard has been rotated halfway
  • FIG. 3 (C) shows a state in which the keyboard has been rotated to the maximum rotation position
  • FIG. 4 is an explanatory view showing operations when using the keyboard.
  • A) is a perspective view showing the first and second keyboard units folded
  • FIG. 4 (B) is a state in which the first and second keyboard units are opened.
  • FIG. 4 (C) is a perspective view showing a state in which the backrest member is raised from the state shown in FIG. 4 (B)
  • FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the control unit and the keyboard.
  • FIG. 5 (A) is an explanatory view showing a state where the control unit is removed from the first keyboard unit
  • FIG. 5 (A) is an explanatory view showing a state where the control unit is removed from the first keyboard unit
  • FIG. 5 (B) is an explanatory view showing a state where the control unit and the universal arm are connected
  • FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing various use states of the universal arm
  • FIG. 7 is a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the first and second keyboard units in the folded state shown in FIG. 4 (A).
  • FIG. 8 is an explanatory view schematically showing the wiring state of signal lines connected to the respective key switches of the second keyboard unit
  • FIG. 9 is a control section. Connect the connection terminal of the PDA to the connector member, and use the back member
  • FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the PDA is supported in an inclined state and used in the state of the form (B) in FIG. 6.
  • FIG. 11 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the PDA is supported in an inclined state by members and used in the state of the form (C) in FIG. 6, and FIG. 11 is a state shown in FIG. 4 (B);
  • FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the gear tooth portion of the first gear member and the gear tooth portion of the second gear member, as viewed from the back side of the keyboard.
  • Fig. 12 (A) is an explanatory view showing the gear teeth and the gear teeth separated from each other for convenience of explanation
  • Fig. 12 (B) is a state where the gear teeth and the gear teeth are combined.
  • FIG. 12 (C) is an explanatory view showing a combined state of the gear teeth and the gear teeth when the first keyboard unit and the second keyboard unit are mutually folded.
  • FIG. 13 shows a series of states in which the first keyboard unit and the second keyboard unit that are leveled and in use are gradually folded, and FIG. 13 (A) shows each key unit.
  • FIG. 13B is an explanatory view schematically showing the relationship between the gear teeth when one board unit is in a horizontal state.
  • FIG. 13 (B) shows the second keyboard unit slightly rotated.
  • Fig. 13 (C) is an explanatory view schematically showing the relationship between the gear teeth when they are in a state of being started to be folded, and Fig. 13 (C) further rotates the second keyboard-dunit from the state of Fig. 13 (B).
  • Fig. 13 (D) is an explanatory view schematically showing the relationship between the gear teeth immediately before folding is completed by moving the gear unit
  • Fig. 13 (D) is a diagram schematically showing each gear when the folding of each keyboard unit is completed.
  • FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a tooth engagement relationship.
  • FIGS. 14 to 24 are views for explaining a foldable keyboard according to the second embodiment
  • FIG. 14 is a foldable keyboard according to the second embodiment
  • FIG. 15 is an enlarged explanatory view schematically showing a synchronizing mechanism for synchronizing the rotating operation of the first support plate and the second support plate
  • FIG. Fig. 16 is an explanatory view showing a series of states from a state where the support plate and the second support ⁇ are not rotated to a state where the support plate and the second support ⁇ ⁇ are rotated to the maximum rotation position. Not rotated, Fig. 16 (B) shows a half-turned position, Fig. 16 (C) shows a full-turn position, Fig. 17 shows a keyboard FIG.
  • FIG. 17 (A) is a perspective view showing a state where the first and second keyboard units are folded
  • FIG. 17 (B) is a view showing the first and second keyboard units.
  • FIG. 17 (C) is a perspective view showing a state where the backrest member is raised from the state shown in FIG. 17 (B)
  • FIG. 18 is a perspective view showing a state where the control unit and the keyboard are opened.
  • FIG. 18 (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the control unit is removed from the first keyboard unit
  • FIG. 18 (B) is a control unit.
  • FIG. 19 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the universal arm is connected to the universal arm
  • FIG. 19 is an explanatory view showing various usage states of the universal arm
  • FIG. 20 is an illustration shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 21 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the first and second keyboard units cut in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction (short side direction) in a folded state
  • FIG. 21 is each key suite of the second keyboard unit.
  • Explanatory diagram schematically showing the wiring condition of the signal line connected to the switch Fig. 22 shows the connector member of the control part: Connect the connection terminal of the PDA and support the PDA with the backrest member inclined.
  • FIG. 19 is an explanatory view showing a state of use in the state of the form (B) in FIG. 19, and
  • FIG. 23 is a diagram in which a PDA connection terminal is connected to a connector member of a control unit, and the PDA is inclined by a backrest member FIG.
  • FIG. 19 is an explanatory view showing a state of use in the state of the form (C) in FIG. 19, and FIG. 24 is a state shown in FIG. 17 (B), and FIG. Explanatory diagram schematically showing the state of C) when viewed from the back side of the keyboard A.
  • FIGS. 25 to 35 are views for explaining the foldable keyboard according to the third embodiment
  • FIG. 25 is a foldable key according to the third embodiment
  • FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view schematically showing one board
  • FIG. 26 is an enlarged explanatory view showing a synchronization mechanism for synchronizing the rotation of the first support plate and the second support plate
  • FIG. Fig. 27 is an explanatory view showing a series of states from a state where the support plate and the second support plate are not rotated to a state where the support plate and the second support plate are rotated to the maximum rotation position.
  • Fig. 27 (B) shows a partially rotated state
  • Fig. 27 (C) shows a fully rotated position
  • Fig. 28 uses a keyboard.
  • FIG. 28 (A) is a perspective view showing a state where the first and second keyboard units are folded
  • FIG. 28 (B) is a first and second keyboard units.
  • Uni FIG. 28 (C) is a perspective view showing a state where the backrest member is raised from the state of FIG. 28 (B)
  • FIG. 29 is a perspective view showing a state where the backrest member is raised.
  • FIG. 29 (A) is an explanatory view showing a state where the control section is removed from the first keyboard unit
  • FIG. 29 (B) is an explanatory view showing the control section and the free arm.
  • FIG. 30 is an explanatory view showing various states of use of the free arm.
  • FIG. 31 is a folded state shown in FIG. 28 (A).
  • FIG. 32 shows the wiring state of the signal lines connected to each key switch of the second keyboard unit.
  • Fig. 33 schematically shows the PDA connection terminal connected to the connector member of the control section.
  • Fig. 30 is an illustration showing the PDA supported in an inclined state and used in the configuration (B) shown in Fig. 30.
  • Fig. 34 shows the connection of the PDA connection terminal to the connector member of the control unit.
  • FIG. 30 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the PDA is supported in an inclined state by the backrest member and used in the state of the form (C) in FIG. 30.
  • FIG. 35 is a state shown in FIG. 28 (B).
  • FIG. 30 is an explanatory view schematically showing the state of the form (C) in FIG. 30 as viewed from the back side of the keyboard.
  • FIG. FIGS. 36 to 46 are views for explaining the foldable keyboard according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating the foldable keyboard according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view schematically showing the keyboard.
  • FIG. 37 shows the first support plate and the second support plate at the rotation position after the first support plate and the second support plate are independently rotated.
  • FIG. 38 is an enlarged explanatory view showing a lock mechanism for locking the plate, and FIG. 38 shows a state in which the first key unit and the second unit are turned from a state where they are not turned to a desired turning position.
  • FIG. 8 (A) shows the first key unit and the second key unit not rotated
  • Fig. 38 (B) shows the first key unit clockwise and the second key unit counterclockwise.
  • Explanatory drawing showing the rotated state Fig. 39 shows the state where the first key unit and the second key unit are rotated to the desired rotation position.
  • Fig. 39 (A) shows a state in which only the first key unit 37 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in Fig. 38 (A)
  • Fig. 39 (B) shows a state shown in Fig. 3-9.
  • FIG. 40 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the second key unit 4 is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 40A
  • FIG. 40 is an explanatory view showing an operation when using the keyboard.
  • FIG. 40 (B) is a perspective view showing a state where the first and second keyboard units are opened
  • FIG. C) is a perspective view showing a state where the backrest member is raised from the state shown in FIG. 40 (B)
  • FIG. 41 is an explanatory view showing a relationship between the control section and the keyboard.
  • (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the control unit is removed from the first key unit
  • FIG. 41 (B) is a diagram in which the control unit and the free arm are connected.
  • FIG. 42 is an explanatory view showing the use state of the free arm.
  • FIG. 43 is a first and second keyboard units in the folded state shown in FIG. 40 (A).
  • FIG. 44 is an enlarged cross-sectional view cut in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction (transverse direction).
  • Use FIG. 45 is an explanatory view schematically showing the state shown in FIG. 40 (B) when viewed from the back side of the keyboard 1, and
  • FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing, in an enlarged manner, a holding mechanism for holding a rotating position of a second key unit.
  • FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view schematically showing a foldable keyboard.
  • a keyboard 1 is basically composed of a first keyboard unit 3 and a second keyboard unit 4 which are rotatably connected to each other via a rotation connection unit 2. .
  • the first keyboard unit 3 is disposed on the first base plate 5, the first support plate 6 rotatably supported on the first base plate 5 in a horizontal direction, and the first support plate 6. It is composed of a plurality of key switches 7.
  • the second key unit 4 is provided on a second base plate 8, a second support plate 9 rotatably supported on the second base plate 8, and a second support plate 9. It consists of a plurality of key switches 10 provided.
  • the first base plate 5 is formed of a thin metal plate such as aluminum, and has two corners 12 at the side end 11 (the right end in FIG. 1) of the first base plate 5.
  • Resin bearing members 13, 14, which constitute a part of the rotation connecting portion 2 are provided.
  • the bearing member 13 is provided with two bearings 13B having a bearing hole 13A formed apart from each other.
  • two bearings 14 B each having a bearing hole 14 A are provided separately.
  • the second base plate 8 is formed of a thin metal plate such as aluminum, and has two corners at a side end 15 (left end in FIG. 1) of the second base plate 8.
  • the portion 16 is provided with bearing members 17 and 18 made of resin, which respectively constitute a part of the rotary connection portion 2.
  • One bearing 17 with a bearing hole 17 A formed in the bearing member 17 B is provided.
  • the bearing member 18 is provided with one bearing 18B in which a bearing hole 18A is formed.
  • the bearing 17B is inserted between the bearings 13B, and the bearing holes 13A of the bearings 13B and the bearing holes 17A of the bearing 17B are arranged in a straight line.
  • the bearing 18B is inserted between the bearings 14B, and the bearing hole 14A of each bearing 14B and the bearing hole 18A of the bearing 18B are arranged in a straight line. You. A support shaft 19 A is fitted in each of the bearing holes 13 A and 17 A arranged in a straight line as described above, and a support shaft 1 is provided in each of the 14 A and 18 A. 9 B is inserted. As a result, the first base plate 5 and the second base plate 8 are rotatably supported via the two support shafts 198 and 19B.
  • the bearing member 14 has a hollow peripheral wall member 23 integrally formed therewith, and the bearing member 18 has a hollow peripheral wall member 24 integrally formed therewith. I have. Inside the peripheral wall member 24, a signal line 69 (described later) for connecting each key switch 10 provided on the second keyboard unit 4 and the control unit 62 (described later) is passed. The signal line 69 is guided outward from the hollow bearing member 18 and the bearing 18B and wound around the support shaft 19B, and further from the hollow bearing member 14 It is guided through the peripheral wall member 23. A signal line (not shown) for connecting each key switch 7 provided on the first keyboard unit 3 and the control unit 62 is inserted through the inside of the peripheral wall member 23.
  • the wire is guided through a free arm 67 (to be described later) together with a signal wire 69 that is guided from the second keyboard unit 4 via the peripheral wall member 24. Further, an arm supporting portion 25 formed on the back side of the peripheral wall member 23 is formed in a hollow shape, rotatably supports the free arm 67, and transmits each signal guided as described above. The wire is guided through the universal arm 6 7.
  • a screw receiving portion 27 is formed substantially at the center near the side end 26 opposite to the side end 11 and the screw receiving portion 2 is formed.
  • a screw 29 loosely fitted into the screw hole 28 of the first support plate 6 is fastened to 7.
  • the first support plate 6 is mounted on the first pace plate 5 so as to be rotatable in the horizontal direction with the screw 29 and the screw receiver 27 as fulcrums.
  • a substantially center position (inside by a width of a control portion 62 described later) slightly inside the side end portion 8 a opposite to the side end portion 15.
  • a screw receiving portion 30 is formed in the mounting portion, and a screw 32 that is loosely fitted into the screw hole 31 of the second support plate 9 is fastened to the screw receiving portion 30.
  • the second support plate 9 is mounted on the second base plate 8 so as to be rotatable in the horizontal direction with the screw 32 and the screw receiving portion 30 as fulcrums.
  • the first support plate 6 in the first keyboard unit 3 is formed of a thin metal plate such as aluminum, and a predetermined number of key switches 7 operated by the left hand are disposed on the first support plate 6. ing.
  • the number of key switches 7 operated by the left hand is determined based on international standards (ISO 21026 and ISO2503).
  • a membrane switch having a three-layer structure an upper sheet having a movable electrode, a lower sheet having a fixed electrode, and a switching hole interposed between the upper sheet and the lower sheet to separate the movable electrode from the fixed electrode.
  • Each locking portion 33 projects upward from a hole formed in the membrane switch.
  • each key switch 7 urges the key top 34, the pair of link members 35 for guiding the up and down movement of the key top 34 and the key top 34 upward, and the membrane switch. It is composed of a wrapper spring 36 arranged on the main switch corresponding to the switching part composed of the movable electrode and the fixed electrode.
  • each upper end of the pair of link members 35 is movably connected to the lower surface of the key top 34, and each lower end is movably locked by the locking portion 33.
  • the rubber spring 36 presses the movable electrode of the membrane switch to make contact with the fixed electrode through the switching hole of the switcher, whereby a predetermined switching operation is performed.
  • the above-mentioned key switch 7 and the first support plate 6 constitute a first key unit 37.
  • the configuration of the key switch 7 is publicly known, and a detailed description is omitted here.
  • One side of the first support plate 6 (the right side in FIG. 1) is An arc surface 38 matching the radius of rotation centered on the fitted screw 29 and the screw receiver 27) is formed, and an arc-shaped long groove 39 is formed inside the arc surface 38. It has been done.
  • a screw 40 is loosely fitted in the long groove 39, and the screw 40 is fastened to a screw receiving portion 41 formed on the first pace plate 5.
  • the long groove 39 and the screw 40 guide the first support plate 6 so that when the first support plate 6 turns horizontally on the first base plate 5, the turning operation is stably performed. Perform the action.
  • an arc surface 42 having the same radius of curvature as the arc surface 38 is provided.
  • a first gear member 44 provided with a gear tooth portion 43 corresponding to the gear tooth portion 53 of the second gear member 54 is provided.
  • a plurality of lock grooves 45 are formed in the arc surface 42 of the first gear member 44, and the lock grooves 45 constitute a part of a lock mechanism 57 described later.
  • both arc surfaces 38, 4 2 coincide with each other, so that the first key unit 37 can be made to look good without causing any deviation between the arc surfaces 38, 42.
  • the first gear member 44 is disposed on the first support plate 6, the first gear member 44 is disposed so as to cover the screw 40 and the long groove 39 from above.
  • the first keystone 37 can be configured so as not to be seen from the outside.
  • a peripheral wall member 46 is provided.When the peripheral wall member 46 is disposed on the first base plate 5, In cooperation with the peripheral wall member 23 provided on the first base plate 5, a peripheral wall member surrounding the first support plate 6 excluding the arc surface 38 is formed.
  • the second support plate 9 in the second key unit 4 is formed of a thin metal plate such as aluminum similarly to the first support plate 6, and the second support plate 9 is operated with the right hand.
  • a predetermined number of key switches 10 are provided.
  • the number of key switches 10 operated with the right hand is determined based on international standards (IS 0 126 126 and IS 0 250 30), and is arranged on the first support plate 6. The number is larger than the number of left-hand operated switches.
  • the key switch 10 has the same configuration as that of the key switch 7, and its constituent elements are the same as those of the key switch 7.
  • PC leak 28 is provided.
  • Each locking portion 33 corresponding to one key switch 10 are integrally formed on the second support plate 9 by press working or the like.
  • a membrane switch having a layer structure an upper sheet having a movable electrode, a lower sheet having a fixed electrode, and a switch having a switching hole interposed between the upper sheet and the lower sheet to separate the movable electrode and the fixed electrode from each other. (Consisting of a single sheet).
  • Each locking portion 33 projects upward from a hole formed in the membrane switch.
  • each key switch 10 urges the key top 34, a pair of link members 35 for guiding the vertical movement of the key top 34, and the key top 34, and the key switch 34. It is composed of a rubber spring 36 arranged on the membrane switch corresponding to the switching part composed of the movable electrode and the fixed electrode.
  • each upper end of the pair of link members 35 is movably connected to the lower surface of the key top 34, and each lower end is movably locked by the locking portion 33.
  • the rubber spring 36 presses the movable electrode of the membrane switch and abuts on the fixed electrode through the switching hole of the spacer, whereby a predetermined switching operation is performed.
  • the above-mentioned key switch 10 and the second support plate 9 constitute a second key unit 47.
  • One side (left side in FIG. 1) of the second support plate 9 coincides with a turning radius centered on the rotation fulcrum (the screw 32 and the screw receiving portion 30 loosely fitted in the screw hole 31).
  • An arc surface 48 is formed, and an arc-shaped long groove 49 is formed inside the arc surface 48.
  • a screw 50 is loosely fitted in the long groove 49, and the screw 50 is fastened to a screw receiving portion 51 formed on the second base plate 8.
  • the long groove 49 and the screw 50 act to guide the second support plate 9 so that when the second support plate 9 turns horizontally on the second base plate 8, the turning operation is performed stably. I do.
  • a second gear member 54 formed with a gear tooth portion 53 corresponding to the portion 43 is provided. Further, a plurality of lock grooves 55 (see FIG. 2) are formed in the arc surface 52 of the second gear member 54, and the lock grooves 55 are part of a lock mechanism 57 described later. Make up
  • both the arc surfaces 48, 5 2 coincide with each other, thereby making it possible to enhance the appearance of the second key unit 47 without causing any displacement between the arc surfaces 48 and 52.
  • the second gear member 54 is disposed on the second support plate 9, the second gear member 54 is disposed so as to cover the screw 50 and the long groove 49 from above.
  • the second unit 47 can be configured to look good without being seen from the outside.
  • a hollow peripheral wall member 56 is provided except for a part around the second holding plate 9, and the peripheral wall member 56 has the second support plate 9 disposed on the second pace plate 8. At this time, in cooperation with the peripheral wall member 24 provided on the second base plate 8, a peripheral wall member surrounding the periphery of the second support plate 9 excluding the arc surface 48 is formed.
  • FIG. 2 shows a synchronization mechanism for rotating the first support plate 6 and the second support plate 9 rotated through the synchronization mechanism at the rotation position.
  • FIG. 3 (A) is an explanatory view showing a series of states from a state in which the rotating member 9 is not rotated to a state in which the rotating member 9 is rotated to the maximum rotating position.
  • FIG. B) shows a state in which it has been turned halfway
  • FIG. 3 (C) shows a state in which it has been turned to the maximum turning position.
  • a gear tooth portion 43 formed on an arc surface 42 of the first gear member 44 and a gear tooth portion 53 formed on an arc surface 52 of the second gear member 54 are formed. Are interconnected.
  • FIG. 12 shows the 1st gear
  • FIG. 12 is an enlarged explanatory view showing the gear tooth portion 43 of the member 44 and the gear tooth portion 53 of the second gear member 54.
  • FIG. 12 (A) shows the gear tooth portion for convenience of explanation.
  • FIG. 12 (B) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the gear teeth 43 and the gear teeth 53 are engaged with each other
  • FIG. FIG. 2 (C) is an explanatory view showing a combined state of the gear teeth 43 and the gear teeth 53 in a state where the first keyboard unit 3 and the second keyboard unit 4 are mutually folded.
  • the gear teeth portion 43 of the first gear member 44 is composed of a plurality of gear teeth 43A formed along the arc surface 42.
  • 43 A is a gear portion 43 B present below the upper surface 44 A of the gear member 44, and formed continuously with the gear portion 43 B and protrudes upward from the upper surface 44 A.
  • the gear section consists of 4 3 C.
  • the gear teeth 53 of the second gear member 54 are composed of a plurality of gear teeth 53 A formed along the arc surface 52.
  • Each gear tooth 53 A is a gear member.
  • each gear tooth 43 A of the gear tooth 43 of the first gear member 44 and each gear tooth 53 A of the gear tooth 53 of the second gear member 54 is determined.
  • the state is not released in any series of states from the state in which the first keyboard unit 3 and the second keyboard unit 4 are folded to the state in which the keyboard 1 is used in a horizontal state.
  • FIG. 13 shows a series of states in which the first keyboard unit 3 and the second keyboard unit 4 in a horizontal state and in use are gradually folded, and a pair of link members 35 are shown.
  • Fig. 13 (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing the relationship between the gear teeth 43A and 53A when the keyboard units 3 and 4 are in a horizontal state
  • Fig. 13 (B) is No. 2
  • FIG. 13 (C) is an explanatory view schematically showing the relationship between the gear teeth 43A and 53A when the keyboard unit 4 is slightly folded and started to be folded.
  • FIG. 13B is an explanatory view schematically showing the relationship between the gear teeth 43 A and 53 A immediately before folding is completed by further rotating the second keyboard unit 4 from the state shown in FIG.
  • FIG. (D) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the gear teeth 43A and 53A schematically showing a state in which folding of the keyboard units 3 and 4 is completed.
  • each gear tooth 43 A in the gear tooth part 43 of the first gear member 44 is replaced by a gear part 43 B located below the upper surface 44 A of the gear member 44.
  • a gear portion 43C formed continuously with the gear portion 43B and protruding above the upper surface 44A, and each of the gear teeth 53 of the second gear member 54 is formed.
  • the gear teeth 53A are formed continuously with the gear portion 53B below the upper surface 54A of the gear member 54, and protrude upward from the upper surface 54A.
  • Gear section that is composed of 5 3 C And the gear teeth 4 3 A and the gear teeth 5 3 A were combined with each other, so that each gear tooth 4 3 A of the gear tooth part 4 3 and each gear tooth 5 3 A of the gear tooth part 53 were formed. Is released in any series of states from the state in which the first keyboard unit 3 and the second keyboard unit 4 are folded to the state in which the horizontal key board 1 is used. Can be held without.
  • both the gear teeth 43 and the gear teeth 53 are formed on the arc surfaces 42 and 52, the tips of the gear teeth 43 and the gear teeth 53 are also arranged in an arc. ing. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 2, FIG. 3, etc., the relationship between the gear tooth portions 43 and 53 is not uniform, but a shallow portion and a deep portion are generated. This does not change even when the first support plate 6 and the second support plate 9 rotate. However, since there is always a deep coupling relationship between the gear teeth 43 and 53 of the first gear member 44 and the second gear member 54, the first support plate 6 and the second The rotation of the support plate 9 does not deviate from the engagement with the gear teeth 43, 53.
  • Each key switch 10 has the same key arrangement relationship as in a normal key board, and has a gear tooth portion 43 of the first gear member 44 and a gear tooth portion 43 of the second gear member 54. Between the gear teeth 53, there is a shallow connection on the upper side in FIG. 3 (A) and a deep connection on the lower side. If the operation of the keyboard 1 is desired in such a key arrangement, the keyboard can be operated in this state.
  • FIG. 3 (C) shows a state in which the first support plate 6 and the second support plate 9 have been rotated to the maximum rotation position in this manner.
  • the key units 37, 47 can be arranged in a desired operation state by an extremely simple operation, and the keyboard operation can be performed in an optimal operation form for each user.
  • the lock mechanism 57 is provided between the first base plate 5 and the first unit 37 and between the second base plate 8 and the second unit 47. Since the lock mechanism 57 has the same configuration, only the lock mechanism 57 provided between the second base plate 8 and the second key unit 47 will be described below.
  • the lock mechanism 57 provided between the first base plate 5 and the first unit 37 is a first gear member provided on the first support plate 6 of the first unit 37.
  • the lock mechanism 57 does not need to be provided on both the first key unit 37 side and the second key unit 47 side, and it may be configured to provide only one of them.
  • a bearing member 17 provided at a corner 16 of the second base plate 8 is formed in a hollow shape, and a pair of holding portions 5 8 are provided. Between the pair of holding portions 58, both ends of an elastic lock piece 59 obtained by bending a metal elastic thin plate in a " ⁇ " shape are supported. Also, an opening 61 is formed in the concave curved surface 60 of the bearing member 17 that contacts the arc surface 52 of the second gear member 54. The distal end of the elastic lock piece 59 is configured to protrude from the opening 61. The tip of the elastic hook piece 59 projecting from the opening 61 in this way is engaged with one of the plurality of mouth grooves 55 formed on the arc surface 52 of the second gear member 54. Is stopped.
  • the elastic lock piece 5 is rotated at the rotation position.
  • the lock can be achieved by locking the tip of the lock member 9 into the lock groove 55 of the second gear member. Therefore, the keyboard operation can be stably performed in a state where the operation mode is fixed to the optimum one for each user.
  • the lock mechanism 57 includes a lock groove 55 formed in the arc surface 52 of the second gear member 54 and an elastic lock piece 59 provided in the bearing portion 17 of the second base plate 8. Therefore, the opening mechanism 57 of the first key 37 and the second key 47 can be realized at low cost. Further, since the lock groove 55 is formed on the arc surface 52 of the second gear member 54, it is possible to form the opening groove 55 simultaneously with the formation of the gear teeth 53. According to this, the cost can be reduced.
  • FIG. 1 the peripheral structure provided on the keyboard 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 11.
  • FIG. 1 the peripheral structure provided on the keyboard 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 11.
  • the first support plate 6 of the first keyboard unit 3 has a predetermined number operated by the left hand in accordance with international standards (ISO 2126 and IS0250).
  • Key switches 7 are arranged on the second support unit 9 of the second keyboard unit 4, and a predetermined number of key switches 10 operated by the right hand according to international standards are arranged on the second support plate 9;
  • the number of key switches 7 operated with the keys is smaller than the number of key switches 10 operated with the right hand.
  • the length of the first keyboard unit 3 in the longitudinal direction is configured to be shorter than the length of the second keyboard unit 4 in the longitudinal direction.
  • one side edge of the first keyboard unit 3 (the second keyboard A control section 62 for controlling the keyboard 1 is provided side by side on the edge opposite to the side rotatably connected to the knit 4 (the left edge in FIG. 4), and a first keyboard unit.
  • the length of the second keyboard unit 4 in the longitudinal direction which is obtained by adding the control unit 3 and the control unit 62, is the same as the length of the second keyboard unit 4 in the longitudinal direction.
  • the space generated in the first keyboard unit 3 due to the difference in length between the first keyboard unit 3 and the second keyboard unit 4 can be used very much.
  • the keyboard 1 can be made thinner and more compact than when the control unit 62 is disposed below or on the side of the keyboard 1.
  • Fig. 4 (A) shows the bearing holes 13A of the bearing members 13B of the bearing member 13 and the bearing holes 17B of the bearing members 17B when the key board 1 is not used.
  • a and bearing member 14 Each bearing 14 14 B bearing hole 14 B and bearing member 18 Bearing 18 B Bearing hole 18 A inserted through bearing hole 18 A Support shaft 19 A, 19 This shows a folded state in which the two keyboard units 3 and 4 are rotated in a direction approaching each other via B and are superimposed on each other, and a longitudinal direction in which the first keyboard unit 3 and the control unit 62 are added. It can be seen that the length is made the same as the length of the second key unit 4 and is compact.
  • FIG. 4 (B) shows a horizontal state in which the keyboard units 3 and 4 are rotated in the direction away from each other via the support shafts 19A and 19B when the keyboard 1 is used.
  • the length of the keyboard unit 3 and the control unit 6 2 in the longitudinal direction is the same as the length of the second keyboard unit 4, and the length of the keyboard 1 with respect to the support shafts 19A and 19B. It can be seen that the left and right balance is maintained.
  • a cover member 63 is attached to the control unit 62 so as to be openable and closable at a substantially central portion thereof.
  • a connector member 64 to which the portable electronic device is connected is provided.
  • the connector member 64 is connected to a flexible board 65 built in the control section 62 and connected to a control unit (not shown) for controlling the keyboard 1.
  • a pair of wire members 66A is fixed to both sides of the lid member 63 near the connector member 64, and a wire member 66B is provided between the outer ends of both wire members 66A. It is mounted rotatably.
  • a support wire 66C is provided at the center of the wire member 66B.
  • Each wire member 66A is rotated together with the lid member 63 until the state shown in FIG. 4 (C), and in this state, the supporting wire 66C is rotated rearward, so that a portable electronic device such as a PDA is rotated. Can be supported in an inclined state.
  • the wire members 66 A, 66 B, and 66 C constitute a backrest member 66 that supports a portable electronic device such as a PDA in an inclined state.
  • the connector member 64 is disposed on the lid member 63 rotatably attached to the control part 62, and the back member 63 is disposed on the lid member 63 near the connector member 64.
  • the portable electronic device such as a PDA can be tilted and supported in a state where the portable electronic device such as a PDA is directly connected to the connector member 64 without requiring a cable or the like.
  • FIG. 4 (A) when the first keyboard unit 3 and the second keyboard unit 4 are folded as shown in FIG. 4 (A), the back member 66 configured as described above, —The configuration to be stored between the bodunits 3 and 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 4 (B) and FIG. FIG. 7 is an enlarged sectional view of the folded state shown in FIG. 4 (A), which is cut in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of each of the keyboard units 3 and 4 (transverse direction).
  • one wire member 66A of the backrest member 66 is connected to the gap generated between the first keyswitch row K1 and the second keyswitch row K2 in each of the keyboard units 3 and 4. S, and similarly support wire 6 6 C It is stored in the gap S generated between the switch row K2 and the third switch row # 3, and the other wire members 66 are similarly stored in the third key switch row K3 and the fourth key switch row K4. And is stored in the gap S between them. Further, the wire member 66B has a height difference between the top surface of the key top 34 and the plane portion of the first gear member 44, and the height difference is doubled in the folded state. As a result, it is possible to sufficiently house the gap between the first keyboard unit 3 and the second keyboard unit 4.
  • the wire members 66 A and the support wires 66 C constituting the backrest member 66 are connected between the key switches which are opposed to each other in the folded state of the keyboard units 3 and 4. Since the wire member 66B is housed in the gap generated between the two keyboard units 3 and 4 while being stored in the gap S generated, the first key unit 3 and the second keyboard unit in the folded state are configured. Since the thickness of the knit 4 can be reduced, and the backrest member 66 does not need to be provided outside the keyboard 1, it is possible to reduce the size of the keyboard 1 as a whole.
  • FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the control unit 6 2 and the keyboard 1, and FIG. 5 (A) shows a state in which the control unit 6 2 is removed from the first keyboard unit 3.
  • FIG. 5 (B) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the control section 62 and the free arm are connected.
  • a universal arm 67 is rotatably supported by an arm supporting portion 25 formed on the back side of the peripheral wall member 23 of the first base plate 5 in the first key board unit 3.
  • the free arm 67 includes a hollow first arm member 67 A whose one end is rotatably supported by an arm supporting portion 25 via a first connecting pin 68 A, and a first arm member 6. It is composed of a hollow second arm member 67B rotatably supported at the other end of 7A via a second connecting pin 68B.
  • each of a plurality of key switches arranged on the second support plate 9 of the second key unit 47 is As shown in FIG. 8, the signal line 69 connected to the membrane switch corresponding to the switch 10 is connected to the second base plate 8 from the hollow peripheral wall member 56 formed on the second support plate 9.
  • the formed hollow peripheral wall member 24, bearing member 18, bearing 18 B, bearing member 14, through the peripheral wall member 23 of the first base plate 5, are guided through to the arm support portion 25.
  • the signal lines (not shown) connected to the membrane switches corresponding to the plurality of key switches 7 provided on the first support plate 6 of the first unit 37 are directly hollow. From the peripheral wall member 23 to the arm support portion 25.
  • the signal line from the second key unit 47 and the signal line from the first key unit 37 are combined by the arm support portion 25, and the signal lines from the first arm member 67A to the second arm member 67B You are being guided.
  • the signal line guided in this manner is connected to a connector member 70 (see FIG. 5 (A)) provided on one surface of the second arm member 67B.
  • control unit 62 two projections 71 are formed on a surface facing the side edge of the first keyboard unit 3, and each projection 71 is a first keyboard unit V3. It is detachably fitted into a positioning hole (not shown) formed in the peripheral wall member 46 of the first support plate 6. As a result, the control unit 62 is removably juxtaposed with the first key board unit 3. Further, a connector member 72 is provided on an end face of the control portion 62, and the connector member 72 is connected to the connector member 70 of the second arm member 67B.
  • each projection 71 of the control portion 62 is detachably fitted to the positioning hole of the peripheral wall member 46 of the first keyboard unit 3, and the control portion 62 Since the connector member 72 of the second arm member 67 and the connector member 70 of the second arm member 67B can be connected to and separated from each other, the control port 62 can be detachably attached to the first keyboard unit 3. If multiple control units 62 are prepared for various portable electronic devices such as PDAs, the same keyboard 1 can be used by replacing only the control unit 62. Thus, data can be input to various portable electronic devices, and the burden on the user can be reduced by eliminating the waste of purchasing the keyboard 1 corresponding to the portable electronic device. Also, the manufacturer of the keyboard 1 does not need to manufacture the keyboard 1 for each type of portable electronic device. PC leak 3/07028
  • FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing various states of use of the universal arm.
  • one end of the first arm portion 67 A of the universal arm 67 is connected to an arm support portion 25 formed on the back side (non-operator side) of the peripheral wall member 23.
  • the first arm member 67A is rotatably supported via a first connecting pin 68A.
  • the second arm member 67B is connected to the other end of the first arm member 67A via a second connecting pin 68B. It is supported rotatably.
  • the control section 62 since the control section 62 is configured to be detachable from the first keyboard unit 3, the control section 62 utilizes the rotatable freedom of the universal arm 67. It can be used in various usage forms.
  • each projection 71 of the control portion 62 is removed from the positioning hole of the peripheral wall member 46, and the control portion 62 is arranged in the longitudinal direction of the keyboard 1.
  • the control portion 62 is arranged in the longitudinal direction of the keyboard 1.
  • it can be used in the state of form (A) shown in FIG.
  • the first arm member 67A is rotated clockwise around the first connecting pin 68A from the state of the state (A)
  • the control panel 62 is separated from the keyboard 1. It can be used in the condition (B).
  • the first arm member 67 A is further rotated clockwise about the connecting pin 68 A from the state of the form (B), so that the first arm member 67 A is substantially at the center position in the longitudinal direction of the keyboard 1 and the side of the keyboard 1. It can be used in the state of (C) close to (the side edge opposite to the operation side).
  • connection terminal of the PDA 73 is connected to the connector member 64 of the control section 62, and the PDA 73 is supported in an inclined state by the back member 66, and the state of the form (B) in FIG. Fig. 9 shows the case of using it.
  • connection terminal of the PDA 73 is connected to the connector member 64 of the control section 62, and the PDA 73 is supported in an inclined state by the back member 66.
  • FIG. 10 shows the case of using in the state of (C).
  • control unit 62 is configured to be detachable from the first keyboard unit 3, and the control unit 62 is connected to the first keyboard unit 3 by the free arm 67. As a result, within the allowable range of the universal arm 6 7 P so-called 28
  • the arrangement relationship between the control unit 62 and the keyboard 1 can be freely changed. Therefore, the arrangement of the PDA 73 with respect to the keyboard 1 can be freely changed to a position desired by the keyboard user, so that the operability can be further improved.
  • FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the state shown in FIG. 4 (B) and the state of the form (C) in FIG. 6 when viewed from the back side of the keyboard 1.
  • the thickness H of the second arm member 67 B is determined by the necessity of providing a connector member 70 for connecting to the connector member 72 of the control part 62. Due to restrictions, the thickness is larger than the thickness h of the key board 1 (the thickness between the bottom surface of the first pace plate 5, the second base plate 8 and the top surface of the key top 34). Therefore, the keyboard 1 is not used in the state shown in FIGS. 4B and 4C, but in such a state, the top surfaces of the key switches 7 and 10 on the keyboard 1 are not used.
  • the plane to be formed is not parallel to the installation surface of the keyboard 1, but is slightly inclined with respect to the installation surface.
  • the bottom surface of the keyboard 1 (the bottom surfaces of the first and second base plates 5, 8) and the second arm member in a state where the keyboard 1 is actually used.
  • the connection angle of the first connection pin 68 A and the second connection pin 68 B is inclined such that the bottom of 67 B is flush with the bottom.
  • the first connecting pin 68 A for rotatably connecting the arm supporting portion 25 and the first arm member 67 A is inclined by an angle A with respect to the perpendicular L.
  • the second connecting pin 68 B for rotatably connecting the first arm member 67 A and the second arm member 67 B is inclined by an angle B with respect to the perpendicular L. I have.
  • the angle B is set to be larger than the angle A.
  • the first connecting pin 68 A is inclined by the angle A with respect to the perpendicular L
  • the second connecting pin 68 B is inclined by the angle B with respect to the perpendicular L.
  • the first connection bin 68A and the second connection pin When the keyboard 1 is used, the bottom of the second arm member 67B and the control section 62 and the bottom of the keyboard 1 are flush with each other when the keyboard 1 is used by tilting the connection angle of the keyboard 8 so that the keyboard 1 can be used.
  • the surface formed by the top surfaces of the respective key switches 7 and 10 can be made parallel to the installation surface of the keyboard 1, thereby preventing the key operability of the keyboard 1 from deteriorating. .
  • connection angle between the first connection pin 68A and the second connection pin 68B is configured to be inclined.However, the present invention is not limited to this.
  • the connecting angle of the connecting pin may be inclined.
  • FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view schematically showing a foldable keyboard.
  • the keyboard 101 is basically composed of a first keyboard unit 103 and a second key unit rotatably connected to each other via a rotation connection unit 102. It consists of a board unit 104.
  • the first keyboard unit 103 includes a first base plate 105, a first support plate 106 supported on the first base plate 105 so as to be rotatable in a horizontal direction, and And a plurality of key switches 107 arranged on the first support plate 106.
  • the second keyboard unit 104 includes a second base plate 108, a second support plate 109 supported on the second base plate 108 so as to be rotatable in a horizontal direction, and It is composed of a plurality of key switches 110 arranged on the second support plate 109.
  • the first base plate 105 is formed of a thin metal plate such as aluminum, and the side end 1 1 1 of the first base plate 105 is formed.
  • resin bearings 113, 114 constituting part of the rotational connection 102 are provided. Have been.
  • two bearings 113B having a bearing hole 113A formed are spaced apart.
  • two bearings 114B having a bearing hole 114A are provided separately.
  • the second base plate 108 is made of a thin metal plate such as aluminum, and the second base plate 108 has a side end 1 15 ( At the two corners 1 16 at the left end in FIG. 14), resin bearing members 117 and 118 which respectively constitute a part of the rotary connecting portion 102 are provided. ing.
  • the bearing member 1 17 is provided with one bearing 1 17 B having a bearing hole 1 17 A formed therein.
  • one bearing 118B in which a bearing hole 118A is formed is provided in the bearing member 118.
  • the bearings 11 17 B are inserted between the bearings 11 13 B, and the bearing holes 11 13 A of the bearings 11 13 B and the bearing holes 11 17 A of the bearings 11 B are formed.
  • the bearings are arranged in a straight line, and the bearings 118B are fitted between the bearings 114B, and the bearing holes 114A of the bearings 114B and the bearing holes of the bearings 118B 1 18 A are arranged in a straight line.
  • the support shafts 119 are fitted into the bearing holes 1 13 A, 1 17 A, 1 1 4 A, and 1 18 A thus arranged in a straight line.
  • the support shaft 119 has a cylindrical shape, a sliding hole 120 is formed at the center, and a gear tooth portion 121 is formed concentrically around the periphery.
  • a sliding member 122 is slidably fitted through a sliding hole 120.
  • the sliding member 122 is a member for rotating the first keyboard unit 103 and the second keyboard unit 104 in synchronization with each other, and the operation thereof will be described later. I do.
  • the bearing member 114 has a hollow peripheral wall member 123 integrally formed therewith.
  • the bearing member 118 has a hollow peripheral wall member 122 integrally formed therewith. 4 is formed.
  • a signal line 16 for connecting each key switch 110 provided on the second keyboard unit 104 to a control section 16 2 (described later) is provided inside the peripheral wall member 124. 9 (to be described later), and the signal line 16 9 is guided outward from the hollow bearing member 1 18 and the bearing 1 18 B and wound around the support shaft 1 19.
  • P03 07028 P03 07028
  • the hollow bearing member 114 is guided from the hollow bearing member 114 to the peripheral wall member 123.
  • signal lines for connecting the respective key switches 107 provided on the first keyboard unit 103 to the control unit 162 (see FIG. 1). (Not shown), and such a signal line will be described later together with a signal line 169 guided from the second keyboard unit 104 via the peripheral wall member 124. It is guided through a free arm 1 6 7 (described later).
  • the arm support portion 125 formed on the back side of the peripheral wall member 123 is formed in a hollow shape, and supports the universal arm 167 so as to be rotatable and guides as described above. Each of the incoming signal lines is guided to the free arm 167.
  • a screw receiving portion 127 is formed substantially at the center near the side end portion 126 opposite to the side end portion 111, and the screw receiving portion 127 is formed.
  • a screw 1 29 loosely fitted into the screw hole 1 28 of the first support plate 106 is fastened to the portion 127.
  • the first support plate 106 is mounted on the first base plate 105 so as to be rotatable in the horizontal direction with the screw 12 9 and the screw receiver 127 as a fulcrum.
  • the second pace plate 108 it entered slightly inside the side end 108 a opposite to the side end 115 (the inner part by the width of the control part 16 2 described later).
  • a screw receiving portion 130 is formed at a substantially central position.
  • the screw receiving portion 130 has a screw 1 loosely fitted into a screw hole 13 1 of the second support plate 109. 32 is concluded.
  • the second support plate 109 is mounted on the second base plate 108 so as to be rotatable in the horizontal direction with the screw 132 and the screw receiving portion 131 serving as a fulcrum.
  • the first support plate 106 of the first keyboard unit 103 is formed of a thin metal plate such as aluminum, and a predetermined number of key switches operated by the left hand are placed on the first support plate 106. 107 are provided. The number of switches 107 operated with the left hand is determined based on international standards (ISO2126 and ISO2530).
  • the first support plate 106 is integrally formed with four locking portions 133 corresponding to one key switch 107 by press working or the like.
  • a membrane switch (not shown) having a three-layer structure (an upper sheet having a movable electrode, a lower sheet having a fixed electrode, and a movable electrode and a fixed electrode interposed between the upper sheet and the lower sheet. Consisting of a spacer sheet having a switching hole for separating Are located. Note that each locking portion 133 projects upward from a hole formed in the membrane switch.
  • Each key switch 107 basically urges the key top 13 4, a pair of link members 1 35 to guide the vertical movement of the key top 134, and the key top 1 34 upward.
  • it is composed of a rubber spring 136 arranged on the membrane switch corresponding to a switching part composed of a movable electrode and a fixed electrode of the membrane switch.
  • each upper end of the pair of link members 135 is movably connected to the lower surface of the key top 134, and each lower end is movably locked to the locking portion 133.
  • the above-mentioned key switch 107 and the first support plate 106 constitute a first key unit 1337.
  • the configuration of the key switch 107 is publicly known, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.
  • One side (the right side in FIG. 14) of the first support plate 106 is centered on its rotation fulcrum (the screw 12 9 loosely fitted into the screw hole 1 28 and the screw receiver 1 27).
  • An arc-shaped surface 138 corresponding to the turning radius is formed, and an arc-shaped long groove 139 is formed inside the arc-shaped surface 138.
  • a screw 140 is loosely fitted in the long groove 139, and the screw 140 is fastened to a screw receiving portion 141 formed on the first base plate 105.
  • the screw 140 are designed so that the first supporting plate 106 forces s when rotating horizontally on the first base plate 105 so that the rotating operation is performed stably. It acts as a guide.
  • the lock groove 144 forms a part of a lock mechanism 157 described later.
  • the first unit 13 7 can be made to look good without causing any slippage. Further, when the first gear member 144 is disposed on the first support plate 106, the first gear member 144 is disposed so as to cover the screw 140 and the long groove 139 from above. However, the first key unit 1337 can be formed with a good appearance by making the long groove 1339 invisible from the outside.
  • the peripheral wall member 144 includes the first support plate 106 and the first base plate 100. 5 when arranged on the first base plate 105, cooperates with the peripheral wall member 123 provided on the first base plate 105, excluding the circular arc surface 1 38, the peripheral wall member surrounding the periphery of the first support plate 106. Is configured.
  • the second support plate 109 in the second keyboard unit 104 is formed of a thin metal plate such as aluminum similarly to the first support plate 1 ⁇ 6, and is formed on the second support plate 109.
  • the number of key switches 110 operated with the right hand is determined based on international standards (ISO 212 and 250), and is arranged on the first support plate 106. The number is greater than the number of key switches 107 operated by the left hand.
  • the key switch 110 has the same configuration as that of the key switch 107, and the components thereof will be described with the same reference numerals as those of the key switch 107.
  • the second support plate 109 is integrally formed with four locking portions 133 corresponding to one key switch 110 by press working or the like.
  • a membrane switch (not shown) having a three-layer structure (an upper sheet having a movable electrode, a lower sheet having a fixed electrode, and a movable electrode and a fixed electrode interposed between the upper sheet and the lower sheet are separated from each other. (Consisting of a spacer sheet having a switching hole to be made). Note that each locking portion 133 protrudes upward from a hole formed in the membrane switch.
  • Each key switch 110 basically urges the key tops 1 3 4 and the pair of link members 1 3 5 and the key tops 1 3 4 that guide the key tops 1 3 4 up and down.
  • a rubber spring 1 36 arranged on the membrane switch corresponding to the switching part consisting of the movable electrode and the fixed electrode of the membrane switch.
  • each upper end of the pair of link members 135 is movably connected to the lower surface of the key top 134, and each lower end is movably locked to the locking portion 133.
  • the key top 1 3 4 is not pressed, the key top 1 3 4 is urged upward through the urging force of the rubber spring 1 36 and is held at the non-pressed position.
  • the rubber spring 1 36 presses the movable electrode of the membrane switch to abut the fixed electrode through the switching hole of the switcher, thereby performing a predetermined switching operation.
  • the above-mentioned key switch 110 and the second support plate 109 constitute a second key unit 147.
  • One side (the left side in the 14th) of the second support plate 109 is rotated about its rotation fulcrum (the screw 1332 and the screw receiver 1330 loosely fitted into the screw hole 1331).
  • An arc-shaped surface 1 48 matching the radius is formed, and an arc-shaped long groove 1 is formed inside the arc-shaped surface 1 48.
  • a screw 150 is loosely fitted in the long groove 149, and the screw 150 is fastened to a screw receiving portion 151 formed on the second pace plate 108.
  • the long groove 149 and the screw 150 move stably. It acts to guide you to be heard.
  • On the side of the second support plate 109 where the arc surface 1 48 is formed there is an arc surface 15 2 having the same radius of curvature as the arc surface 1 48, and the arc surface 1 5 2 Is provided with a second gear member 154 having gear teeth 153 formed on the gear tooth portion 121 of the sliding member 122.
  • a plurality of lock grooves 1555 are formed in the arcuate surface 152 of the second gear member 1554. A part of the lock mechanism 157.
  • the second unit 144 can be made to look good without any deviation between the arc surfaces 148 and 152.
  • the second gear member 154 is disposed on the second support plate 109, the second gear member 154 is disposed so as to cover the screw 150 and the long groove 149 from above. However, the long groove 149 is not visible from the outside, so that the second unit 147 can be formed with a good appearance.
  • a hollow peripheral wall member 156 is provided.
  • the peripheral wall member 156 cooperates with the peripheral wall member 124 provided on the second base plate 108.
  • a peripheral wall member surrounding the second support plate 109 except for the arc surface 148 is formed.
  • FIG. 15 is an enlarged explanatory view showing a synchronizing mechanism for synchronizing the turning operation of the first support plate 106 and the second support plate 109
  • FIG. 16 is a first support plate.
  • FIG. 16 is an explanatory view showing a series of states from a state where the first support plate 106 and the second support plate 109 are not rotated to a state where the second support plate 109 is rotated to the maximum rotation position.
  • FIG. 16 (B) shows a state where it has not been moved
  • FIG. 16 (B) shows a state where it has been rotated halfway
  • FIG. 16 (C) shows a state where it has been rotated to the maximum rotation position.
  • the gear teeth 1 2 1 of the sliding member 1 2 2 are formed concentrically, the distance from the center of the sliding member 1 2 2 to the tip of the gear tooth 1 2 1 is the same. Since the gear teeth 14 3 and the gear teeth 15 3 are both formed on the arcuate surfaces 14 2 and 15 2, the tips of the gear teeth 14 3 and the gear teeth 15 3 are also formed. They are arranged in an arc. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the mating relationship between the gear teeth 12 1 and each gear tooth 14 3, 15 3 is not uniform but shallow and deep. In addition, such a relationship is that the sliding member 122 moves on the support shaft 119 as the first support plate 106 and the second support plate 109 rotate. Even if it does not change.
  • FIG. 16 (A) From the state shown in Fig. 16 (A), one of the first key unit 1337 or the second key unit 147 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise in Fig. 16 (A).
  • the gear teeth 14 3 of the first gear member 14 4 and the gear teeth 15 3 of the second gear member 15 4 are engaged with the gear teeth 12 1 of the sliding member 12 2.
  • the sliding member 122 slides on the support shaft 119 to the lower side in FIG. 16 (A).
  • the first support plate 106 and the second support plate 109 rotate in synchronization with each other, and rotate clockwise with the screw 12 9 and the screw receiving portion 127 as a pivot point. At the same time, it turns counterclockwise around the screw 13 2 and the screw receiving portion 130.
  • FIG. 16B shows a state in which the first support plate 106 and the second support plate 109 are slightly rotated. When the keyboard 101 is desired to be operated in such a key arrangement state, the keyboard can be operated in this state.
  • the sliding member 122 is moved in the same manner as described above. 16 From the position shown in Fig. 16 (B), it is slid further down on the support shaft 1 19, and the first support plate 106 and the second support plate 109 are synchronized with each other, Rotates clockwise and counterclockwise. Thus, the first support plate 106 and the second support plate 109 are rotated to the maximum rotation position.
  • the condition is shown in Fig. 16 (C). If the operation of the keyboard 101 is desired in such a key arrangement state, the keyboard operation can be performed in this state.
  • the other key unit is synchronized with the other key unit. And can be rotated.
  • the keyboards 1337 and 147 can be arranged in a desired operation state by an extremely simple operation, and the keyboard operation can be performed in an operation mode optimal for each user.
  • the first key unit 13 7 and the second key unit 14 7 are synchronously rotated and locked to the first pace plate 105 and the second base plate 108 at desired rotational positions, respectively.
  • the lock mechanism will be described with reference to FIG.
  • the lock mechanism 157 is disposed between the first base plate 105 and the first key unit 137, and between the second base plate 108 and the second key unit 147. However, since each of the lock mechanisms 157 has the same configuration, the lock mechanism 157 provided between the second base plate 108 and the second unit 147 will be described below. Only 7 will be explained.
  • a lock mechanism 157 provided between the first base plate 105 and the first key unit 133 is provided with a lock mechanism 157 provided on the first support plate 1 ⁇ 6 of the first key unit 133.
  • the lock mechanism 157 does not need to be provided on both the first key unit 137 side and the second key unit 147 side, and only one of them may be provided.
  • the bearing member 117 provided at the corner portion 116 of the second base plate 108 is formed in a hollow shape, Is provided with a pair of holding portions 158. Between the pair of holding portions 158, both ends of an elastic lock piece 159 obtained by bending a metal elastic thin plate in a “ ⁇ ” shape are supported.
  • an opening 16 1 is formed in the concave curved surface 16 0 of the bearing member 11 17 which contacts the arc surface 15 2 of the second gear member 15 9 points ⁇ from opening 1 6 1 It is configured to protrude.
  • the distal end of the elastic lock piece 159 protruding from the opening 161 in this manner is connected to the plurality of orifice grooves 155 formed on the arcuate surface 152 of the second gear member 154. It is locked in one.
  • the lock mechanism 157 described above, after the first key unit 1337 and the second key unit 147 are rotated to a desired rotation position in synchronization with each other, the rotation position By locking the tip of the elastic lock piece 159 in the lock groove 155 of the second gear member 154, the lock can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to stably perform the keyboard operation in a state where the operation mode is fixed optimally for each user.
  • the lock mechanism 157 is provided in an opening groove 155 formed in the arc surface 152 of the second gear member 154 and a bearing portion 117 of the second base plate 108.
  • the lock mechanism 157 of the first key unit 1337 and the second key unit 147 can be realized at a low cost because it is easily configured from the elastic lock pieces 159 provided. it can.
  • the lock groove 155 is formed on the circular arc surface 152 of the second gear member 154, the lock groove 155 can be formed simultaneously with the formation of the gear teeth 153. This makes it possible to reduce costs.
  • FIG. 17 the peripheral structure provided on the keyboard 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 24.
  • FIG. 17 the peripheral structure provided on the keyboard 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 24.
  • the first support plate 1 ⁇ 6 of the first keyboard unit 103 has, as described above, the international standard (IS 0 2 1 2 6 and IS 0 2 3 5 0) ), A predetermined number of key switches 107 to be operated by the left hand according to the standard are arranged, and the second support plate 109 of the second keyboard unit 104 is provided by the right hand in accordance with international standards. Although a predetermined number of key switches 110 to be operated are arranged, the number of key switches 107 operated by the left hand is smaller than the number of key switches 110 operated by the right hand. Based on this, as shown in FIG. 16, the length of the first keyboard unit 103 in the longitudinal direction is shorter than the length of the second keyboard unit 104 in the longitudinal direction. ing.
  • the first keyboard unit 103 and the second keyboard unit 104 are folded together, their lengths become unbalanced and the portability of the keyboard 101 is not good. Therefore, in the keyboard 101 according to the present embodiment, the first As shown in FIGS. 7 (A) to 17 (C), one side edge of the first keyboard unit 103 (the side which is rotatably connected to the second keyboard unit 104) At the opposite edge, on the left edge in Fig. 17), a control section 162 for controlling the keyboard 101 is arranged side by side, and the first keyboard unit 103 and the control section are connected.
  • the length of the second keyboard unit 104 in the longitudinal direction, which is the same as the length of the second keyboard unit 104, is the same as that of the second keyboard unit 104.
  • the first keyboard unit 103 can be removed due to the difference in length between the first keyboard unit 103 and the second keyboard unit 104. This makes it possible to make effective use of the space that occurs in the keyboard 101, and to make the keyboard 101 thinner than when the control unit 16 2 is arranged below or on the side of the keyboard 101. It is possible to reduce the size.
  • Fig. 17 (A) shows the bearing holes 1 13 A of bearings 1 13 B and the bearings of bearing members 1 17 when the keyboard 101 is not used.
  • B bearing hole 1 1 7 A and bearing member 1 1 4 each bearing 1 1 4 B bearing hole 1 1 4 A and bearing member 1 1 8 bearing 1 1 8 B bearing hole 1 1 8 A
  • FIG. 17 (B) shows a horizontal state in which both keyboard units 103 and 104 are rotated in a direction away from each other via the support shaft 119 when the keyboard 101 is used.
  • the length in the longitudinal direction of the first keyboard unit 103 and the control unit 162 is the same as the length of the second keyboard unit 104, and is based on the support shaft 119. It can be seen that the right and left sides of the keyboard 101 are balanced.
  • a cover member 163 is attached to the substantially central portion of the control portion 162 so as to be openable and closable.
  • a connector 164 for connecting various portable electronic devices such as PDAs is provided.
  • a flexible board 165 connected to a control unit (not shown) built in the control section 162 for controlling the keyboard 101 is connected to the connector 164.
  • a pair of wire members 166A are fixed to both sides of the lid member 163 near the connector member 164, and a wire is provided between the outer ends of both wire members 166A.
  • the member 166B is rotatably mounted. Further, a support wire 166C is fixed at the center of the wire member 166B.
  • Each wire member 166A is rotated together with the lid member 163 until the state shown in FIG. 17 (C), and by rotating the support wire 166C backward in this state, the The portable electronic device can be supported in an inclined state.
  • the wire members 166A, 166B, and 166C constitute a backrest member 166 that supports a portable electronic device such as a PDA in an inclined state.
  • the connector member 164 is disposed on the lid member 163 rotatably attached to the control portion 162, and the back member is attached to the lid member 163 near the connector member 164.
  • the portable electronic device such as a PDA can be supported by being inclined while the portable electronic device such as a PDA is directly connected to the connector member 164 without requiring a cable or the like.
  • FIG. 17 (A) is an enlarged sectional view of the keyboard unit 103, 104 cut in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction (transverse direction) in the folded state shown in FIG. 17 (A). is there.
  • one of the wire members 166A of the backrest member 166 is connected to the first key switch row K1 and the second key switch row K1 of each of the keyboard units 103 and 104. It is stored in the gap S generated between the key switch row K2 and the supporting wire 1666C is similarly stored in the gap S generated between the second key switch row K2 and the third key switch row K3, Similarly, the other wire member 16A is housed in a gap S generated between the third key switch row K3 and the fourth key switch row K4.
  • the wire member 1666B there is a height difference between the top surface of the key top 134 and the plane portion of the first gear member 144, and the height difference is 2 Since it is doubled, it can be sufficiently accommodated in the gap generated between the first keyboard unit 103 and the second keyboard unit 104.
  • the wire members 166A and the support members 166C constituting the backrest member 166 are connected to each other in a folded state of both keyboard units 103 and 104.
  • the wire member 166 B is housed in the gap between the keyboard units 103 and 104, so that it is folded.
  • the thickness in which the first keyboard unit 103 and the second keyboard unit 104 in the tatami state are overlapped with each other can be reduced, and the back member 166 is the key board 101 Since there is no need to attach the keyboard to the outside, the entire keyboard 101 can be reduced in size.
  • FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the control unit 162 and the keyboard 101.
  • FIG. 18 (A) shows the control unit 162 from the first keyboard unit 103.
  • FIG. 18 (B) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the control section 162 and the free arm are connected to each other.
  • PT / JPO so-called 28
  • a universal arm 1667 is rotatably supported by an arm support portion 125 formed on the back side of the peripheral wall member 123 of the first base plate 1 ⁇ 5 in the first key unit 103.
  • the universal arm 167 has a hollow first arm member 167A, one end of which is rotatably supported by an arm support portion 125 via a first connecting pin 168A, and It is composed of a hollow second arm member 167B rotatably supported at the other end of the arm member 167A via a second connecting pin 168B.
  • reference numeral 69 denotes a hollow peripheral wall member formed on the second support plate 109 to a hollow peripheral wall member formed on the second base plate 108.
  • a signal line (not shown) connected to a membrane switch corresponding to each of the plurality of key switches 107 provided on the first support plate 106 of the first key unit 133 is However, it is directly guided from the hollow peripheral wall member 123 to the arm support part 125.
  • the signal line from the second unit 1 47 and the signal line from the first unit 1 37 are combined by the arm support portion 125, and the second arm 1 It is guided to the arm member 16 7 B.
  • the signal line guided in this manner is connected to a connector member 170 (see FIG. 18 (A)) provided on one surface of the second arm member 167B.
  • each projection 1 71 is a first projection. It is detachably fitted into a positioning hole (not shown) formed in the peripheral wall member 144 of the first support plate 106 of the keyboard unit 103. As a result, the control section 162 is removably juxtaposed to the first keyboard unit 103. Further, a connector member 172 is provided on an end face of the control section 162, and the connector member 172 is connected to the connector member 17 ° of the second arm member 167B.
  • each projection 17 1 of the control section 16 2 is connected to the first keyboard menu.
  • G is detachably fitted to the positioning hole of the peripheral wall member 160 of the third arm 103, and the connector member 172 of the control section 162 and the connector of the second arm member 1667B.
  • the control section 162 is configured to be detachable from the first keyboard unit 103 because it can be brought into contact with and separated from the member 170, so that it can be attached to various portable electronic devices such as PDAs. If a plurality of control units 162 are prepared correspondingly, data can be input to various portable electronic devices using the same keyboard 101 by replacing only the control unit 162. This can eliminate the waste of purchasing the keyboard 101 corresponding to the portable electronic device and reduce the burden on the user. Also, the manufacturer of the keyboard 101 eliminates the need to manufacture the keyboard 101 for each type of portable electronic device, and reduces the investment and management costs required to manufacture multiple types of keyboards. Can be reduced.
  • FIG. 19 is an explanatory view showing various use states of the universal arm.
  • first arm portion 167 A of the universal arm 167 is connected to an arm supporting portion formed on the back side (non-operator side) of the peripheral wall member 123.
  • the first arm member 1667A is rotatably supported via a first connecting pin 1668A at 125.
  • the second arm member 1667B is connected to the other end of the first arm member 1667A.
  • second connecting pins 168B are rotatably supported via second connecting pins 168B.
  • the control section 162 is configured to be detachable from the first keyboard unit 103, the control section 162 is provided with the universal arm 1667. It can be used in various usage forms by utilizing the rotatable nature of.
  • connection terminal of the PDA 173 is connected to the connector member 164 of the control section 162, and the PDA 173 is supported in an inclined state by the backrest member 666.
  • FIG. 22 shows the case of using in the state of (B).
  • connection terminal of the PDA 173 is connected to the connector member 164 of the control section 162, and the PDA 173 is supported in an inclined state by the back member 166.
  • FIG. 23 shows the case of using in the state of the form (C) in FIG.
  • control unit 16 2 is configured to be detachable from the first keyboard unit 103, and the control unit 16 2 and the first keyboard unit 103 are connected to the free arm 16. Since the configuration is such that the control unit 16 and the keyboard 101 are connected to each other, the arrangement relationship between the control unit 162 and the keyboard 101 can be freely changed within a range permitted by the universal arm 167. Therefore, the arrangement position of the PDA 173 with respect to the keyboard 101 can be freely changed to a position desired by the keyboard user, so that the operability can be further improved.
  • FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the state shown in FIG. 17 (B) and the state of form (C) in FIG. 19 as viewed from the back side of the keyboard 101.
  • the thickness 11 of the second arm member 1678 requires the provision of a connector 170 for connection to the connector 1702 of the control section 162. Due to the restrictions, etc., the thickness of the keyboard 101 is h (the thickness between the bottom surface of the first base plate 105 and the second base plate 108 and the top surface of the key top 134) Greater than). Therefore, the keyboard 101 is not used in the state shown in FIGS. 17 (B) and 17 (C), but in such a state, each key switch 107 in the keyboard 101 is not used. , 7028
  • the surface formed by the top surface of 110 is not parallel to the installation surface of keyboard 110, but is slightly inclined with respect to the installation surface.
  • the keyboard 101 employs the bottom surface (the first and second bases) of the keyboard 101 in a state where the keyboard 101 is actually used.
  • the first connecting pin 168 A that rotatably connects the arm supporting portion 125 and the first arm member 167 A is at an angle with respect to the perpendicular L.
  • the angle B is set larger than the angle A.
  • the first connecting pin 168A is tilted by the angle A with respect to the vertical line L
  • the second connecting pin 168B is tilted by the angle B with respect to the vertical line L. 2
  • the arm member 1667 B has a thickness (A + B) based on the angle (A + B) inclined as a whole. H—h) will be moved upward by an amount.
  • the bottom of the control section 16 2 (the bottom face of the control section 16 2 is arranged so as to be flush with the lower end face of the second arm member 1667 B) and the bottom face of the keyboard 101 Are on the same plane.
  • the first connection pin 168A and the second connection By tilting the connection angle of pin 168 B, the bottom of second arm member 167 B and control section 162 and the bottom of keyboard 101 are flush with each other when keyboard 101 is used.
  • the surface formed by the top surfaces of the key switches 107 and 110 in the keyboard 1 can be parallel to the installation surface of the keyboard 101, and the key operability of the keyboard 101 decreases. Can be prevented.
  • connection angle of the first connection pin 168A and the second connection pin 168B is configured to be inclined.
  • the present invention is not limited to this. May be inclined.
  • FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view schematically showing a foldable keyboard.
  • a keyboard 201 is basically composed of a first keyboard unit 203 and a second keyboard unit which are rotatably connected to each other via a rotation connection unit 202. It consists of 204.
  • the first keyboard unit 203 includes a first base plate 205, a first support plate 206 supported on the first base plate 205 so as to be rotatable in the horizontal direction, and a first base plate 205. It is composed of a plurality of key switches 207 arranged on one support plate 206.
  • the second keyboard unit 204 includes a second base plate 208, a second support plate 209 supported on the second base plate 208 so as to be rotatable in a horizontal direction, and a second base plate 208. It is composed of a plurality of key switches 210 arranged on the support plate 209.
  • the first base plate 205 is formed of a thin metal plate such as aluminum, and has two corners 2 1 at the side end 2 1 1 (the right end in FIG. 25) of the first base plate 205.
  • the bearing 12 is provided with resin bearing members 2 13 and 2 14 which respectively constitute a part of the rotary connecting portion 202.
  • the bearing member 2 13 has two bearings 2 13 B having a bearing hole 2 13 A formed apart from each other.
  • two bearings 214B having a bearing hole 214A are separately provided.
  • the second base plate 208 is made of a thin metal plate such as aluminum, and the second base plate 208 has a side end 2 15 (second At the two corners 2 16 at the left end in FIG. 5), resin bearing members 2 17, 2 18 which respectively constitute a part of the rotary connecting portion 202 are provided. .
  • the bearing member 217 is provided with one bearing 217B in which a bearing hole 217A is formed.
  • one bearing 218B having a bearing hole 218A formed therein is provided.
  • the bearings 2 17 B are fitted between the bearings 2 13 B, and the bearing holes 2 13 A of the bearings 2 13 B and the bearing holes 2 17 A of the bearings 2 17 B are formed.
  • the bearings 2 18 B are inserted between the bearings 2 14 B, and the bearing holes 2 14 A of the bearings 2 14 B and the bearing holes 2 18 A of the bearings 2 18 B are provided. Are arranged in a straight line.
  • the support shaft 219 is fitted in the bearing holes 2 13 As 2 17 As 2 14 A and 2 18 A arranged in a straight line as described above. As a result, the first base plate 205 and the second base plate 208 are rotatably supported via the support shaft 219.
  • the supporting shaft 2 19 has a shape in which three disks 22 1 A are connected by a semi-cylindrical connecting portion 22 1 B, and each of the disks 2 21 A
  • a sliding member 222 having a sliding hole 220 formed at the center is slidably fitted through the sliding hole 220.
  • the sliding member 222 is a member for rotating the first keyboard unit 203 and the second keyboard unit 204 in synchronization with each other, and the operation thereof will be described later. I do.
  • the bearing member 214 has a hollow peripheral wall member 223 integrally formed therewith, and the bearing member 218 has a hollow peripheral wall member 222 integrally formed therewith. 4 is formed.
  • a signal line 269 for connecting each key switch 210 provided on the second keyboard unit 204 to a control unit 262 (described later) is provided inside the peripheral wall member 224.
  • the signal line 269 is guided outward from the hollow bearing member 218 and the bearing 218B and wound around the support shaft 219. It is guided from the hollow bearing member 214 to the peripheral wall member 222.
  • a signal line (not shown) for connecting each key switch 207 provided in the first key unit 203 to the control unit 262 is provided inside the peripheral wall member 223.
  • the signal line is connected to a signal line 269 guided from the second keyboard unit 204 via the peripheral wall member 224, and a free arm 267 (described later). (Described later). Further, an arm supporting portion 225 formed on the back side of the peripheral wall member 223 is formed in a hollow shape, supports the free arm 267 so as to be rotatable, and guides as described above. Each of the incoming signal lines is guided through the free arm 267.
  • a screw receiving portion 227 is formed substantially at the center near the side end portion 226 opposite to the side end portion 211.
  • a screw 229 loosely fitted into the screw hole 228 of the first support plate 206 is fastened to the part 227.
  • the first support plate 206 becomes the first base plate 2 with the screw 229 and the screw receiving portion 227 as fulcrums. It is attached to be able to turn horizontally on 05.
  • the second base plate 208 entered slightly inside the side end portion 208 a on the opposite side to the side end portion 205 (only the inside width equal to the width of the control portion 262 described later).
  • a screw receiving portion 230 is formed at a substantially central position of the screw receiving portion 230.
  • the screw receiving portion 230 has a screw loosely fitted into the screw hole 2 31 of the second support plate 209. 2 32 is concluded.
  • the second support plate 209 is mounted on the second base plate 208 so as to be rotatable in the horizontal direction with the screw 2.32 and the screw receiving portion 230 as fulcrums.
  • the first support plate 206 of the first keyboard unit 203 is formed of a thin metal plate such as aluminum, and a predetermined number of key switches operated by the left hand are placed on the first support plate 206. 207 are provided. Note that the number of key switches 207 operated by the left hand is determined based on international standards (ISO 21026 and IS2503).
  • the first support plate 206 has four locking parts corresponding to one key switch 207.
  • the first support plate 206 is provided with a membrane switch (not shown) having a three-layer structure (an upper sheet having a movable electrode and a fixed electrode). (Which comprises a lower sheet and a switching sheet interposed between the upper sheet and the lower sheet and having a switching hole for separating the movable electrode and the fixed electrode). Each of the locking portions 233 protrudes upward from a hole formed in the membrane switch.
  • each key switch 2 07 is basically a key top 2 3 4 and a key top 2
  • a pair of links 2 3 5 and key tops 2 3 4 that guide the vertical movement of 3 4 are urged upward, and a membrane switch corresponding to the switching part consisting of the movable electrode and the fixed electrode of the membrane switch. It consists of a rubber spring 2 36 arranged above.
  • each upper end of the pair of link members 235 is movably connected to the lower surface of the key top 234, and each lower end is movably locked by the locking portion 233. I have.
  • the key top 2 3 4 is not pressed, the key top 2 3 4 is urged upward through the urging force of the rubber spring 2 36 and is held at the non-pressed position, and is pressed against the urging force of the rubber spring 2 3 6.
  • the rubber spring 2 3 6 6 presses the movable electrode of the membrane switch to abut the fixed electrode through the switching hole of the switch.
  • the above-mentioned key switch 207 and the first support plate 206 constitute a first key unit 237.
  • the configuration of the key switch 207 is publicly known, and a detailed description is omitted here.
  • One side (the right side in FIG. 25) of the first support plate 206 is centered on its rotation fulcrum (the screw 229 loosely fitted into the screw hole 228 and the screw receiving portion 227).
  • An arcuate surface 238 is formed that matches the turning radius of the arc, and an arc-shaped long groove 239 is formed inside the arcuate surface 238.
  • a screw 240 is loosely fitted in the long groove 239, and the screw 240 is fastened to a screw receiving portion 241 formed in the first base plate 205.
  • the long groove 2 39 and the screw 2 40 are such that when the first support plate 206 rotates in the horizontal direction on the first base plate 205, the turning operation is stable. It acts as a guide to be performed.
  • first support plate 206 On the side of the first support plate 206 where the circular surface 2 38 is formed, there is a circular surface 2 42 having the same radius of curvature as the circular surface 2 38, and the circular surface 2 42 A first support member 244 having a link arranging portion 243 formed therein is provided inside. Further, a plurality of lock grooves 245 are formed on the arc surface 242 of the first support member 244, and the lock groove 245 is a part of a lock mechanism 257 described later. Is configured.
  • the first support member 244 is disposed on the first support plate 206, the first support member 244 is disposed so as to cover the screw 240 and the long groove 239 from above.
  • the first key unit 237 can be formed with a good appearance by making the long groove 239 invisible from the outside.
  • the peripheral wall member 246 includes the first support plate 206 and the first base plate 206. 5 when arranged on the first base plate 205, cooperates with the peripheral wall member 222 provided on the first base plate 205, excluding the arc surface 238, the peripheral wall member surrounding the periphery of the first support plate 206. Is configured.
  • the second support plate 209 in the second key unit 204 is formed of a thin metal plate such as aluminum, similarly to the first support plate 206, and the second support plate 209 Above, a predetermined number of key switches 210 operated by the right hand are arranged. still, The number of key switches 21 ° operated with the right hand is determined based on international standards (ISO 2126 and IS 025030), and is arranged on the first support plate 206. This is larger than the number of key switches 207 operated by the left hand. Since the key switch 210 has the same configuration as the key switch 207, its components will be described with the same numbers as those of the key switch 207.
  • each locking portion 2 33 corresponding to one key switch 210 are integrally formed on the second support plate 209 by pressing or the like.
  • a membrane switch (not shown) having a three-layer structure (an upper sheet having a movable electrode, a lower sheet having a fixed electrode, and a switching interposed between the upper sheet and the lower sheet to separate the movable electrode and the fixed electrode. (Made of a spacer sheet having holes).
  • each locking part 2 33 protrudes upward from a hole formed in the membrane switch.
  • Each key switch 2 10 basically urges the key top 2 3 4, the pair of link members 2 3 5 for guiding the vertical movement of the key top 2 3 4, and the key top 2 3 4 upward.
  • it is composed of a rubber spring 236 arranged on the membrane switch corresponding to a switching part composed of a movable electrode and a fixed electrode of the membrane switch.
  • each upper end of the pair of link members 235 is movably connected to the lower surface of the key top 234, and each lower end is movably locked by the locking portion 233.
  • the key switch 210 and the second support plate 209 constitute a second key unit 247.
  • One side (the left side in FIG. 25) of the second support plate 209 is centered on its rotation fulcrum (the screw 23 32 and the screw receiving portion 230, which are loosely fitted in the screw holes 2 31).
  • An arcuate surface 248 corresponding to the turning radius is formed, and an arc-shaped long groove 249 is formed inside the arcuate surface 248.
  • a screw 250 is loosely fitted in the long groove 249, and the screw 250 is fastened to a screw receiving portion 251 formed in the second base plate 208.
  • the long The groove 249 and the screw 250 are designed so that when the second support plate 209 is horizontally rotated on the second base plate 209, the rotation is stably performed. It acts as a guide.
  • arc surface 252 On the side of the second support plate 209 where the arc surface 248 is formed, there is an arc surface 252 having the same radius of curvature as the arc surface 248, and the arc surface 252 A second support member 254 having a link arranging portion 253 formed therein is provided inside. Further, a plurality of hook grooves 255 (see FIG. 26) are formed in the circular arc surface 252 of the second support member 2554, and such lock grooves 255 are described later. It constitutes a part of the lock mechanism 257.
  • the second support member 254 is disposed on the second support plate 209, the second support member 254 is disposed so as to cover the screw 250 and the long groove 249 from above.
  • the second groove 247 can be formed with a good appearance by making the long groove 249 invisible from the outside.
  • a hollow peripheral wall member 256 is provided.
  • the peripheral wall member 256 is formed by connecting the second support plate 209 to the second base plate. When placed on 208, it cooperates with the peripheral wall member 222 provided on the second pace plate 208 to surround the periphery of the second support plate 209 excluding the arc surface 248.
  • a peripheral wall member is configured.
  • FIG. 26 is an enlarged explanatory view showing a synchronizing mechanism for synchronizing the turning operation of the first support plate 206 and the second support plate 209
  • FIG. 27 is a first support plate.
  • FIG. 27A is an explanatory diagram showing a series of states from a state where the second support plate 209 and the second support plate 209 are not rotated to a state where the second support plate 209 is rotated to the maximum rotation position.
  • FIG. 27 (B) shows a state in which it has not been moved
  • FIG. 27 (B) shows a state in which it has been rotated halfway
  • FIG. 27 (C) shows a state in which it has been rotated to the maximum rotation position.
  • the link arrangement portion 2 43 formed on the first support member 244 slides.
  • the first link member is provided between the connecting portion 2 2 1B (the lower connecting portion 2 2 1B in FIG. 26) existing between the two disks 22 1A in the member 22.
  • the first link member 280 is rotatably locked via the screw 281 on the link arrangement portion 243 side, and the connecting portion 221 B The side is locked via one end of a U-shaped link stop member 28 2.
  • a second link member 283 is disposed between the link disposing portion 253 formed on the second support member 254 and the connecting portion 221B, and such a second link is provided.
  • the member 283 is rotatably locked via a screw 284 on the link arrangement portion 253 side, and the other end of the U-shaped link stopper 282 on the connection portion 221 B side. It is locked through.
  • the sliding member 222 and the first support member 244 are formed by the first link member. 280, and the sliding member 222 and the second support member 254 are linked via the second link member 283, so that the first key unit 2
  • the rotating power is increased by the first link member 2.
  • the power is transmitted from the 80 or the second link member 283 to the other unit via the sliding member 222 that slides on the support shaft 219.
  • each key switch 2 arranged on the support plate 206 is not rotated.
  • the key switches 210 arranged on the support plate 209 and the support plate 209 have the same key arrangement relationship as a normal keyboard, and the sliding members 222 are arranged as shown in FIG. As shown in A), it is located at the uppermost position.
  • one of the first key unit 237 and the second key unit 247 is turned clockwise or counterclockwise in FIG. 27 (A).
  • the link arrangement portion 24 3 of the first support member 24 4 and the sliding member 222 are linked via the first link member 280.
  • the sliding member 22 2 has a support shaft 21 9 Slide up to the bottom in Fig. 27 (A).
  • FIG. 27 (B) shows a state in which the first support plate 206 and the second support plate 209 are rotated by a small amount. If the operation of the keyboard 201 is desired in such a key arrangement relationship, the operation of the keyboard can be performed in this state.
  • FIG. 27 (C) shows a state where the first support plate 206 and the second support plate 209 have been rotated to the maximum rotation position in this manner.
  • the keyboard 201 when the user uses the keyboard 201, one of the first key unit 237 or the second key unit 247 is rotated so that the other key unit is turned to the other key unit. It can be rotated in synchronization with the unit. In this way, by arranging the units 237 and 247 in a desired operation state by an extremely simple operation, the keyboard operation can be performed in an operation mode optimal for each user. Next, as described above, the first key unit 237 and the second key unit 247 are synchronously rotated, and the first pace plate 205 and the second base plate are respectively rotated at desired rotation positions. A lock mechanism for locking at 208 will be described with reference to FIG.
  • the lock mechanism 257 is disposed between the first base plate 205 and the first key unit 237 and between the second base plate 208 and the second key unit 247. However, since each of the lock mechanisms 257 has the same configuration, the lock mechanism 250 provided between the second base plate 208 and the second key unit 247 will be described below. Only 7 will be explained.
  • the lock mechanism 257 provided between the first base plate 205 and the first key unit 237 is a lock mechanism provided on the first support plate 206 of the first key unit 237. (1) a mouth groove 2 4 5 formed in an arc surface 2 4 2 of the support member 2 4 4; An elastic port piece (not shown) formed on a bearing member 21 provided at a corner 2 12 of the first base plate 205 is provided.
  • lock mechanism 257 does not need to be provided on both the first key unit 237 side and the second key unit 247 side, and may be provided with only one of them.
  • the bearing member 2 17 provided at the corner 2 16 of the second base plate 208 is formed in a hollow shape, and has a hollow inside.
  • a pair of holding portions 258 are provided between the pair of holding portions 258, both ends of an elastic lock piece 259 formed by bending a metal elastic thin plate in a ⁇ shape are supported.
  • an opening 26 1 is formed in the concave curved surface 260 of the bearing member 2 17 in contact with the arc surface 25 2 of the second support member 25 4, and an elastic piece 2 2
  • the tip of 59 is configured to protrude from the opening 26 1.
  • the tip of the elastic lock piece 25 9 protruding from the opening 26 1 in this manner is one of a plurality of lock grooves 25 5 formed on the circular surface 25 2 of the second support member 25 4. Is locked.
  • the first key unit 237 and the second key unit 247 are synchronized with each other and rotated to a desired rotation position, and then at the rotation position. Locking can be performed by locking the tip of the elastic lock piece 255 to the lock groove 255 of the second support member 255. Therefore, the keyboard operation can be stably performed in a state where the operation mode is optimal for each user.
  • the lock mechanism 255 is provided in an opening groove 255 formed in the circular arc surface 250 of the second support member 254 and a bearing portion 217 of the second base plate 208. Since it is easily composed of the elastic port pieces 255 provided, the lock mechanism 257 of the first and second ports 237 and 247 can be reduced in cost. Can be realized. In addition, since the lock groove 255 is formed on the circular surface 252 of the second support member 2554, it is necessary to form the groove 25 when the circular surface 25 is formed. This makes it possible to reduce costs.
  • FIG. 28 the peripheral structure provided on the keyboard 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 35.
  • FIG. 28 the peripheral structure provided on the keyboard 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 35.
  • the first support of the first keyboard unit 203 is provided.
  • a predetermined number of key switches 7 operated by the left hand are arranged on the plate 206 in accordance with international standards (IS 0 212 and ISO 250).
  • a predetermined number of key switches 210 operated by the right hand are arranged on the second support plate 209 of the keyboard unit 204 in accordance with international standards, but the key switches 210 operated by the left hand are arranged. Is less than the number of key switches 210 operated by the right hand.
  • the length of the first keyboard unit 203 in the longitudinal direction is configured to be shorter than the length of the second keyboard unit 204 in the longitudinal direction. I have.
  • the keyboard 201 is carried. Therefore, in the keyboard 201 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 28 (A) to 28 (C), one of the first keyboard units 203 is not provided.
  • the keyboard 201 is controlled at a side edge (an edge opposite to the side rotatably connected to the second keyboard unit 204 and the left edge in FIG. 28).
  • the control section 262 is juxtaposed, and the length in the longitudinal direction of the first keyboard unit 203 and the control section 262 is added in the longitudinal direction of the second keyboard unit 204. It is configured to have the same length as the length to be cut.
  • the keyboard 201 can be made thinner and more compact than when the control unit 26 2 is provided below or on the side of the keyboard 201. Can be planned.
  • Fig. 28 (A) shows the bearing holes 2 13 A of the bearings 2 13 B of the bearing members 2 13 and the bearings 2 17 of the bearing members 2 17 when the keyboard 201 is not used.
  • B bearing hole 2 17 A and bearing member 2 1 bearing 2 14 B bearing hole 2 14 A and bearing member 2 18 bearing 2 18 B bearing hole 2 18 A This shows a folded state in which both keyboard units 203 and 204 are rotated in the direction in which they approach each other via the support shaft 219 which is inserted through the first keyboard unit 203.
  • the control section 26 2 are added, and the length in the lateral direction is the same as the length of the second keyboard unit 204. It can be seen that the configuration is as follows.
  • FIG. 28 (B) shows a horizontal state in which the keyboard units 203 and 204 are turned in a direction separating from each other via the support shaft 219 when the keyboard 201 is used.
  • the length of the first keyboard unit 203 and the control unit 262 in the longitudinal direction are the same as the length of the second keyboard unit 204, and the support shaft 219 It can be seen that the left and right balance of the keyboard 201 is balanced on the basis of.
  • a cover member 263 is attached to the substantially central portion of the control portion 262 so as to be openable and closable.
  • a connector 264 for connecting various portable electronic devices such as PDAs is provided.
  • the connector 2 264 is connected to a flexible board 265 which is built in the control section 262 and is connected to a control unit (not shown) for controlling the key board 201.
  • a pair of wire members 266 A is fixed to both sides of the lid member 263 in the vicinity of the connector member 264, and a wire is provided between the outer ends of both wire members 266 A.
  • the member 26B is rotatably mounted. Further, a support wire 266C is fixed at the center of the wire member 266B.
  • Each wire member 266A is rotated together with the lid member 263 until the state shown in FIG. 28 (C), and by rotating the support wire 266C backward in this state, the PDA and the like are turned off.
  • the portable electronic device can be supported in an inclined state.
  • the wire members 266A, 266B, and 266C constitute a backrest member 266 that supports a portable electronic device such as a PDA in an inclined state.
  • the connector member 264 is provided on the lid member 263 rotatably attached to the control portion 262, and the back member is attached to the lid member 263 near the connector member 264.
  • FIG. 28 (A) when the first keyboard unit 203 and the second keyboard unit 204 are folded as shown in FIG. 28 (A), the backrest member 2666 configured as described above,
  • FIG. 28 (B) The configuration accommodated between the keyboard units 203 and 204 will be described with reference to FIG. 28 (B) and FIG. Fig. 31 is the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of each keyboard unit 203, 204 in the folded state shown in Fig. 28 (A) (transverse direction).
  • FIG. Fig. 31 is the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of each keyboard unit 203, 204 in the folded state shown in Fig. 28 (A) (transverse direction).
  • one wire member 266 A of the backrest member 266 is connected to the first key switch row K 1 in each of the keyboard units 203 and 204. It is stored in the gap S generated between the second key switch row K2 and the support wire 266C is stored in the gap S generated between the second key switch row K2 and the third key switch row K3. Similarly, the other wire member 266A is housed in the gap S generated between the third key switch row K3 and the fourth key switch row K4. In the wire member 2666B, there is a height difference between the top surface of the key top 23 and the plane portion of the first support member 2444. Since it is doubled, it can be sufficiently accommodated in the gap generated between the first keyboard unit 203 and the second keyboard unit 204.
  • the respective wire members 2666A and the support pins 266C constituting the backrest member 266 are opposed to each other in the folded state of the keyboard units 203 and 204.
  • the wire member 266 B is housed in the gap formed between the keyboard units 203 and 204, so that the first member in the folded state is The thickness of the keyboard unit 203 and the second keyboard unit 204 can be reduced, and the backrest member 266 can be attached to the outside of the keyboard 201. Since there is no need to attach it, the size of the key board 2 Can be achieved.
  • FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the control unit 262 and the keyboard 201.
  • FIG. 29A shows the control unit 262 removed from the first keyboard unit 203.
  • FIG. 29 (B) is an explanatory view showing a state where the control section 262 and the free arm are connected.
  • a free arm 2667 is rotatably supported by an arm supporting portion 222 formed on the back side of the peripheral wall member 222 of the first base plate 205 in the first key board unit 203.
  • the universal arm 2667 includes a hollow first arm member 2667A, one end of which is rotatably supported by an arm supporting portion 225 via a first connecting pin 2688A, and a first arm. It is composed of a hollow second arm member 267B rotatably supported at the other end of the arm member 267A via a second connecting pin 268B.
  • a signal line (not shown) connected to a membrane switch corresponding to each of the plurality of key switches 207 provided on the first support plate 206 of the first unit 237 is However, it is inserted and guided directly from the hollow peripheral wall member 223 to the arm support 225.
  • the signal line from the second key unit 247 and the signal line from the first key unit 237 are put together by the arm support section 25, and the signal line from the first arm member 267A to the second It is guided to the arm member 2667B.
  • the signal line guided in this way is
  • the arm member 267B is connected to a connector member 270 (see FIG. 29 (A)) provided on one surface of the arm member 267B.
  • each projection 2 71 is a first keyboard unit. It is detachably fitted into a positioning hole (not shown) formed in the peripheral wall member 246 of the first support plate 206 of 203. As a result, the control unit 262 is removably juxtaposed with the first keyboard unit 203. Further, a connector member 272 is provided on an end face of the control portion 262, and the connector member 272 is connected to the connector member 270 of the second arm member 267B.
  • each of the projections 27 1 of the control portion 26 2 is detachably fitted to the positioning hole of the peripheral wall member 24 6 of the first keyboard unit 203.
  • the connector part 27 of the control part 26 2 and the connector part 27 0 of the second arm member 26 67 B can be brought into contact with and separated from each other. 3 can be attached to and detached from, so that if multiple control units 26 2 are prepared for various portable electronic devices such as PDAs, only the control unit 26 2 can be replaced.
  • This allows the user to input data to various portable electronic devices using the same keyboard 201, and eliminates the waste of purchasing a keyboard 201 corresponding to the portable electronic device. Burden can be reduced.
  • the keyboard 201 manufacturer does not need to manufacture the keyboard 201 for each type of portable electronic device, and can reduce the investment and management costs required for manufacturing multiple types of keyboards. it can.
  • FIG. 30 is an explanatory view showing various use states of the free arm.
  • the universal arm 267 As shown in FIG. 29, in the universal arm 267, one end of the first arm portion 267A is connected to an arm supporting portion formed on the rear side (non-operator side) of the peripheral wall member 23.
  • the first arm member 2667A is rotatably supported via a first connecting pin 2668A at 225
  • the second arm member 2667B is connected to the other end of the first arm member 2667A.
  • Through the second connecting pin 2 6 8 B And is rotatably supported.
  • the control section 262 since the control section 262 is configured to be detachable from the first keyboard unit 203, the control section 262 includes the universal arm 267. It can be used in various usage forms by utilizing the rotatable nature of.
  • connection terminal of the PDA 273 is connected to the connector member 264 of the control part 262, and the PDA 273 is supported by the backrest member 266 in an inclined state.
  • FIG. 33 shows the case of using in the state of the form (B) in FIG.
  • connection terminal of the PDA 273 is connected to the connector member 264 of the control part 262, and the PDA 273 is supported by the backrest member 266 in an inclined state.
  • FIG. 34 shows the case of using in the state of form (C) in FIG.
  • control unit 262 is configured to be detachable from the first keyboard unit 203, and the control unit 262 and the first keyboard unit 203 are controlled by the free arm 267. Since they are configured to be connected, the positional relationship between the control unit 262 and the keyboard 201 can be freely changed within the range allowed by the universal arm 2667. Therefore, the arrangement position of the PDA 273 with respect to the keyboard 201 can be freely changed to a position desired by the keyboard user, so that the operability can be further improved.
  • FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the state shown in FIG. 28 (B) and the state of form (C) in FIG. 30 as viewed from the back side of the keyboard 201.
  • the thickness 11 of the second arm member 2678 requires that a connector member 270 for connecting to the connector member 272 of the control section 262 be provided. Due to the restrictions, etc., the thickness of the keyboard 201 is h (the thickness between the bottom surface of the first pace plate 205 and the bottom surface of the second base plate 208 and the top surface of the key top 234) Greater than. Therefore, the key board 201 is not used in the state shown in FIGS. 28 (B) and (C), but in such a state, each key switch 2 in the key board 201 is not used.
  • the surface formed by the top surfaces of 07 and 210 is not parallel to the installation surface of the keyboard 201 and is slightly inclined with respect to the installation surface.
  • the bottom surface of the keyboard 201 (the first and second bases) is used when the keyboard 201 is actually used. 1st connecting pin 268A and 2nd connecting pin 268B so that the bottom of the second arm member 2667B and the bottom of the second arm member 2667B are flush with each other.
  • the connecting angle of is inclined.
  • the first connecting pin 268A for rotatably connecting the arm supporting portion 225 and the first arm member 267A is at an angle with respect to the perpendicular L.
  • a second connecting pin 268 B rotatably connects the first arm member 267 A and the second arm member 267 B to the perpendicular L. It is tilted by angle B.
  • the angle B is set larger than the angle A.
  • the first connecting pin 268 A is inclined by the angle A with respect to the perpendicular L
  • the second connecting pin 268 B is inclined by the angle B with respect to the perpendicular L.
  • the first connecting pin 268A and the second connecting pin When the key board 201 is used, the bottom of the second arm member 267 B and the control section 262 and the bottom of the key board 201 are disengaged by inclining the connecting angle of the key board 221.
  • the surface formed by the top surface of each key switch 207 and 210 of the keyboard 201 on the same surface can be parallel to the installation surface of the keyboard 201, and the keyboard 207 The key operability in 1 can be prevented from lowering.
  • connection angle of the first connection pin 268A and the second connection pin 268B is configured to be inclined.
  • the present invention is not limited to this. May be inclined.
  • FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view schematically showing a foldable keyboard.
  • the keyboard 301 is basically composed of a first keyboard unit 303 and a second keyboard unit which are rotatably connected to each other via a rotary connection portion 302. It consists of 304.
  • the first keyboard unit 303 includes a first base plate 300, a first support plate 303 supported rotatably in the horizontal direction on the first base plate 305, and
  • the first support plate 300 includes a plurality of key switches 307 disposed on the first support plate 306.
  • the second keyboard unit 304 includes a second base plate 308, a second support plate 309 supported on the second base plate 308 so as to be rotatable in the horizontal direction, and a second base plate 308. It is composed of a plurality of key switches 310 arranged on the support plate 309.
  • the first base plate 300 is formed of a thin metal plate such as aluminum, and the side end 311 of the first base plate 300 (the right end in FIG. 36) is made of resin. And a hollow bearing member 312 is provided. At both ends of the bearing member 312, a part of the rotation connection portion 302 is formed.
  • the bearings 3 13 and 3 14 are integrally formed, and an inner surface of the bearing member 3 12 has the same shape as an arc surface 3 38 of a first support plate 30 6 described later.
  • An arc surface 380 having a radius of curvature is provided.
  • the bearing portion 313 is provided with two bearings 313B each having a bearing hole 313A formed apart.
  • the second base plate 308 like the first base plate 305, is formed of a thin metal plate, such as aluminum, and has a side end portion 315 of the second base plate 308 (FIG. 36).
  • a resin bearing member 316 is provided.
  • bearing portions 3 17 and 3 18 which respectively constitute a part of the rotation connecting portion 302 are formed in a body.
  • An arc surface 381 having the same radius of curvature as an arc surface 348 of a second support plate 309 described later is provided inside the 16.
  • the bearing part 317 is provided with one bearing 317B in which a bearing hole 317A is formed.
  • one bearing 318B having a bearing hole 318A is provided in the bearing portion 318.
  • the bearings 3 17 B are inserted between the bearings 3 13 B, and the bearing holes 3 13 A of the bearings 3 13 B and the bearing holes 3 17 B of the bearings 3 17 B are provided.
  • A is arranged in a straight line
  • bearings 3 18 B are fitted between bearings 3 14 B, and bearing holes 3 14 A of bearings 3 14 B and bearings 3 18 B
  • Bearing holes 3 18 A are arranged in a straight line.
  • the support shaft 319 A is inserted into the bearing holes 3 13 As 3 17 A arranged in a straight line as described above, and the bearing holes 3 14 A and 3 18 A are inserted into the bearing holes 3 13 As 3 17 A.
  • the support shaft 3 19 B is fitted.
  • the first base plate 300 and the second base plate 308 are supported so as to be mutually rotatable via the support shafts 319A and 319B.
  • the first base plate 305 has a signal line (hereinafter, referred to as a signal line) for connecting each key switch 307 provided on the first keyboard unit 303 with a control unit 362 (described later).
  • a guide groove 3 23 for guiding and arranging the signal line (not shown) is formed, and such a signal line is guided and arranged in the guide groove 323 and passes through a hollow bearing member 3 12. It is guided through the arm 3 6 7 (described later).
  • an arm supporting portion 325 formed on the back side of the bearing member 312 is formed in a hollow shape, rotatably supports the free arm 367, and is guided as described above. The incoming signal line is guided through the free arm 367.
  • the second base plate 308 has a second keyboard unit A guide groove 324 for guiding and arranging a signal line (not shown) for connecting each key switch 310 provided on 304 to the control section 362 is formed.
  • the wire is guided and arranged in the guide groove 3 2 4, is guided outward from the hollow bearing 3 18, the bearing 3 18 B, and is further extended from the hollow bearing 3 14 to the arm support 3. After passing through 25, it is guided to the free arm 3 6 7.
  • a screw receiving portion 327 is formed at a substantially central position inside the vicinity of the side end portion 326 opposite to the side end portion 331.
  • a screw 329 loosely fitted in the screw hole 328 of the first support plate 306 is fastened to the screw receiving portion 327.
  • the first support plate 306 is mounted on the first base plate 305 so as to be horizontally rotatable about the screw 329 and the screw receiver 327.
  • the second base plate 308 it is slightly inside the side end 308 a opposite to the side end 315 (inside by the width of the control part 362 described later). At approximately the center position, a screw receiving portion 330 is formed.
  • the screw receiving portion 330 has a screw loosely fitted into the screw hole 331 of the second support plate 309. 3 3 2 is concluded.
  • the second support plate 309 is attached to the second pace plate 308 so as to be rotatable in the horizontal direction with the screw 33 and the screw receiving portion 330 as a fulcrum.
  • the screw receiving portion 3 27 to which the screw 3 209 is fastened is formed inside the side end 3 11 of the first base plate 3 05 and the screw 3 3 2 is fastened. Since the screw receiving portion 330 to be formed is formed inside the side end portion 308 a of the second base plate 308, the screw 329 is formed on the first cutout 3. 3 7 and screws 3 3 2 are disposed inside the second key unit 3 4 7, and each screw 3 2 9 and 3 3 2 is attached to each key unit 3 3 It is possible to reliably prevent foreign matter from colliding with or entering each of the screws 32 9 and 33 32 as compared with the case where it is provided outside of 7 and 34 7.
  • first cutout 3337 and the second cutout 3347 are stably and rotationally supported on the first base plate 304 and the second base plate 310, respectively. be able to. Also, set the screws 3 239 and 332 inside the key units 337 and 347 so that they do not go out of the units 337 and 347. With this configuration, the size of each keyboard unit 303 and 304 can be reduced.
  • the first support plate 303 of the first keyboard unit 303 is made of a thin metal such as aluminum.
  • a predetermined number of key switches 307 operated by the left hand are arranged on the first support plate 306 formed of a plate. Note that the number of keys 307 operated by the left hand is determined based on international standards (IS02126 and IS0250).
  • locking portions 3333 corresponding to one key switch 307 are integrally formed on the first support plate 306 by press working or the like.
  • a membrane switch (not shown) having a three-layer structure (an upper sheet having a movable electrode, a lower sheet having a fixed electrode, and a movable electrode and a fixed electrode interposed between the upper sheet and the lower sheet. (Made of a spacer sheet having a switching hole for separating the sheet).
  • Each of the locking portions 3 33 protrudes upward from a hole formed in the membrane switch.
  • Each key switch 3 07 basically urges a pair of link members 3 3 5 and a key top 3 3 4 for guiding the key top 3 3 4 and the key top 3 3 4 to move up and down.
  • it comprises a rubber spring 336 arranged on the membrane switch corresponding to a switching portion composed of a movable electrode and a fixed electrode of the membrane switch.
  • each upper end of the pair of link members 3 35 is movably connected to the lower surface of the key top 3 3 4, and each lower end is movably locked by the locking portion 3 3 3 .
  • the key top 3 3 4 When the key top 3 3 4 is not pressed, the key top 3 3 4 is urged upward through the urging force of the rubber spring 3 3 6 and is held at the non-pressed position, and is pressed against the urging force of the rubber spring 3 3 6. When the top 3 3 4 is pressed, the rubber spring 3 3 6 6 presses the movable electrode of the membrane switch and abuts the fixed electrode through the switching hole of the spacer, thereby performing a predetermined switching operation. Done.
  • the above-mentioned key switch 307 and the first support plate 306 constitute a first key unit 337.
  • the configuration of the key switch 307 is publicly known, and the detailed description is omitted here.
  • One side (the right side in FIG. 36) of the first support plate 306 is centered on the rotation fulcrum (the screw 3 229 and the screw receiver 3 2 7 loosely fitted into the screw hole 3 288).
  • An arcuate surface 338 corresponding to the turning radius is formed, and an arc-shaped long groove 339 is formed inside the arcuate surface 338.
  • a screw 340 is loosely fitted in the long groove 339, and the screw 340 is fastened to a screw receiving portion 341 formed on the first pace plate 305.
  • the 339 and the screw 3400 guide the first support plate 303 so that when the first support plate 360 rotates in the horizontal direction on the first base plate 305, the rotation operation is performed stably. Perform the action of On the side of the first support plate 303 on which the arc surface 338 is formed, there is an arc surface 342 having the same radius of curvature as the arc surface 338.
  • the first support member 3 has a plurality of lock grooves 345 formed on the lower side, and graduations 344 formed at positions corresponding to the lock grooves 345 on the upper side of the arc surface 342. 4 4 are arranged.
  • the opening groove 345 forms a part of a locking mechanism 357 described later.
  • the arc surface 338 of the first support plate 303 and the arc surface 342 of the first support member 344 have the same radius of curvature, The arc surfaces 3 3 8 and 3 4 2 coincide with each other, thereby making it possible to improve the appearance of the first key unit 3 3 7 without causing a shift between the arc surfaces 3 3 8 and 3 4 2. it can.
  • the first support member 3 4 4 is disposed on the first support plate 3 06, it is disposed so as to cover the screw 3 4 0 and the long groove 3 39 from above.
  • a peripheral wall member 346 is provided around the first support plate 360.
  • the second support plate 309 in the second keyboard panel 304 is formed of a thin metal plate such as aluminum similarly to the first support plate 306, and the second support plate 309
  • a predetermined number of key switches 310 operated by the right hand are arranged.
  • the number of key switches 310 operated by the right hand is determined based on international standards (IS 0 2 126 and IS 0 2 5 3 0), and is provided on the first support plate 3 06.
  • the number is greater than the number of left-hand operated switches 307 provided.
  • the key switch 310 has the same configuration as that of the key switch 307, and the components thereof will be described with the same reference numerals as those of the key switch 307.
  • each locking portion 3333 corresponding to one key switch 310 are integrally formed on the second support plate 309 by pressing or the like, and are formed on the second support plate 309.
  • a membrane switch (not shown) having a three-layer structure (an upper sheet having a movable electrode, a lower sheet having a fixed electrode, and a switching hole interposed between the upper sheet and the lower sheet to separate the movable electrode and the fixed electrode. (Consisting of a spacer sheet having the following formula).
  • each locking part 3 3 3 is above the hole formed in the membrane switch. It is protruded toward.
  • each key switch 310 is basically a key top 3 3 4 and a key top 3
  • a pair of link members for guiding the up and down movement of 3 4 3 3 5 and the key top 3 3 4 are urged upward and are arranged on the membrane switch corresponding to the switching part consisting of the movable electrode and the fixed electrode of the membrane switch. It consists of a rubber spring 3 3 6
  • the respective upper ends of the pair of link members 335 are movably connected to the lower surface of the key top 334, and the respective lower ends are movably locked to the locking portions 333. I have.
  • the key top 3 3 4 is urged upward through the urging force of the rubber spring 3 3 6 and held at the non-pressed position.
  • the key switch 310 and the second support plate 309 constitute a second key unit 347.
  • One side (the left side in FIG. 36) of the second support plate 309 is centered on its rotation fulcrum (the screw 332 and the screw receiver 3330 loosely fitted into the screw hole 331).
  • An arc-shaped surface 348 corresponding to the turning radius is formed, and an arc-shaped long groove 3 is formed inside the arc-shaped surface 348.
  • a screw 350 is loosely fitted in the long groove 349, and the screw 350 is fastened to a screw receiving portion 351 formed in the second pace plate 308.
  • the long groove 349 and the screw 350 are stable when the second support plate 309 is rotated on the second base plate 308 in the horizontal direction. It acts to guide you to be heard.
  • On the side of the second support plate 309 on which the arc surface 348 is formed there is an arc surface 352 having the same radius of curvature as the arc surface 348, and the arc surface 352 is provided.
  • Lock grooves 35 5 are formed on the lower side, and scales 35 3 are formed on the upper side of the arc surface 35 2 at positions corresponding to the lock grooves 35 5.
  • the provided second support member 354 is provided.
  • the lock groove 355 forms a part of a lock mechanism 357 described later.
  • the second support member 354 When the second support member 354 is disposed on the second support plate 309, it is disposed so as to cover the screw 350 and the long groove 349 from above.
  • the second key unit 347 can be formed with a good appearance by making the 3449 invisible from the outside.
  • a peripheral wall member 356 is provided around the second support plate 309.
  • FIG. 37 shows that the first support plate 303 and the second support plate 310 are rotated independently after the first support plate 310 and the second support plate 310 are rotated.
  • FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a lock mechanism for locking 09 in an enlarged manner.
  • the lock mechanism 357 is provided between the first base plate 305 and the first key unit 337, and between the second base plate 308 and the second key unit 347.
  • the lock mechanisms 357 have the same configuration.
  • the lock mechanism 357 provided between the first support member 370 and the first support plate 306 of the first keyunit 337 is located below the circular arc surface 342 of the first support member 344.
  • the locking mechanism 357 is composed of the first key unit 337 and the second key unit
  • switches 47 are configured to be rotatable independently of each other, it is necessary to provide both the first key unit 337 side and the second key unit 347 side.
  • the bearing member 312 provided on the first pace plate 3505 is formed in a hollow shape, and a pair of holding portions 358 is provided therein. Between the pair of holding portions 358, both ends of a lock piece 359 obtained by bending a metal elastic thin plate in a “ ⁇ ” shape are supported.
  • an opening 361 is formed in the arc surface 3800 of the bearing member 312 that abuts against the arc surface 342 of the first support member 344, and an end of the opening piece 359 is formed. Is configured to protrude from the opening 36 1.
  • the tip of the lock piece 359 protruding from the opening 361 in this way is formed on the arcuate surface 3422 of the first support member 3444 8
  • a lock mechanism 357 provided between the second pace plate 308 and the second cutout 347 on the second keyboard unit 304 side has a second lock mechanism.
  • An orifice piece 359 formed at a substantially central position on the arc surface 381 of the bearing member 316 provided on the reference numeral 08 is provided.
  • the bearing member 316 provided on the second base plate 308 is formed in a hollow shape, and a pair of holding portions 358 are provided therein. Between the pair of holding portions 358, both ends of a lock piece 359 formed by bending a metal elastic thin plate in a “ ⁇ ” shape are supported.
  • an opening 361 is formed in the arc surface 381 of the bearing member 316 which is in contact with the arc surface 3552 of the second support member 3554, and the tip of the opening piece 359 is formed. Is configured to protrude from the opening 36 1. The tip of the lock piece 359 protruding from the opening 361 in this manner is engaged with one of the plurality of lock grooves 3555 formed in the arc surface 352 of the second support member 3554. Is stopped.
  • the first key unit 337 and the second key unit 347 are independently rotated to a desired rotation position, and then at the rotation position.
  • the tip of the lock piece 359 in the lock groove 345 of the first support member 344 By locking the tip of the lock piece 359 in the lock groove 345 of the first support member 344, the first kite 337 can be locked.
  • the second key unit 347 can be locked by locking the tip of the lock piece 359 in the lock groove 3555 of the second support member 3554.
  • the lock mechanism 357 is formed in an opening groove 345 formed in the circular arc surface 342 of the first support member 344 and a bearing member 321 of the first base plate 305.
  • the lock piece 359, the lock groove 355 formed in the arcuate surface 352 of the second support member 3554, and the lock piece formed in the bearing member 316 of the second base plate 310 Since the configuration is simple from the configuration of the 359, the lock mechanism 357 of the first keyunit 337 and the second keyunit 347 can be realized at low cost.
  • the lock grooves 345 and 355 are formed on the arc surfaces 342 and 352 of the first support member 344 and the second support member 354, respectively.
  • FIGS. 38 and 39 are explanatory diagrams showing a state in which the first key unit 337 and the second key unit 347 are turned from a state where they are not turned to a desired turning position.
  • Fig. 38 (A) shows a state in which the first key unit 33 7 and the second key unit 3 47 are not rotated
  • Fig. 38 (B) shows a state in which the first key unit 33 7 is turned clockwise.
  • FIG. 2 shows a state in which the key unit 347 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction
  • FIG. 39 (A) shows only the first key unit 337 from the state shown in FIG. 38 (A).
  • FIG. 39 (B) shows a state in which the second unit 3347 is rotated clockwise from the state in FIG. 39 (A).
  • FIG. 38 (A) shows the state in which the first support plate 303 of the first key unit 3337 and the second support plate 309 of the second key unit 347 are not rotated.
  • each key switch 307 arranged on the support plate 106 and each key switch 310 arranged on the support plate 309 have the same key arrangement relationship as a normal keyboard. are doing.
  • the lock piece 359 supported by the bearing member 312 is located at the center of the plurality of lock grooves 345 formed on the lower side of the arc surface 342 of the first support member 3444.
  • the lock piece 359, which is locked in the opening groove 345 and supported by the bearing member 316, is formed on the lower side of the circular arc surface 352 in the second support member 354. It is locked in the central lock groove 355 among the plurality of lock grooves 359.
  • Such a locked state can be confirmed by looking at the scale 3 43 of the first support member 3 4 4 and the scale 3 53 of the second support member 3 5 4.
  • the keyboard 301 When the operation of the keyboard 301 is desired in the state of the key arrangement as described above, the keyboard can be operated in this state.
  • the locking state between the lock groove 3 5 5 of 5 4 is confirmed by checking the scale 3 4 3 of the first support member 3 4 4 and the scale 3 5 3 of the second support member 3 5 4 C)
  • the operation of the keyboard 301 can be performed in this state.
  • first unit 3337 can be independently rotated from the state shown in FIG. 38 (A). From the state shown in FIG. 38 (A), only the first support plate 306 of the first key unit 33 7 is independent of the second support plate 309 of the second key unit 3 47, When it is rotated clockwise in FIG. 38 (A), the lock grooves 345 engaging with the mouthpieces 359 of the bearing member 312 move sequentially in the rotating direction, and When the lock pieces 359 of 312 are locked in the lock grooves 345 at the end positions on the rotation direction side, the first keyunit 337 and the second keyunit 347 are not locked. 39 The state shown in Fig. 9 (A) is obtained.
  • the first key unit 337 and the second key unit 3 are connected via the lock mechanism 3557 composed of the mouth piece 359 and the lock grooves 345,355.
  • the keyboard units 3 3 7 and 3 4 7 can be locked independently of one another in the desired pivot position, making operation extremely simple
  • the keyboard units 3 3 7 and 3 4 7 are independently arranged in a desired operation state, thereby stabilizing the keyboard operation in a state in which the operation form is optimal for each user. Can be done.
  • the locking state between the third support member 3 5 5 and the arc surface 3 4 3 on the first support member 3 4 4 and the scale 3 4 3 formed on the upper side of the second support member 3 5 4 The scale 35 3 formed on the upper side of 52 can be confirmed by visually recognizing it from above the keyboard 301.
  • the scales 3 4 3 are provided at positions corresponding to the lock grooves 3 4 5 on the first support member 3 4 4, and the scales 3 4 3 are provided on the second support member 3 5 4 corresponding to the lock grooves 3 5 5.
  • the scale 3 5 3 is provided at the position where the key unit 3 3 7 and the second key unit 3 4 7 are rotated, while looking at the scales 3 4 3 and 3 5 3 when turning the first key unit 3 3 7 and the second key unit 3 4 7. By rotating 7, 347, the rotation angle of each key unit 337, 347 can be adjusted easily and easily.
  • the first support plate 303 of the first keyboard unit 303 has, as described above, the international standard (IS 0 2 1 2 6 and IS 0 2 3 5 0) ), A predetermined number of switches 307 which are operated by the left hand according to) are arranged on the second support plate 309 of the second keyboard unit 304 with the right hand according to international standards. Although a predetermined number of key switches 310 operated are arranged, the number of key switches 307 operated by the left hand is smaller than the number of key switches 310 operated by the right hand. Based on this, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the length of the first keyboard unit 304 in the longitudinal direction is larger than the length of the second keyboard unit 304 in the longitudinal direction. Is also short.
  • the keyboard 301 is carried. Therefore, in the keyboard 301 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 40 (A) to 40 (C), one of the first keyboard units 303 is not provided.
  • a control portion for controlling the keyboard 301 is provided on a side edge (an edge opposite to the side rotatably connected to the second keyboard unit 304 and the left edge in FIG. 40).
  • the length of the second keyboard unit 304 in the longitudinal direction is the sum of the length of the second keyboard unit 304 and the first keyboard unit 303 and the control unit 362. It is configured to have the same length as
  • the first keyboard unit 303 is generated due to the difference in length between the first keyboard unit 303 and the second keyboard unit 304. This makes it possible to make effective use of the space created, and makes the keyboard 301 thinner than when the control section 36 2 is arranged below or on the side of the keyboard 301. And miniaturization can be achieved.
  • Fig. 40 (A) shows the bearing holes 3 13 A of the bearings 3 13 B of the bearing members 3 13 and the bearings 3 17 of the bearing members 3 17 when the keyboard 301 is not used.
  • B bearing hole 3 17 A and bearing part 3 1 4 each bearing 3 1 4 B bearing hole 3 14 A and bearing part 3 18 bearing 3 18 B bearing hole 3 18 A
  • the folded state is shown in which both keyboard units 303, 304 are turned in the direction of approach and overlapped via the support shafts 319A, 319B which are respectively passed through.
  • the length of the first keyboard unit 303 and the control unit 362 in the longitudinal direction is the same as the length of the second keyboard 4nit 304, making it compact. You can see that.
  • the keyboard units 303 and 304 are turned in a direction in which the keyboard units 310 and 304 are separated via the support shafts 319A and 319B.
  • the horizontal state is shown, and the first key unit 303 and the control unit 362 are heated.
  • the length in the longitudinal direction is the same as the length of the second keyboard unit 304, and the support shaft 3 is provided. It can be seen that the left and right sides of the keyboard 301 are balanced with respect to 19 A and 319 B.
  • a cover member 363 is attached to the substantially central portion of the control portion 362 so as to be openable and closable, and on the back side of the cover member 363, A connector member 364 for connecting various portable electronic devices such as PDAs is provided.
  • the connecting member 364 has a flexible board 356 connected to a control unit (not shown) built in the control section 362 for controlling the keyboard 301. 5 is connected.
  • a pair of wire members 366 A are fixed to both sides of the lid member 363 near the connector member 364, and a wire member is provided between the outer ends of both wire members 366 A.
  • 3 6 6 B is rotatably mounted. Further, a support wire 366C is fixed at a center position of the wire member 366B.
  • Each wire member 366 A is rotated together with the lid member 363 until the state shown in FIG. 40 (C), and by rotating the support wire 366 C rearward in this state, the PDA or the like is turned off.
  • Portable electronic devices can be supported in an inclined state.
  • the wire members 3666A, 3666B and 3666C constitute a backrest member 3666 that supports a portable electronic device such as a PDA in an inclined state.
  • the connector member 36 4 is disposed on the lid member 36 3 rotatably attached to the control section 36 2, and the back member is attached to the lid member 36 3 near the connector member 36 4.
  • the portable electronic device such as a PDA can be tilted and supported while the portable electronic device such as a PDA is directly connected to the connector member 364 without requiring a cable or the like.
  • FIG. 40 (A) when the first keyboard unit 303 and the second keyboard unit 304 are folded as shown in FIG. 40 (A), the back member 3666 configured as described above is formed.
  • the configuration accommodated between the key units 303, 304 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 (B) and 43.
  • FIG. FIG. 43 is an enlarged sectional view of the keyboard unit 303, 304 cut in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction (transverse direction) in the folded state shown in FIG. 40 (A). is there.
  • one of the wire members 3666 A of the backrest member 36 6 is connected to the first key switch row K 1 and the second key switch row K 3 in each of the keyboard units 303 and 304. It is stored in the gap S generated between the key switch row K2, and the support wire 3666C is stored in the gap S generated between the second key switch row K2 and the third key switch row K3, and similarly.
  • the other wire member 3666A is housed in the gap S generated between the third key switch row K3 and the fourth key switch row K4.
  • the wire member 3666B has a height difference between the top surface of the key top 334 and the plane portion of the first support member 3444, and the height difference is in a folded state. Therefore, it can be sufficiently accommodated in the gap generated between the first keyboard unit 303 and the second keyboard unit 304.
  • the respective wire members 3666A and the support pins 366C constituting the backrest member 366 are connected to each other in a folded state of both keyboard units 303, 304.
  • the wire member 366 B is housed in the gap between the keyboard units 303 and 304, as well as housed in the gap S created between the key switch rows facing each other.
  • the thickness of the first keyboard unit 303 and the second keyboard unit 304 in the folded state can be reduced in thickness, and the back member 36 6 can be used as a keyboard 30 1 Since there is no need to attach the key board outside, the size of the entire keyboard 301 can be reduced.
  • FIG. 41 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the control unit 362 and the keyboard 301
  • Fig. 41 (A) shows the control unit 362 removed from the first keyboard unit 303
  • FIG. 41 (B) shows the control unit 36 2 and the universal unit.
  • FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where the system is connected to a system.
  • a universal arm 3667 is rotatable on an arm support portion 325 formed on the back side of the bearing member 312 of the first base plate 300 in the first keyboard unit 303. Supported.
  • the free arm 367 includes a hollow first arm member 3667As, one end of which is rotatably supported by an arm support portion 3225 via a first connecting pin 3668A, and a first arm. It is composed of a hollow second arm member 365 B which is rotatably supported at the other end of the one-piece member 365 A via a second connecting pin 365 B.
  • the signal lines connected to the membrane switches corresponding to the plurality of switches 310 provided on the second support plate 309 of the second key unit 347 are, as described above, While being guided in the guide groove 3 2 4, it is guided outward from the hollow bearing portion 3 18 and the bearing 3 18 B, and further, the arm support portion 3 25 from the hollow bearing portion 3 14.
  • a signal line (not shown) connected to a membrane switch corresponding to each of the plurality of key switches 300 arranged on the first support plate 300 of the first key unit 3337 is provided as a guide. While being guided in the groove 3 23, it is guided through the hollow bearing member 3 12 to the free arm 3 6.7.
  • an arm supporting portion 325 formed on the back side of the bearing member 312 is formed in a hollow shape, and rotatably supports the universal arm 367, and guides the arm 367 as described above. The resulting signal line is guided through the free arm 366.
  • the signal line from the second key unit 347 and the signal line from the first key unit 337 are combined by the arm support part 325, and the second arm 366A is connected to the second arm. It is guided to the arm member 367B.
  • the signal line guided in this manner is connected to a connector member 370 (see FIG. 41 (A)) provided on one surface of the second arm member 369B.
  • each projection 371 is a first keyboard unit. It is detachably fitted into a positioning hole (not shown) formed in the peripheral wall member 346 of the first support plate 303 of 303. As a result, the control unit 362 is detachably arranged in parallel with the first keyboard unit 303.
  • a connector member 372 is provided on the end face of the control part 362, and The connector member 372 is connected to the connector member 370 of the second arm member 370B.
  • each protrusion 371 of the control portion 362 is removably fitted into a positioning hole in the peripheral wall member 346 of the first keyboard unit 303, and Since the connector member 3652 and the connector member 360 of the second arm member 3607B can be brought into contact with and separated from each other, the control section 3652 is in contact with the first key board unit 303.
  • the same unit can be replaced by replacing only the control unit.
  • the keyboard 301 can be used to input data to various portable electronic devices overnight, eliminating the need to purchase a keyboard 301 compatible with portable electronic devices and reducing the burden on the user. Can be reduced.
  • the manufacturer of the keyboard 301 eliminates the need to manufacture the keyboard 301 for each type of portable electronic device, thereby reducing investment and management costs required for manufacturing multiple types of keyboards. be able to.
  • FIG. Fig. 42 is an explanatory view showing the use state of the universal arm.
  • C As shown in Fig. 41, in the universal arm 367, one end of the first arm portion 367A is connected to the back of the bearing member.
  • the arm support section 325 formed on the side (non-operator side) is rotatably supported via a first connection bin 3668A.
  • a second arm member 365B is rotatably supported via a second connecting pin 365B.
  • the control section 362 is configured to be detachable from the first keyboard unit 303, the control section 362 is provided with a free arm 367. It can be used in various usage forms by utilizing the rotatable nature in.
  • each projection 3 71 of the control section 36 2 is removed from the positioning hole of the peripheral wall member 34 6 and the first arm member 36 7 A is connected to the first connecting pin 36.
  • the control unit 362 can be used while being separated from the keyboard 301.
  • connection terminal of the PDA 3 7 3 is connected to the connector 3 6 4 of the control section 3 6 2 T JP03 / 07028
  • FIG. 44 shows a case where the PDA 373 is supported in an inclined state by the backrest member 366 and used in the state shown in FIG.
  • control unit 362 is configured to be detachable from the first keyboard unit 303, and the control unit 362 and the first keyboard unit 303 are connected to the free arm 3 Since the configuration is such that they are connected by the connecting arm 67, the arrangement relationship between the control section 362 and the keyboard 301 can be freely changed within a range permitted by the universal arm 365. Therefore, the operability can be further improved by freely changing the arrangement position of the PDA 373 with respect to the keyboard 301 to a position desired by the keyboard user.
  • FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the state shown in FIG. 40 (B) when viewed from the back side of the keyboard 301.
  • the thickness 11 of the second arm member 368 is required to provide a connector member 370 for connecting to the connector member 372 of the control part 362. Due to restrictions, etc., the thickness of the keyboard 301 is h (the thickness between the bottom surface of the first base plate 305, the second pace plate 308 and the top surface of the key top 334) Greater than. Therefore, the keyboard 301 is not used in the state shown in FIGS. 40 (B) and (C), but in such a state, each key switch 307, 310 of the keyboard 301 is used. The top surface does not become parallel to the installation surface of the keyboard 301, but is slightly inclined with respect to the installation surface.
  • the keyboard 301 has the bottom surface (the first and second base plates 301) of the keyboard 301 when the keyboard 3 ⁇ 1 is actually used.
  • the connection angle of the first connection bin 368 A and the second connection pin 368 B is inclined so that the bottom of the second arm member 366 B and the bottom of the second arm member 370 B are flush with each other.
  • the first connecting pin 368 A for rotatably connecting the arm supporting portion 3 225 and the first arm member 366 A is at an angle with respect to the perpendicular L.
  • the second connecting pin 368 B that rotatably connects the first arm member 366 A and the second arm member 366 B only has an angle B with respect to the perpendicular L. It is inclined.
  • the angle B is set larger than the angle A.
  • the first connection pin 368 A and the second connection By tilting the connection angle of the pin 36 8 B, the bottom of the second arm member 36 7 B and the control section 36 2 and the bottom of the keyboard 31 are flush with each other when using the keyboard 31.
  • the surface formed by the top surfaces of the key switches 3107 and 310 in the keyboard 301 can be made parallel to the installation surface of the keyboard 301, and the key operability of the keyboard 301 Can be prevented from decreasing.
  • connection angle of the first connection pin 368 A and the second connection pin 368 B is configured to be inclined.
  • the present invention is not limited to this. May be inclined.
  • the lock mechanism 357 is provided between the second base plate 308 and the second key unit 347, as shown in FIG. 46, the lock mechanism 357 is provided on the first base plate 305.
  • the braking member provided on the bearing member 3 12 and the braking member provided on the bearing member 3 16 provided on the second base plate 3 08 are respectively connected to the arc surfaces of the first support member 3 4 4.
  • the rotation position of the first key unit 3 37 and the second key unit 3 47 may be maintained by contacting the circular surface 3 52 of the 3 4 2 and the second support member 3 54. .
  • FIG. 46 is an explanatory view showing, in an enlarged manner, a holding mechanism for holding the rotating positions of the first unit 3337 and the second unit 347.
  • the same reference numerals are given to the same elements and members as those in the above embodiment.
  • a concave pad holding portion 382 is formed substantially at the center of the arc surface 380 of the bearing member 312 on the first key unit 337 side, and the pad A braking pad 383 made of a felt material or the like is fixed to the holding portion 3822.
  • the brake pad 383 is in contact with the arc surface 342 of the first support member 344.
  • a holding mechanism 384 is constituted by the brake pad 383 and the arc surface 342.
  • the holding mechanism 384 contacts the brake pad 383 with the arc surface 342 of the first support member 344, and the first key unit 337 via the frictional force generated therebetween. Is held at its rotational position, unlike the embodiment described above, the arcuate surface 3 42 of the first support member 3 4 4 that forms the holding mechanism 3 84 4 5 is not formed.
  • a concave pad holding portion 382 is formed at a substantially center position of the circular arc surface 381 of the bearing member 316, and the pad holding portion 3 A braking pad 3 83 made of felt material or the like is fixed to 82.
  • the brake pad 383 is in contact with the arc surface 352 of the second support member 354.
  • the holding mechanism 384 is constituted by the braking pad 383 and the arc surface 352. Note that, similarly to the above case, the main holding mechanism 384 contacts the brake pad 383 with the arc surface 352 of the second support member 354, and applies the frictional force generated between the two. 2 Since the key unit 3 47 is held at the rotation position, the arc surface 3 52 of the second support member 3 54 forming the holding mechanism 3 84 is different from that of the above-described embodiment.
  • the lock groove 355 is not formed.
  • Holding mechanisms 3 8 4 provided between the first base plate 3 05 and the first key unit 3 3 7, and between the second base plate 3 08 and the second key unit 3 4 7, respectively.
  • the pad holding portion formed on the arcuate surface 380 of the bearing member 312 of the first base plate 305 will be described.
  • the brake pad 3 8 3 fixed to the first support member 3 4 4 is held by contacting the arc surface 3 4 2 of the first support member 3 4 4, and the second key unit 3 4 7 is held at a desired rotation position.
  • the brake pad 383 fixed to the pad holding portion 382 formed on the arc surface 3181 of the bearing member 316 of the second pace plate 3108 is connected to the arc surface of the second support member 354.
  • the contact position between the braking pad 3 83 and the circular surface 3 42 on the first support member 3 4 4 and the contact position between the braking pad 3 8 3 and the second support member 3 The contact position with the arc surface 3 52 at 54 can be moved steplessly.
  • the rotation position can be freely selected.
  • the keyboard operation can be stably performed in a state where the operation mode is more optimal for each user.
  • the holding mechanism 384 of the first and second key units 337, 347 is provided with the brake pad 3833 and the arcuate surface 3424 of each support member 344, 354. Since the structure is simple, the holding mechanism of the first and second key units 337, 347 can be realized at low cost.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
  • Input From Keyboards Or The Like (AREA)

Abstract

A first key unit (37) of a first keyboard unit (3) is provided so as to be swingable on a first base plate (5), and a second key unit (47) of a second keyboard unit (4) is provided so as to be swingable on a second base plate (8). A gear teeth portion (43) formed on a circular arc face (42) of a first gear member (44) provided on one side of a first support plate (6) and a gear teeth portion (53) formed on a circular arc face (52) of a second gear member (54) provided on one side of a second support plate (9) mesh with each other.

Description

明 細 折畳可能なキ一ボード 技術分野  Membrane Foldable key board Technical field
本発明は、携帯性に優れるとともに操作時には良好な操作性を有する折畳可能な キーボードに関し、特に、 2つのキ一ボードュニットの折畳状態を開放した後極め て簡単な操作により各キーボードュニットを所望の操作状態に配置することがで きる折畳可能なキ一ボ一ドに関するものである。 背景技術 '  The present invention relates to a foldable keyboard that is excellent in portability and has good operability during operation.In particular, each keyboard unit can be operated by extremely simple operation after opening the folded state of two keyboard units. The present invention relates to a foldable keyboard that can be arranged in a desired operation state. Background technology ''
従来より、 キーボードを 2つのキーボードユニットに分割するとともに、各キ一 ボードュニットを相互に回動可能に連結し、非使用時には各キーボードュニットを 折り畳んだ状態でコンパクトにして携帯性を容易にし、 また、使用時には各キ一ボ 一ドュニットを折畳状態から開放して通常のキーボードと同等の操作性を実現し た各種の折畳可能なキーボードが提案されている。  Conventionally, the keyboard has been divided into two keyboard units, and each keyboard unit has been rotatably connected to each other. When not in use, each keyboard unit has been folded down to make it compact and easy to carry. In addition, various foldable keyboards have been proposed in which each keyboard unit is released from a folded state when used to achieve the same operability as a normal keyboard.
例えば、 特許第 3 2 0 1 4 5 6号公報 （特開平 9一 3 4 6 1 2号公報） 、 及び、 特許第 3 2 5 4 6 5 8号公報（特開平 9— 3 4 6 1 1号公報） には、 キ一ボード及 びェンクロージャを長手方向の中央にて 2つの分割し、その分割された各キーボー ド及びェンクロージャを相互に回動係合する連結アームを介して折畳自在に構成 した折畳式キーボードが記載されている。  For example, Japanese Patent No. 3210456 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. Hei 9-341 612) and Japanese Patent No. 3254648 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-34661) In this publication, the keyboard and the enclosure are divided into two parts at the center in the longitudinal direction, and each of the divided keyboard and the enclosure is foldable via a connecting arm which is rotationally engaged with each other. The composed foldable keyboard is described.
また、特開 2 0 0 0— 5 6 9 0 4号公報には、 2つの分割キーボードの少なくと も一方を支持プレート上で摺動自在に支持するとともに、各分割キーボードをそれ それ背プレートの両辺で支持プレートを介して回動自在に連結した折畳式のキー ボードが記載されている。  Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-56904 discloses that at least one of two divided keyboards is slidably supported on a support plate, and each of the divided keyboards is attached to a back plate. A foldable keyboard which is rotatably connected via support plates on both sides is described.
前記した各キーボードにおいては、分割された 2つのキーボードュニットが相互 に回動可能に連結されているので、その非使用時には各キーボードュニットを折り 畳んだ状態でコンパクトにして携帯性が向上し、 また、 その使用時には各キーボー ドュニットを折畳状態から外側方向に回動して開放し、通常のキーボードと同等の 操作性をもって操作することが可能となるものである。 In each of the above-mentioned keyboards, the two divided keyboard units are rotatably connected to each other, so that when not in use, each keyboard unit is folded down in a compact state to improve portability. When using the keyboard unit, each keyboard unit is pivoted outward from the folded state to open, and the same as a normal keyboard. It is possible to operate with operability.
ところで、 キーボードの操作は、 同一姿勢で行われるものであり、長時間操作を 続けると眼や身体が疲労してしまうことから、近年、人間工学的見地からキ一ボ一 ドにおけるキートップの配置関係等が見直されてきている。例えば、人間工学的に キーボードの構造等を考慮すれば、 キーボードの使用者は個々に手指の長さ、形等 が異なっているのであるから、キーボードにおけるキートップの配置関係等を考慮 する場合、個々の使用者にとって最も使用し易い配置関係等が望ましいこととなる。 しかしながら、前記した特許第 3 2 0 1 4 5 6号公報（特開平 9— 3 4 6 1 2号 公報）、 及び、 特許第 3 2 5 4 6 5 8号公報（特閧平 9一 3 4 6 1 1号公報） に記 載された各キーボードでは、 2つのキーボードュニットを折畳状態から開放した状 態がそのまま使用状態となるものであり、 2つのキーボードュニット相互間の配置 関係を使用者の所望の使用形態に応じて変更することはできない。  By the way, keyboard operation is performed in the same posture, and eyes and body become tired if the operation is continued for a long time. Relationships are being reviewed. For example, considering the structure of the keyboard ergonomically, the users of the keyboard have different finger lengths, shapes, etc., so when considering the key top arrangement on the keyboard, etc. An arrangement that is the easiest to use for each user is desirable. However, the above-mentioned Patent No. 3210456 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-34612) and Patent No. 3254658 (Japanese Patent Application No. In each of the keyboards described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 6111), the two keyboard units are used as they are when the keyboard units are released from the folded state, and the arrangement relationship between the two keyboard units is determined. It cannot be changed according to the desired use form of the user.
また、特開 2 0 0 0— 5 6 9 0 4号公報に記載されたキーボードでは、 2つのキ 一ボードュニットを使用状態にする際、各キーボードュニットをその折畳状態から 外側方向に回動して開放した後、支持プレート上で摺動自在に支持された一方のキ —ボードュニットを他方のキーボードュニットに向かって摺動させることにより、 2つのキーボードュニヅトが近接した使用状態に配置するものであるが、かかる状 態における 2つのキーボードュニット相互間の配置関係を使用者の所望の使用形 態に応じて変更することはできない点で、 前記の場合と同様である。  In the keyboard described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-56904, when two keyboard units are put into use, each keyboard unit is turned outward from the folded state. Then, one keyboard unit slidably supported on the support plate is slid toward the other keyboard unit so that the two keyboard units are in close use. Although it is arranged, it is the same as the above case in that the arrangement relationship between the two keyboard units in such a state cannot be changed according to the user's desired use form.
これに対して、 米国特許第 5， 5 7 4 , 4 8 1号公報には、 キーボードを 2つの キーボードュニヅトに分割し、各キーボードュニヅトを相互に接離可能となるよう に連結するとともに、各キーボードュニットをキーボードの設置面と平行な水平方 向に回動可能に構成した折畳可能なキーボードが記載されている。  On the other hand, US Pat. No. 5,574,481 discloses that a keyboard is divided into two keyboard units so that the keyboard units can be moved toward and away from each other. And a foldable keyboard in which each keyboard unit is configured to be rotatable in a horizontal direction parallel to the installation surface of the keyboard.
かかる折畳可能なキーボードでは、各キーボードュニットを相互に接触させて配 置した場合には通常の状態で使用可能となり、 また、各キーボードュニット相互を 回動させて配置した場合には使用者の操作面側に対して各キ一ボードュニットを 傾けた状態で使用可能となる。  In such a foldable keyboard, when the keyboard units are arranged in contact with each other, the keyboard units can be used in a normal state, and when the keyboard units are rotated, the keyboard units are used. It can be used with each key unit inclining with respect to the user's operation surface.
しかしながら、 前記米国特許第 5， 5 7 4 , 4 8 1号公報に記載されたキーボ一 ドにおいては、各キーボードュニット相互は回動可能に構成されてはいるが、各キ —ボードュニットの回動動作は、 その設置面から離れた状態で行う必要がある。 従って、各キーボードュニットを使用者にとって最適な状態となるように操作面 側に対して各キーボードュニットを傾けて配置するには、左手で一方のキーボード ュニットを持ち、 且つ、 右手で他方のキーボードユニットを持ちながら、 各キーボ —ドュニヅトを所望の傾斜状態まで回動させなければならない。このような操作は 非常に煩わしいものであり、 また、 微妙な調整は非常に困難なものである。 However, in the keyboard described in the above-mentioned U.S. Pat. No. 5,574,481, although each keyboard unit is configured to be rotatable relative to each other, each key unit is rotated. —The rotation of the bodunit must be performed away from the installation surface. Therefore, in order to arrange each keyboard unit at an angle with respect to the operation surface side so that each keyboard unit is optimal for the user, hold one keyboard unit with the left hand and the other with the right hand. While holding the keyboard unit, each keyboard donut must be turned to the desired tilt state. Such operations are very cumbersome, and subtle adjustments are very difficult.
本発明は前記従来における問題点を解消するためになされたものであり、 2つの キーボードュニットの折畳状態を開放した後、極めて簡単な操作により各キ一ボー ドュニットを所望の操作状態に配置することができる折畳可能なキーボードを提 供することを目的とする。 発明の開示  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned conventional problems. After releasing the folded state of two keyboard units, each keyboard unit is arranged in a desired operation state by a very simple operation. It is intended to provide a foldable keyboard that can be operated. Disclosure of the invention
( 1 )前記目的を達成するため第 1発明に係る折畳可能なキーボードは、 第 1キ 一ボードュニットと第 2キーボードュニットとの間に回動連結部を設け、キ一ボー ドの使用時には回動連結部を介して両ュニットが離間する方向に回動されて水平 状態になるとともに、キーボードの非使用時には回動連結部を介して両ュニットが 近接する方向に回動されて重ね合わせた状態になる折畳可能なキーボードにおい て、前記第 1キ一ボードュニヅトは、 第 1ベース板と、 第 1ベ一ス板上で水平方向 に回動可能に配設された第 1支持板に複数のキースィツチが配列された第 1キー ユニットとを有し、 前記第 2キーボードユニットは、 第 2ベース板と、 第 2ベース 板上で水平方向に回動可能に配設された第 2支持板に複数のキースィツチが配列 された第 2キーユニットとを有し、前記回動連結部は、前記第 1ベ一ス板と第 2ベ ース板とを回動可能に支持する支持軸を有し、前記第 1支持板の一側に配設される とともに所定の円弧面が形成され、その円弧面に第 1ギア歯部が形成された第 1ギ ァ部材と、 前記第 2支持板の一側に配設されるとともに所定の円弧面が形成され、 その円弧面に前記第 1ギア歯部に嚙合する第 2ギア歯部が形成された第 2ギア部 材とを備えたことを特徴とする。  (1) In order to achieve the above object, the foldable keyboard according to the first invention is provided with a rotation connecting portion between the first keyboard unit and the second keyboard unit, and when the keyboard is used, Both units are pivoted in the direction separating from each other via the pivotal connection, and become horizontal, and when the keyboard is not used, both units are pivoted in the direction approaching via the pivotal connection to overlap. In the foldable keyboard which is in a state, the first keyboard unit is provided on a first base plate and a first support plate disposed on the first base plate so as to be rotatable in a horizontal direction. A first key unit in which key switches are arranged.The second keyboard unit includes a second base plate and a second support plate disposed on the second base plate so as to be rotatable in a horizontal direction. The second key in which multiple key switches are arranged And the rotation connecting portion has a support shaft rotatably supporting the first base plate and the second base plate, and is provided on one side of the first support plate. A first gear member having a predetermined arc surface formed thereon and a first gear tooth portion formed on the arc surface; and a first arc member disposed on one side of the second support plate and having a predetermined arc shape. A second gear member having a surface formed, and a second gear tooth portion formed on the arc surface of the first gear tooth portion.
また、第 1発明に係る折畳可能なキーボードは、前記第 1ベース板と第 1キーュ ニヅ トとの間、 又は、 第 2ベース板と第 2キーユニットとの間に配設され、 第 1ベ —ス板又は第 2ベース板に対して、第 1キーュニット又は第 2キーュニヅトを所望 の回動位置でロックするロック機構を備えたことを特徴とする。 Further, the foldable keyboard according to the first invention is provided between the first base plate and the first key unit or between the second base plate and the second key unit. 1 be A lock mechanism for locking the first key unit or the second key unit at a desired rotation position with respect to the base plate or the second base plate.
更に、 第 1発明に係る折畳可能なキ一ボードは、 前記ロック機構は、 前記第 1ギ ァ部材又は第 2ギア部材における円弧面に形成された口、リク溝と、前記第 1ベース 板又は第 2ベース板に設けられ口ック溝に係止する口ック片とから構成されるこ とを特徴とする。 .  Further, in the foldable key board according to the first invention, the lock mechanism includes: an opening formed in an arc surface of the first gear member or the second gear member; a groove; and the first base plate. Alternatively, it is characterized by comprising a hook piece provided on the second base plate and locked in a hook groove. .
更に、第 1発明に係る折畳可能なキーボードは、前記第 1キーュニッ卜の第 1支 持板は所定の回動支点で第 1ペース板にて回動可能に配置されるとともに、第 1支 持板の一側には回動支点を中心とする回転半径に合致する円弧面が形成され、前記 第 1ギア部材の円弧面は、前記第 1支持板の円弧面と同一の曲率半径を有し、また、 前記第 2キーュニットの第 2支持板は所定の回動支点で第 2ベ一ス板にて回動可 能に配置されるとともに、第 2支持板の一側には回動支点を中心とする回転半径に 合致する円弧面が形成され、前記第 2ギア部材の円弧面は、前記第 2支持板の円弧 面と同一の曲率半径を有することを特徴とする。  Further, in the foldable keyboard according to the first invention, the first support plate of the first key unit is rotatably disposed on the first pace plate at a predetermined rotation fulcrum, and the first support plate is rotatable. An arcuate surface is formed on one side of the holding plate, the arcuate surface conforming to the radius of rotation about the pivot point, and the arcuate surface of the first gear member has the same radius of curvature as the arcuate surface of the first support plate. The second support plate of the second key unit is rotatably disposed on a second base plate at a predetermined rotation fulcrum, and a rotation fulcrum is provided on one side of the second support plate. An arc surface that matches a rotation radius around the center is formed, and the arc surface of the second gear member has the same radius of curvature as the arc surface of the second support plate.
また、第 1発明に係る折畳可能なキーボードは、前記第 1ギア部材に形成された 第 1ギア歯部は、第 1ギア部材の上面よりも下側に位置する下歯と第 1ギア部材の 上面よりも上側に位置する上歯とからなる複数の第 1ギア歯を有し、前記第 2ギア 部材に形成された第 2ギア歯部は、第 2ギア部材の上面よりも下側位置にする下歯 と第 2ギア部材の上面よりも上側に位置する上歯とからなる複数の第 2ギア歯を 有し、前記複数の第 1ギア歯及び第 2ギア歯は、 それぞれにおける上歯及び下歯を 介して相互に嚙合されていることを特徴とする。  In addition, in the foldable keyboard according to the first invention, the first gear tooth portion formed on the first gear member includes a lower gear located below an upper surface of the first gear member and the first gear member. A plurality of first gear teeth formed of upper teeth located above the upper surface of the second gear member, and a second gear tooth portion formed on the second gear member is located below the upper surface of the second gear member. And a plurality of second gear teeth, each of which includes upper teeth positioned above the upper surface of the second gear member. The plurality of first gear teeth and the second gear teeth are respectively upper teeth. And are connected to each other via lower teeth.
前記構成を有する第 1発明に係る折畳可能なキーボードでは、第 1キーボードュ ニットの第 1ペース板と第 2キーボードュニヅトの第 2ベース板とが、回動連結部 の支持軸を介して回動可能に支持されており、これによりキーボードの使用時に両 ュニットは、支持軸を介して相互に離間する方向に回動されて水平状態になり、 ま た、 キーボードの非使用時に両ュニットは、支持軸を介して相互に近接する方向に 回動されて重ね合わされた状態になる。  In the foldable keyboard according to the first invention having the above configuration, the first pace plate of the first keyboard unit and the second base plate of the second keyboard unit are connected via the support shaft of the rotary connecting portion. When the keyboard is in use, the units are turned in a direction away from each other via the support shaft to be horizontal, and when the keyboard is not in use, both units are in a horizontal state. Are rotated in the direction approaching each other via the support shaft, and are in an overlapped state.
また、前記キーボードでは、第 1キーボードュニヅトの第 1キーュニヅトが第 1 ベース板上で回動可能に配設されるとともに、第 2キ一ボードュニットの第 2キー ュニッ卜が第 2ベース板上で回動可能に配設されており、 また、 第 1支持板の一側 に配設された第 1ギア部材の円弧面に形成された第 1ギア歯部が、第 2支持板の一 側に配設された第 2ギア部材の円弧面に形成された第 2ギア歯部と嚙合されてい るので、 使用者がキ一ボードを使用する際に、 両キ一ュニッ卜の一方を、 第 1ぺ一 ス板又は第 2ベース板上で水平方向に回動させることにより、両キ一ュニッ卜の他 方は、 一方のキ一ユニットと同期して回動させることが可能となる。 このように、 極めて簡単な操作により各キーボードユニットを所望の操作状態に配置して、個々 の使用者にとって最適な操作形態でキ一ボード操作を行うことができる。 In the keyboard, the first key unit of the first keyboard unit is rotatably disposed on the first base plate, and the second key unit of the second keyboard unit is provided. A unit is rotatably disposed on the second base plate, and a first gear tooth formed on an arc surface of a first gear member disposed on one side of the first support plate. And the second gear teeth formed on the arc surface of the second gear member disposed on one side of the second support plate. By rotating one of the units in a horizontal direction on the first base plate or the second base plate, the other unit is rotated in synchronization with one of the key units. It is possible to do. In this way, the keyboard units can be arranged in a desired operation state by a very simple operation, and the keyboard operation can be performed in an operation mode most suitable for each user.
また、 第 1ベース板と第 1キーュニットの間、 又は、 第 2ペース板と第 2キーュ ニッ卜の間に、第 1キーュニット又は第 2キ一ュニットを所望の回動位置でロック するロヅク機構が配設されているので、第 1キーュニヅ卜と第 2キーュニヅトとを 相互に同期させて所望の回動位置まで回動させた後、その回動位置で第 1及び第 2 キ一ュニヅトをロック機構によりロックすることができ、個々の使用者にとって最 適な操作形態に固定した状態でキ一ボード操作を安定して行うことができる。 更に、 ロック機構が、 第 1ギア部材又は第 2ギア部材の円弧面に形成されたロッ ク溝と、第 1ベース板又は第 2ベース板に設けられてロック溝に係止するロック片 とから簡単に構成されているので、第 1及び第 2キ一ュニットのロック機構を低い コストで実現することができる。 また、 ロック溝は、 第 2ギア歯部が形成された第 1ギア部材又は第 2ギア部材の円弧面に形成されることから、第 2ギア歯部の形成 と同時にロック溝を形成することが可能となり、 これによつても'コストの低廉化を 図ることができる。  Further, a lock mechanism for locking the first key unit or the second unit at a desired rotation position is provided between the first base plate and the first key unit or between the second pace plate and the second key unit. Since the first key unit and the second key unit are synchronized with each other and turned to a desired turning position, the first and second key units are locked at the turning position. Thus, the keyboard operation can be stably performed in a state where the operation mode is optimal for each user. Further, the lock mechanism includes a lock groove formed on the arc surface of the first gear member or the second gear member, and a lock piece provided on the first base plate or the second base plate and locked in the lock groove. Since the configuration is simple, the lock mechanisms of the first and second units can be realized at low cost. Further, since the lock groove is formed on the arcuate surface of the first gear member or the second gear member on which the second gear tooth portion is formed, it is possible to form the lock groove simultaneously with the formation of the second gear tooth portion. This makes it possible to reduce costs.
また、第 1ギア歯部の円弧面と第 1キーュニットにおける支持板の円弧面とが同 一の曲率半径を有するとともに、第 2ギア歯部の円弧面と第 2キ一ュ二ットにおけ る支持板の円弧面とが同一の曲率半径を有するように構成したので、第 1キーュニ ッ卜における第 1ギア歯部の円弧面と支持板の円弧面、及び、 第 2キーュニットに おける第 2ギア歯部の円弧面と支持板の円弧面が、相互に合致することとなり、 こ れにより双方の円弧面間でずれを発生することなく第 1キ一ュ二ヅト及び第 2キ 一ュニットを見栄え良く構成することができる。  In addition, the arc surface of the first gear tooth portion and the arc surface of the support plate in the first key unit have the same radius of curvature, and the arc surface of the second gear tooth portion and the second cutout have the same curvature radius. The arc surface of the support plate has the same radius of curvature as the arc surface of the first gear tooth portion in the first key unit, the arc surface of the support plate, and the second surface in the second key unit. The arcuate surface of the gear tooth and the arcuate surface of the support plate coincide with each other, so that there is no deviation between the two arcuate surfaces, so that the first unit and the second unit are not shifted. Can be configured to look good.
更に、第 1ギア歯部が、第 1ギア部材の上面よりも下側に位置する下歯と第 1ギ ァ部材の上面よりも上側に位置する上歯とからなる複数の第 1ギア歯を有すると ともに、第 2ギア部材に形成された第 2ギア歯部は、第 2ギア部材の上面よりも下 側位置にする下歯と第 2ギァ部材の上面よりも上側に位置する上歯とからなる複 数の第 2ギア歯を有し、複数の第 1ギア歯及び第 2ギア歯を、 それぞれにおける上 歯及び下歯を介して相互に嚙合させる構成にしたので、複数の第 1ギア歯と第 2ギ ァ歯との間における嚙合状態を、 それそれにおける下歯と上歯との協働により、第 1キーボードュニッ卜と第 2キーボードュニットとをその折畳状態と水平状態と の間で回動させている間においても、解除させることなく常時保持することができ る o Further, the first gear tooth portion is provided with the lower gear and the first gear located below the upper surface of the first gear member. A plurality of first gear teeth formed of upper teeth positioned above the upper surface of the second gear member, and the second gear teeth formed on the second gear member are lower than the upper surface of the second gear member. It has a plurality of second gear teeth consisting of lower teeth to be located at the side position and upper teeth located above the upper surface of the second gear member, and a plurality of the first gear teeth and the second gear teeth are respectively provided. Since the configuration is such that the upper teeth and the lower teeth are engaged with each other, the engagement between the plurality of first gear teeth and the second gear teeth can be changed by the cooperation of the lower teeth and the upper teeth in each case. Even when the first keyboard unit and the second keyboard unit are rotated between the folded state and the horizontal state, they can be always held without being released.o
( 2 )前記目的を達成するため第 2発明に係る折畳可能なキーボードは、第 1キー ボードュニットと第 2キーボードュニットとの間に回動連結部を設け、キーボード の使用時には回動連結部を介して両ュニットが離間する方向に回動されて水平状 態になるとともに、キーボードの非使用時には回動連結部を介して両ュニットが近 接する方向に回動されて重ね合わせた状態になる折畳可能なキーボードにおいて、 前記第 1キーボードュニットは、第 1ベース板と、第 1ベース板上で水平方向に回 動可能に配設された第 1支持板に複数のキースィツチが配列された第 1キーュニ ットとを有し、 前記第 2キーボードユニットは、 第 2ベース板と、 第 2ペース板上 で水平方向に回動可能に配設された第 2支持板に複数のキ一スィツチが配列され た第 2キーユニットとを有し、前記回動連結部は、前記第 1ベース板と第 2ベース 板とを回動可能に支持する支持軸と、支持軸に対して摺動可能に挿嵌されるととも にギア歯部が形成された摺動部材とを有し、前記第 1支持板の一側に配設されると ともに所定の円弧面が形成され、その円弧面に前記ギア歯部に嚙合する第 1ギア歯 が形成された第 1ギア部材と、前記第 2支持板の一側に配設されるとともに所定の 円弧面が形成され、その円弧面に前記ギア歯部に嚙合する第 2ギア歯が形成された 第 2ギア部材とを備えたことを特徴とする。  (2) In order to achieve the above object, the foldable keyboard according to the second invention is provided with a rotation connecting portion between the first keyboard unit and the second keyboard unit, and the turning connection portion when the keyboard is used. The two units are pivoted in the direction away from each other and become horizontal when the keyboard is not used. In the foldable keyboard, the first keyboard unit includes a first base plate and a plurality of key switches arranged on a first support plate that is rotatably arranged on the first base plate in a horizontal direction. A first key unit, wherein the second keyboard unit is provided with a plurality of key switches on a second base plate and a second support plate disposed on the second pace plate so as to be rotatable in a horizontal direction. 2nd key with A support shaft that rotatably supports the first base plate and the second base plate, and the rotation connection portion is slidably inserted into the support shaft. A sliding member having a gear tooth portion formed thereon, which is disposed on one side of the first support plate, and has a predetermined arc surface formed thereon, and the arc surface engages with the gear tooth portion. A first gear member having first gear teeth formed thereon, and a second gear disposed on one side of the second support plate and having a predetermined arc surface formed thereon, the second gear engaging with the gear tooth portion on the arc surface. And a second gear member having teeth formed thereon.
また、第 2発明に係る折畳可能なキ一ボードは、前記第 1ベース板と第 1キーュ ニヅトとの間、 又は、 第 2ベース板と第 2キーュニヅトとの間に配設され、 第 1ベ ース板又は第 2ペース板に対して、第 1キ一ュニヅト又は第 2キ一ュニットを所望 の回動位置でロックするロック機構を備えたことを特徴とする。 更に、 第 2発明に係る折畳可能なキーボードは、前記ロック機構は、 前記第 1ギ ァ部材又は第 2ギア部材における円弧面に形成されたロック溝と、前記第 1ベース 板又は第 2ペース板に設けられロック溝に係止する口ック片とから構成されるこ とを特徴とする。 Further, the foldable key board according to the second invention is provided between the first base plate and the first key unit or between the second base plate and the second key unit, A lock mechanism for locking the first unit or the second unit at a desired rotation position with respect to the base plate or the second pace plate is provided. Further, in the foldable keyboard according to the second invention, the lock mechanism includes: a lock groove formed in an arc surface of the first gear member or the second gear member; and a first base plate or a second pace. And a hook piece provided on the plate and locked in the lock groove.
また、第 2発明に係る折畳可能なキーボードは、前記第 1キーュニットの第 1支 持板は所定の回動支点で第 1ベース板にて回動可能に配置されるとともに、第 1支 持板の一側には回動支点を中心とする回転半径に合致する円弧面が形成され、前記 第 1ギア部材の円弧面は、 前記第 1支持板の円弧面と同一の曲率半径を有し、 また、前記第 2キーュニッ卜の第 2支持板は所定の回動支点で第 2ベース板にて回 動可能に配置されるとともに、第 2支持板の一側には回動支点を中心とする回転半 径に合致する円弧面が形成され、前記第 2ギア部材の円弧面は、前記第 2支持板の 円弧面と同一の曲率半径を有することを特徴とする。  Further, in the foldable keyboard according to the second invention, the first support plate of the first key unit is rotatably disposed on the first base plate at a predetermined rotation fulcrum, and the first support unit is provided with a first support plate. On one side of the plate, an arc surface is formed that matches the radius of rotation about the pivot point, and the arc surface of the first gear member has the same radius of curvature as the arc surface of the first support plate. Further, the second support plate of the second key unit is rotatably arranged on the second base plate at a predetermined rotation fulcrum, and one side of the second support plate has a rotation fulcrum as a center. An arc surface conforming to the rotating radius of the second gear member is formed, and the arc surface of the second gear member has the same radius of curvature as the arc surface of the second support plate.
前記構成を有する第 2発明に係る折畳可能なキーボードでは、第 1キーボードュ ニヅ卜の第 1ベース板と第 2キーボードュニットの第 2ベース板とが、回動連結部 の支持軸を介して回動可能に支持されており、これによりキーボードの使用時に両 ュニットは、支持軸を介して相互に離間する方向に回動されて水平状態になり、 ま た、 キーボードの非使用時に両ュニットは、支持軸を介して相互に近接する方向に 回動されて重ね合わされた状態になる。  In the foldable keyboard according to the second invention having the above configuration, the first base plate of the first keyboard unit and the second base plate of the second keyboard unit are connected to each other via the support shaft of the rotation connecting portion. When the keyboard is in use, the units are turned in a direction away from each other via the support shaft to be horizontal, and when the keyboard is not in use, both units are in a horizontal state. Are rotated in the direction approaching each other via the support shaft, and are in an overlapped state.
また、前記キーボードでは、第 1キ一ボードュニットの第 1キーュニッ卜が第 1 ベース板上で回動可能に配設されるとともに、第 2キーボードュニヅトの第 2キ一 ュニッ卜が第 2ベース板上で回動可能に配設されており、 また、第 1支持板の一側 に配設された第 1ギア部材の円弧面に形成された第 1ギア歯が、支持軸に摺動可能 に揷嵌された摺動部材のギア歯部に嚙合され、且つ、第 2支持板の一側に配設され た第 2ギア部材の円弧面に形成された第 2ギア歯が、摺動部材のギア歯部に嚙合さ れているので、 使用者がキ一ボードを使用する際に、 両キーュニットの一方を、 第 1ベース板又は第 2ベース板上で水平方向に回動させることにより、両キ一ュニッ トの他方は、一方のキーュニットと同期して回動させることが可能となる。 このよ うに、極めて簡単な操作により各キーボードュニットを所望の操作状態に配置して、 個々の使用者にとって最適な操作形態でキーボード操作を行うことができる。 8 In the keyboard, the first key unit of the first keyboard unit is rotatably disposed on the first base plate, and the second key unit of the second keyboard unit is connected to the second key unit. The first gear teeth formed on the base plate so as to be rotatable, and the first gear teeth formed on the arc surface of the first gear member provided on one side of the first support plate slide on the support shaft. The second gear teeth formed on the arcuate surface of the second gear member disposed on one side of the second support plate are fitted with the gear teeth of the sliding member fitted as much as possible. Since it is engaged with the gear teeth of the member, when the user uses the keyboard, one of the two key units is turned horizontally on the first base plate or the second base plate. The other of the two units can be rotated in synchronization with one of the units. As described above, the keyboard units can be arranged in a desired operation state by an extremely simple operation, and the keyboard operation can be performed in an operation mode optimal for each user. 8
また、第 2発明に係る折畳可能なキ一ボードでは、第 1ベース板と第 1キ一ュ二 ヅトの間、 又は、 第 2ベース板と第 2キーュニヅトの間に、 第 1キ一ュニヅト又は 第 2キーュニヅトを所望の回動位置でロックするロック機構が配設されているの で、第 1キーュニッ卜と第 2キーユニットとを相互に同期させて所望の回動位置ま で回動させた後、その回動位置で第 1及び第 2キーュニヅトをロック機構により口 ヅクすることができ、個々の使用者にとって最適な操作形態に固定した状態でキー ボード操作を安定して行うことができる。  Further, in the foldable key board according to the second invention, the first key is provided between the first base plate and the first keyboard or between the second base plate and the second keyboard. Since the lock mechanism for locking the unit or the second key unit at a desired rotation position is provided, the first key unit and the second key unit are synchronized with each other to rotate to the desired rotation position. After that, the first and second key units can be opened by the lock mechanism at the rotation position, and the keyboard operation can be stably performed in a state where the operation mode is optimal for each user. it can.
更に 第 2発明に係る折畳可能なキーボードでは、 ロック機構が、第 1ギア部材 又は第 2ギア部材の円弧面に形成されたロック溝と、第 1ベース板又は第 2ベース 板に設けられてロック溝に係止するロック片とから簡単に構成されているので、第 1及び第 2キーュニッ卜のロヅク機構を低いコス卜で実現することができる。また、 口ック溝は、第 1ギア歯が形成された第 1ギア部材又は第 2ギア歯が形成された第 2ギア部材の円弧面に形成されることから、第 1ギア歯及び第 2ギア歯の形成と同 時にロック溝を形成することが可能となり、これによつてもコストの低廉化を図る ことができる。  Further, in the foldable keyboard according to the second invention, the lock mechanism is provided in the lock groove formed in the arc surface of the first gear member or the second gear member, and in the first base plate or the second base plate. Since the lock mechanism is simply composed of the lock piece that locks in the lock groove, the lock mechanism of the first and second key units can be realized at low cost. Further, since the notch groove is formed on an arc surface of the first gear member on which the first gear teeth are formed or the second gear member on which the second gear teeth are formed, the first gear teeth and the second gear teeth are formed. The lock groove can be formed at the same time as the formation of the gear teeth, so that the cost can be reduced.
また、第 2発明に係る折畳可能なキーボードでは、第 1ギア歯の円弧面と第 1キ —ュニヅトにおける支持板の円弧面とが同一の曲率半径を有するとともに、第 2ギ ァ歯の円弧面と第 2キーュニットにおける支持板の円弧面とが同一の曲率半径を 有するように構成したので、第 1キーュニットにおける第 1ギア歯の円弧面と支持 板の円弧面、及び、第 2キーュニットにおける第 2ギア歯の円弧面と支持板の円弧 面が、相互に合致することとなり、 これにより双方の円弧面間でずれを発生するこ となく第 1キーュニット及び第 2キ一ュニットを見栄え良く構成することができ る。  Further, in the foldable keyboard according to the second invention, the arc surface of the first gear tooth and the arc surface of the support plate in the first key unit have the same radius of curvature, and the arc of the second gear tooth. Since the surface and the arc surface of the support plate in the second key unit have the same radius of curvature, the arc surface of the first gear tooth in the first key unit and the arc surface of the support plate, and the second key unit have the same curvature radius. The arc surface of the 2 gear teeth and the arc surface of the support plate coincide with each other, so that the first key unit and the second unit are formed with a good appearance without any deviation between the two arc surfaces. be able to.
( 3 )前記目的を達成するため第 3発明に係る折畳可能なキーボードは、第 1キ一 ボードュニッ卜と第 2キーボードュニットとの間に回動連結部を設け、キーボード の使用時には回動連結部を介して両ュニッ卜が離間する方向に回動されて水平状 態になるとともに、キーボードの非使用時には回動連結部を介して両ュニッ卜が近 接する方向に回動されて重ね合わせた状態になる折畳可能なキーボードにおいて、 前記第 1キ一ボードュニットは、第 1ベース板と、第 1ベース板上で水平方向に回 P T/JP03/07028 (3) In order to achieve the above object, the foldable keyboard according to the third invention is provided with a rotation connecting portion between the first keyboard unit and the second keyboard unit, and the keyboard is rotated when the keyboard is used. Both units are pivoted in the direction of separation via the connecting part and become horizontal, and when the keyboard is not in use, both units are pivoted in the direction of approaching via the rotating connecting part and overlap. In the foldable keyboard in the folded state, the first key unit is horizontally rotated on the first base plate and the first base plate. PT / JP03 / 07028
9  9
動可能に配設された第 1支持板に複数のキ一スィツチが配列された第 1キ一ュ二 ッ卜とを有し、 前記第 2キーボードュニットは、 第 2ベース板と、 第 2ベース板上 で水平方向に回動可能に配設された第 2支持板に複数のキースィツチが配列され た第 2キーユニットとを有し、前記回動連結部は、前記第 1ベース板と第 2ベース 板とを回動可能に支持する支持軸と、支持軸に対して摺動可能に揷嵌された摺動部 材とを有し、前記第 1支持板の一側に配設された第 1支持部材と、前記第 2支持板 の一側に配設された第 2支持部材と、前記摺動部材と第 1支持部材とをリンクする 第 1リンク部材、及び、摺動部材と前記第 2支持部材とをリンクする第 2リンク部 材とを有するリンク機構とを備えたことを特徴とする。 A first keyboard in which a plurality of switches are arranged on a first support plate movably disposed, wherein the second keyboard unit includes a second base plate; A second key unit in which a plurality of key switches are arranged on a second support plate arranged rotatably in a horizontal direction on the base plate, wherein the rotation connection portion is provided with the first base plate and the second base plate; (2) a support shaft rotatably supporting the base plate, and a sliding member slidably fitted to the support shaft, and disposed on one side of the first support plate; A first support member, a second support member disposed on one side of the second support plate, a first link member for linking the sliding member and the first support member, and a sliding member. A link mechanism having a second link member that links the second support member.
また、第 3発明に係る折畳可能なキーボードは、前記第 1ペース板と第 1キ一ュ ニットとの間、 又は、 第 2ペース板と第 2キ一ユニットとの間に配設され、 第 1ベ —ス板又は第 2ベース板に対して、第 1キ一ュニヅト又は第 2キーュニットを所望 の回動位置でロックするロック機構を備えたことを特徴とする。  Further, the foldable keyboard according to the third invention is provided between the first pace board and the first unit, or between the second pace board and the second key unit, A lock mechanism is provided for locking the first key unit or the second key unit at a desired rotation position with respect to the first base plate or the second base plate.
また、 第 3発明に係る折畳可能なキーボードは、 前記ロック機構は、 前記第 1支 持部材又は第 2支持部材における円弧面に形成されたロック溝と、前記第 1ベース 板又は第 2ベース板に設けられロック溝に係止する口ック片とから構成されるこ とを特徴とする。  Also, in the foldable keyboard according to the third invention, the lock mechanism includes: a lock groove formed in an arc surface of the first support member or the second support member; and the first base plate or the second base. And a hook piece provided on the plate and locked in the lock groove.
更に、第 3発明に係る折畳可能なキ一ボードは、前記第 1キーュニットの第 1支 持板は所定の回動支点で第 1ベース板にて回動可能に配置されるとともに、第 1支 持板の一側には回動支点を中心とする回転半径に合致する円弧面が形成され、前記 第 1支持部材には、前記第 1支持板の円弧面と同一の曲率半径を有する円弧面が形 成されており、 また、前記第 2キーュニットの第 2支持板は所定の回動支点で第 2 ベース板にて回動可能に配置されるとともに、第 2支持板の一側には回動支点を中 心とする回転半径に合致する円弧面が形成され、前記第 2支持部材には、前記第 2 支持板の円弧面と同一の曲率半径を有する円弧面が形成されていることを特徴と する。  Furthermore, in the foldable key board according to the third invention, the first support plate of the first key unit is rotatably arranged on the first base plate at a predetermined rotation fulcrum, and An arc surface is formed on one side of the support plate so as to conform to a radius of rotation about the pivot point, and the first support member has an arc having the same radius of curvature as the arc surface of the first support plate. A second support plate of the second key unit is rotatably disposed on a second base plate at a predetermined rotation fulcrum, and is provided on one side of the second support plate. An arc surface conforming to a rotation radius centered on the rotation fulcrum is formed, and the second support member has an arc surface having the same radius of curvature as the arc surface of the second support plate. It is characterized by
前記構成を有する第 3発明に係る折畳可能なキーボードでは、第 1キーボードュ ニヅトの第 1ベース板と第 2キーボードュニットの第 2ベース板とが、回動連結部 の支持軸を介して回動可能に支持されており、これによりキーボードの使用時に両 ユニットは、支持軸を介して相互に離間する方向に回動されて水平状態になり、 ま た、 キーボードの非使用時に両ュニットは、支持軸を介して相互に近接する方向に 回動されて重ね合わされた状態になる。 In the foldable keyboard according to the third aspect of the present invention, the first base plate of the first keyboard unit and the second base plate of the second keyboard unit are turned via the support shaft of the rotary connecting portion. Movably supported so that when using the keyboard The units are pivoted away from each other via the support shaft to be horizontal, and when the keyboard is not used, both units are pivoted toward each other via the support shaft. It will be in a superimposed state.
また、前記キーボードでは、第 1キーボードュニヅトの第 1キーュニヅトが第 1 ベース板上で回動可能に配設されるとともに、第 2キーボードュニットの第 2キー ユニットが第 2ベース板上で回動可能に配設されており、 また、第 1支持板の一側 に配設された第 1支持部材が、支持軸に摺動可能に揷嵌された摺動部材に第 1リン ク部材を介してリンクされ、且つ、第 2支持板の一側に配設された第 2支持部材が、 摺動部材に第 2リンク部材を介してリンクされているので、使用者がキーボードを 使用する際に、両キーュニットの一方を、第 1ベース板又は第 2ベース板上で水平 方向に回動させることにより、両キーュニッ卜の他方は、一方のキーュニッ卜と同 期して回動させることが可能となる。 このように、極めて簡単な操作により各キ一 ボードュニヅトを所望の操作状態に配置して、個々の使用者にとって最適な操作形 態でキ一ボ一ド操作を行うことができる。  In the keyboard, the first key unit of the first keyboard unit is rotatably disposed on the first base plate, and the second key unit of the second keyboard unit is mounted on the second base plate. And a first support member provided on one side of the first support plate is provided with a first link on a slide member slidably fitted on the support shaft. The user uses the keyboard because the second support member linked via the member and disposed on one side of the second support plate is linked to the sliding member via the second link member. At this time, by rotating one of the key units in the horizontal direction on the first base plate or the second base plate, the other of the two key units can be rotated synchronously with the one key unit. It becomes possible. In this manner, the keyboard units can be arranged in a desired operation state by a very simple operation, and the keyboard operation can be performed in an operation mode most suitable for each user.
また、 第 1ベース板と第 1キ一ユニットの間、 又は、 第 2ベース板と第 2キ一ュ ニットの間に、第 1キ一ュ二ット又は第 2キ一ュ二ヅトを所望の回動位置でロヅク するロック機構が配設されているので、第 1キ一ュ二ヅトと第 2キ一ュ二ットとを 相互に同期させて所望の回動位置まで回動させた後、その回動位置で第 1及び第 2 キ一ュ二ットをロック機構によりロックすることができ、個々の使用者にとって最 適な操作形態に固定した状態でキ一ボ一ド操作を安定して行うことができる。 更に、 ロック機構が、第 1支持部材又は第 2支持部材の円弧面に形成されたロッ ク溝と、第 1ベ一ス板又は第 2ベース板に設けられて口ック溝に係止するロック片 とから簡単に構成されているので、第 1及び第 2キーュニヅトのロック機構を低い コストで実現することができる。 また、 ロック溝は、 第 1支持部材又は第 2支持部 材の円弧面に形成されることから、円弧面の形成と同時にロック溝を形成すること が可能となり、 これによつてもコストの低廉化を図ることができる。  In addition, the first cut or the second cut is placed between the first base plate and the first key unit or between the second base plate and the second unit. Since the lock mechanism that locks at the desired rotation position is provided, the first cut and the second cut are synchronized with each other to rotate to the desired rotation position. After that, the first and second kits can be locked by the lock mechanism at the rotation position, and the keyboard is fixed in an optimal operation form for each user. Operation can be performed stably. Further, a lock mechanism is provided on the arc groove surface of the first support member or the second support member, and is provided on the first base plate or the second base plate, and is engaged with the lock groove. Since the lock mechanism is simply composed of the lock pieces, the lock mechanisms of the first and second key units can be realized at low cost. In addition, since the lock groove is formed on the arc surface of the first support member or the second support member, it is possible to form the lock groove simultaneously with the formation of the arc surface, which also reduces costs. Can be achieved.
また、第 1支持部材の円弧面と第 1キ一ュ二ットにおける支持板の円弧面とが同 —の曲率半径を有するとともに、第 2支持部材の円弧面と第 2キーュニットにおけ る支持板の円弧面とが同一の曲率半径を有するように構成したので、第 1キーュニ ットにおける第 1支持部材の円弧面と支持板の円弧面、及び、第 2キーュニッ卜に おける第 2支持部材の円弧面と支持板の円弧面が、相互に合致することとなり、 こ れにより双方の円弧面間でずれを発生することなく第 1キーュニット及び第 2キ —ュニットを見栄え良く構成することができる。 Further, the arc surface of the first support member and the arc surface of the support plate in the first cutout have the same radius of curvature, and the arc surface of the second support member and the support in the second key unit. Since the arc surface of the plate is configured to have the same radius of curvature, the first key The arc surface of the first support member and the arc surface of the support plate in the unit, and the arc surface of the second support member and the arc surface of the support plate in the second key unit coincide with each other. The first key unit and the second key unit can be configured to look good without causing a displacement between the two arc surfaces.
( 4 )前記目的を達成するため第 4発明に係る折畳可能なキ一ボードは、第 1キー ボードュニットと第 2キーボードュニヅ トとの間に回動連結部を設け、キーボード の使用時には回動連結部を介して両ュニットが離間する方向に回動されて水平状 態になるとともに、キーボードの非使用時には回動連結部を介して両ュニッ卜が近 接する方向に回動されて重ね合わせた状態になる折畳可能なキーボードにおいて、 前記第 1キーボードュニットは、第 1ベース板と、第 1ベース板上で水平方向に回 動可能に配設された第 1支持板に複数のキ一スィツチが配列された第 1キーュニ ヅトとを有し、 前記第 2キ一ボードュニヅトは、 第 2ベース板と、第 2ベース板上 で水平方向に回動可能に配設された第 2支持板に複数のキースィツチが配列され た第 2キーユニットとを有し、前記回動連結部は、前記第 1ベース板と第 2ベース 板とを回動可能に支持する支持軸を有し、前記第 1ベース板と第 1キーュニットと の間、 及び、 第 2ベース板と第 2キ一ュニットとの間に配設され、 第 1ベース板及 び第 2ベース板に対して、第 1キ一ュ二ット及び第 2キーュニットを相互に独立し て所望の回動位置で保持する保持機構を備えたことを特徴とする。  (4) In order to achieve the above object, the foldable key board according to the fourth invention is provided with a rotary connecting portion between the first keyboard unit and the second keyboard unit, and the rotary connecting portion is used when the keyboard is used. The two units are rotated in the direction in which they are separated from each other and become horizontal, and when the keyboard is not in use, both units are rotated in the direction in which they come close to each other via the rotary connection part and are superimposed. The first keyboard unit comprises a first base plate and a plurality of key switches mounted on a first support plate disposed on the first base plate so as to be rotatable in a horizontal direction. And a second key board unit, wherein the second keyboard unit is provided on a second base plate and a second support plate disposed on the second base plate so as to be rotatable in a horizontal direction. 2nd key with multiple key switches A rotating shaft, the rotating connecting portion having a support shaft rotatably supporting the first base plate and the second base plate, and a support shaft between the first base plate and the first key unit. And, disposed between the second base plate and the second unit, the first cut and the second key unit are independent of each other with respect to the first base plate and the second base plate. And a holding mechanism for holding at a desired rotation position.
また.、 第 4発明に係る折畳可能なキーボードは、前記保持機構は、前記第 1支持 板の一側に配設されるとともに所定の円弧面が形成され、その円弧面に複数の第 1 口ック溝が形成された第 1支持部材と、前記第 1ベース板に設けられ、前記第 1口 、ソク溝に係止する第 1ロック片と、前記第 2支持板の一側に配設されるとともに所 定の円弧面が形成され、その円弧面に複数の第 2ロック溝が形成された第 2支持部 材と、前記第 2ベース板に設けられ、前記第 2ロック溝に係止する第 2ロック片と を備えたことを特徴とする。  Also, in the foldable keyboard according to the fourth invention, the holding mechanism is provided on one side of the first support plate and has a predetermined circular surface, and the plurality of first circular surfaces are formed on the circular surface. A first support member provided with an opening groove, a first lock piece provided on the first base plate and locked in the first groove, and a lock member disposed on one side of the second support plate; And a second support member having a predetermined arc surface formed thereon and a plurality of second lock grooves formed in the arc surface, the second support member being provided on the second base plate, and engaging with the second lock groove. And a second lock piece for stopping.
更に、第 4発明に係る折畳可能なキーボードは、前記第 1支持部材には前記各第 1口ック溝に対応する位置に目盛りが設けられ、前記第 2支持部材には前記第 2口 ック溝に対応する位置に目盛りが設けられていることを特徴とする。  Further, in the foldable keyboard according to the fourth invention, the first support member is provided with a scale at a position corresponding to each of the first opening grooves, and the second support member is provided with the second opening. The scale is provided at a position corresponding to the lock groove.
また、第 4発明に係る折畳可能なキーボードは、前記第 1キ一ュニツトの第 1支 持板は所定の回動支点で第 1ベース板にて回動可能に配置されるとともに、第 1支 持板の一側には回動支点を中心とする回転半径に合致する円弧面が形成され、前記 第 1支持部材の円弧面は、前記第 1支持板の円弧面と同一の曲率半径を有し、また、 前記第 2キ一ュ二ットの第 2支持板は所定の回動支点で第 2ベース板にて回動可 能に配置されるとともに、第 2支持板の一側には回動支点を中心とする回転半径に 合致する円弧面が形成され、前記第 2支持部材の円弧面は、前記第 2支持板の円弧 面と同一の曲率半径を有することを特徴とする。 In addition, the foldable keyboard according to the fourth invention is characterized in that the first support of the first kite is provided. The holding plate is rotatably arranged on the first base plate at a predetermined rotation fulcrum, and an arcuate surface is formed on one side of the first support plate that matches the radius of rotation about the rotation fulcrum. The arc surface of the first support member has the same radius of curvature as the arc surface of the first support plate, and the second support plate of the second kit has a predetermined rotation. The second support member is rotatably disposed on the second base plate at a fulcrum, and an arcuate surface is formed on one side of the second support plate so as to match a radius of rotation about the rotation fulcrum. The arc surface has the same radius of curvature as the arc surface of the second support plate.
更に、 第 4発明に係る折畳可能なキーボードは、 前記保持機構は、 前記第 1支持 板の一側に配設されるとともに所定の円弧面が形成された第 1支持部材と、前記第 1ベース板に設けられ、前記第 1支持板の円弧面に当接する第 1制動部材と、前記 第 2支持板の一側に配設されるとともに所定の円弧面が形成された第 2支持部材 と、前記第 2ベース板に設けられ、前記第 2支持板の円弧面に当接する第 2制動部 材とを備えたことを特徴とする。  Further, in the foldable keyboard according to a fourth aspect of the present invention, the foldable keyboard includes: a first support member provided on one side of the first support plate and having a predetermined arc surface formed thereon; A first braking member provided on the base plate and in contact with an arc surface of the first support plate; and a second support member provided on one side of the second support plate and having a predetermined arc surface formed thereon. A second braking member provided on the second base plate and in contact with an arc surface of the second support plate.
また、第 4発明に係る折畳可能なキーボードは、第 1キーボードュニットと第 2 キーボードュニットとの間に回動連結部を設け、キ一ボードの使用時には回動連結 部を介して両ュニットが離間する方向に回動されて水平状態になるとともに、キ一 ボードの非使用時には回動連結部を介して両ュニットが近接する方向に回動され て重ね合わせた状態になる折畳可能なキーボードにおいて、前記回動連結部は、前 記第 1ベース板と第 2ペース板とを回動可能に支持する支持軸を有し、前記第 1キ —ボードュニヅトは、第 1ベース板と、第 1ペース板上で水平方向に回動可能に配 設された第 1支持板に複数のキ一スィツチが配列された第 1キ一ュニットとを有 し、 前記第 2キーボードュニットは、 第 2ベース板と、 第 2ベース板上で水平方向 に回動可能に配設された第 2支持板に複数のキ一スィツチが配列された第 2キー ユニットとを有し、前記第 1支持板は第 1ベース板上に配設された第 1回動軸を介 して水平方向に回動されるとともに、前記第 2支持板は第 2ベース板上に配設され た第 2回動軸を介して水平方向に回動されることを特徴とする。  Further, in the foldable keyboard according to the fourth aspect of the present invention, the pivotable connecting portion is provided between the first keyboard unit and the second keyboard unit, and the keyboard is used via the pivotal connecting portion when the keyboard is used. When the keyboard is not in use, both units are rotated in the direction of approach through the rotation connection part to be in a superimposed state, while the units are pivoted away from each other. In a preferred keyboard, the rotation connecting portion has a support shaft rotatably supporting the first base plate and the second pace plate, and the first key board unit includes a first base plate, A first support plate disposed on the first pace plate so as to be rotatable in a horizontal direction, and a first unit in which a plurality of keys are arranged; and the second keyboard unit includes: (2) Base and horizontal rotation on the second base A second key unit in which a plurality of key switches are arranged on a second support plate disposed on the first support plate, wherein the first support plate is provided with a first rotating shaft disposed on a first base plate. And the second support plate is horizontally rotated via a second rotation shaft provided on the second base plate.
前記構成を有する第 4発明に係る折畳可能なキーボードでは、第 1キーボードュ ニットの第 1ベース板と第 2キーボードュニヅトの第 2ベース板とが、回動連結部 の支持軸を介して回動可能に支持されており、これによりキーボードの使用時に両 ユニットは、支持軸を介して相互に離間する方向に回動されて水平状態になり、 ま た、 キーボードの非使用時に両ュニットは、支持軸を介して相互に近接する方向に 回動されて重ね合わされた状態になる。 In the foldable keyboard according to the fourth aspect of the present invention, the first base plate of the first keyboard unit and the second base plate of the second keyboard unit are connected via the support shaft of the rotary connecting portion. Pivotally supported so that when using the keyboard, The units are pivoted away from each other via the support shaft to be horizontal, and when the keyboard is not used, both units are pivoted toward each other via the support shaft. It will be in a superimposed state.
また、前記キーボードでは、第 1キーボードュニットの第 1キーュニットが第 1 ペース板上で回動可能に配設されるとともに、第 2キーボードュニットの第 2キー ユニットが第 2ベース板上で回動可能に配設されており、 また、第 1ベース板と第 1キーュニヅトとの間及び第 2ベ一ス板と第 2キーュニヅトの間に、第 1ベース板 及び第 2ベ一ス板に対して、第 1キーュニヅト及び第 2キーュニットを相互に独立 して所望の回動位置で保持する保持機構を設けたので、使用者がキ一ボ一ドを使用 する際に、第 1キーュニヅトを第 1ベース板上で水平方向に回動させ、 その回動位 置で保持機構により第 1キーュニヅトを保持することができ、 また、第 2キーュニ ットを第 2ペース板上で水平方向に回動させ、その回動位置で保持機構により第 2 キーュニヅトを保持することができる。このように、保持機構を介して第 1キ一ュ ニヅト及び第 2キ一ュニットを所望の回動位置で相互に独立して保持することが でき、極めて簡単な操作により各キーボードュニットを独立して所望の操作状態に 配置することにより、個々の使用者にとって最適な操作形態に固定した状態でキー ボード操作を安定して行うことができる。  In the keyboard, the first key unit of the first keyboard unit is rotatably disposed on the first pace plate, and the second key unit of the second keyboard unit is rotated on the second base plate. The first base plate and the second base plate are located between the first base plate and the first key unit and between the second base plate and the second key unit. Therefore, a holding mechanism for holding the first key unit and the second key unit at desired rotation positions independently of each other is provided, so that when the user uses the keyboard, the first key unit is moved to the first key unit. The first key unit can be held by the holding mechanism at the rotation position by rotating the key unit in the horizontal direction on the base plate, and the second key unit can be turned in the horizontal direction on the second pace plate by the holding mechanism. At its pivot position, the second key It is possible to hold the door. In this manner, the first unit and the second unit can be held independently of each other at the desired rotation position via the holding mechanism, and each keyboard unit can be independently held by an extremely simple operation. By arranging them in a desired operation state, the keyboard operation can be stably performed in a state where the operation mode is optimal for each user.
また、第 1キーユニットを所望の回動位置でロックするについて、第 1ベース板 に設けられた第 1ロック片を第 1支持板に配設された第 1支持部材の第 1ロック 溝に係止することによりロックし、 また、第 2キーユニットを所望の回動位置で口 ックするについて、第 2ベース板に設けられた第 2ロック片を第 2支持部材の第 2 口ック溝に係止することによりロックしており、いずれについてもロック溝とロッ ク片とから簡単に構成されているので、第 1及び第 2キーュニヅトのロック機構を 低いコストで実現することができる。 また、第 1ロック溝は第 1支持部材の円弧面 に形成され、 また、 第 2ロック溝は第 2支持部材の円弧面に形成されることから、 第 1支持部材及び第 2支持部材の円弧面の形成と同時に口ック溝を形成すること が可能となり、 これによつてもコス卜の低廉化を図ることができる。  Further, with regard to locking the first key unit at a desired rotation position, the first lock piece provided on the first base plate is engaged with the first lock groove of the first support member provided on the first support plate. When the second key unit is locked at a desired rotation position, the second lock piece provided on the second base plate is locked with the second locking groove of the second support member. Since the locking mechanism is locked by locking the first and second key units, the locking mechanism of the first and second key units can be realized at low cost. Further, since the first lock groove is formed on the arc surface of the first support member, and the second lock groove is formed on the arc surface of the second support member, the arc of the first support member and the second support member is formed. The opening groove can be formed at the same time as the formation of the surface, so that the cost can be reduced.
更に、第 1支持部材には各第 1口ック溝に対応する位置に目盛りが設けられると ともに、第 2支持部材には各第 2ロック溝に対応する位置に目盛りが設けられてい PC画細 28 Further, the first support member is provided with a scale at a position corresponding to each first lock groove, and the second support member is provided with a scale at a position corresponding to each second lock groove. PC picture 28
14  14
るので、第 1キーュニヅト及び第 2キーュニットを回動させる際に、 目盛りを見な がら各キ一ュニットを回動させることにより各キ一ュニッ卜の回動角度を簡単且 つ容易に調整することができる。 Therefore, when rotating the first key unit and the second key unit, it is possible to easily and easily adjust the rotation angle of each unit by rotating each unit while checking the scale. Can be.
また、第 1支持部材の円弧面と第 1キ一ュニットにおける第 1支持板の円弧面と が同一の曲率半径を有するとともに、第 2支持部材の円弧面と第 2キーュニットに おける第 2支持板の円弧面とが同一の曲率半径を有するように構成したので、第 1 キーュニットにおける第 1支持部材の円弧面と第 1支持板の円弧面、及び、第 2キ —ュニットにおける第 2支持部材の円弧面と第 2支持板の円弧面が、相互に合致す ることとなり、これにより双方の円弧面間でずれを発生することなく第 1キ一ュ二 ット及び第 2キーュニットを見栄え良く構成することができる。  In addition, the arc surface of the first support member and the arc surface of the first support plate in the first unit have the same radius of curvature, and the arc surface of the second support member and the second support plate in the second key unit. And the arc surface of the first support member in the first unit, the arc surface of the first support plate, and the second support member in the second unit. The arc surface and the arc surface of the second support plate coincide with each other, so that the first cut unit and the second key unit can be configured to have a good appearance without any deviation between the two arc surfaces. can do.
更に、第 1キーュニットを所望の回動位置で保持するについて、第 1ベース板に 設けられた第 1制動部材を第 1支持部材の円弧面に当接することにより保持し、ま た、第 2キーュニヅトを所望の回動位置で保持するについて、第 2ベース板に設け られた第 2制動部材を第 2支持板の円弧面に当接することにより保持しており、第 1制動部材と第 1支持部材における円弧面との当接位置及び第 2制動部材と第 2 支持部材における円弧面との当接位置は、 それそれ無段階で移動可能となる。従つ て、第 1キーュニット及び第 2キーュニットを所望の回動位置で相互に独立して保 持するに際して、 回動位置の選択を自在に行うことができ、個々の使用者にとって 更に最適な操作形態に固定した状態でキーボード操作を安定して行うことができ る。 また、 第 1及び第 2キーュニヅトにおける保持機構は、 いずれについても制動 部材と支持部材の円弧面とから簡単に構成されているので、第 1及び第 2キ一ュ二 ヅ卜の保持機構を低いコス卜で実現することができる。  Further, with respect to holding the first key unit at a desired rotation position, the first braking member provided on the first base plate is held by abutting against an arc surface of the first support member, and the second key unit is held. Is held at a desired rotational position by holding a second braking member provided on the second base plate in contact with an arc surface of the second support plate, and the first braking member and the first support member are held. The contact position between the second braking member and the second support member and the second support member can be moved steplessly. Therefore, when the first key unit and the second key unit are held independently of each other at a desired rotation position, the rotation position can be freely selected, and a more optimal operation for each user can be performed. The keyboard operation can be performed stably in a state where the keyboard is fixed in the form. In addition, since the holding mechanism in the first and second key units is simply constituted by the braking member and the arc surface of the supporting member, the holding mechanism of the first and second key units is low. It can be realized at cost.
また、第 1支持板は第 1ベース板上に配設された第 1回動軸を介して水平方向に 回動されるとともに、前記第 2支持板は第 2ベース板上に配設された第 2回動軸を 介して水平方向に回動されるように構成されているので、第 1回動軸は第 1キーュ ニッ卜の内部に配設され、且つ、第 2回動軸は第 2キ一ュニヅトの内部に配設され ることとなり、第 1回動軸や第 2回動軸が各キーュニッ卜の外部に設けられる場合 に比して、第 1回動軸や第 2回動軸に異物が衝突したり入ったりすることを確実に 防止することができる。 これにより、 第 1ベース板及び第 2ベース板上で、 それそ T JP03/07028 In addition, the first support plate is horizontally rotated via a first rotation shaft provided on the first base plate, and the second support plate is provided on the second base plate. Since the first rotary shaft is configured to be horizontally rotated via the second rotary shaft, the first rotary shaft is disposed inside the first key unit, and the second rotary shaft is connected to the second rotary shaft. (2) The first pivot and the second pivot are disposed inside the key unit, as compared with the case where the first and second pivots are provided outside each key unit. It is possible to reliably prevent foreign matter from colliding or entering the shaft. As a result, on the first base plate and the second base plate, T JP03 / 07028
15  Fifteen
れ第 1キーュニット及び第 2キ一ュニットを安定して回動支持することができる。 また、第 1及び第 2回動軸を各キーュニヅトの内部に配設して各キ一ュニヅトの外 部に出ないように構成することにより、各キーボードュニットの小型化を図ること ができる。 図面の簡単な説明 Thus, the first key unit and the second key unit can be stably rotated and supported. In addition, by disposing the first and second rotating shafts inside each key unit so as not to protrude outside each key unit, the size of each keyboard unit can be reduced. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES
第 1図乃至第 1 3図は、第 1実施形態に係る折畳可能なキーボードを説明するた めの図であり、第 1図は第 1実施形態に係る折畳可能なキーボードを模式的に示す 分解斜視図、第 2図は第 1支持板と第 2支持板の回動動作を同期させる同期機構を 拡大して示す説明図、第 3図は 第 1支持板及び第 2支持板を回動させていない状 態から最大回動位置まで回動させた状態に至る一連の状態を示す説明図であり、第 3図 （A) は回動させていない状態、 第 3図（B ) は途中まで回動させた状態、 第 3図 （C )は最大回動位置まで回動させた状態を示し、 第 4図はキーボードを使用 する際の操作を示す説明図であり、 第 4図（A) は第 1及び第 2キーボードュニッ トを折り畳んだ状態を示す斜視図、 第 4図（B )は第 1及び第 2キーボードュニッ トを開放した状態を示す斜視図、 第 4図 （C ) は第 4図（B ) の状態から背もたれ 部材を起こした状態を示す斜視図、第 5図はコントロール部とキーボードとの関係 を示す説明図であり、 第 5図 （A) はコントロール部を第 1キーボードユニットか ら取り外した状態を示す説明図であり、 第 5図（B ) はコントロール部と自在ァー ムとが接続される状態を示す説明図、第 6図は自在アームの各種の使用状態を示す 説明図、 第 7図は第 4図（A) に示す折畳状態で第 1及び第 2キーボードュニヅト の長手方向に直交する方向（短手方向） に切断して示す拡大断面図、 第 8図は第 2 キーボードュニッ卜の各キースィツチに接続された信号線の配線状態を模式的に 示す説明図、第 9図はコントロール部のコネクタ部材に P D Aの接続端子を接続す るとともに、背もたれ部材により P D Aを傾斜した状態で支持し、第 6図における 形態（B )の状態で使用する状態を示す説明図、 第 1 0図はコントロール部のコネ クタ部材に P D Aの接続端子を接続するとともに、背もたれ部材により P D Aを傾 斜した状態で支持し、 第 6図における形態（C )の状態で使用する状態を示す説明 図、 第 1 1図は第 4図 （B ) に示す状態、 及び、 第 6図における形態 （C ) の状態 をキーボードの背面側から見て模式的に示す説明図、第 1 2図は第 1ギア部材のギ ァ歯部と第 2ギア部材のギア歯部とを拡大して示す説明図であり、 第 1 2図 （A) は説明の便宜のためギア歯部とギア歯部とを離間させて示す説明図、第 1 2図（ B ) はギア歯部とギア歯部とが嚙合している状態を示す説明図、 第 1 2図（C)は第 1 キーボードュニットと第 2キーボードユニットとを相互に折り畳んだ状態におけ るギア歯部とギア歯部との嚙合状態を示す説明図、第 1 3図は水平にされて使用状 態にある第 1キーボードュニヅトと第 2キ一ボ一ドュニットを徐々に折り畳んで いく一連の状態を示し、 第 1 3図（A)は各キ一ボードュニヅ卜が水平状態にある 時の各ギア歯の嗨合関係を模式的に示す説明図、 第 1 3図（B ) は第 2キーボード ュニットを若干回動させて折り畳み始めた状態にある時の各ギア歯の嚙合関係を 模式的に示す説明図、 第 1 3図 （C) は第 1 3図 （B ) の状態から更に第 2キーボ ―ドュニットを回動させて折畳が完了する直前の各ギア歯の嚙合関係を模式的に 示す説明図、第 1 3図（D) は各キーボードュニットの折畳が完了した状態を模式 的に示す各ギア歯の嚙合関係を模式的に示す説明図である。 FIGS. 1 to 13 are views for explaining a foldable keyboard according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 1 schematically shows the foldable keyboard according to the first embodiment. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view, Fig. 2 is an enlarged explanatory view showing a synchronizing mechanism for synchronizing the rotation of the first support plate and the second support plate, and Fig. 3 is a diagram showing the rotation of the first support plate and the second support plate. FIGS. 3A and 3B are explanatory diagrams showing a series of states from a state in which they are not moved to a state in which they are rotated to a maximum rotation position. FIG. 3A is a state in which they are not rotated, and FIG. FIG. 3 (C) shows a state in which the keyboard has been rotated halfway, FIG. 3 (C) shows a state in which the keyboard has been rotated to the maximum rotation position, and FIG. 4 is an explanatory view showing operations when using the keyboard. A) is a perspective view showing the first and second keyboard units folded, and FIG. 4 (B) is a state in which the first and second keyboard units are opened. FIG. 4 (C) is a perspective view showing a state in which the backrest member is raised from the state shown in FIG. 4 (B), and FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the control unit and the keyboard. FIG. 5 (A) is an explanatory view showing a state where the control unit is removed from the first keyboard unit, FIG. 5 (B) is an explanatory view showing a state where the control unit and the universal arm are connected, FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing various use states of the universal arm, and FIG. 7 is a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the first and second keyboard units in the folded state shown in FIG. 4 (A). FIG. 8 is an explanatory view schematically showing the wiring state of signal lines connected to the respective key switches of the second keyboard unit, and FIG. 9 is a control section. Connect the connection terminal of the PDA to the connector member, and use the back member FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the PDA is supported in an inclined state and used in the state of the form (B) in FIG. 6. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the PDA is supported in an inclined state by members and used in the state of the form (C) in FIG. 6, and FIG. 11 is a state shown in FIG. 4 (B); State of form (C) in the figure FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the gear tooth portion of the first gear member and the gear tooth portion of the second gear member, as viewed from the back side of the keyboard. Fig. 12 (A) is an explanatory view showing the gear teeth and the gear teeth separated from each other for convenience of explanation, and Fig. 12 (B) is a state where the gear teeth and the gear teeth are combined. FIG. 12 (C) is an explanatory view showing a combined state of the gear teeth and the gear teeth when the first keyboard unit and the second keyboard unit are mutually folded. FIG. 13 shows a series of states in which the first keyboard unit and the second keyboard unit that are leveled and in use are gradually folded, and FIG. 13 (A) shows each key unit. FIG. 13B is an explanatory view schematically showing the relationship between the gear teeth when one board unit is in a horizontal state. FIG. 13 (B) shows the second keyboard unit slightly rotated. Fig. 13 (C) is an explanatory view schematically showing the relationship between the gear teeth when they are in a state of being started to be folded, and Fig. 13 (C) further rotates the second keyboard-dunit from the state of Fig. 13 (B). Fig. 13 (D) is an explanatory view schematically showing the relationship between the gear teeth immediately before folding is completed by moving the gear unit, and Fig. 13 (D) is a diagram schematically showing each gear when the folding of each keyboard unit is completed. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a tooth engagement relationship.
また、第 1 4図乃至第 2 4図は、第 2実施形態に係る折畳可能なキーボードを説 明するための図であり、第 1 4図は第 2実施形態に係る折畳可能なキーボードを模 式的に示す分角军斜視図、第 1 5図は第 1支持板と第 2支持板の回動動作を同期させ る同期機構を拡大して示す説明図、第 1 6図は第 1支持板及び第 2支持扳を回動さ せていない状態から最大回動位置まで回動させた状態に至る一連の状態を示す説 明図であり、 第 1 6図 （A) は回動させていない状態、 第 1 6図 （B ) は途中まで 回動させた状態、 第 1 6図（C ) は最大回動位置まで回動させた状態を示し、 第 1 7図はキーボードを使用する際の操作を示す説明図であり、 第 1 7図（A)は第 1 及び第 2キーボードュニヅトを折り畳んだ状態を示す斜視図、 図第 1 7図（B ) は 第 1及び第 2キ一ボードユニットを開放した状態を示す斜視図、 第 1 7図（C) は 第 1 7図（B )の状態から背もたれ部材を起こした状態を示す斜視図、第 1 8図は コントロール部とキーボードとの関係を示す説明図であり、 第 1 8図（A) はコン ト口一ル部を第 1キ一ボ一ドュニットから取り外した状態を示す説明図であり、図 1 8 ( B ) はコントロール部と自在アームとが接続される状態を示す説明図、 第 1 9図は自在アームの各種の使用状態を示す説明図、 第 2 0図は第 1 7図（A) に示 す折畳状態で第 1及び第 2キーボ一ドュニットの長手方向に直交する方向（短手方 向）に切断して示す拡大断面図、第 2 1図は第 2キーボードュニヅトの各キースィ ツチに接続された信号線の配線状態を模式的に示す説明図、第 2 2図はコントロー ル部のコネクタ部材に： P D Aの接続端子を接続するとともに、背もたれ部材により P D Aを傾斜した状態で支持し、 第 1 9図における形態（B )の状態で使用する状 態を示す説明図、第 2 3図はコントロール部のコネクタ部材に P D Aの接続端子を 接続するとともに、背もたれ部材により P D Aを傾斜した状態で支持し、第 1 9図 における形態（C )の状態で使用する状態を示す説明図、第 2 4図は第 1 7図（B ) に示す状態、 及び、 第 1 9図における形態 ( C ) の状態をキーボードの背面側から 見て模式的に示す説明図である。 FIGS. 14 to 24 are views for explaining a foldable keyboard according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 14 is a foldable keyboard according to the second embodiment. FIG. 15 is an enlarged explanatory view schematically showing a synchronizing mechanism for synchronizing the rotating operation of the first support plate and the second support plate, and FIG. Fig. 16 is an explanatory view showing a series of states from a state where the support plate and the second support 扳 are not rotated to a state where the support plate and the second support 回 動 are rotated to the maximum rotation position. Not rotated, Fig. 16 (B) shows a half-turned position, Fig. 16 (C) shows a full-turn position, Fig. 17 shows a keyboard FIG. 17 (A) is a perspective view showing a state where the first and second keyboard units are folded, and FIG. 17 (B) is a view showing the first and second keyboard units. 2nd key board FIG. 17 (C) is a perspective view showing a state where the backrest member is raised from the state shown in FIG. 17 (B), and FIG. 18 is a perspective view showing a state where the control unit and the keyboard are opened. FIG. 18 (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the control unit is removed from the first keyboard unit, and FIG. 18 (B) is a control unit. FIG. 19 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the universal arm is connected to the universal arm, FIG. 19 is an explanatory view showing various usage states of the universal arm, and FIG. 20 is an illustration shown in FIG. FIG. 21 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the first and second keyboard units cut in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction (short side direction) in a folded state, and FIG. 21 is each key suite of the second keyboard unit. Explanatory diagram schematically showing the wiring condition of the signal line connected to the switch, Fig. 22 shows the connector member of the control part: Connect the connection terminal of the PDA and support the PDA with the backrest member inclined. FIG. 19 is an explanatory view showing a state of use in the state of the form (B) in FIG. 19, and FIG. 23 is a diagram in which a PDA connection terminal is connected to a connector member of a control unit, and the PDA is inclined by a backrest member FIG. 19 is an explanatory view showing a state of use in the state of the form (C) in FIG. 19, and FIG. 24 is a state shown in FIG. 17 (B), and FIG. Explanatory diagram schematically showing the state of C) when viewed from the back side of the keyboard A.
更に、第 2 5図乃至第 3 5図は、第 3実施形態に係る折畳可能なキーボードを説 明するための図であり、第 2 5図は第 3実施形態に係る折畳可能なキ一ボードを模 式的に示す分解斜視図、第 2 6図は第 1支持板と第 2支持板の回動動作を同期させ る同期機構を拡大して示す説明図、第 2 7図は第 1支持板及び第 2支持板を回動さ せていない状態から最大回動位置まで回動させた状態に至る一連の状態を示す説 明図であり、 第 2 7図 （A) は回動させていない状態、 第 2 7図 （B) は途中まで 回動させた状態、 第 2 7図（C ) は最大回動位置まで回動させた状態を示し、 第 2 8図は キーボードを使用する際の操作を示す説明図であり、 第 2 8図（A) は第 1及び第 2キーボードュニットを折り畳んだ状態を示す斜視図、 第 2 8図 （B) は 第 1及び第 2キーボードユニットを開放した状態を示す斜視図、 第 2 8図（C ) は 第 2 8図（B )の状態から背もたれ部材を起こした状態を示す斜視図、 第 2 9図は コントロール部とキーボードとの関係を示す説明図であり、 第 2 9図（A) はコン トロール部を第 1キーボードユニットから取り外した状態を示す説明図であり、第 2 9図 （B ) はコントロール部と自在アームとが接続される状態を示す説明図、 第 3 0図は自在アームの各種の使用状態を示す説明図、 第 3 1図は第 2 8図（A) に 示す折畳状態で第 1及び第 2キ一ボ一ドュニットの長手方向に直交する方向（短手 方向）に切断して示す拡大断面図、第 3 2図は第 2キーボードュニットの各キース ィツチに接続された信号線の配線状態を模式的に示す説明図、第 3 3図はコントロ ール部のコネクタ部材に P D Aの接続端子を接続するとともに、背もたれ部材によ り P D Aを傾斜した状態で支持し、 第 3 0図における形態（B )の状態で使用する 状態を示す説明図、第 3 4図はコント口ール部のコネクタ部材に P D Aの接続端子 を接続するとともに、背もたれ部材により P D Aを傾斜した状態で支持し、第 3 0 図における形態（C)の状態で使用する状態を示す説明図、第 3 5図は第 2 8図（B ) に示す状態、 及び、 第 3 0図における形態（C) の状態をキーボードの背面側から 見て模式的に示す説明図である。 . また、第 3 6図乃至第 4 6図は、第 4実施形態に係る折畳可能なキーボードを説 明するための図であり、第 3 6図は第 4実施形態に係る折畳可能なキーボードを模 式的に示す分解斜視図、第 3 7図は第 1支持板と第 2支持板の回動動作を独立して 行った後、その回動位置で第 1支持板及び第 2支持板をロックするロック機構を拡 大して示す説明図、第 3 8図第 1キーュニット及び第 2キ一ュニットを回動させて いない状態から所望の回動位置まで回動させた状態を示し、 図 3 8図（A)は第 1 キ一ユニット及び第 2キーユニットを回動させていない状態、 第 3 8図（B) は第 1キ一ュニットを時計方向に、第 2キーュニットを反時計方向に回動させた状態を 示す説明図、第 3 9図は第 1キーュニット及び第 2キ一ユニットを所望の回動位置 まで回動させた状態を示し、 第 3 9図 （A) は第 3 8図 （A)の状態から第 1キー ユニット 3 7のみを時計方向に回動させた状態、 第 3 9図 （B ) は第 3— 9図 （A) の状態から第 2キーュニット 4を時計方向に回動させた状態を示す説明図、第 4 0 図はキーボードを使用する際の操作を示す説明図であり、 第 4 0図（A) は第 1及 び第 2キ一ボ一ドュニットを折り畳んだ状態を示す斜視図、 第 4 0図（ B ) は第 1 及び第 2キーボードユニットを開放した状態を示す斜視図、 第 4 0図（C) は第 4 0図（B) の状態から背もたれ部材を起こした状態を示す斜視図、 第 4 1図はコン トロール部とキ一ボードとの関係を示す説明図であり、 第 4 1図（A)はコント口 一ル部を第 1キ一ボードュニッ卜から取り外した状態を示す説明図であり、第 4 1 図 （B) はコントロール部と自在アームとが接続される状態を示す説明図、 第 4 2 図は自在アームの使用状態を示す説明図、 第 4 3図は第 4 0図（A) に示す折畳状 態で第 1及び第 2キーボードュニッ卜の長手方向に直交する方向（短手方向）に切 断して示す拡大断面図、第 4 4図はコントロール部のコネクタ部材に P D Aの接続 端子を接続するとともに、背もたれ部材により P D Aを傾斜した状態で支持して使 用する状態を示す説明図、第 4 5図は第 4 0図 （B ) に示す状態をキーボード 1の 背面側から見て模式的に示す説明図、第 4 6図は第 1キ一ュニット及び第 2キーュ ニットの回動位置を保持する保持機構を拡大して示す説明図である。 発明を実施するための最良の形態 Further, FIGS. 25 to 35 are views for explaining the foldable keyboard according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 25 is a foldable key according to the third embodiment. FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view schematically showing one board, FIG. 26 is an enlarged explanatory view showing a synchronization mechanism for synchronizing the rotation of the first support plate and the second support plate, and FIG. Fig. 27 is an explanatory view showing a series of states from a state where the support plate and the second support plate are not rotated to a state where the support plate and the second support plate are rotated to the maximum rotation position. Not rotated, Fig. 27 (B) shows a partially rotated state, Fig. 27 (C) shows a fully rotated position, and Fig. 28 uses a keyboard. FIG. 28 (A) is a perspective view showing a state where the first and second keyboard units are folded, and FIG. 28 (B) is a first and second keyboard units. Uni FIG. 28 (C) is a perspective view showing a state where the backrest member is raised from the state of FIG. 28 (B), and FIG. 29 is a perspective view showing a state where the backrest member is raised. FIG. 29 (A) is an explanatory view showing a state where the control section is removed from the first keyboard unit, and FIG. 29 (B) is an explanatory view showing the control section and the free arm. FIG. 30 is an explanatory view showing various states of use of the free arm. FIG. 31 is a folded state shown in FIG. 28 (A). An enlarged cross-sectional view of the keyboard unit cut in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction (transverse direction). FIG. 32 shows the wiring state of the signal lines connected to each key switch of the second keyboard unit. Fig. 33 schematically shows the PDA connection terminal connected to the connector member of the control section. With the backrest member Fig. 30 is an illustration showing the PDA supported in an inclined state and used in the configuration (B) shown in Fig. 30. Fig. 34 shows the connection of the PDA connection terminal to the connector member of the control unit. FIG. 30 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the PDA is supported in an inclined state by the backrest member and used in the state of the form (C) in FIG. 30. FIG. 35 is a state shown in FIG. 28 (B). 30 is an explanatory view schematically showing the state of the form (C) in FIG. 30 as viewed from the back side of the keyboard. FIG. FIGS. 36 to 46 are views for explaining the foldable keyboard according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating the foldable keyboard according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view schematically showing the keyboard. FIG. 37 shows the first support plate and the second support plate at the rotation position after the first support plate and the second support plate are independently rotated. FIG. 38 is an enlarged explanatory view showing a lock mechanism for locking the plate, and FIG. 38 shows a state in which the first key unit and the second unit are turned from a state where they are not turned to a desired turning position. Fig. 8 (A) shows the first key unit and the second key unit not rotated, and Fig. 38 (B) shows the first key unit clockwise and the second key unit counterclockwise. Explanatory drawing showing the rotated state. Fig. 39 shows the state where the first key unit and the second key unit are rotated to the desired rotation position. Fig. 39 (A) shows a state in which only the first key unit 37 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in Fig. 38 (A), and Fig. 39 (B) shows a state shown in Fig. 3-9. FIG. 40 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the second key unit 4 is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 40A, and FIG. 40 is an explanatory view showing an operation when using the keyboard. Is a perspective view showing a state where the first and second keyboard units are folded, FIG. 40 (B) is a perspective view showing a state where the first and second keyboard units are opened, and FIG. C) is a perspective view showing a state where the backrest member is raised from the state shown in FIG. 40 (B), and FIG. 41 is an explanatory view showing a relationship between the control section and the keyboard. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the control unit is removed from the first key unit, and FIG. 41 (B) is a diagram in which the control unit and the free arm are connected. FIG. 42 is an explanatory view showing the use state of the free arm. FIG. 43 is a first and second keyboard units in the folded state shown in FIG. 40 (A). Fig. 44 is an enlarged cross-sectional view cut in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction (transverse direction). Use FIG. 45 is an explanatory view schematically showing the state shown in FIG. 40 (B) when viewed from the back side of the keyboard 1, and FIG. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing, in an enlarged manner, a holding mechanism for holding a rotating position of a second key unit. BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION
( 1 ) 第 1実施形態  (1) First embodiment
以下、本発明に係る折畳可能なキーボ一ドについて本発明を具体化した第 1実施 形態に基づき図面を参照しつつ詳細に説明する。先ず、本第 1実施形態に係るキー ボードの概略構成について第 1図に基づき説明する。第 1図は折畳可能なキ一ボ一 ドを模式的に示す分解斜視図である。  Hereinafter, a foldable keyboard according to the present invention will be described in detail based on a first embodiment of the present invention with reference to the drawings. First, a schematic configuration of the keyboard according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view schematically showing a foldable keyboard.
第 1図において、 キーボード 1は、基本的に、 回動連結部 2を介して相互に回動 可能に連結された第 1キーボ一ドュニット 3及び第 2キ一ボ一ドュニット 4から 構成されている。第 1キーボードュニット 3は、 第 1ベース板 5、 第 1ベース板 5 上で水平方向に回動可能に支持された第 1支持板 6、及び、第 1支持板 6上に配設 された複数個のキ一スイッチ 7から構成されている。また、第 2キ一ボードュニッ ト 4は、第 2ベース板 8、第 2ベース板 8上で水平方向に回動可能に支持された第 2支持板 9、及び、第 2支持板 9上に配設された複数個のキースイッチ 1 0から構 成されている。  In FIG. 1, a keyboard 1 is basically composed of a first keyboard unit 3 and a second keyboard unit 4 which are rotatably connected to each other via a rotation connection unit 2. . The first keyboard unit 3 is disposed on the first base plate 5, the first support plate 6 rotatably supported on the first base plate 5 in a horizontal direction, and the first support plate 6. It is composed of a plurality of key switches 7. The second key unit 4 is provided on a second base plate 8, a second support plate 9 rotatably supported on the second base plate 8, and a second support plate 9. It consists of a plurality of key switches 10 provided.
ここで、 先ず、 回動連結部 2の構成について説明する。第 1ベース板 5はアルミ 等の金属製薄板から形成されており、第 1ベース板 5の側端部 1 1 (第 1図におけ る右側端部） における 2つの隅部 1 2には、それそれ回動連結部 2の一部を構成す る樹脂製の軸受部材 1 3、 1 4が設けられている。軸受部材 1 3には、 軸受孔 1 3 Aが形成された 2つの軸受 1 3 Bが離間して設けられている。 また、軸受部材 1 4 においても同様に、軸受孔 1 4 Aが形成された 2つの軸受 1 4 Bが離間して設けら れている。  Here, first, the configuration of the rotation connecting portion 2 will be described. The first base plate 5 is formed of a thin metal plate such as aluminum, and has two corners 12 at the side end 11 (the right end in FIG. 1) of the first base plate 5. Resin bearing members 13, 14, which constitute a part of the rotation connecting portion 2, are provided. The bearing member 13 is provided with two bearings 13B having a bearing hole 13A formed apart from each other. Similarly, in the bearing member 14, two bearings 14 B each having a bearing hole 14 A are provided separately.
第 2ベース板 8は、第 1ベース板 5と同様、 アルミ等の金属薄板から形成されて おり、 第 2ベース板 8の側端部 1 5 (第 1図における左側端部） における 2つの隅 部 1 6には、 それぞれ回動連結部 2の一部を構成する樹脂製の軸受部材 1 7、 1 8 が設けられている。軸受部材 1 7には、軸受孔 1 7 Aが形成された 1つの軸受 1 7 Bが設けられている。 また、 軸受部材 1 8においても同様に、 軸受孔 1 8 Aが形成 された 1つの軸受 1 8 Bが設けられている。そして、軸受 1 7 Bは各軸受 1 3 Bの 間に嵌入されるとともに、各軸受け 1 3 Bの軸受孔 1 3 Aと軸受 1 7 Bの軸受孔 1 7 Aとが一直線に配置され、 また、軸受 1 8 Bは各軸受 1 4 Bの間に嵌入されると ともに、各軸受 1 4 Bの軸受孔 1 4 Aと軸受 1 8 Bの軸受孔 1 8 Aとがー直線に配 置される。 このように一直線に配置された各軸受孔 1 3 A、 1 7 Aに対しては支持 軸 1 9 Aが揷嵌され、 また、 各 1 4 A、 1 8 Aに対しては、 支持軸 1 9 Bが揷嵌さ れる。 これにより、 2つの支持軸 1 9八及び1 9 Bを介して第 1ベース板 5と第 2 ベース板 8とは、 相互に回動可能に支持される。 Like the first base plate 5, the second base plate 8 is formed of a thin metal plate such as aluminum, and has two corners at a side end 15 (left end in FIG. 1) of the second base plate 8. The portion 16 is provided with bearing members 17 and 18 made of resin, which respectively constitute a part of the rotary connection portion 2. One bearing 17 with a bearing hole 17 A formed in the bearing member 17 B is provided. Similarly, the bearing member 18 is provided with one bearing 18B in which a bearing hole 18A is formed. The bearing 17B is inserted between the bearings 13B, and the bearing holes 13A of the bearings 13B and the bearing holes 17A of the bearing 17B are arranged in a straight line. The bearing 18B is inserted between the bearings 14B, and the bearing hole 14A of each bearing 14B and the bearing hole 18A of the bearing 18B are arranged in a straight line. You. A support shaft 19 A is fitted in each of the bearing holes 13 A and 17 A arranged in a straight line as described above, and a support shaft 1 is provided in each of the 14 A and 18 A. 9 B is inserted. As a result, the first base plate 5 and the second base plate 8 are rotatably supported via the two support shafts 198 and 19B.
尚、 軸受部材 1 4には、 これと一体に中空状の周壁部材 2 3が形成されており、 また、 軸受部材 1 8には、 これと一体に中空状の周壁部材 2 4が形成されている。 周壁部材 2 4の内部には、第 2キーボードュニット 4に設けられた各キースィツチ 1 0とコントロール部 6 2 (後述する）とを接続するための信号線 6 9 (後述する） が揷通されており、 かかる信号線 6 9は、 中空状の軸受部材 1 8、 軸受 1 8 Bから 外方に案内されるとともに支持軸 1 9 Bに卷回され、更に中空状の軸受部材 1 4か ら周壁部材 2 3に揷通案内される。 また、 周壁部材 2 3の内部には、 第 1キーボ一 ドュニヅト 3に設けられた各キースィヅチ 7とコントロール部 6 2とを接続する ための信号線（図示せず） が挿通されており、 かかる信号線は、 周壁部材 2 4を介 して第 2キ一ボードュニヅト 4側から案内されてくる信号線 6 9と合わせて、後述 する自在アーム 6 7 (後述する） に揷通案内される。 また、 周壁部材 2 3の背面側 に形成されたアーム支持部 2 5は中空状に形成されており、自在アーム 6 7を回動 可能に支持するとともに、前記のように案内されてくる各信号線を自在アーム 6 7 に揷通案内するものである。  The bearing member 14 has a hollow peripheral wall member 23 integrally formed therewith, and the bearing member 18 has a hollow peripheral wall member 24 integrally formed therewith. I have. Inside the peripheral wall member 24, a signal line 69 (described later) for connecting each key switch 10 provided on the second keyboard unit 4 and the control unit 62 (described later) is passed. The signal line 69 is guided outward from the hollow bearing member 18 and the bearing 18B and wound around the support shaft 19B, and further from the hollow bearing member 14 It is guided through the peripheral wall member 23. A signal line (not shown) for connecting each key switch 7 provided on the first keyboard unit 3 and the control unit 62 is inserted through the inside of the peripheral wall member 23. The wire is guided through a free arm 67 (to be described later) together with a signal wire 69 that is guided from the second keyboard unit 4 via the peripheral wall member 24. Further, an arm supporting portion 25 formed on the back side of the peripheral wall member 23 is formed in a hollow shape, rotatably supports the free arm 67, and transmits each signal guided as described above. The wire is guided through the universal arm 6 7.
第 1ベ一ス板 5において、側端部 1 1とは反対側の側端部 2 6の近傍で略中央位 置には、 ネジ受部 2 7が形成されており、 このネジ受部 2 7には、第 1支持板 6の ネジ孔 2 8に遊嵌されるネジ 2 9が締結される。 これにより、第 1支持板 6はネジ 2 9及びネジ受 2 7を支点として第 1ペース板 5上で水平方向に回動可能に取り 付けられる。 また、第 2ベース板 8において、 側端部 1 5とは反対側の側端部 8 a より少し内側に入った（後述するコントロール部 6 2の幅分だけ内側の）略中央位 置には、 ネジ受部 3 0が形成されており、 このネジ受部 3 0には、 第 2支持板 9の ネジ孔 3 1に遊嵌されるネジ 3 2が締結される。 これにより、 第 2支持板 9はネジ 3 2、ネジ受部 3 0を支点として第 2ベース板 8上で水平方向に回動可能に取り付 けられる。 In the first base plate 5, a screw receiving portion 27 is formed substantially at the center near the side end 26 opposite to the side end 11 and the screw receiving portion 2 is formed. A screw 29 loosely fitted into the screw hole 28 of the first support plate 6 is fastened to 7. Thus, the first support plate 6 is mounted on the first pace plate 5 so as to be rotatable in the horizontal direction with the screw 29 and the screw receiver 27 as fulcrums. Further, in the second base plate 8, a substantially center position (inside by a width of a control portion 62 described later) slightly inside the side end portion 8 a opposite to the side end portion 15. A screw receiving portion 30 is formed in the mounting portion, and a screw 32 that is loosely fitted into the screw hole 31 of the second support plate 9 is fastened to the screw receiving portion 30. Thus, the second support plate 9 is mounted on the second base plate 8 so as to be rotatable in the horizontal direction with the screw 32 and the screw receiving portion 30 as fulcrums.
第 1キーボードュニット 3における第 1支持板 6はアルミ等の金属薄板から形 成されており、 かかる第 1支持板 6上には、左手で操作される所定数のキースイツ チ 7が配設されている。 尚、 左手で操作されるキースィッチ 7の数は、 国際的規格 ( I S O 2 1 2 6及び I S O 2 5 3 0 ) に基づいて定められている。  The first support plate 6 in the first keyboard unit 3 is formed of a thin metal plate such as aluminum, and a predetermined number of key switches 7 operated by the left hand are disposed on the first support plate 6. ing. The number of key switches 7 operated by the left hand is determined based on international standards (ISO 21026 and ISO2503).
また、第 1支持板 6には 1つのキースィツチ 7に対応して 4個の係止部 3 3がプ レス加工等により一体に形成されており、 かかる第 1支持板 6上には、 図示しない 3層構造を有するメンブレンスィツチ（可動電極を有する上側シ一ト、 固定電極を 有する下側シ一ト及び上側シートと下側シート間に介挿され可動電極と固定電極 とを離間させるスィツチング孔を有するスぺーサシートからなる）が配置されてい る。 尚、 各係止部 3 3は、 メンプレンスィッチに形成された孔から上方へ突出され ている。  Further, four locking portions 33 corresponding to one key switch 7 are integrally formed on the first support plate 6 by pressing or the like, and not shown on the first support plate 6. A membrane switch having a three-layer structure (an upper sheet having a movable electrode, a lower sheet having a fixed electrode, and a switching hole interposed between the upper sheet and the lower sheet to separate the movable electrode from the fixed electrode. (Made of spacer sheet). Each locking portion 33 projects upward from a hole formed in the membrane switch.
そして、 各キースイッチ 7は、 基本的に、 キ一トヅプ 3 4、 キ一トップ 3 4の上 下動を案内する一対のリンク部材 3 5、キートップ 3 4を上方へ付勢するとともに メンブレンスィツチの可動電極と固定電極からなるスィツチング部に対応してメ ンプレンスイッチ上に配置されたラパースプリング 3 6から構成される。 ここに、 一対のリンク部材 3 5の各上端部はキートップ 3 4の下面に可動状態で連結され、 また、 各下端部は係止部 3 3に可動状態で係止されている。非押下時にキートップ 3 4はラバースプリング 3 6の付勢力を介して上方へ付勢されて非押下位置に保 持されており、ラバ一スプリング 3 6の付勢力に杭してキートップ 3 4を押下した 際には、ラバースプリング 3 6がメンブレンスィツチの可動電極を押圧してスぺ一 ザのスィツチング孔で固定電極に当接させ、これにより所定のスィヅチング動作が 行われる。前記したキ一スィヅチ 7と第 1支持板 6とは、 第 1キーュニヅト 3 7を 構成する。 尚、 キ一スイッチ 7の構成については公知であり、 ここでは詳細な説明 を省略する。  Basically, each key switch 7 urges the key top 34, the pair of link members 35 for guiding the up and down movement of the key top 34 and the key top 34 upward, and the membrane switch. It is composed of a wrapper spring 36 arranged on the main switch corresponding to the switching part composed of the movable electrode and the fixed electrode. Here, each upper end of the pair of link members 35 is movably connected to the lower surface of the key top 34, and each lower end is movably locked by the locking portion 33. When the key top 3 4 is not pressed, the key top 3 4 is urged upward through the urging force of the rubber spring 36 and is held at the non-pressed position. When the button is pressed, the rubber spring 36 presses the movable electrode of the membrane switch to make contact with the fixed electrode through the switching hole of the switcher, whereby a predetermined switching operation is performed. The above-mentioned key switch 7 and the first support plate 6 constitute a first key unit 37. The configuration of the key switch 7 is publicly known, and a detailed description is omitted here.
第 1支持板 6の一側 （第 1図における右側） は、 その回動支点 （ネジ孔 2 8に遊 嵌されたネジ 2 9及びネジ受 2 7 )を中心とする回転半径に合致する円弧面 3 8が 形成されており、 また、 円弧面 3 8の内側には、 円弧状の長溝 3 9が形成されてい る。長溝 3 9にはネジ 4 0が遊嵌され、 そのネジ 4 0は第 1ペース板 5に形成され たネジ受部 4 1に締結されている。 ここに、長溝 3 9とネジ 4 0とは、 第 1支持板 6が第 1ベース板 5上で水平方向に回動する際に、その回動動作が安定して行われ るように案内する作用を行う。 One side of the first support plate 6 (the right side in FIG. 1) is An arc surface 38 matching the radius of rotation centered on the fitted screw 29 and the screw receiver 27) is formed, and an arc-shaped long groove 39 is formed inside the arc surface 38. It has been done. A screw 40 is loosely fitted in the long groove 39, and the screw 40 is fastened to a screw receiving portion 41 formed on the first pace plate 5. Here, the long groove 39 and the screw 40 guide the first support plate 6 so that when the first support plate 6 turns horizontally on the first base plate 5, the turning operation is stably performed. Perform the action.
また、第 1支持板 6にて円弧面 3 8が形成された側には、 円弧面 3 8と同一曲率 半径を有する円弧面 4 2を有し、 その円弧面 4 2には、後述する第 2ギア部材 5 4 のギア歯部 5 3に嚙合するギア歯部 4 3が形成された第 1ギア部材 4 4が配設さ れている。更に、 第 1ギア部材 4 4の円弧面 4 2には、 複数個のロック溝 4 5が形 成されており、 かかるロック溝 4 5は後述するロック機構 5 7の一部を構成する。 尚、前記のように、第 1支持板 6の円弧面 3 8と第 1ギア部材 4 4の円弧面 4 2 とが同一の曲率半径を有するように構成したので、両円弧面 3 8、 4 2が相互に合 致することとなり、 これにより各円弧面 3 8、 4 2間でずれが発生することなく、 第 1キーユニット 3 7を見栄え良くすることができる。また、第 1ギア部材 4 4は、 第 1支持板 6に配設する際に、 ネジ 4 0、長溝 3 9を上方から覆うように配設され るので、 ネジ 4 0、長溝 3 9を外側から見えなくして第 1キーュニヅト 3 7を見栄 え良く構成できる。  On the side of the first support plate 6 where the arc surface 38 is formed, an arc surface 42 having the same radius of curvature as the arc surface 38 is provided. A first gear member 44 provided with a gear tooth portion 43 corresponding to the gear tooth portion 53 of the second gear member 54 is provided. Further, a plurality of lock grooves 45 are formed in the arc surface 42 of the first gear member 44, and the lock grooves 45 constitute a part of a lock mechanism 57 described later. As described above, since the arc surface 38 of the first support plate 6 and the arc surface 42 of the first gear member 44 have the same radius of curvature, both arc surfaces 38, 4 2 coincide with each other, so that the first key unit 37 can be made to look good without causing any deviation between the arc surfaces 38, 42. When the first gear member 44 is disposed on the first support plate 6, the first gear member 44 is disposed so as to cover the screw 40 and the long groove 39 from above. The first keystone 37 can be configured so as not to be seen from the outside.
第 1支持板 6の周囲の一部を除いて、周壁部材 4 6が設けられており、 かかる周 壁部材 4 6は、第 1支持板 6を第 1ベース板 5上に配置した際に、第 1ベース板 5 に設けられた周壁部材 2 3と協働して、円弧面 3 8を除く第 1支持板 6の周囲を囲 む周壁部材を構成する。  Except for a part of the periphery of the first support plate 6, a peripheral wall member 46 is provided.When the peripheral wall member 46 is disposed on the first base plate 5, In cooperation with the peripheral wall member 23 provided on the first base plate 5, a peripheral wall member surrounding the first support plate 6 excluding the arc surface 38 is formed.
更に、第 2キ一ボードュニット 4おける第 2支持板 9は、前記第 1支持板 6と同 様、 アルミ等の金属薄板から形成されており、 かかる第 2支持板 9上には、 右手で 操作される所定数のキースィツチ 1 0が配設されている。尚、右手で操作されるキ —スィツチ 1 0の数は、 国際規格（I S 0 2 1 2 6及び I S 0 2 5 3 0 ) に基づい て定められており、前記第 1支持板 6上に配設される左手で操作されるキ一スィッ チアの数よりも多くされている。 ここに、 キースィツチ 1 0は、 前記キ一スイッチ 7と同様の構成を有しているので、その構成要素についてはキースィツチ 7と同一 PC漏删 28 Further, the second support plate 9 in the second key unit 4 is formed of a thin metal plate such as aluminum similarly to the first support plate 6, and the second support plate 9 is operated with the right hand. A predetermined number of key switches 10 are provided. The number of key switches 10 operated with the right hand is determined based on international standards (IS 0 126 126 and IS 0 250 30), and is arranged on the first support plate 6. The number is larger than the number of left-hand operated switches. Here, the key switch 10 has the same configuration as that of the key switch 7, and its constituent elements are the same as those of the key switch 7. PC leak 28
23  twenty three
の番号を付して説明する。 The description will be given with the reference numerals.
第 2支持板 9には 1つのキースィツチ 1 0に対応して 4個の係止部 3 3がプレ ス加工等により一体に形成されており、 かかる第 2支持板 9上には、 図示しない 3 層構造を有するメンブレンスイッチ（可動電極を有する上側シート、 固定電極を有 する下側シ一ト及び上側シートと下側シート間に介挿され可動電極と固定電極と を離間させるスィツチング孔を有するスぺ一サシートからなる）が配置されている。 尚、 各係止部 3 3は、 メンブレンスィツチに形成された孔から上方へ突出されてい る。  Four locking portions 33 corresponding to one key switch 10 are integrally formed on the second support plate 9 by press working or the like. A membrane switch having a layer structure (an upper sheet having a movable electrode, a lower sheet having a fixed electrode, and a switch having a switching hole interposed between the upper sheet and the lower sheet to separate the movable electrode and the fixed electrode from each other. (Consisting of a single sheet). Each locking portion 33 projects upward from a hole formed in the membrane switch.
そして、 各キースィツチ 1 0は、 基本的に、 キートヅプ 3 4、 キ一トヅプ 3 4の 上下動を案内する一対のリンク部材 3 5、キートップ 3 4を上方へ付勢するととも にメンブレンスィヅチの可動電極と固定電極からなるスィツチング部に対応して メンブレンスィヅチ上に配置されたラバ一スプリング 3 6から構成される。ここに、 一対のリンク部材 3 5の各上端部はキートップ 3 4の下面に可動状態で連結され、 また、各下端部は係止部 3 3に可動状態で係止されている。非押下時にキートップ 3 4はラバースプリング 3 6の付勢力を介して上方へ付勢されて非押下位置に保 持さており、 ラバ一スプリング 3 6の付勢力に抗してキートップ 3 4を押下した際 には、ラバースプリング 3 6がメンブレンスィツチの可動電極を押圧してスぺーサ のスィヅチング孔で固定電極に当接させ、 これにより所定のスィツチング動作が行 われる。前記したキースィツチ 1 0と第 2支持板 9とは、 第 2キーユニット 4 7を 構成する。  Basically, each key switch 10 urges the key top 34, a pair of link members 35 for guiding the vertical movement of the key top 34, and the key top 34, and the key switch 34. It is composed of a rubber spring 36 arranged on the membrane switch corresponding to the switching part composed of the movable electrode and the fixed electrode. Here, each upper end of the pair of link members 35 is movably connected to the lower surface of the key top 34, and each lower end is movably locked by the locking portion 33. When the key top 3 4 is not pressed, the key top 3 4 is urged upward through the urging force of the rubber spring 36 and is held at the non-pressed position, and the key top 3 4 is pressed against the urging force of the rubber spring 36. When depressed, the rubber spring 36 presses the movable electrode of the membrane switch and abuts on the fixed electrode through the switching hole of the spacer, whereby a predetermined switching operation is performed. The above-mentioned key switch 10 and the second support plate 9 constitute a second key unit 47.
第 2支持板 9の一側 （第 1図における左側） は、 その回動支点 （ネジ孔 3 1に遊 嵌されたネジ 3 2及びネジ受部 3 0 )を中心とする回転半径に合致する円弧面 4 8 が形成されており、 また、 円弧面 4 8の内側には、 円弧状の長溝 4 9が形成されて いる。長溝 4 9にはネジ 5 0が遊嵌され、 そのネジ 5 0は第 2ベ一ス板 8に形成さ れたネジ受部 5 1に締結されている。 ここに、 長溝 4 9とネジ 5 0とは、 第 2支持 板 9が第 2ベース板 8上で水平方向に回動する際に、その回動動作が安定して行わ れるように案内する作用を行う。  One side (left side in FIG. 1) of the second support plate 9 coincides with a turning radius centered on the rotation fulcrum (the screw 32 and the screw receiving portion 30 loosely fitted in the screw hole 31). An arc surface 48 is formed, and an arc-shaped long groove 49 is formed inside the arc surface 48. A screw 50 is loosely fitted in the long groove 49, and the screw 50 is fastened to a screw receiving portion 51 formed on the second base plate 8. Here, the long groove 49 and the screw 50 act to guide the second support plate 9 so that when the second support plate 9 turns horizontally on the second base plate 8, the turning operation is performed stably. I do.
また、 第 2支持板 9にて円弧面 4 8が形成された側には、 円弧面 4 8と同一曲率 半径を有する円弧面 5 2を有し、 その円弧面 5 2には、第 1ギア部材 4 4のギア歯 PC蘭 3/0菌 On the side of the second support plate 9 where the arc surface 48 is formed, there is an arc surface 52 having the same radius of curvature as the arc surface 48, and the arc surface 52 has a first gear. Member 4 4 gear teeth PC orchid 3/0 bacteria
24  twenty four
部 4 3に嚙合するギア歯部 5 3が形成された第 2ギア部材 5 4が配設されている。 更に、 第 2ギア部材 5 4の円弧面 5 2には、 複数個のロック溝 5 5 (第 2図参照） が形成されており、かかるロック溝 5 5は後述するロック機構 5 7の一部を構成す る A second gear member 54 formed with a gear tooth portion 53 corresponding to the portion 43 is provided. Further, a plurality of lock grooves 55 (see FIG. 2) are formed in the arc surface 52 of the second gear member 54, and the lock grooves 55 are part of a lock mechanism 57 described later. Make up
尚、前記のように、第 2支持板 9の円弧面 4 8と第 2ギア部材 5 4の円弧面 5 2 とが同一の曲率半径を有するように構成したので、両円弧面 4 8、 5 2が相互に合 致することとなり、 これにより各円弧面 4 8、 5 2間でずれが発生することなく、 第 2キーュニット 4 7を見栄え良くすることができる。また、第 2ギア部材 5 4は、 第 2支持板 9に配設する際に、 ネジ 5 0、長溝 4 9を上方から覆うように配設され るので、 ネジ 5 0、長溝 4 9を外側から見えなくして第 2キ一ュニヅト 4 7を見栄 え良く構成できる。  As described above, since the arc surface 48 of the second support plate 9 and the arc surface 52 of the second gear member 54 have the same radius of curvature, both the arc surfaces 48, 5 2 coincide with each other, thereby making it possible to enhance the appearance of the second key unit 47 without causing any displacement between the arc surfaces 48 and 52. When the second gear member 54 is disposed on the second support plate 9, the second gear member 54 is disposed so as to cover the screw 50 and the long groove 49 from above. The second unit 47 can be configured to look good without being seen from the outside.
第 2ま持板 9の周囲の一部を除いて、 中空状の周壁部材 5 6が設けられており、 かかる周壁部材 5 6は、第 2支持板 9を第 2ペース板 8上に配置した際に、第 2ベ ース板 8に設けられた周壁部材 2 4と協働して、円弧面 4 8を除く第 2支持板 9の 周囲を囲む周壁部材を構成する。  A hollow peripheral wall member 56 is provided except for a part around the second holding plate 9, and the peripheral wall member 56 has the second support plate 9 disposed on the second pace plate 8. At this time, in cooperation with the peripheral wall member 24 provided on the second base plate 8, a peripheral wall member surrounding the periphery of the second support plate 9 excluding the arc surface 48 is formed.
続いて、第 1ペース板 5と第 2ベース板 8上で、 それそれ第 1支持板 6及ぴ第 2 支持板 9を水平方向に回動するにつき、第 1支持板 6と第 2支持板 9とを同期して 回動させる同期機構、 及び、 同期機構を介して回動された第 1支持板 6、 第 2支持 板 9をその回動位置でロックするロック機構について、第 2図及び第 3図に基づき 説明する。第 2図は第 1支持板 6と第 2支持板 9の回動動作を同期させる同期機構 を拡大して示す説明図であり、 また、第 3図は第 1支持板 6及び第 2支持板 9を回 動させていない状態から最大回動位置まで回動させた状態に至る一連の状態を示 す説明図であり、 第 3図 （A) は回動させていない状態、 第 3図 （B ) は途中まで 回動させた状態、 第 3図 （C ) は最大回動位置まで回動させた状態を示す。  Subsequently, the first support plate 6 and the second support plate 9 are rotated on the first pace plate 5 and the second base plate 8 in the horizontal direction. FIG. 2 shows a synchronization mechanism for rotating the first support plate 6 and the second support plate 9 rotated through the synchronization mechanism at the rotation position. An explanation is given based on FIG. FIG. 2 is an enlarged explanatory view showing a synchronizing mechanism for synchronizing the turning operation of the first support plate 6 and the second support plate 9, and FIG. FIG. 3 (A) is an explanatory view showing a series of states from a state in which the rotating member 9 is not rotated to a state in which the rotating member 9 is rotated to the maximum rotating position. FIG. B) shows a state in which it has been turned halfway, and FIG. 3 (C) shows a state in which it has been turned to the maximum turning position.
第 2図において、第 1ギア部材 4 4の円弧面 4 2に形成されたギア歯部 4 3、及 び、第 2ギア部材 5 4の円弧面 5 2に形成されたギア歯部 5 3は、相互に嚙合して いる。  In FIG. 2, a gear tooth portion 43 formed on an arc surface 42 of the first gear member 44 and a gear tooth portion 53 formed on an arc surface 52 of the second gear member 54 are formed. Are interconnected.
ここで、第 1ギア部材 4 4におけるギア歯部 4 3と第 2ギア部材 5 4におけるギ ァ歯部 5 3の詳細な構成について第 1 2図に基づき説明する。第 1 2図は第 1ギア 部材 4 4のギア歯部 4 3と第 2ギア部材 5 4のギア歯部 5 3とを拡大して示す説 明図であり、第 1 2図（A) は説明の便宜のためギア歯部 4 3とギア歯部 5 3とを 離間させて示す説明図、 第 1 2図（B )はギア歯部 4 3とギア歯部 5 3とが嚙合し ている状態を示す説明図、 第 1 2図（C) は第 1キーボードユニット 3と第 2キー ボードュニット 4とを相互に折り畳んだ状態におけるギア歯部 4 3とギア歯部 5 3との嚙合状態を示す説明図である。 Here, a detailed configuration of the gear teeth 43 of the first gear member 44 and the gear teeth 53 of the second gear member 54 will be described with reference to FIG. Fig. 12 shows the 1st gear FIG. 12 is an enlarged explanatory view showing the gear tooth portion 43 of the member 44 and the gear tooth portion 53 of the second gear member 54. FIG. 12 (A) shows the gear tooth portion for convenience of explanation. FIG. 12 (B) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the gear teeth 43 and the gear teeth 53 are engaged with each other, and FIG. FIG. 2 (C) is an explanatory view showing a combined state of the gear teeth 43 and the gear teeth 53 in a state where the first keyboard unit 3 and the second keyboard unit 4 are mutually folded.
第 1 2図 （A) において、 第 1ギア部材 4 4のギア歯部 4 3は、 円弧面 4 2に沿 つて形成された複数個のギア歯 4 3 Aから構成されており、各ギア歯 4 3 Aは、 ギ ァ部材 4 4の上面 4 4 Aよりも下側に存在するギア部 4 3 Bと、ギア部 4 3 Bに連 続して形成され上面 4 4 Aよりも上方に突出するギア部 4 3 Cとからなる。 また、 第 2ギア部材 5 4のギア歯部 5 3は、円弧面 5 2に沿って形成された複数個のギア 歯 5 3 Aから構成されており、各ギア歯 5 3 Aは、 ギア部材 5 4の上面 5 4 Aより も下側に存在するギア部 5 3 Bと、ギア部 5 3 Bに連続して形成され上面 5 4 Aよ りも上方に突出するギア部 5 3 Cとからなる。  In FIG. 12 (A), the gear teeth portion 43 of the first gear member 44 is composed of a plurality of gear teeth 43A formed along the arc surface 42. 43 A is a gear portion 43 B present below the upper surface 44 A of the gear member 44, and formed continuously with the gear portion 43 B and protrudes upward from the upper surface 44 A. The gear section consists of 4 3 C. The gear teeth 53 of the second gear member 54 are composed of a plurality of gear teeth 53 A formed along the arc surface 52. Each gear tooth 53 A is a gear member. The gear portion 53B located below the upper surface 54A of 54 and the gear portion 53C formed continuously with the gear portion 53B and protruding above the upper surface 54A. Become.
そして、 ギア歯部 4 3とギア歯部 5 3とが嚙合された状態においては、第 1 2図 (B )に示すように、 ギア歯 4 3 Aのギア部 4 3 C及びギア歯 5 3 Aのギア部 5 3 Cは、第 1ギア部材 4 4の上面 4 4 A及び第 2ギア部材 5 4の上面 5 4 Aより上方 においても嚙合している。  Then, in the state where the gear teeth 43 and the gear teeth 53 are combined, as shown in FIG. 12 (B), the gears 43 C of the gear teeth 43 A and the gear teeth 53 The gear portion 53 C of A is also engaged above the upper surface 44 A of the first gear member 44 and the upper surface 54 A of the second gear member 54.
かかる嚙合関係に基づき、第 1ギア部材 4 4におけるギア歯部 4 3の各ギア歯 4 3 Aと第 2ギア部材 5 4におけるギア歯部 5 3の各ギア歯 5 3 Aとの間における 嚙合状態は、第 1キーボードュニット 3及び第 2キーボードュニヅト 4を折り畳ん だ状態から水平にしたキーボード 1の使用状態に至る一連の如何なる状態におい ても、 解除されることはない。  On the basis of such a relationship, the relationship between each gear tooth 43 A of the gear tooth 43 of the first gear member 44 and each gear tooth 53 A of the gear tooth 53 of the second gear member 54 is determined. The state is not released in any series of states from the state in which the first keyboard unit 3 and the second keyboard unit 4 are folded to the state in which the keyboard 1 is used in a horizontal state.
このようにギア歯部 4 3の各ギア歯 4 3 Aとギア歯部 5 3の各ギア歯 5 3 Aと の嚙合関係が常時保持される点について、 図 1 3に基づき説明する。第 1 3図は水 平にされて使用状態にある第 1キーボードュニヅ ト 3と第 2キーボードュニッ ト 4を徐々に折り畳んでいく一連の状態を示しており、一対のリンク部材 3 5は図示 していない。第 1 3図 （A) は各キーボードユニット 3、 4が水平状態にある時の 各ギア歯 4 3 A、 5 3 Aの嚙合関係を模式的に示す説明図、 第 1 3図（B ) は第 2 キ—ボードュニット 4を若干回動させて折り畳み始めた状態にある時の各ギア歯 4 3 A、 5 3 Aの嚙合関係を模式的に示す説明図、第 1 3図（C)は第 1 3図（B ) の状態から更に第 2キーボードュニット 4を回動させて折畳が完了する直前の各 ギア歯 4 3 A、 5 3 Aの嚙合関係を模式的に示す説明図、 第 1 3図（D ) は各キー ボードユニット 3、 4の折畳が完了した状態を模式的に示す各ギア歯 4 3 A、 5 3 Aの嚙合関係を模式的に示す説明図である。 A description will be given of a point that the combined relationship between each gear tooth 43 A of the gear tooth part 43 and each gear tooth 53 A of the gear tooth part 53 is always maintained in reference to FIG. FIG. 13 shows a series of states in which the first keyboard unit 3 and the second keyboard unit 4 in a horizontal state and in use are gradually folded, and a pair of link members 35 are shown. Not. Fig. 13 (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing the relationship between the gear teeth 43A and 53A when the keyboard units 3 and 4 are in a horizontal state, and Fig. 13 (B) is No. 2 FIG. 13 (C) is an explanatory view schematically showing the relationship between the gear teeth 43A and 53A when the keyboard unit 4 is slightly folded and started to be folded. FIG. 13B is an explanatory view schematically showing the relationship between the gear teeth 43 A and 53 A immediately before folding is completed by further rotating the second keyboard unit 4 from the state shown in FIG. FIG. (D) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the gear teeth 43A and 53A schematically showing a state in which folding of the keyboard units 3 and 4 is completed.
先ず、 各キーボードユニット 3、 4が水平にされて使用状態にある場合、 第 1ギ ァ部材 4 4のギア歯部 4 3における各ギア歯 4 3 Aと第 2ギア部材 5 4のギア歯 部 5 3における各ギア歯 5 3 Aとは、第 1 2 (B )に示すように、ギア部 4 3 B、 4 3〇とギァ部5 3 8、 5 3 Cの全体で嚙合している。かかる状態が第 1 3図（A) に示されている。  First, when the keyboard units 3 and 4 are leveled and in use, the gear teeth 43 of the gear teeth 43 of the first gear member 44 and the gear teeth of the second gear member 54 are provided. As shown in FIG. 12 (B), each gear tooth 53 A in 53 is engaged with the entire gear portion 43 B, 43 〇 and the gear portion 538, 53 C. Such a state is shown in FIG. 13 (A).
また、 第 1 3図 （B ) に示すように、 第 2キーボードユニット 4を徐々に回動し ていくと、ギア歯 4 3 Aのギア部 4 3 Bとギア歯 5 3 Aのギア部 5 3 Bとの嚙合は、 徐々に解除されていくが、ギア部 4 3 Cとギア部 5 3 Cの嚙合は保持されたままで ある。  As shown in FIG. 13 (B), when the second keyboard unit 4 is gradually rotated, the gear portion 43B of the gear teeth 43A and the gear portion 53 of the gear teeth 53A are formed. The connection with 3B is gradually released, but the connection between the gear section 43C and the gear section 53C remains held.
また、 第 1 3図 （C) に示すように、 第 2キーボードユニット 4を更に回動させ ていくと、ギア歯 4 3 Aのギア部 4 3 Bとギア歯 5 3 Aのギア部 5 3 Bとの嚙合は 完全に解除されるが、 この場合おいても、 ギア部 4 3 Cとギア部 5 3 Cとの嚙合は 保持されている。  Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (C), when the second keyboard unit 4 is further rotated, the gear portion 43B of the gear teeth 43A and the gear portion 53 of the gear teeth 53A are formed. The connection with B is completely released, but also in this case, the connection between the gear portion 43C and the gear portion 53C is maintained.
そして、第 1キーボードュニット 3と第 2キーボードュニヅト 4とを完全に折り 畳んだ場合、 ギア歯 4 3 Aとギア歯 5 3 Aとは、 第 1 2図 （C) に示すように、 ギ ァ部 4 3 Cとギア部 5 3 Cのみで嚙合する。 この状態が第 1 3図（D ) に示されて いる。  Then, when the first keyboard unit 3 and the second keyboard unit 4 are completely folded, the gear teeth 43A and the gear teeth 53A become as shown in FIG. 12 (C). Then, only the gear section 43C and the gear section 53C are combined. This state is shown in FIG. 13 (D).
前記にて説明したように、第 1ギア部材 4 4のギア歯部 4 3における各ギア歯 4 3 Aを、 ギア部材 4 4の上面 4 4 Aよりも下側に存在するギア部 4 3 Bと、 ギア部 4 3 Bに連続して形成され上面 4 4 Aよりも上方に突出するギア部 4 3 Cとから 構成するとともに、 また、第 2ギア部材 5 4のギア歯部 5 3における各ギア歯 5 3 Aを、 ギア部材 5 4の上面 5 4 Aよりも下側に存在するギア部 5 3 Bと、 ギア部 5 3 Bに連続して形成され上面 5 4 Aよりも上方に突出するギア部 5 3 Cとから構 成し、各ギア歯 4 3 Aと各ギア歯 5 3 Aとを相互に嚙合させたので、 ギア歯部 4 3 の各ギア歯 4 3 Aとギア歯部 5 3の各ギア歯 5 3 Aとの間における嚙合状態は、第 1キ一ボードュニット 3及び第 2キーボ一ドュニット 4を折り畳んだ状態から水 平にしたキ一ボード 1の使用状態に至る一連の如何なる状態においても、解除され ることなく保持することができる。 As described above, each gear tooth 43 A in the gear tooth part 43 of the first gear member 44 is replaced by a gear part 43 B located below the upper surface 44 A of the gear member 44. And a gear portion 43C formed continuously with the gear portion 43B and protruding above the upper surface 44A, and each of the gear teeth 53 of the second gear member 54 is formed. The gear teeth 53A are formed continuously with the gear portion 53B below the upper surface 54A of the gear member 54, and protrude upward from the upper surface 54A. Gear section that is composed of 5 3 C And the gear teeth 4 3 A and the gear teeth 5 3 A were combined with each other, so that each gear tooth 4 3 A of the gear tooth part 4 3 and each gear tooth 5 3 A of the gear tooth part 53 were formed. Is released in any series of states from the state in which the first keyboard unit 3 and the second keyboard unit 4 are folded to the state in which the horizontal key board 1 is used. Can be held without.
また、 ギア歯部 4 3とギア歯部 5 3は共に円弧面 4 2、 5 2に形成されているこ とから、ギア歯部 4 3及びギア歯部 5 3の先端も円弧状に配置されている。従って、 各ギア歯部 4 3、 5 3の間における嚙合関係は、 第 2図、 第 3図等に示すように、 均一ではなく浅い部分と深い部分とが発生し、 また、 かかる嚙合関係は、 第 1支持 板 6及び第 2支持板 9が回動する場合でも変わらない。 しかしながら、各第 1ギア 部材 4 4、 第 2ギア部材 5 4のギア歯部 4 3、 5 3との間には、 常時深い嚙合関係 が存在しているので、第 1支持板 6と第 2支持板 9の回動に起因して各ギア歯部 4 3、 5 3との嚙合が外れてしまうことはない。  Also, since both the gear teeth 43 and the gear teeth 53 are formed on the arc surfaces 42 and 52, the tips of the gear teeth 43 and the gear teeth 53 are also arranged in an arc. ing. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 2, FIG. 3, etc., the relationship between the gear tooth portions 43 and 53 is not uniform, but a shallow portion and a deep portion are generated. This does not change even when the first support plate 6 and the second support plate 9 rotate. However, since there is always a deep coupling relationship between the gear teeth 43 and 53 of the first gear member 44 and the second gear member 54, the first support plate 6 and the second The rotation of the support plate 9 does not deviate from the engagement with the gear teeth 43, 53.
第 1支持板 6と第 2支持板 9を回動させていない状態においては、 第 3図 （A) に示すように、支持板 6上に配列される各キースィツチ 7と支持板 9上に配列され る各キ一スィツチ 1 0は、通常のキ一ボードにおけるのと同一のキ一配列関係を有 しており、第 1ギア部材 4 4のギア歯部 4 3と第 2ギア部材 5 4のギア歯部 5 3と の間には、 第 3図 （A) における上側で浅い嚙合関係が存在し、 下側で深い嚙合関 係が存在する。このようなキ一配列関係の状態でキーボード 1の操作を所望する場 合には、 勿論この状態でキーボードの操作を行うことができる。  When the first support plate 6 and the second support plate 9 are not rotated, the key switches 7 arranged on the support plate 6 and the arrangement on the support plate 9 are arranged as shown in FIG. Each key switch 10 has the same key arrangement relationship as in a normal key board, and has a gear tooth portion 43 of the first gear member 44 and a gear tooth portion 43 of the second gear member 54. Between the gear teeth 53, there is a shallow connection on the upper side in FIG. 3 (A) and a deep connection on the lower side. If the operation of the keyboard 1 is desired in such a key arrangement, the keyboard can be operated in this state.
第 3図（A) に示す状態から、 第 1キーユニット 3 7又は第 2キーボードュニヅ ト 4 7の一方を第 3図（A) における時計方向又は反時計方向へ回動させると、 第 1ギア部材 4 4のギア歯部 4 3及び第 2ギア部材 5 4のギア歯部 5 3が相互に嚙 合されていることに基づき、 第 1支持板 6と第 2支持板 9とは、 相互に同期して、 それそれネジ 2 9、 ネジ受部 2 7を回動支点として時計方向に回動するとともに、 ネジ 3 2、 ネジ受部 3 0を支点として反時計方向へ回動する。 このように、 第 1支 持板 6と第 2支持板 9とを、 若干回動させた状態が第 3図 （B ) に示されている。 このようなキー配列関係の状態でキ一ボード 1の操作を所望する場合には、この状 態でキーボ一ドの操作を行うことができる。 更に、 第 3図（B ) に示す状態から第 1支持板 6又は第 2支持板 9を回動させる と、前記の場合と同様にして、第 1支持板 6と第 2支持板 9とは、相互に同期して、 それぞれ時計方向、反時計方向に回動する。このようにして第 1支持板 6及び第 2 支持板 9を最大回動位置まで回動させた状態が第 3図（C ) に示されている。 この ようなキー配列関係の状態でキーボ一ド 1の操作を所望する場合には、この状態で キーボ—ドの操作を行うことができる。 When one of the first key unit 37 or the second keyboard unit 47 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise in FIG. 3 (A) from the state shown in FIG. 3 (A), the first gear member The first support plate 6 and the second support plate 9 are synchronized with each other based on the fact that the gear tooth portions 43 of 44 and the gear tooth portions 53 of the second gear member 54 are mutually engaged. Then, each of them rotates clockwise with the screw 29 and the screw receiving portion 27 as a fulcrum, and rotates counterclockwise with the screw 32 and the screw receiving portion 30 as a fulcrum. The state where the first support plate 6 and the second support plate 9 are slightly rotated in this way is shown in FIG. 3 (B). When the operation of the keyboard 1 is desired in such a key arrangement relationship, the keyboard operation can be performed in this state. Further, when the first support plate 6 or the second support plate 9 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 3 (B), the first support plate 6 and the second support plate 9 , Rotate clockwise and counterclockwise, respectively, in synchronization with each other. FIG. 3 (C) shows a state in which the first support plate 6 and the second support plate 9 have been rotated to the maximum rotation position in this manner. When the operation of the keyboard 1 is desired in such a key arrangement state, the operation of the keyboard can be performed in this state.
従って、使用者がキーボード 1を使用する際に、第 1キーュニット 3 7又は第 2 キーュニヅト 4 7の一方を回動させることにより、他方のキ一ュニットを一方のキ 一ュニヅトと同期して回動させることが可能となる。 このように、極めて簡単な操 作により各キーュニット 3 7、 4 7を所望の操作状態に配置して、個々の使用者に とって最適な操作形態でキーボ一ド操作を行うことができる。  Therefore, when the user uses the keyboard 1, by rotating one of the first key unit 37 or the second key unit 47, the other unit is rotated in synchronization with the one unit. It is possible to do. In this way, the key units 37, 47 can be arranged in a desired operation state by an extremely simple operation, and the keyboard operation can be performed in an optimal operation form for each user.
次に、前記のように第 1キーュニット 3 7及ぴ第 2キーュニット 4 7を同期回動 させ所望回動位置でそれそれ第 1ベース板 5及び第 2ベース板 8にロックする口 ック機構について第 2図に基づき説明する。  Next, as described above, the lock mechanism for synchronously rotating the first key unit 37 and the second key unit 47 and locking them to the first base plate 5 and the second base plate 8 at desired rotation positions, respectively. This will be described with reference to FIG.
ロック機構 5 7は、 第 1ベース板 5と第 1キ一ュニット 3 7との間、 及び、 第 2 ベース板 8と第 2キ一ュニット 4 7との間に配設されるが、いずれのロック機構 5 7も同一の構成を有しているので、以下においては第 2ベース板 8と第 2キーュニ ヅト 4 7との間に設けられたロック機構 5 7のみについて説明することとする。尚、 第 1ベース板 5と第 1キ一ュニヅト 3 7との間に設けられたロック機構 5 7は、第 1キ一ュニット 3 7の第 1支持板 6に配設された第 1ギア部材 4 4の円弧面 4 2 に形成された口ヅク溝 4 5と、第 1ベ一ス板 5の隅部 1 2に設けられた軸受部材 1 3に形成された弾性ロック片 （図示せず） とから構成されている。  The lock mechanism 57 is provided between the first base plate 5 and the first unit 37 and between the second base plate 8 and the second unit 47. Since the lock mechanism 57 has the same configuration, only the lock mechanism 57 provided between the second base plate 8 and the second key unit 47 will be described below. The lock mechanism 57 provided between the first base plate 5 and the first unit 37 is a first gear member provided on the first support plate 6 of the first unit 37. An orifice groove 45 formed on the circular arc surface 4 2 and an elastic lock piece (not shown) formed on the bearing member 13 provided at the corner 12 of the first base plate 5. It is composed of
ここに、ロック機構 5 7は第 1キーュニヅト 3 7側と第 2キーュニヅト 4 7側の 双方について設ける必要はなく、 いずれか一方のみを設ける構成であってもよい。 第 2図に示すロック機構 5 7おいて、第 2ベース板 8の隅部 1 6に設けられた軸 受部材 1 7は中空状に形成されており、 その内部には、一対の保持部 5 8が設けら れている。 かかる一対の保持部 5 8の間には、 金属製の弾性薄板を「く」字状に折 曲された弾性ロック片 5 9の両端が支持されている。 また、第 2ギア部材 5 4の円 弧面 5 2に当接する軸受部材 1 7の凹状湾曲面 6 0には、開口 6 1が形成されてお り、弾性ロック片 5 9の先端は開口 6 1から突出するように構成されている。 この ように開口 6 1から突出された弾性口ック片 5 9の先端は、第 2ギア部材 5 4の円 弧面 5 2に形成された複数個の口ヅク溝 5 5の 1つに係止される。 Here, the lock mechanism 57 does not need to be provided on both the first key unit 37 side and the second key unit 47 side, and it may be configured to provide only one of them. In the lock mechanism 57 shown in FIG. 2, a bearing member 17 provided at a corner 16 of the second base plate 8 is formed in a hollow shape, and a pair of holding portions 5 8 are provided. Between the pair of holding portions 58, both ends of an elastic lock piece 59 obtained by bending a metal elastic thin plate in a "<" shape are supported. Also, an opening 61 is formed in the concave curved surface 60 of the bearing member 17 that contacts the arc surface 52 of the second gear member 54. The distal end of the elastic lock piece 59 is configured to protrude from the opening 61. The tip of the elastic hook piece 59 projecting from the opening 61 in this way is engaged with one of the plurality of mouth grooves 55 formed on the arc surface 52 of the second gear member 54. Is stopped.
前記したロック機構 5 7によれば、第 1キーュニヅト 3 7と第 2キーュニヅト 4 7とを相互に同期させて所望の回動位置まで回動させた後、その回動位置にて弾性 ロック片 5 9の先端を第 2ギア部材のロック溝 5 5に係止することによりロック することができる。従って、個々の使用者にとって最適な操作形態に固定した状態 でキーボード操作を安定して行うことができる。  According to the lock mechanism 57 described above, after the first key unit 37 and the second key unit 47 are rotated to a desired rotation position in synchronization with each other, the elastic lock piece 5 is rotated at the rotation position. The lock can be achieved by locking the tip of the lock member 9 into the lock groove 55 of the second gear member. Therefore, the keyboard operation can be stably performed in a state where the operation mode is fixed to the optimum one for each user.
また、 ロック機構 5 7は、 第 2ギア部材 5 4の円弧面 5 2に形成されたロック溝 5 5と、第 2ベース板 8の軸受部 1 7に配設された弾性ロック片 5 9とから簡単に 構成されているので、第 1キ一ュニヅト 3 7及び第 2キーュニヅト 4 7の口ヅク機 構 5 7を低いコストで実現することができる。 また、 ロック溝 5 5は、 第 2ギア部 材 5 4の円弧面 5 2に形成されることから、ギア歯部 5 3の形成と同時に口ヅク溝 5 5を形成することが可能となり、 これによつてもコストの低廉化を図ることがで きる。  Further, the lock mechanism 57 includes a lock groove 55 formed in the arc surface 52 of the second gear member 54 and an elastic lock piece 59 provided in the bearing portion 17 of the second base plate 8. Therefore, the opening mechanism 57 of the first key 37 and the second key 47 can be realized at low cost. Further, since the lock groove 55 is formed on the arc surface 52 of the second gear member 54, it is possible to form the opening groove 55 simultaneously with the formation of the gear teeth 53. According to this, the cost can be reduced.
続いて、前記キーボード 1に設けられている周辺構造について、第 4図乃至第 1 1図に基づき説明する。  Next, the peripheral structure provided on the keyboard 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 11. FIG.
前記したキーボード 1において、第 1キ一ボードュニヅト 3の第 1支持板 6には、 前記したように、 国際規格 ( I S O 2 1 2 6及び I S 0 2 5 3 0 ) に従って左手で 操作される所定数のキースィッチ 7が配列されており、 また、 第 2キーボードュニ ット 4の第 2支持板 9には、国際規格に従って右手で操作される所定数のキースィ ツチ 1 0が配列されているが、 左手で操作されるキースィツチ 7の数は、 右手で操 作されるキ一スィヅチ 1 0の数よりも少ない。これに基づき、第 3図に示すように、 第 1キーボードュニット 3の長手方向における長さは、第 2キーボードュニット 4 の長手方向における長さよりも短く構成されている。  In the keyboard 1, the first support plate 6 of the first keyboard unit 3, as described above, has a predetermined number operated by the left hand in accordance with international standards (ISO 2126 and IS0250). Key switches 7 are arranged on the second support unit 9 of the second keyboard unit 4, and a predetermined number of key switches 10 operated by the right hand according to international standards are arranged on the second support plate 9; The number of key switches 7 operated with the keys is smaller than the number of key switches 10 operated with the right hand. Based on this, as shown in FIG. 3, the length of the first keyboard unit 3 in the longitudinal direction is configured to be shorter than the length of the second keyboard unit 4 in the longitudinal direction.
このままでは、第 1キーボードュニヅト 3と第 2キーボードュニヅト 4とを相互 に折り畳んだ場合に、 両者の長さがアンバランスとなって、 キ一ボード 1の携帯性 も良くないことから、 本実施形態に係るキーボード 1では、 第 4図 （A) 乃至第 4 図 （C ) に示すように、 第 1キーボードユニット 3の一側端縁（第 2キーボードュ ニット 4と回動可能に連結される側と反対側の端縁で、図 4における左側端縁）に、 キーボ—ド 1の制御を行うコントロール部 6 2を並設するとともに、第 1キーボー ドュニット 3とコントロール部 6 2とを加えた長手方向の長さが第 2キーボード ュニット 4の長手方向における長さと同一長さとなるように構成している。 In this state, when the first keyboard unit 3 and the second keyboard unit 4 are folded together, the lengths of both are unbalanced, and the portability of the keyboard 1 is not good. Therefore, in the keyboard 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 4A to 4C, one side edge of the first keyboard unit 3 (the second keyboard A control section 62 for controlling the keyboard 1 is provided side by side on the edge opposite to the side rotatably connected to the knit 4 (the left edge in FIG. 4), and a first keyboard unit. The length of the second keyboard unit 4 in the longitudinal direction, which is obtained by adding the control unit 3 and the control unit 62, is the same as the length of the second keyboard unit 4 in the longitudinal direction.
このように構成することにより、第 1キーボードュニヅ ト 3と第 2キーボードュ ニット 4との長さ相違に起因して、第 1キーボードュニヅト 3に発生するスペース を有 ¾!に利用することができ、コントロール部 6 2をキーボード 1の下部や側部に 配設する場合に比して、 キーボード 1の薄型化を図ることができ、 また、 小型化を 図ることができる。  With such a configuration, the space generated in the first keyboard unit 3 due to the difference in length between the first keyboard unit 3 and the second keyboard unit 4 can be used very much. The keyboard 1 can be made thinner and more compact than when the control unit 62 is disposed below or on the side of the keyboard 1.
ここに、第 4図 （A) は、 キ一ボード 1の非使用時に軸受部材 1 3の各軸受 1 3 Bの軸受孔 1 3 Aと軸受部材 1 7の軸受 1 7 Bの軸受孔 1 7 A、及び、軸受部材 1 4の各軸受 1 4 Bの軸受孔 1 4 Aと軸受部材 1 8の軸受 1 8 Bの軸受孔 1 8 Aに 渡って挿通される支持軸 1 9 A、 1 9 Bを介して両キ一ボードユニット 3、 4が近 接する方向に回動して重ね合わせた折畳状態を示しており、第 1キーボードュニッ ト 3とコントロール部 6 2とを加えた長手方向の長さは第 2キ一ボードュニット 4の長さと同一にされてコンパクトに構成されていることが分かる。  Here, Fig. 4 (A) shows the bearing holes 13A of the bearing members 13B of the bearing member 13 and the bearing holes 17B of the bearing members 17B when the key board 1 is not used. A and bearing member 14 Each bearing 14 14 B bearing hole 14 B and bearing member 18 Bearing 18 B Bearing hole 18 A inserted through bearing hole 18 A Support shaft 19 A, 19 This shows a folded state in which the two keyboard units 3 and 4 are rotated in a direction approaching each other via B and are superimposed on each other, and a longitudinal direction in which the first keyboard unit 3 and the control unit 62 are added. It can be seen that the length is made the same as the length of the second key unit 4 and is compact.
また、 第 4図 （B ) は、 キーボード 1の使用時に支持軸 1 9 A、 1 9 Bを介して 両キ—ボードュニット 3、 4が離間する方向に回動した水平状態を示しており、第 1キーボードュニット 3とコントロール部 6 2とを加えた長手方向の長さは第 2 キーボードュニット 4の長さと同一にされて、支持軸 1 9 A、 1 9 Bを基準にキー ボード 1における左右のパランスがとれていることが分かる。 FIG. 4 (B) shows a horizontal state in which the keyboard units 3 and 4 are rotated in the direction away from each other via the support shafts 19A and 19B when the keyboard 1 is used. 1 The length of the keyboard unit 3 and the control unit 6 2 in the longitudinal direction is the same as the length of the second keyboard unit 4, and the length of the keyboard 1 with respect to the support shafts 19A and 19B. It can be seen that the left and right balance is maintained.
コントロール部 6 2の略中央部には、 第 4図 （C ) に示すように、 蓋部材 6 3が 開閉可能に取り付けられており、 かかる蓋部材 6 3の裏面側には、 P D A等の各種 携帯電子機器が接続されるコネクタ部材 6 4が配設されている。コネクタ部材 6 4 には、コント口一ル部 6 2に内蔵されてキーボード 1の制御を行うためのコント口 ールユニット （図示せず） と接続されたフレキシブル基板 6 5が接続されている。 また、 コネクタ部材 6 4の近傍で蓋部材 6 3の両側には、一対のワイヤ部材 6 6 A が固着されており、両ワイヤ部材 6 6 Aの外端部間にはワイヤ部材 6 6 Bが回動可 能に掛装されている。更に、 ワイヤ部材 6 6 Bの中央位置には支持ワイヤ 6 6 Cが 03 07028 As shown in FIG. 4 (C), a cover member 63 is attached to the control unit 62 so as to be openable and closable at a substantially central portion thereof. A connector member 64 to which the portable electronic device is connected is provided. The connector member 64 is connected to a flexible board 65 built in the control section 62 and connected to a control unit (not shown) for controlling the keyboard 1. Further, a pair of wire members 66A is fixed to both sides of the lid member 63 near the connector member 64, and a wire member 66B is provided between the outer ends of both wire members 66A. It is mounted rotatably. Further, a support wire 66C is provided at the center of the wire member 66B. 03 07028
31  31
固着されている。 各ワイヤ部材 6 6 Aは、 第 4図 （C ) に示す状態まで蓋部材 6 3 と共に回動され、 この状態で支持ワイヤ 6 6 Cを後方に回動させることにより、 P D A等の携帯電子機器を傾斜した状態で支持することができる。 ここに、 ワイヤ部 材 6 6 A、 6 6 B、 6 6 Cは、 P D A等の携帯電子機器を傾斜した状態で支持する 背もたれ部材 6 6を構成する。 It is fixed. Each wire member 66A is rotated together with the lid member 63 until the state shown in FIG. 4 (C), and in this state, the supporting wire 66C is rotated rearward, so that a portable electronic device such as a PDA is rotated. Can be supported in an inclined state. Here, the wire members 66 A, 66 B, and 66 C constitute a backrest member 66 that supports a portable electronic device such as a PDA in an inclined state.
このように、コントロール部 6 2に回動可能に取り付けられた蓋部材 6 3にコネ クタ部材 6 4を配設するとともに、コネクタ部材 6 4の近傍で蓋部材 6 3に背もた れ部材 6 6を設けることにより、ケーブル等を必要とすることなく P D A等の携帯 電子機器を直接コネクタ部材 6 4に接続した状態で、携帯電子機器を傾斜させて支 持することができる。  As described above, the connector member 64 is disposed on the lid member 63 rotatably attached to the control part 62, and the back member 63 is disposed on the lid member 63 near the connector member 64. By providing 6, the portable electronic device such as a PDA can be tilted and supported in a state where the portable electronic device such as a PDA is directly connected to the connector member 64 without requiring a cable or the like.
ここで、 第 1キーボードュニヅト 3と第 2キーボードュニヅト 4を第 4図 （A) に示すように折り畳んだ時に、前記のように構成される背もたれ部材 6 6が、 各キ —ボードュニット 3、 4間で収納される構成について、 第 4図 （B )及び第 7図に 基づき説明する。第 7図は第 4図（ A)に示す折畳状態で各キ一ボードユニット 3、 4の長手方向に直交する方向 （短手方向） に切断して示す拡大断面図である。  Here, when the first keyboard unit 3 and the second keyboard unit 4 are folded as shown in FIG. 4 (A), the back member 66 configured as described above, —The configuration to be stored between the bodunits 3 and 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 4 (B) and FIG. FIG. 7 is an enlarged sectional view of the folded state shown in FIG. 4 (A), which is cut in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of each of the keyboard units 3 and 4 (transverse direction).
第 4図 （B ) に示すように、 第 1キ一ボードユニット 3において、 上側から第 1 キースィヅチ列 K 1と第 2キースィツチ列 K 2との間、第 2キースィツチ列 K 2と 第 3キ一スィツチ列 K 3との間、 及び、 第 3キースィツチ列 K 3と第 4キ一スィッ チ列 K 4との間には、それそれ一定のクリアランスが存在する。また、この関係は、 第 2キーボードュニット 4においても同様に、第 1キースイッチ列 K 1と第 2キ一 スィツチ列 K 2との間、第 2キ一スィツチ列 K 2と第 3キースィヅチ列 K 3との間、 及び、第 3キ一スィツチ列 K 3と第 4キースィヅチ列 K 4との間に存在する。従つ て、 第 4 (A) に示す折畳状態では、 各キースイッチ列におけるキ一トップ 3 4の 形状とも相まって、 第 7図に示すように、相互に対向する第 1キーボードュニット 3と第 2キーボードュニット 4にて隣接するキ一スィツチ列間には、間隙 S.が形成 されることとなる。  As shown in FIG. 4 (B), in the first key board unit 3, between the first key switch row K1 and the second key switch row K2, and the second key switch row K2 and the third key There is a certain clearance between the switch row K3 and between the third key switch row K3 and the fourth key switch row K4. This relationship also applies to the second keyboard unit 4 between the first key switch row K1 and the second key switch row K2, the second key switch row K2 and the third key switch row. K3, and between the third key switch row K3 and the fourth key switch row K4. Therefore, in the folded state shown in FIG. 4 (A), together with the shape of the key tops 34 in each key switch row, as shown in FIG. A gap S. is formed between adjacent key switches in the second keyboard unit 4.
本実施形態に係るキーボード 1では、背もたれ部材 6 6の一方のワイヤ部材 6 6 Aを各キーボードュニット 3、 4における第 1キースィヅチ列 K 1と第 2キースィ ヅチ列 K 2との間に生じる間隙 Sに収納し、同様に支持ワイヤ 6 6 Cを第 2キース ィツチ列 K 2と第 3キ一スィツチ列 Κ 3との間に生じる間隙 Sに収納し、同様に他 方のワイヤ部材 6 6 Αを第 3キースィヅチ列 K 3と第 4キ一スィヅチ列 K 4との 間に生じる間隙 Sに収納している。 また、 ワイヤ部材 6 6 Bは、 キートップ 3 4の 頂面と第 1ギア部材 4 4の平面部との間には高低差が存在し、 また、 かかる高低差 は折畳状態で 2倍になることから、第 1キーボ一ドュニヅト 3と第 2キ一ボードュ ニット 4との間に生じる間隙に充分収納することができる。 In the keyboard 1 according to the present embodiment, one wire member 66A of the backrest member 66 is connected to the gap generated between the first keyswitch row K1 and the second keyswitch row K2 in each of the keyboard units 3 and 4. S, and similarly support wire 6 6 C It is stored in the gap S generated between the switch row K2 and the third switch row # 3, and the other wire members 66 are similarly stored in the third key switch row K3 and the fourth key switch row K4. And is stored in the gap S between them. Further, the wire member 66B has a height difference between the top surface of the key top 34 and the plane portion of the first gear member 44, and the height difference is doubled in the folded state. As a result, it is possible to sufficiently house the gap between the first keyboard unit 3 and the second keyboard unit 4.
前記したように、 背もたれ部材 6 6を構成する各ワイヤ部材 6 6 A、支持ワイヤ 6 6 Cを、 両キーボードュニヅト 3、 4の折畳状態で相互に対向するキ一スィツチ 列間に生じる間隙 Sに収納するとともに、ワイヤ部材 6 6 Bを両キ一ボードュニヅ ト 3、 4間に生じる間隙に収納するように構成したので、折畳状態における第 1キ —ボードュニット 3と第 2キーボードュニット 4とを重ね合わせた厚さを薄くす ることができ、 また、 背もたれ部材 6 6がキーボード 1の外部に付設する必要がな いことから、 キーボード 1全体の小型化を図ることができる。  As described above, the wire members 66 A and the support wires 66 C constituting the backrest member 66 are connected between the key switches which are opposed to each other in the folded state of the keyboard units 3 and 4. Since the wire member 66B is housed in the gap generated between the two keyboard units 3 and 4 while being stored in the gap S generated, the first key unit 3 and the second keyboard unit in the folded state are configured. Since the thickness of the knit 4 can be reduced, and the backrest member 66 does not need to be provided outside the keyboard 1, it is possible to reduce the size of the keyboard 1 as a whole.
更に、キーボード 1に対して背もたれ部材 6 6を収納するための特別の構成を全 く必要としないので、 キーボード 1全体のコストを低減することができる。  Further, since no special structure for storing the back member 66 with respect to the keyboard 1 is required, the cost of the entire keyboard 1 can be reduced.
次に、第 1キーボードュニット 3における各キ一スィツチ 7及び第 2キ一ボード ュニヅト 4における各キースィヅチ 1 0とコントロール部 6 2とを電気的に接続 する構成について第 4図、 第 5図及び第 8図に基づき説明する。第 5図はコント口 —ル部 6 2をキーボード 1との関係を示す説明図であり、 第 5図（A) はコント口 ール部 6 2を第 1キーボードユニット 3から取り外した状態を示す説明図であり、 第 5図（B ) はコントロール部 6 2と自在アームとが接続される状態を示す説明 ¾ である。  Next, a configuration for electrically connecting each key switch 10 in the first keyboard unit 3 and each key switch 10 in the second keyboard unit 4 to the control unit 62 will be described with reference to FIGS. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the control unit 6 2 and the keyboard 1, and FIG. 5 (A) shows a state in which the control unit 6 2 is removed from the first keyboard unit 3. FIG. 5 (B) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the control section 62 and the free arm are connected.
第 1キ—ボードュニット 3における第 1ベース板 5の周壁部材 2 3の背面側に 形成されたアーム支持部 2 5には、 自在アーム 6 7が回動可能に支持されている。 自在アーム 6 7は、アーム支持部 2 5に第 1連結ピン 6 8 Aを介して一端が回動可 能に支持された中空状の第 1アーム部材 6 7 A、 及び、 第 1アーム部材 6 7 Aの他 端に第 2連結ピン 6 8 Bを介して回動可能に支持された中空状の第 2アーム部材 6 7 Bから構成されている。  A universal arm 67 is rotatably supported by an arm supporting portion 25 formed on the back side of the peripheral wall member 23 of the first base plate 5 in the first key board unit 3. The free arm 67 includes a hollow first arm member 67 A whose one end is rotatably supported by an arm supporting portion 25 via a first connecting pin 68 A, and a first arm member 6. It is composed of a hollow second arm member 67B rotatably supported at the other end of 7A via a second connecting pin 68B.
ここに、第 2キーュニット 4 7の第 2支持板 9上に配設された複数の各キースィ ヅチ 1 0に対応するメンブレンスィヅチに接続された信号線 6 9は、第 8図に示す ように、第 2支持板 9に形成された中空状の周壁部材 5 6から第 2ベース板 8に形 成された中空状の周壁部材 2 4、 軸受部材 1 8、 軸受 1 8 B、 軸受部材 1 4、 第 1 ベース板 5の周壁部材 2 3を経てアーム支持部 2 5まで揷通案内されており、また、 第 1キ一ュニット 3 7の第 1支持板 6上に配設された複数の各キ一スィツチ 7に 対応するメンブレンスィツチに接続された信号線（図示せず） は、 直接中空状の周 壁部材 2 3からアーム支持部 2 5まで揷通案内されている。 Here, each of a plurality of key switches arranged on the second support plate 9 of the second key unit 47 is As shown in FIG. 8, the signal line 69 connected to the membrane switch corresponding to the switch 10 is connected to the second base plate 8 from the hollow peripheral wall member 56 formed on the second support plate 9. The formed hollow peripheral wall member 24, bearing member 18, bearing 18 B, bearing member 14, through the peripheral wall member 23 of the first base plate 5, are guided through to the arm support portion 25. The signal lines (not shown) connected to the membrane switches corresponding to the plurality of key switches 7 provided on the first support plate 6 of the first unit 37 are directly hollow. From the peripheral wall member 23 to the arm support portion 25.
そして、第 2キーュニヅト 4 7からの信号線と第 1キーュニット 3 7からの信号 線とは、 アーム支持部 2 5にてまとめられ、第 1アーム部材 6 7 Aから第 2アーム 部材 6 7 Bまで案内されている。このように案内される信号線は、第 2アーム部材 6 7 Bの一面に設けられたコネクタ部材 7 0 (第 5図（A)参照） に接続されてい る。  Then, the signal line from the second key unit 47 and the signal line from the first key unit 37 are combined by the arm support portion 25, and the signal lines from the first arm member 67A to the second arm member 67B You are being guided. The signal line guided in this manner is connected to a connector member 70 (see FIG. 5 (A)) provided on one surface of the second arm member 67B.
また、 コントロール部 6 2において、第 1キ一ボ一ドュニヅ ト 3の側端縁に対向 する面には、 2つの突起 7 1が形成されており、各突起 7 1は第 1キーボードュニ Vト 3の第 1支持板 6における周壁部材 4 6に形成された位置決め孔 （図示せず） に対して、 着脱可能に嵌合される。 これにより、 コントロール部 6 2は、 第 1キ一 ボードュニット 3に対して着脱可能に並設される。 また、 コントロール部 6 2の端 面にはコネクタ部材 7 2が設けられており、 かかるコネクタ部材 7 2は、第 2ァ一 ム部材 6 7 Bのコネクタ部材 7 0に接続される。  In the control unit 62, two projections 71 are formed on a surface facing the side edge of the first keyboard unit 3, and each projection 71 is a first keyboard unit V3. It is detachably fitted into a positioning hole (not shown) formed in the peripheral wall member 46 of the first support plate 6. As a result, the control unit 62 is removably juxtaposed with the first key board unit 3. Further, a connector member 72 is provided on an end face of the control portion 62, and the connector member 72 is connected to the connector member 70 of the second arm member 67B.
前記したように、コントロール部 6 2の各突起 7 1は第 1キ一ボ一ドュニット 3 の周壁部材 4 6における位置決め孔に対して着脱可能に嵌合されており、 また、 コ ントロール部 6 2のコネクタ部材 7 2と第 2アーム部材 6 7 Bのコネクタ部材 7 0とは接離可能であるから、 コント口一ル部 6 2は、第 1キ一ボ一ドュニット 3に 対して着脱可能に構成されており、これにより P D A等の各種の携帯電子機器に対 応してコントロール部 6 2を複数用意しておけば、コントロール部 6 2のみを交換 することにより、同一のキーボード 1を使用して各種の携帯電子機器にデータ入力 を行うことができ、携帯電子機器に対応してキ一ボ一ド 1を購入する無駄を排して ユーザの負担を軽減することができる。 また、 キーボード 1の製造者は、 各種携帯 電子機器毎にキーボ一ド 1を製造する必要がなくなり、複数種類のキーボード製造 PC漏 3/07028 As described above, each projection 71 of the control portion 62 is detachably fitted to the positioning hole of the peripheral wall member 46 of the first keyboard unit 3, and the control portion 62 Since the connector member 72 of the second arm member 67 and the connector member 70 of the second arm member 67B can be connected to and separated from each other, the control port 62 can be detachably attached to the first keyboard unit 3. If multiple control units 62 are prepared for various portable electronic devices such as PDAs, the same keyboard 1 can be used by replacing only the control unit 62. Thus, data can be input to various portable electronic devices, and the burden on the user can be reduced by eliminating the waste of purchasing the keyboard 1 corresponding to the portable electronic device. Also, the manufacturer of the keyboard 1 does not need to manufacture the keyboard 1 for each type of portable electronic device. PC leak 3/07028
34  34
に必要な投資費用や管理費用を低減することができる。 Investment costs and management costs required for the system can be reduced.
続いて、前記のように構成されたアーム部材 6 7の作用について第 5図及び第 6 図に基づき説明する。 第 6図は自在アームの各種の使用状態を示す説明図である。 第 5図に示すように、 自在アーム 6 7において、 その第 1アーム部 6 7 Aの一端 は、 周壁部材 2 3の背面側（非操作者側） に形成されたアーム支持部 2 5にて第 1 連結ピン 6 8 Aを介して回動可能に支持されており、 また、第 1アーム部材 6 7 A の他端には第 2アーム部材 6 7 Bが第 2連結ピン 6 8 Bを介して回動可能に支持 されている。 また、 コントロール部 6 2は、前記したように、 第 1キーボードュニ ヅ ト 3に対して着脱可能に構成されていることから、 コントロール部 6 2は、 自在 アーム 6 7における回動自在性を利用して各種の使用形態で使用することができ る。  Next, the operation of the arm member 67 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing various states of use of the universal arm. As shown in FIG. 5, one end of the first arm portion 67 A of the universal arm 67 is connected to an arm support portion 25 formed on the back side (non-operator side) of the peripheral wall member 23. The first arm member 67A is rotatably supported via a first connecting pin 68A.The second arm member 67B is connected to the other end of the first arm member 67A via a second connecting pin 68B. It is supported rotatably. Further, as described above, since the control section 62 is configured to be detachable from the first keyboard unit 3, the control section 62 utilizes the rotatable freedom of the universal arm 67. It can be used in various usage forms.
例えば、第 6図に示すように、 コントロール部 6 2の各突起 7 1を周壁部材 4 6 の位置決め孔から外して、コント口一ル部 6 2をキ一ボ一ド 1の長手方向に配置す ることにより、 第 6図に示す形態 (A)の状態で使用することができる。 また、 形 態（A)の状態から第 1アーム部材 6 7 Aを第 1連結ピン 6 8 Aを中心に時計方向 に回動させると、 コント口一ル部 6 2をキーボード 1から離間した形態（ B )の状 態で使用することができる。更に、形態 （B ) の状態から第 1アーム部材 6 7 Aを 連結ピン 6 8 Aを中心として更に時計方向に回動させて、キーボード 1の長手方向 の略中央位置で且つキーボード 1の側緣（操作側と反対側の側縁）に近接させた形 態 （C ) の状態で使用することができる。  For example, as shown in FIG. 6, each projection 71 of the control portion 62 is removed from the positioning hole of the peripheral wall member 46, and the control portion 62 is arranged in the longitudinal direction of the keyboard 1. By doing so, it can be used in the state of form (A) shown in FIG. When the first arm member 67A is rotated clockwise around the first connecting pin 68A from the state of the state (A), the control panel 62 is separated from the keyboard 1. It can be used in the condition (B). Further, the first arm member 67 A is further rotated clockwise about the connecting pin 68 A from the state of the form (B), so that the first arm member 67 A is substantially at the center position in the longitudinal direction of the keyboard 1 and the side of the keyboard 1. It can be used in the state of (C) close to (the side edge opposite to the operation side).
ここに、コントロール部 6 2のコネクタ部材 6 4に P D A 7 3の接続端子を接続 するとともに、背もたれ部材 6 6により P D A 7 3を傾斜した状態で支持し、第 6 図における形態（B )の状態で使用する場合が第 9図に示されている。また同様に、 コントロール部 6 2のコネクタ部材 6 4に P D A 7 3の接続端子を接続するとと もに、背もたれ部材 6 6により P D A 7 3を傾斜した状態で支持し、第 6図におけ る形態 （C ) の状態で使用する場合が第 1 0図に示されている。  Here, the connection terminal of the PDA 73 is connected to the connector member 64 of the control section 62, and the PDA 73 is supported in an inclined state by the back member 66, and the state of the form (B) in FIG. Fig. 9 shows the case of using it. Similarly, the connection terminal of the PDA 73 is connected to the connector member 64 of the control section 62, and the PDA 73 is supported in an inclined state by the back member 66. FIG. 10 shows the case of using in the state of (C).
前記したように、コントロール部 6 2を第 1キ一ボードュニヅト 3から着脱可能 に構成し、且つ、 コントロール部 6 2と第 1キーボードュニヅト 3とを自在アーム 6 7により連結するように構成したので、 自在アーム 6 7により許容される範囲で P 漏謂 28 As described above, the control unit 62 is configured to be detachable from the first keyboard unit 3, and the control unit 62 is connected to the first keyboard unit 3 by the free arm 67. As a result, within the allowable range of the universal arm 6 7 P so-called 28
35  35
コントロール部 6 2とキーボード 1との配置関係を自在に変更することができる。 従って、キーボード 1に対する P D A 7 3の配置位置をキーボード使用者の所望す る位置に自在に変更して操作性をより向上することができる。 The arrangement relationship between the control unit 62 and the keyboard 1 can be freely changed. Therefore, the arrangement of the PDA 73 with respect to the keyboard 1 can be freely changed to a position desired by the keyboard user, so that the operability can be further improved.
続いて、前記のように構成された自在アーム 6 7において、第 1アーム部材 6 7 Aとアーム支持部 2 5とを連結する第 1連結ピン 6 8 Aの連結構造、及び、第 1ァ 一ム部材 6 7 Aと第 2アーム部材 6 7 Bとを連結する第 2連結ピン 6 8 Bの連結 構造について、 第 1 1図に基づき説明する。 第 1 1図は第 4図 （B ) に示す状態、 及び、 第 6図における形態（C) の状態をキーボード 1の背面側から見て模式的に 示す説明図である。  Subsequently, in the universal arm 67 configured as described above, the connecting structure of the first connecting pin 68A for connecting the first arm member 67A and the arm supporting portion 25, and the first arm The connecting structure of the second connecting pin 68B for connecting the arm member 67A and the second arm member 67B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the state shown in FIG. 4 (B) and the state of the form (C) in FIG. 6 when viewed from the back side of the keyboard 1.
ここに、 第 1 1図において、 第 2アーム部材 6 7 Bの厚さ Hは、 コントロール部 6 2のコネクタ部材 7 2に接続するためのコネクタ部材 7 0を設ける必要性があ ること等の制約上、 キ一ボード 1の厚さ h (第 1ペース板 5、 第 2ベース板 8の底 面とキートップ 3 4の頂面との間の厚さ） よりも、 大きい。従って、 キーボード 1 は、 第 4図 （B )、 ( C) に示す状態で使用されるものではないが、 かかる状態で は、 キーボ一ド 1における各キ一スィツチ 7、 1 0の頂面がなす面は、 キーボード 1の設置面に平行な状態とはならず、 設置面に対して若干傾斜した面となる。 かかる事情を勘案し、本実施形態にかかるキーボード 1では、実際にキーボード 1が使用される状態においてキ一ボード 1の底面（第 1及び第 2ベース板 5、 8の 底面）と第 2アーム部材 6 7 Bの底部とが同一面となるように第 1連結ピン 6 8 A 及び第 2連結ピン 6 8 Bの連結角度を傾斜させている。  Here, in FIG. 11, the thickness H of the second arm member 67 B is determined by the necessity of providing a connector member 70 for connecting to the connector member 72 of the control part 62. Due to restrictions, the thickness is larger than the thickness h of the key board 1 (the thickness between the bottom surface of the first pace plate 5, the second base plate 8 and the top surface of the key top 34). Therefore, the keyboard 1 is not used in the state shown in FIGS. 4B and 4C, but in such a state, the top surfaces of the key switches 7 and 10 on the keyboard 1 are not used. The plane to be formed is not parallel to the installation surface of the keyboard 1, but is slightly inclined with respect to the installation surface. In consideration of such circumstances, in the keyboard 1 according to the present embodiment, the bottom surface of the keyboard 1 (the bottom surfaces of the first and second base plates 5, 8) and the second arm member in a state where the keyboard 1 is actually used. The connection angle of the first connection pin 68 A and the second connection pin 68 B is inclined such that the bottom of 67 B is flush with the bottom.
具体的には、第 1 1図において、 アーム支持部 2 5と第 1アーム部材 6 7 Aとを 回動可能に連結する第 1連結ピン 6 8 Aは、垂線 Lに対して角度 Aだけ傾斜されて おり、 また、 第 1アーム部材 6 7 Aと第 2アーム部材 6 7 Bとを回動可能に連結す る第 2連結ピン 6 8 Bは、垂線 Lに対して角度 Bだけ傾斜されている。 ここに、 角 度 Bは角度 Aよりも大きく設定されている。  More specifically, in FIG. 11, the first connecting pin 68 A for rotatably connecting the arm supporting portion 25 and the first arm member 67 A is inclined by an angle A with respect to the perpendicular L. Further, the second connecting pin 68 B for rotatably connecting the first arm member 67 A and the second arm member 67 B is inclined by an angle B with respect to the perpendicular L. I have. Here, the angle B is set to be larger than the angle A.
このように第 1連結ピン 6 8 Aを垂線 Lに対して角度 Aだけ傾斜させるととも に、第 2連結ピン 6 8 Bを垂線 Lに対して角度 Bだけ傾斜させることにより、第 2 アーム部材 6 7 Bは、 第 6図に示す形態 ( C) の状態にコントロール部 6 2を配置 した際に、 全体で傾斜された角度 （A + B ) に基づき、 厚さ （H— h)分上方へ移 動させることとなる。 これにより、 コントロール部 6 2の底部（コントロール部 6 2の底面は第 2アーム部材 6 7 Bの下端面と同一面となるように配置されている） とキーボード 1の底面とが同一面となる。 As described above, the first connecting pin 68 A is inclined by the angle A with respect to the perpendicular L, and the second connecting pin 68 B is inclined by the angle B with respect to the perpendicular L. When the control section 62 is arranged in the state shown in Fig. 6 (C), the 6 7B is raised by the thickness (H-h) based on the angle (A + B) of the overall inclination. Move to Will be moved. As a result, the bottom of the control unit 62 (the bottom surface of the control unit 62 is disposed so as to be flush with the lower end surface of the second arm member 67B) and the bottom surface of the keyboard 1 are flush with each other. .
従って、第 2アーム部材 6 7の厚さ Hやコントロール部 6 2の厚さが、 キ一ボ一 ドの厚さ hと同一でない場合においても、第 1連結ビン 6 8 A、第 2連結ピン 6 8 Bの連結角度を傾斜させることにより、キーボ一ド 1の使用時に第 2アーム部材 6 7 Bやコントロール部 6 2の底部とキ一ボード 1の底面とを同一面にしてキーボ ―ド 1における各キースィツチ 7、 1 0の頂面がなす面を、 キ一ボード 1の設置面 に平行な状態にすることができ、キーボ一ド 1におけるキー操作性が低下してしま うことを防止できる。  Therefore, even when the thickness H of the second arm member 67 and the thickness of the control section 62 are not the same as the thickness h of the keyboard, the first connection bin 68A and the second connection pin When the keyboard 1 is used, the bottom of the second arm member 67B and the control section 62 and the bottom of the keyboard 1 are flush with each other when the keyboard 1 is used by tilting the connection angle of the keyboard 8 so that the keyboard 1 can be used. The surface formed by the top surfaces of the respective key switches 7 and 10 can be made parallel to the installation surface of the keyboard 1, thereby preventing the key operability of the keyboard 1 from deteriorating. .
尚、前記の例では、第 1連結ピン 6 8 A及び第 2連結ピン 6 8 Bの連結角度を傾 斜させるように構成しているが、 これに限定されることはなく、 いずれか一方の連 結ピンの連結角度を傾斜させてもよい。  In the above example, the connection angle between the first connection pin 68A and the second connection pin 68B is configured to be inclined.However, the present invention is not limited to this. The connecting angle of the connecting pin may be inclined.
( 2 ) 第 2実施形態  (2) Second embodiment
以下、本発明に係る折畳可能なキーボードについて本発明を具体ィヒした第 2実施 形態に基づき図面を参照しつつ詳細に説明する。先ず、本第 2実施形態に係るキ一 ボードの概略構成について第 1 4図に基づき説明する。第 1 4図は折畳可能なキ一 ボ一ドを模式的に示す分解斜視図である。  Hereinafter, a foldable keyboard according to the present invention will be described in detail based on a second embodiment of the present invention with reference to the drawings. First, a schematic configuration of a keyboard according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view schematically showing a foldable keyboard.
第 1 4図において、 キーボ一ド 1 0 1は、基本的に、 回動連結部 1 0 2を介して 相互に回動可能に連結された第 1キーボードュニット 1 0 3及び第 2キ一ボード ユニット 1 0 4から構成されている。第 1キーボードュニヅト 1 0 3は、第 1ベ一 ス板 1 0 5、第 1ベース板 1 0 5上で水平方向に回動可能に支持された第 1支持板 1 0 6、及び、第 1支持板 1 0 6上に配設された複数個のキ一スィツチ 1 0 7から 構成されている。 また、 第 2キーボードュニヅト 1 0 4は、 第 2ベース板 1 0 8、 第 2ベース板 1 0 8上で水平方向に回動可能に支持された第 2支持板 1 0 9、及び、 第 2支持板 1 0 9上に配設された複数個のキ一スィッチ 1 1 0から構成されてい る。  In FIG. 14, the keyboard 101 is basically composed of a first keyboard unit 103 and a second key unit rotatably connected to each other via a rotation connection unit 102. It consists of a board unit 104. The first keyboard unit 103 includes a first base plate 105, a first support plate 106 supported on the first base plate 105 so as to be rotatable in a horizontal direction, and And a plurality of key switches 107 arranged on the first support plate 106. The second keyboard unit 104 includes a second base plate 108, a second support plate 109 supported on the second base plate 108 so as to be rotatable in a horizontal direction, and It is composed of a plurality of key switches 110 arranged on the second support plate 109.
ここで、 先ず、 回動連結部 1 0 2の構成について説明する。第 1ベース板 1 0 5 はアルミ等の金属製薄板から形成されており、第 1ベース板 1 0 5の側端部 1 1 1 (第 1 4図における右側端部） における 2つの隅部 1 1 2には、 それそれ回動連結 部 1 0 2の一部を構成する樹脂製の軸受部材 1 1 3、 1 1 4が設けられている。軸 受部材 1 1 3には、軸受孔 1 1 3 Aが形成された 2つの軸受 1 1 3 Bが離間して設 けられている。 また、 軸受部材 1 1 4においても同様に、軸受孔 1 1 4 Aが形成さ れた 2つの軸受 1 1 4 Bが離間して設けられている。 Here, first, the configuration of the rotation connecting portion 102 will be described. The first base plate 105 is formed of a thin metal plate such as aluminum, and the side end 1 1 1 of the first base plate 105 is formed. At the two corners 1 12 (the right end in FIG. 14), resin bearings 113, 114 constituting part of the rotational connection 102 are provided. Have been. In the bearing member 113, two bearings 113B having a bearing hole 113A formed are spaced apart. Similarly, also in the bearing member 114, two bearings 114B having a bearing hole 114A are provided separately.
第 2ベ一ス板 1 0 8は、第 1ベ一ス板 1 0 5と同様、 アルミ等の金属薄板から形 成されており、 第 2ベース板 1 0 8の側端部 1 1 5 (第 1 4図における左側端部） における 2つの隅部 1 1 6には、それそれ回動連結部 1 0 2の一部を構成する樹脂 製の軸受部材 1 1 7、 1 1 8が設けられている。軸受部材 1 1 7には、 軸受孔 1 1 7 Aが形成された 1つの軸受 1 1 7 Bが設けられている。 また、軸受部材 1 1 8に おいても同様に、軸受孔 1 1 8 Aが形成された 1つの軸受 1 1 8 Bが設けられてい る。 そして、 軸受 1 1 7 Bは各軸受 1 1 3 Bの間に嵌入されるとともに、 各軸受け 1 1 3 Bの軸受孔 1 1 3 Aと軸受 1 1 7 Bの軸受孔 1 1 7 Aとが一直線に配置さ れ、 また、 軸受 1 1 8 Bは各軸受 1 1 4 Bの間に嵌入されるとともに、 各軸受 1 1 4 Bの軸受孔 1 1 4 Aと軸受 1 1 8 Bの軸受孔 1 1 8 Aとが一直線に配置される。 このように一直線に配置された各軸受孔 1 1 3 A、 1 1 7 A、 1 1 4 A、 1 1 8 A に対して、 支持軸 1 1 9が揷嵌される。 これにより、 支持軸 1 1 9を介して第 1ベ —ス板 1 0 5と第 2ベ一ス板 1 0 8とは、相互に回動可能に支持される。かかる支 持軸 1 1 9に対しては、 円筒状の形状を有し、 中心部に摺動孔 1 2 0が形成される とともに、周囲にギア歯部 1 2 1が同心円状に形成された摺動部材 1 2 2が、摺動 孔 1 2 0を介して摺動可能に揷嵌されている。かかる摺動部材 1 2 2は、第 1キ一 ボードュニヅト 1 0 3と第 2キーボードュニヅト 1 0 4とを、相互に同期して回動 させるための部材であり、 その作用については後述する。  Like the first base plate 105, the second base plate 108 is made of a thin metal plate such as aluminum, and the second base plate 108 has a side end 1 15 ( At the two corners 1 16 at the left end in FIG. 14), resin bearing members 117 and 118 which respectively constitute a part of the rotary connecting portion 102 are provided. ing. The bearing member 1 17 is provided with one bearing 1 17 B having a bearing hole 1 17 A formed therein. Similarly, in the bearing member 118, one bearing 118B in which a bearing hole 118A is formed is provided. The bearings 11 17 B are inserted between the bearings 11 13 B, and the bearing holes 11 13 A of the bearings 11 13 B and the bearing holes 11 17 A of the bearings 11 B are formed. The bearings are arranged in a straight line, and the bearings 118B are fitted between the bearings 114B, and the bearing holes 114A of the bearings 114B and the bearing holes of the bearings 118B 1 18 A are arranged in a straight line. The support shafts 119 are fitted into the bearing holes 1 13 A, 1 17 A, 1 1 4 A, and 1 18 A thus arranged in a straight line. As a result, the first base plate 105 and the second base plate 108 are rotatably supported via the support shaft 119. The support shaft 119 has a cylindrical shape, a sliding hole 120 is formed at the center, and a gear tooth portion 121 is formed concentrically around the periphery. A sliding member 122 is slidably fitted through a sliding hole 120. The sliding member 122 is a member for rotating the first keyboard unit 103 and the second keyboard unit 104 in synchronization with each other, and the operation thereof will be described later. I do.
尚、軸受部材 1 1 4には、 これと一体に中空状の周壁部材 1 2 3が形成されてお り、 また、 軸受部材 1 1 8には、 これと一体に中空状の周壁部材 1 2 4が形成され ている。周壁部材 1 2 4の内部には、第 2キーボードュニヅト 1 0 4に設けられた 各キースイッチ 1 1 0とコントロール部 1 6 2 (後述する） とを接続するための信 号線 1 6 9 (後述する） が揷通されており、 かかる信号線 1 6 9は、 中空状の軸受 部材 1 1 8、軸受 1 1 8 Bから外方に案内されるとともに支持軸 1 1 9に卷回され、 P03 07028 The bearing member 114 has a hollow peripheral wall member 123 integrally formed therewith. The bearing member 118 has a hollow peripheral wall member 122 integrally formed therewith. 4 is formed. A signal line 16 for connecting each key switch 110 provided on the second keyboard unit 104 to a control section 16 2 (described later) is provided inside the peripheral wall member 124. 9 (to be described later), and the signal line 16 9 is guided outward from the hollow bearing member 1 18 and the bearing 1 18 B and wound around the support shaft 1 19. And P03 07028
38  38
更に中空状の軸受部材 1 1 4から周壁部材 1 2 3に揷通案内される。 また、周壁部 材 1 2 3の内部には、第 1キーボードュニヅト 1 0 3に設けられた各キ一スィツチ 1 0 7とコントロール部 1 6 2とを接続するための信号線（図示せず）が揷通され ており、 かかる信号線は、 周壁部材 1 2 4を介して第 2キーボードュニヅト 1 0 4 側から案内されてくる信号線 1 6 9と合わせて、後述する自在アーム 1 6 7 (後述 する） に揷通案内される。 また、 周壁部材 1 2 3の背面側に形成されたアーム支持 部 1 2 5は中空状に形成されており、 自在アーム 1 6 7を回動可能に支持するとと もに、前記のように案内されてくる各信号線を自在アーム 1 6 7に揷通案内するも のである。 Further, it is guided from the hollow bearing member 114 to the peripheral wall member 123. Also, inside the peripheral wall member 123, signal lines for connecting the respective key switches 107 provided on the first keyboard unit 103 to the control unit 162 (see FIG. 1). (Not shown), and such a signal line will be described later together with a signal line 169 guided from the second keyboard unit 104 via the peripheral wall member 124. It is guided through a free arm 1 6 7 (described later). Further, the arm support portion 125 formed on the back side of the peripheral wall member 123 is formed in a hollow shape, and supports the universal arm 167 so as to be rotatable and guides as described above. Each of the incoming signal lines is guided to the free arm 167.
第 1ペース板 1 0 5において、側端部 1 1 1とは反対側の側端部 1 2 6の近傍で 略中央位置には、 ネジ受部 1 2 7が形成されており、 このネジ受部 1 2 7には、 第 1支持板 1 0 6のネジ孔 1 2 8に遊嵌されるネジ 1 2 9が締結される。これにより、 第 1支持板 1 0 6はネジ 1 2 9及びネジ受 1 2 7を支点として第 1ベース板 1 0 5上で水平方向に回動可能に取り付けられる。また、第 2ペース板 1 0 8において、 側端部 1 1 5とは反対側の側端部 1 0 8 aより少し内側に入った（後述するコント ロール部 1 6 2の幅分だけ内側の）略中央位置には、 ネジ受部 1 3 0が形成されて おり、 このネジ受部 1 3 0には、 第 2支持板 1 0 9のネジ孔 1 3 1に遊嵌されるネ ジ 1 3 2が締結される。 これにより、 第 2支持板 1 0 9はネジ 1 3 2、 ネジ受部 1 3 1を支点として第 2ベース板 1 0 8上で水平方向に回動可能に取り付けられる。 第 1キーボードュニット 1 0 3における第 1支持板 1 0 6はアルミ等の金属薄 板から形成されており、 かかる第 1支持板 1 0 6上には、 左手で操作される所定数 のキースィヅチ 1 0 7が配設されている。尚、 左手で操作されるキ一スィツチ 1 0 7の数は、 国際規格 ( I S O 2 1 2 6及び I S O 2 5 3 0 ) に基づいて定められて いる。  In the first pace plate 105, a screw receiving portion 127 is formed substantially at the center near the side end portion 126 opposite to the side end portion 111, and the screw receiving portion 127 is formed. A screw 1 29 loosely fitted into the screw hole 1 28 of the first support plate 106 is fastened to the portion 127. As a result, the first support plate 106 is mounted on the first base plate 105 so as to be rotatable in the horizontal direction with the screw 12 9 and the screw receiver 127 as a fulcrum. Also, in the second pace plate 108, it entered slightly inside the side end 108 a opposite to the side end 115 (the inner part by the width of the control part 16 2 described later). A screw receiving portion 130 is formed at a substantially central position. The screw receiving portion 130 has a screw 1 loosely fitted into a screw hole 13 1 of the second support plate 109. 32 is concluded. Thus, the second support plate 109 is mounted on the second base plate 108 so as to be rotatable in the horizontal direction with the screw 132 and the screw receiving portion 131 serving as a fulcrum. The first support plate 106 of the first keyboard unit 103 is formed of a thin metal plate such as aluminum, and a predetermined number of key switches operated by the left hand are placed on the first support plate 106. 107 are provided. The number of switches 107 operated with the left hand is determined based on international standards (ISO2126 and ISO2530).
また、第 1支持板 1 0 6には 1つのキースィツチ 1 0 7に対応して 4個の係止部 1 3 3がプレス加工等により一体に形成されており、かかる第 1支持板 1 0 6上に は、 図示しない 3層構造を有するメンプレンスィツチ（可動電極を有する上側シ一 ト、固定電極を有する下側シート及び上側シートと下側シート間に介挿され可動電 極と固定電極とを離間させるスィツチング孔を有するスぺーサシートからなる）が 配置されている。 尚、 各係止部 1 3 3は、 メンブレンスイッチに形成された孔から 上方へ突出されている。 The first support plate 106 is integrally formed with four locking portions 133 corresponding to one key switch 107 by press working or the like. On the top are a membrane switch (not shown) having a three-layer structure (an upper sheet having a movable electrode, a lower sheet having a fixed electrode, and a movable electrode and a fixed electrode interposed between the upper sheet and the lower sheet. Consisting of a spacer sheet having a switching hole for separating Are located. Note that each locking portion 133 projects upward from a hole formed in the membrane switch.
そして、 各キ一スィヅチ 1 0 7は、 基本的に、 キートヅプ 1 3 4、 キ一トヅプ 1 3 4の上下動を案内する一対のリンク部材 1 3 5、キートップ 1 3 4を上方へ付勢 するとともにメンブレンスィツチの可動電極と固定電極からなるスィツチング部 に対応してメンブレンスィヅチ上に配置されたラバ一スプリング 1 3 6から構成 される。 ここに、 一対のリンク部材 1 3 5の各上端部はキートヅプ 1 3 4の下面に 可動状態で連結され、また、各下端部は係止部 1 3 3に可動状態で係止されている。 非押下時にキ一トップ 1 3 4はラバ一スプリング 1 3 6の付勢力を介して上方へ 付勢されて非押下位置に保持されており、ラバ一スプリング 1 3 6の付勢力に抗し てキ一トップ 1 3 4を押下した際には、ラバ一スプリング 1 3 6がメンブレンスィ ツチの可動電極を押圧してスぺ一ザのスィヅチング孔で固定電極に当接させ、 これ により所定のスィツチング動作が行われる。前記したキースィツチ 1 0 7と第 1支 持板 1 0 6とは、 第 1キーュニット 1 3 7を構成する。 尚、 キ一スィヅチ 1 0 7の 構成については公知であり、 ここでは詳細な説明を省略する。  Each key switch 107 basically urges the key top 13 4, a pair of link members 1 35 to guide the vertical movement of the key top 134, and the key top 1 34 upward. In addition, it is composed of a rubber spring 136 arranged on the membrane switch corresponding to a switching part composed of a movable electrode and a fixed electrode of the membrane switch. Here, each upper end of the pair of link members 135 is movably connected to the lower surface of the key top 134, and each lower end is movably locked to the locking portion 133. When the key top 1 3 4 is not pressed, the key top 1 3 4 is urged upward via the urging force of the rubber spring 1 36 and is held at the non-pressed position, and is opposed to the urging force of the rubber spring 1 3 6. When the key top 1 3 4 is pressed, the rubber spring 1 36 presses the movable electrode of the membrane switch and abuts the fixed electrode through the switching hole of the switch, thereby providing a predetermined switching. The operation is performed. The above-mentioned key switch 107 and the first support plate 106 constitute a first key unit 1337. The configuration of the key switch 107 is publicly known, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.
第 1支持板 1 0 6の一側 （第 1 4図における右側） は、 その回動支点 （ネジ孔 1 2 8に遊嵌されたネジ 1 2 9及びネジ受 1 2 7 )を中心とする回転半径に合致する 円弧面 1 3 8が形成されており、 また、 円弧面 1 3 8の内側には、 円弧状の長溝 1 3 9が形成されている。長溝 1 3 9にはネジ 1 4 0が遊嵌され、 そのネジ 1 4 0は 第 1ベ一ス板 1 0 5に形成されたネジ受部 1 4 1に締結されている。 ここに、 長溝 One side (the right side in FIG. 14) of the first support plate 106 is centered on its rotation fulcrum (the screw 12 9 loosely fitted into the screw hole 1 28 and the screw receiver 1 27). An arc-shaped surface 138 corresponding to the turning radius is formed, and an arc-shaped long groove 139 is formed inside the arc-shaped surface 138. A screw 140 is loosely fitted in the long groove 139, and the screw 140 is fastened to a screw receiving portion 141 formed on the first base plate 105. Where the long groove
1 3 9とネジ 1 4 0とは、第 1支持板 1 0 6力 s第 1ベース板 1 0 5上で水平方向に 回動する際に、 その回動動作が安定して行われるように案内する作用を行う。 また、第 1支持板 1 0 6にて円弧面 1 3 8が形成された側には、 円弧面 1 3 8と 同一曲率半径を有する円弧面 1 4 2を有し、その円弧面 1 4 2には摺動部材 1 2 2 のギア歯部 1 2 1に嚙合するギア歯 1 4 3が形成された第 1ギア部材 1 4 4が配 設されている。更に、 第 1ギア部材 1 4 4の円弧面 1 4 2には、 複数個のロック溝1 39 and the screw 140 are designed so that the first supporting plate 106 forces s when rotating horizontally on the first base plate 105 so that the rotating operation is performed stably. It acts as a guide. On the side of the first support plate 106 where the arc surface 1 38 is formed, there is an arc surface 14 2 having the same radius of curvature as the arc surface 13 8, and the arc surface 14 2 Is provided with a first gear member 144 formed with gear teeth 144 that match the gear teeth portion 121 of the sliding member 122. Further, a plurality of lock grooves are provided on the arc surface 144 of the first gear member 144.
1 4 5が形成されており、かかるロック溝 1 4 5は後述するロック機構 1 5 7の一 部を構成する。 The lock groove 144 forms a part of a lock mechanism 157 described later.
尚、 前記のように、 第 1支持板 1 0 6の円弧面 1 3 8と第 1ギア部材 1 4 4の円 03 07028 In addition, as described above, the arc surface 13 8 of the first support plate 10 6 and the circle of the first gear member 14 4 03 07028
40  40
弧面 1 4 2とが同一の曲率半径を有するように構成したので、両円弧面 1 3 8、 1 4 2が相互に合致することとなり、 これにより各円弧面 1 3 8、 1 4 2間でずれが 発生することなく、第 1キ一ュニット 1 3 7を見栄え良くすることができる。また、 第 1ギア部材 1 4 4は、 第 1支持板 1 0 6に配設する際に、 ネジ 1 4 0、 長溝 1 3 9を上方から覆うように配設されるので、 ネジ 1 4 0、 長溝 1 3 9を外側から見え なくして第 1キーュニット 1 3 7を見栄え良く構成できる。 Since the arc surfaces 1 and 2 are configured to have the same radius of curvature, the two arc surfaces 1 3 8 and 1 4 2 coincide with each other. The first unit 13 7 can be made to look good without causing any slippage. Further, when the first gear member 144 is disposed on the first support plate 106, the first gear member 144 is disposed so as to cover the screw 140 and the long groove 139 from above. However, the first key unit 1337 can be formed with a good appearance by making the long groove 1339 invisible from the outside.
第 1支持板 1 0 6の周囲の一部を除いて、周壁部材 1 4 6が設けられており、 か かる周壁部材 1 4 6は、第 1支持板 1 0 6を第 1ベース板 1 0 5上に配置した際に、 第 1ベース板 1 0 5に設けられた周壁部材 1 2 3と協働して、円弧面 1 3 8を除く 第 1支持板 1 0 6の周囲を囲む周壁部材を構成する。  Except for a part of the periphery of the first support plate 106, a peripheral wall member 144 is provided. The peripheral wall member 144 includes the first support plate 106 and the first base plate 100. 5 when arranged on the first base plate 105, cooperates with the peripheral wall member 123 provided on the first base plate 105, excluding the circular arc surface 1 38, the peripheral wall member surrounding the periphery of the first support plate 106. Is configured.
更に、 第 2キーボードユニット 1 0 4おける第 2支持板 1 0 9は、前記第 1支持 板 1◦ 6と同様、 アルミ等の金属薄板から形成されており、 かかる第 2支持板 1 0 9上には、 右手で操作される所定数のキースィッチ 1 1 0が配設されている。 尚、 右手で操作されるキ一スィツチ 1 1 0の数は、 国際規格（I S O 2 1 2 6及び 2 5 3 0 ) に基づいて定められており、前記第 1支持板 1 0 6上に配設される左手で操 作されるキースイッチ 1 0 7の数よりも多くされている。 ここに、 キースィッチ 1 1 0は、 前記キースィツチ 1 0 7と同様の構成を有しているので、 その構成要素に ついてはキ一スィツチ 1 0 7と同一の番号を付して説明する。  Further, the second support plate 109 in the second keyboard unit 104 is formed of a thin metal plate such as aluminum similarly to the first support plate 1◦6, and is formed on the second support plate 109. Is provided with a predetermined number of key switches 110 operated by the right hand. The number of key switches 110 operated with the right hand is determined based on international standards (ISO 212 and 250), and is arranged on the first support plate 106. The number is greater than the number of key switches 107 operated by the left hand. Here, the key switch 110 has the same configuration as that of the key switch 107, and the components thereof will be described with the same reference numerals as those of the key switch 107.
第 2支持板 1 0 9には 1つのキ一スィツチ 1 1 0に対応して 4個の係止部 1 3 3がプレス加工等により一体に形成されており、 かかる第 2支持板 1 0 9上には、 図示しない 3層構造を有するメンプレンスィヅチ （可動電極を有する上側シート、 固定電極を有する下側シート及び上側シートと下側シート間に介挿され可動電極 と固定電極とを離間させるスィヅチング孔を有するスぺーサシートからなる）が配 置されている。 尚、 各係止部 1 3 3は、 メンブレンスイッチに形成された孔から上 方へ突出されている。  The second support plate 109 is integrally formed with four locking portions 133 corresponding to one key switch 110 by press working or the like. A membrane switch (not shown) having a three-layer structure (an upper sheet having a movable electrode, a lower sheet having a fixed electrode, and a movable electrode and a fixed electrode interposed between the upper sheet and the lower sheet are separated from each other. (Consisting of a spacer sheet having a switching hole to be made). Note that each locking portion 133 protrudes upward from a hole formed in the membrane switch.
そして、 各キ一スィツチ 1 1 0は、 基本的に、 キートップ 1 3 4、 キートヅプ 1 3 4の上下動を案内する一対のリンク部材 1 3 5、キートップ 1 3 4を上方へ付勢 するとともにメンブレンスィヅチの可動電極と固定電極からなるスィツチング部 に対応してメンブレンスイッチ上に配置されたラバースプリング 1 3 6から構成 P03 07028 Each key switch 110 basically urges the key tops 1 3 4 and the pair of link members 1 3 5 and the key tops 1 3 4 that guide the key tops 1 3 4 up and down. And a rubber spring 1 36 arranged on the membrane switch corresponding to the switching part consisting of the movable electrode and the fixed electrode of the membrane switch. P03 07028
41  41
される。 ここに、一対のリンク部材 1 3 5の各上端部はキ一トップ 1 3 4の下面に 可動状態で連結され、また、各下端部は係止部 1 3 3に可動状態で係止されている。 非押下時にキートップ 1 3 4はラバースプリング 1 3 6の付勢力を介して上方へ 付勢されて非押下位置に保持さており、ラバ一スプリング 1 3 6の付勢力に抗して キートップ 1 3 4を押下した際には、ラバ一スプリング 1 3 6がメンブレンスイツ チの可動電極を押圧してスぺ一ザのスィヅチング孔で固定電極に当接させ、 これに より所定のスィツチング動作が行われる。前記したキースィツチ 1 1 0と第 2支持 板 1 0 9とは、 第 2キーュニット 1 4 7を構成する。 Is done. Here, each upper end of the pair of link members 135 is movably connected to the lower surface of the key top 134, and each lower end is movably locked to the locking portion 133. I have. When the key top 1 3 4 is not pressed, the key top 1 3 4 is urged upward through the urging force of the rubber spring 1 36 and is held at the non-pressed position. When 3 4 is depressed, the rubber spring 1 36 presses the movable electrode of the membrane switch to abut the fixed electrode through the switching hole of the switcher, thereby performing a predetermined switching operation. Will be The above-mentioned key switch 110 and the second support plate 109 constitute a second key unit 147.
第 2支持板 1 0 9の一側 （第 1 4 における左側） は、 その回動支点 （ネジ孔 1 3 1に遊嵌されたネジ 1 3 2及びネジ受 1 3 0 )を中心とする回転半径に合致する 円弧面 1 4 8が形成されており、 また、 円弧面 1 4 8の内側には、 円弧状の長溝 1 One side (the left side in the 14th) of the second support plate 109 is rotated about its rotation fulcrum (the screw 1332 and the screw receiver 1330 loosely fitted into the screw hole 1331). An arc-shaped surface 1 48 matching the radius is formed, and an arc-shaped long groove 1 is formed inside the arc-shaped surface 1 48.
4 9が形成されている。長溝 1 4 9にはネジ 1 5 0が遊嵌され、 そのネジ 1 5 0は 第 2ペース板 1 0 8に形成されたネジ受部 1 5 1に締結されている。 ここに、長溝 1 4 9とネジ 1 5 0とは、第 2支持板 1 0 9が第 2ベース板 1 0 8上で水平方向に 回動する際に、 その回動動作が安定して行われるように案内する作用を行う。 また、 第 2支持板 1 0 9にて円弧面 1 4 8が形成された側には、 円弧面 1 4 8と 同一曲率半径を有する円弧面 1 5 2を有し、その円弧面 1 5 2には摺動部材 1 2 2 のギア歯部 1 2 1に嚙合するギア歯 1 5 3が形成された第 2ギア部材 1 5 4が配 設されている。 更に、 第 2ギア部材 1 5 4の円弧面 1 5 2には、 複数個のロック溝 1 5 5 (第 1 5図参照） が形成されており、 かかる口ヅク溝 1 5 5は後述する口ッ ク機構 1 5 7の一部を構成する。 4 9 are formed. A screw 150 is loosely fitted in the long groove 149, and the screw 150 is fastened to a screw receiving portion 151 formed on the second pace plate 108. Here, when the second support plate 109 rotates in the horizontal direction on the second base plate 108, the long groove 149 and the screw 150 move stably. It acts to guide you to be heard. On the side of the second support plate 109 where the arc surface 1 48 is formed, there is an arc surface 15 2 having the same radius of curvature as the arc surface 1 48, and the arc surface 1 5 2 Is provided with a second gear member 154 having gear teeth 153 formed on the gear tooth portion 121 of the sliding member 122. Further, a plurality of lock grooves 1555 (see FIG. 15) are formed in the arcuate surface 152 of the second gear member 1554. A part of the lock mechanism 157.
尚、 前記のように、 第 2支持板 1 0 9の円弧面 1 4 8と第 2ギア部材 1 5 4の円 弧面 1 5 2とが同一の曲率半径を有するように構成したので、両円弧面 1 4 8、 1 Note that, as described above, the arc surface 1 48 of the second support plate 109 and the arc surface 15 2 of the second gear member 154 have the same radius of curvature. Arc surface 1 4 8, 1
5 2が相互に合致することとなり、 これにより各円弧面 1 4 8、 1 5 2間でずれが 発生することなく、第 2キ一ュニヅト 1 4 7を見栄え良くすることができる。また、 第 2ギア部材 1 5 4は、 第 2支持板 1 0 9に配設する際に、 ネジ 1 5 0、 長溝 1 4 9を上方から覆うように配設されるので、 ネジ 1 5 0、 長溝 1 4 9を外側から見え なくして第 2キ一ュニット 1 4 7を見栄え良く構成できる。 52 coincide with each other, whereby the second unit 144 can be made to look good without any deviation between the arc surfaces 148 and 152. When the second gear member 154 is disposed on the second support plate 109, the second gear member 154 is disposed so as to cover the screw 150 and the long groove 149 from above. However, the long groove 149 is not visible from the outside, so that the second unit 147 can be formed with a good appearance.
第 2支持板 1 0 9の周囲の一部を除いて、中空状の周壁部材 1 5 6が設けられて おり、 かかる周壁部材 1 5 6は、第 2支持板 1 0 9を第 2ベース板 1 0 8上に配置 した際に、第 2ベース板 1 0 8に設けられた周壁部材 1 2 4と協働して、 円弧面 1 4 8を除く第 2支持板 1 0 9の周囲を囲む周壁部材を構成する。 Except for a part around the second support plate 109, a hollow peripheral wall member 156 is provided. When the second support plate 109 is arranged on the second base plate 108, the peripheral wall member 156 cooperates with the peripheral wall member 124 provided on the second base plate 108. Thus, a peripheral wall member surrounding the second support plate 109 except for the arc surface 148 is formed.
続いて、第 1ベース板 1 0 5と第 2ベース板 1 0 8上で、 それそれ第 1支持板 1 0 6及び第 2支持板 1 0 9を水平方向に回動するにつき、第 1支持板 1 0 6と第 2 支持板 1 0 9とを同期して回動させる同期機構、及び、 同期機構を介して回動され た第 1支持板 1 0 6、第 2支持板 1 0 9をその回動位置でロヅクするロヅク機構に ついて、第 1 5図及び第 1 6図に基づき説明する。第 1 5図は第 1支持板 1 0 6と 第 2支持板 1 0 9の回動動作を同期させる同期機構を拡大して示す説明図であり、 また、第 1 6図は第 1支持板 1 0 6及び第 2支持板 1 0 9を回動させていない状態 から最大回動位置まで回動させた状態に至る一連の状態を示す説明図であり、第 1 6図 （A) は回動させていない状態、 第 1 6図 （B ) は途中まで回動させた状態、 第 1 6図 （C ) は最大回動位置まで回動させた状態を示す。  Subsequently, on the first base plate 105 and the second base plate 108, the first support plate 106 and the second support plate A synchronization mechanism for rotating the plate 106 and the second support plate 109 in synchronization, and a first support plate 106 and a second support plate 109 rotated via the synchronization mechanism. A lock mechanism that locks at the rotation position will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG. FIG. 15 is an enlarged explanatory view showing a synchronizing mechanism for synchronizing the turning operation of the first support plate 106 and the second support plate 109, and FIG. 16 is a first support plate. FIG. 16 is an explanatory view showing a series of states from a state where the first support plate 106 and the second support plate 109 are not rotated to a state where the second support plate 109 is rotated to the maximum rotation position. FIG. 16 (B) shows a state where it has not been moved, FIG. 16 (B) shows a state where it has been rotated halfway, and FIG. 16 (C) shows a state where it has been rotated to the maximum rotation position.
第 1 5図において、第 1ギア部材 1 4 4の円弧面 1 4 2に形成されたギア歯 1 4 3、 及び、 第 2ギア部材 1 5 4の円弧面 1 5 2に形成されたギア歯 1 5 3は、 それ それ支持軸 1 1 9に摺動可能に揷嵌された摺動部材 1 2 2のギア歯部 1 2 1に嚙 合している。  In FIG. 15, the gear teeth 14 3 formed on the arc surface 14 2 of the first gear member 14 4 and the gear teeth formed on the arc surface 15 2 of the second gear member 15 4 The reference numeral 15 3 is engaged with the gear tooth portion 121 of the sliding member 122 slidably fitted to the support shaft 119.
ここに、摺動部材 1 2 2のギア歯部 1 2 1は同心円状に形成されていることから、 摺動部材 1 2 2の中心からギア歯部 1 2 1の先端までの距離は同一にされており、 また、 ギア歯 1 4 3とギア歯 1 5 3は共に円弧面 1 4 2、 1 5 2に形成されている ことから、 ギア歯 1 4 3及びギア歯 1 5 3の先端も円弧状に配置されている。従つ て、 ギア歯部 1 2 1と各ギア歯 1 4 3、 1 5 3との間における嚙合関係は、 第 1 5 図、 第 1 6図に示すように、 均一ではなく浅い部分と深い部分とが発生し、 また、 かかる嚙合関係は、第 1支持板 1 0 6及び第 2支持板 1 0 9が回動することに従い 摺動部材 1 2 2が支持軸 1 1 9上を移動する場合でも変わらない。 しかしながら、 摺動部材 1 2 2のギア歯部 1 2 1と各第 1ギア部材 1 4 4、第 2ギア部材 1 5 4の ギア歯 1 4 3、 1 5 3との間には、摺動部材 1 2 2が支持軸 1 1 9上のどの位置に ある場合においても、常時深い喃合関係が存在しているので、 ギア歯部 1 2 1と各 ギア歯 1 4 3、 1 5 3との嚙合が外れてしまうことはない。 第 1支持板 1 0 6と第 2支持板 1 0 9を回動させていない状態においては、第 1 6図（A) に示すように、 支持板 1 0 6上に配列される各キ一スィツチ 1 0 7と支 持板 1 0 9上に配列される各キ一スィツチ 1 1 0は、通常のキーボードにおけるの と同一のキ一配列関係を有しており、摺動部材 1 2 2のギア歯部 1 2 1と第 1ギア 部材 1 4 4のギア歯 1 4 3との間、及び、 ギア歯部 1 2 1と第 2ギア部材 1 5 4の ギア歯 1 5 3との間には、 第 1 6図 （A) 中上側で浅い嚙合関係が存在し、 下側で 深い嚙合関係が存在する。このようなキ一配列関係の状態でキーボード 1 0 1の操 作を所望する場合には、 勿論この状態でキーボードの操作を行うことができる。 尚、第 1支持板 1 0 6のギア歯 1 4 3と摺動部材 1 2 2のギア歯部 1 2 1との嚙 合い位置からネジ 1 2 9 (回動中心） までの距離と、 第 2支持板 1 0 9のギア歯 1 5 3と摺動部材 1 2 2のギア歯部 1 2 1との嚙合い位置からネジ 1 3 2 (回動中 心） までの距離とは等しくなるように構成されている。 これにより、 両支持板 1 0 6、 1 0 9は摺動部材 1 2 2の作用によりスムーズに回動される。 Here, since the gear teeth 1 2 1 of the sliding member 1 2 2 are formed concentrically, the distance from the center of the sliding member 1 2 2 to the tip of the gear tooth 1 2 1 is the same. Since the gear teeth 14 3 and the gear teeth 15 3 are both formed on the arcuate surfaces 14 2 and 15 2, the tips of the gear teeth 14 3 and the gear teeth 15 3 are also formed. They are arranged in an arc. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the mating relationship between the gear teeth 12 1 and each gear tooth 14 3, 15 3 is not uniform but shallow and deep. In addition, such a relationship is that the sliding member 122 moves on the support shaft 119 as the first support plate 106 and the second support plate 109 rotate. Even if it does not change. However, there is a sliding between the gear teeth 1 2 1 of the sliding member 1 2 2 and the gear teeth 1 4 3 and 1 5 3 of the first gear member 1 4 4 and the second gear member 1 5 4. Regardless of the position of the member 1 2 2 on the support shaft 1 1 9, there is always a deep babbling relationship, so the gear teeth 1 2 1 and the gear teeth 1 4 3, 1 5 3 The situation will not be lost. In a state where the first support plate 106 and the second support plate 109 are not rotated, the keys arranged on the support plate 106 as shown in FIG. 16 (A). Each key switch 110 arranged on the switch 107 and the support plate 109 has the same key arrangement relationship as that of a normal keyboard, and has a sliding member 122. Between the gear teeth 1 2 1 and the gear teeth 1 4 3 of the first gear member 1 4 4, and between the gear teeth 1 2 1 and the gear teeth 1 5 3 of the second gear member 1 5 4 In Fig. 16 (A), there is a shallow relation in the middle upper part and a deep relation in the lower part. When the operation of the keyboard 101 is desired in such a key arrangement state, the keyboard can be operated in this state. Note that the distance from the position where the gear teeth 14 3 of the first support plate 106 and the gear teeth 12 1 of the sliding member 12 2 meet to the screw 12 9 (the center of rotation), (2) The distance from the position where the gear teeth 1 5 3 of the support plate 1 09 and the gear teeth 1 2 1 of the sliding member 1 2 2 match to the screw 1 3 2 (center of rotation) should be the same. Is configured. As a result, the two support plates 106 and 109 are smoothly rotated by the action of the sliding members 122.
第 1 6図 （A) に示す状態から、 第 1キーュニット 1 3 7又は第 2キ一ボードュ ニット 1 4 7の一方を第 1 6図（A)における時計方向又は反時計方向へ回動させ ると、第 1ギア部材 1 4 4のギア歯 1 4 3及び第 2ギア部材 1 5 4のギア歯 1 5 3 が摺動部材 1 2 2のギア歯部 1 2 1に嚙合されていることに基づき、摺動部材 1 2 2は支持軸 1 1 9上を第 1 6図（A) における下側へ摺動される。 これにより、 第 1支持板 1 0 6と第 2支持板 1 0 9とは、 相互に同期して、 それそれネジ 1 2 9、 ネジ受部 1 2 7を回動支点として時計方向に回動するとともに、 ネジ 1 3 2、 ネジ 受部 1 3 0を支点として反時計方向へ回動する。このように、第 1支持板 1 0 6と 第 2支持板 1 0 9とを、 若干回動させた状態が第 1 6図 （B ) に示されている。 こ のようなキ一配列関係の状態でキーボード 1 0 1の操作を所望する場合には、この 状態でキ一ボードの操作を行うことができる。  From the state shown in Fig. 16 (A), one of the first key unit 1337 or the second key unit 147 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise in Fig. 16 (A). The gear teeth 14 3 of the first gear member 14 4 and the gear teeth 15 3 of the second gear member 15 4 are engaged with the gear teeth 12 1 of the sliding member 12 2. Based on this, the sliding member 122 slides on the support shaft 119 to the lower side in FIG. 16 (A). As a result, the first support plate 106 and the second support plate 109 rotate in synchronization with each other, and rotate clockwise with the screw 12 9 and the screw receiving portion 127 as a pivot point. At the same time, it turns counterclockwise around the screw 13 2 and the screw receiving portion 130. FIG. 16B shows a state in which the first support plate 106 and the second support plate 109 are slightly rotated. When the keyboard 101 is desired to be operated in such a key arrangement state, the keyboard can be operated in this state.
更に、 第 1 6図（B ) に示す状態から第 1支持板 1 0 6又は第 2支持板 1 0 9を 回動させると、 前記の場合と同様にして、 摺動部材 1 2 2は第 1 6図 （B ) に示す 位置から更に下側へ支持軸 1 1 9上で摺動され、第 1支持板 1 0 6と第 2支持板 1 0 9とは、 相互に同期して、 それぞれ時計方向、 反時計方向に回動する。 このよう にして第 1支持板 1 0 6及び第 2支持板 1 0 9を最大回動位置まで回動させた状 態が第 1 6図（C ) に示されている。 このようなキ一配列関係の状態でキーボード 1 0 1の操作を所望する場合には、この状態でキーボードの操作を行うことができ る。 Further, when the first support plate 106 or the second support plate 109 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 16 (B), the sliding member 122 is moved in the same manner as described above. 16 From the position shown in Fig. 16 (B), it is slid further down on the support shaft 1 19, and the first support plate 106 and the second support plate 109 are synchronized with each other, Rotates clockwise and counterclockwise. Thus, the first support plate 106 and the second support plate 109 are rotated to the maximum rotation position. The condition is shown in Fig. 16 (C). If the operation of the keyboard 101 is desired in such a key arrangement state, the keyboard operation can be performed in this state.
従って、使用者がキーボード 1 0 1を使用する際に、第 1キーュニヅト 1 3 7又 は第 2キーュニット 1 4 7の一方を回動させることにより、他方のキーュニヅトを —方のキ一ユニットと同期して回動させることが可能となる。 このように、極めて 簡単な操作により各キ一ュニヅト 1 3 7、 1 4 7を所望の操作状態に配置して、 個々の使用者にとって最適な操作形態でキーボード操作を行うことができる。 次に、前記のように第 1キーュニット 1 3 7及び第 2キーュニット 1 4 7を同期 回動させ所望回動位置でそれそれ第 1ペース板 1 0 5及び第 2ベース板 1 0 8に ロックするロック機構について第 1 5図に基づき説明する。  Therefore, when the user uses the keyboard 101, by rotating one of the first key unit 133 or the second key unit 147, the other key unit is synchronized with the other key unit. And can be rotated. As described above, the keyboards 1337 and 147 can be arranged in a desired operation state by an extremely simple operation, and the keyboard operation can be performed in an operation mode optimal for each user. Next, as described above, the first key unit 13 7 and the second key unit 14 7 are synchronously rotated and locked to the first pace plate 105 and the second base plate 108 at desired rotational positions, respectively. The lock mechanism will be described with reference to FIG.
ロヅク機構 1 5 7は、第 1ベース板 1 0 5と第 1キーュニヅト 1 3 7との間、及 び、第 2ベース板 1 0 8と第 2キーュニット 1 4 7との間に配設されるが、 いずれ のロック機構 1 5 7も同一の構成を有しているので、以下においては第 2ベース板 1 0 8と第 2キ一ュニヅト 1 4 7との間に設けられたロック機構 1 5 7のみにつ いて説明することとする。尚、第 1ベース板 1 0 5と第 1キーュニヅト 1 3 7との 間に設けられたロック機構 1 5 7は、第 1キーュニヅト 1 3 7の第 1支持板 1◦ 6 に配設された第 1ギア部材 1 4 4の円弧面 1 4 2に形成された口ヅク溝 1 4 5と、 第 1ベース板 1 0 5の隅部 1 1 2に設けられた軸受部材 1 1 3に形成された弾性 ロック片 （図示せず） とから構成されている。  The lock mechanism 157 is disposed between the first base plate 105 and the first key unit 137, and between the second base plate 108 and the second key unit 147. However, since each of the lock mechanisms 157 has the same configuration, the lock mechanism 157 provided between the second base plate 108 and the second unit 147 will be described below. Only 7 will be explained. A lock mechanism 157 provided between the first base plate 105 and the first key unit 133 is provided with a lock mechanism 157 provided on the first support plate 1◦6 of the first key unit 133. (1) An opening groove (1) formed on the arc surface (1) of the gear member (1) and a bearing member (1) provided on a corner (1) of the first base plate (1). And elastic lock pieces (not shown).
ここに、ロック機構 1 5 7は第 1キーュニット 1 3 7側と第 2キーュニヅト 1 4 7側の双方について設ける必要はなく、いずれか一方のみを設ける構成であっても よい。  Here, the lock mechanism 157 does not need to be provided on both the first key unit 137 side and the second key unit 147 side, and only one of them may be provided.
第 1 5図に示すロック機構 1 5 7おいて、第 2ベ一ス板 1 0 8の隅部 1 1 6に設 けられた軸受部材 1 1 7は中空状に形成されており、 その内部には、一対の保持部 1 5 8が設けられている。かかる一対の保持部 1 5 8の間には、金属製の弾性薄板 を 「く」字状に折曲された弾性ロック片 1 5 9の両端が支持されている。 また、 第 2ギア部材 1 5 4の円弧面 1 5 2に当接する軸受部材 1 1 7の凹状湾曲面 1 6 0 には、 開口 1 6 1が形成されており、 単性口ヅク片 1 5 9の先^^ま開口 1 6 1から 突出するように構成されている。このように開口 1 6 1から突出された弾性ロヅク 片 1 5 9の先端は、第 2ギア部材 1 5 4の円弧面 1 5 2に形成された複数個の口ヅ ク溝 1 5 5の 1つに係止される。 In the lock mechanism 157 shown in FIG. 15, the bearing member 117 provided at the corner portion 116 of the second base plate 108 is formed in a hollow shape, Is provided with a pair of holding portions 158. Between the pair of holding portions 158, both ends of an elastic lock piece 159 obtained by bending a metal elastic thin plate in a “く” shape are supported. In addition, an opening 16 1 is formed in the concave curved surface 16 0 of the bearing member 11 17 which contacts the arc surface 15 2 of the second gear member 15 9 points ^^ from opening 1 6 1 It is configured to protrude. The distal end of the elastic lock piece 159 protruding from the opening 161 in this manner is connected to the plurality of orifice grooves 155 formed on the arcuate surface 152 of the second gear member 154. It is locked in one.
前記したロック機構 1 5 7によれば、第 1キーュニヅト 1 3 7と第 2キ一ュニヅ ト 1 4 7とを相互に同期させて所望の回動位置まで回動させた後、その回動位置に て弾性ロック片 1 5 9の先端を第 2ギア部材 1 5 4のロック溝 1 5 5に係止する ことによりロックすることができる。従って、個々の使用者にとつて最適な操作形 態に固定した状態でキーボード操作を安定して行うことができる。  According to the lock mechanism 157 described above, after the first key unit 1337 and the second key unit 147 are rotated to a desired rotation position in synchronization with each other, the rotation position By locking the tip of the elastic lock piece 159 in the lock groove 155 of the second gear member 154, the lock can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to stably perform the keyboard operation in a state where the operation mode is fixed optimally for each user.
また、 ロヅク機構 1 5 7は、第 2ギア部材 1 5 4の円弧面 1 5 2に形成された口 ヅク溝 1 5 5と、第 2ベース板 1 0 8の軸受部 1 1 7に配設された弾性ロック片 1 5 9とから簡単に構成されているので、第 1キーュニヅト 1 3 7及び第 2キ一ュ二 ヅ ト 1 4 7のロック機構 1 5 7を低いコストで実現することができる。また、 ロヅ ク溝 1 5 5は、第 2ギア部材 1 5 4の円弧面 1 5 2に形成されることから、 ギア歯 1 5 3の形成と同時にロック溝 1 5 5を形成することが可能となり、これによつて もコストの低廉化を図ることができる。  Further, the lock mechanism 157 is provided in an opening groove 155 formed in the arc surface 152 of the second gear member 154 and a bearing portion 117 of the second base plate 108. The lock mechanism 157 of the first key unit 1337 and the second key unit 147 can be realized at a low cost because it is easily configured from the elastic lock pieces 159 provided. it can. Further, since the lock groove 155 is formed on the circular arc surface 152 of the second gear member 154, the lock groove 155 can be formed simultaneously with the formation of the gear teeth 153. This makes it possible to reduce costs.
続いて、前記キーボード 1に設けられている周辺構造について、第 1 7図乃至第 2 4図に基づき説明する。  Next, the peripheral structure provided on the keyboard 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 24. FIG.
前記したキーボード 1 0 1において、第 1キーボードュニヅト 1 0 3の第 1支持 板 1◦ 6には、 前記したように、 国際規格 ( I S 0 2 1 2 6及び I S 0 2 5 3 0 ) に従って左手で操作される所定数のキ一スィヅチ 1 0 7が配列されており、 また、 第 2キーボードュニヅト 1 0 4の第 2支持板 1 0 9には、国際規格に従って右手で 操作される所定数のキ一スィツチ 1 1 0が配列されているが、左手で操作されキー スイッチ 1 0 7の数は、 右手で操作されるキースイッチ 1 1 0の数よりも少ない。 これに基づき、第 1 6図に示すように、第 1キーボードュニヅト 1 0 3の長手方向 における長さは、第 2キーボードュニット 1 0 4の長手方向における長さよりも短 く構成されている。  In the keyboard 101 described above, the first support plate 1◦6 of the first keyboard unit 103 has, as described above, the international standard (IS 0 2 1 2 6 and IS 0 2 3 5 0) ), A predetermined number of key switches 107 to be operated by the left hand according to the standard are arranged, and the second support plate 109 of the second keyboard unit 104 is provided by the right hand in accordance with international standards. Although a predetermined number of key switches 110 to be operated are arranged, the number of key switches 107 operated by the left hand is smaller than the number of key switches 110 operated by the right hand. Based on this, as shown in FIG. 16, the length of the first keyboard unit 103 in the longitudinal direction is shorter than the length of the second keyboard unit 104 in the longitudinal direction. ing.
このままでは、第 1キーボードュニット 1 0 3と第 2キーボードュニット 1 0 4 とを相互に折り畳んだ場合に、両者の長さがアンバランスとなって、 キーボード 1 0 1の携帯性も良くないことから、本実施形態に係るキーボード 1 0 1では、第 1 7図（A)乃至第 1 7図 （C) に示すように、 第 1キーボードュニット 1 0 3の一 側端縁（第 2キーボードュニット 1 0 4と回動可能に連結される側と反対側の端縁 で、 第 1 7図における左側端縁） に、 キーボード 1 0 1の制御を行うコントロール 部 1 6 2を並設するとともに、第 1キーボードュニヅト 1 0 3とコント口一ル部 1 6 2とを加えた長手方向の長さが第 2キーボードュニット 1 0 4の長手方向にお ける長さと同一長さとなるように構成している。 In this state, when the first keyboard unit 103 and the second keyboard unit 104 are folded together, their lengths become unbalanced and the portability of the keyboard 101 is not good. Therefore, in the keyboard 101 according to the present embodiment, the first As shown in FIGS. 7 (A) to 17 (C), one side edge of the first keyboard unit 103 (the side which is rotatably connected to the second keyboard unit 104) At the opposite edge, on the left edge in Fig. 17), a control section 162 for controlling the keyboard 101 is arranged side by side, and the first keyboard unit 103 and the control section are connected. The length of the second keyboard unit 104 in the longitudinal direction, which is the same as the length of the second keyboard unit 104, is the same as that of the second keyboard unit 104.
このように構成することにより、第 1キーボードュニヅト 1 0 3と第 2キ一ボ一 ドュニヅト 1 0 4との長さの相違に起因して、第 1キーボードュニヅト 1 0 3に発 生するスペースを有効に利用することができ、コントロール部 1 6 2をキーボード 1 0 1の下部や側部に配設する場合に比して、キ一ボード 1 0 1の薄型化を図るこ とができ、 また、 小型化を図ることができる。  With this configuration, the first keyboard unit 103 can be removed due to the difference in length between the first keyboard unit 103 and the second keyboard unit 104. This makes it possible to make effective use of the space that occurs in the keyboard 101, and to make the keyboard 101 thinner than when the control unit 16 2 is arranged below or on the side of the keyboard 101. It is possible to reduce the size.
ここに、 第 1 7図（A) は、 キーボード 1 0 1の非使用時に軸受部材 1 1 3の各 軸受 1 1 3 Bの軸受孔 1 1 3 Aと軸受部材 1 1 7の軸受 1 1 7 Bの軸受孔 1 1 7 A、及び、軸受部材 1 1 4の各軸受 1 1 4 Bの軸受孔 1 1 4 Aと軸受部材 1 1 8の 軸受 1 1 8 Bの軸受孔 1 1 8 Aに渡って揷通される支持軸 1 1 9を介して両キ一 ボードュニット 1 0 3、 1 0 4が近接する方向に回動して重ね合わせた折畳状態を 示しており、第 1キーボードュニヅト 1 0 3とコントロール部 1 6 2とを加えた長 手方向の長さは第 2キーボードュニット 1 0 4の長さと同一にされてコンパクト に構成されていることが分かる。  Here, Fig. 17 (A) shows the bearing holes 1 13 A of bearings 1 13 B and the bearings of bearing members 1 17 when the keyboard 101 is not used. B bearing hole 1 1 7 A and bearing member 1 1 4 each bearing 1 1 4 B bearing hole 1 1 4 A and bearing member 1 1 8 bearing 1 1 8 B bearing hole 1 1 8 A This shows a folded state in which the two key units 103, 104 are rotated in the direction in which they approach each other via the support shaft 119, which is passed through, and overlapped with each other. It can be seen that the length in the longitudinal direction, which is obtained by adding the unit 103 and the control unit 162, is the same as the length of the second keyboard unit 104, so that the unit is compact.
また、 第 1 7図 （B) は、 キーボード 1 0 1の使用時に支持軸 1 1 9を介して両 キ—ボードュニット 1 0 3、 1 0 4が離間する方向に回動した水平状態を示してお り、第 1キーボードュニット 1 0 3とコントロール部 1 6 2とを加えた長手方向の 長さは第 2キーボードュニット 1 0 4の長さと同一にされて、支持軸 1 1 9を基準 にキーボード 1 0 1における左右のバランスがとれていることが分かる。  FIG. 17 (B) shows a horizontal state in which both keyboard units 103 and 104 are rotated in a direction away from each other via the support shaft 119 when the keyboard 101 is used. In addition, the length in the longitudinal direction of the first keyboard unit 103 and the control unit 162 is the same as the length of the second keyboard unit 104, and is based on the support shaft 119. It can be seen that the right and left sides of the keyboard 101 are balanced.
コントロール部 1 6 2の略中央部には、 第 1 7図 （ C) に示すように、 蓋部材 1 6 3が開閉可能に取り付けられており、 かかる蓋部材 1 6 3の裏面側には、 P D A 等の各種携帯電子機器が接続されるコネクタ 1 6 4が配設されている。コネクタ 1 6 4には、コントロール部 1 6 2に内蔵されてキーボード 1 0 1の制御を行うため のコントロールュニヅト （図示せず） と接続されたフレキシブル基板 1 6 5が接続 03 07028 As shown in FIG. 17 (C), a cover member 163 is attached to the substantially central portion of the control portion 162 so as to be openable and closable. A connector 164 for connecting various portable electronic devices such as PDAs is provided. A flexible board 165 connected to a control unit (not shown) built in the control section 162 for controlling the keyboard 101 is connected to the connector 164. 03 07028
47  47
されている。 また、 コネクタ部材 1 6 4の近傍で蓋部材 1 6 3の両側には、 一対の ワイヤ部材 1 6 6 Aが固着されており、両ワイヤ部材 1 6 6 Aの外端部間にはワイ ャ部材 1 6 6 Bが回動可能に掛装されている。更に、 ワイヤ部材 1 6 6 Bの中央位 置には支持ワイヤ 1 6 6 Cが固着されている。各ワイヤ部材 1 6 6 Aは、第 1 7図 ( C )に示す状態まで蓋部材 1 6 3と共に回動され、 この状態で支持ワイヤ 1 6 6 Cを後方に回動させることにより、 P D A等の携帯電子機器を傾斜した状態で支持 することができる。 ここに、 ワイヤ部材 1 6 6 A、 1 6 6 B、 1 6 6 Cは、 P D A 等の携帯電子機器を傾斜した状態で支持する背もたれ部材 1 6 6を構成する。 このように、コントロール部 1 6 2に回動可能に取り付けられた蓋部材 1 6 3に コネクタ部材 1 6 4を配設するとともに、コネクタ部材 1 6 4の近傍で蓋部材 1 6 3に背もたれ部材 1 6 6を設けることにより、ケ一ブル等を必要とすることなく P D A等の携帯電子機器を直接コネクタ部材 1 6 4に接続した状態で、携帯電子機器 を傾斜させて支持することができる。 Have been. A pair of wire members 166A are fixed to both sides of the lid member 163 near the connector member 164, and a wire is provided between the outer ends of both wire members 166A. The member 166B is rotatably mounted. Further, a support wire 166C is fixed at the center of the wire member 166B. Each wire member 166A is rotated together with the lid member 163 until the state shown in FIG. 17 (C), and by rotating the support wire 166C backward in this state, the The portable electronic device can be supported in an inclined state. Here, the wire members 166A, 166B, and 166C constitute a backrest member 166 that supports a portable electronic device such as a PDA in an inclined state. As described above, the connector member 164 is disposed on the lid member 163 rotatably attached to the control portion 162, and the back member is attached to the lid member 163 near the connector member 164. By providing the 166, the portable electronic device such as a PDA can be supported by being inclined while the portable electronic device such as a PDA is directly connected to the connector member 164 without requiring a cable or the like.
ここで、第 1キーボードュニット 1 0 3と第 2キ一ボードュニヅ卜 1◦ 4を第 1 7図（A) に示すように折り畳んだ時に、 前記のように構成される背もたれ部材 1 6 6が、 各キーボードュニット 1 0 3、 1 0 4間で収納される構成について、 第 1 7図 （B )及び第 2 0図に基づき説明する。第 2 0図は第 1 7図 （A) に示す折畳 状態で各キーボードュニット 1 0 3、 1 0 4の長手方向に直交する方向（短手方向） に切断して示す拡大断面図である。  Here, when the first keyboard unit 103 and the second keyboard unit 1◦4 are folded as shown in FIG. 17 (A), the back member 16 The configuration accommodated between the keyboard units 103 and 104 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 (B) and 20. FIG. FIG. 20 is an enlarged sectional view of the keyboard unit 103, 104 cut in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction (transverse direction) in the folded state shown in FIG. 17 (A). is there.
第 1 7図 （B ) に示すように、 第 1キ一ボードュニヅト 1 0 3において、 上側か ら第 1キースィツチ列 K 1と第 2キ一スィツチ列 K 2との間、第 2キ一スィツチ列 K 2と第 3キ一スィツチ列 K 3との間、及び、第 3キ一スィツチ列 K 3と第 4キー スィッチ列 K 4との間には、 それそれ一定のクリアランスが存在する。 また、 この 関係は、第 2キーボードュニット 1 0 4においても同様に、第 1キ一スィヅチ列 K 1と第 2キースィヅチ列 K 2との間、第 2キ一スィツチ列 K 2と第 3キースィヅチ 列 K 3との間、及び、第 3キースィツチ列 K 3と第 4キースィツチ列 K 4との間に 存在する。従って、 第 1 7図 （A) に示す折畳状態では、 各キ一スイッチ列におけ るキ一トヅプ 1 3 4の形状とも相まって、第 2 0図に示すように、相互に対向する 第 1キーボードュニット 1 0 3と第 2キーボードュニット 1 0 4にて隣接するキ —スィツチ列間には、 間隙 Sが形成されることとなる。 As shown in FIG. 17 (B), in the first key unit 103, between the first key switch row K1 and the second key switch row K2 from above, the second key switch row There is a certain clearance between K2 and the third key switch row K3 and between the third key switch row K3 and the fourth key switch row K4. This relationship also applies to the second keyboard unit 104 between the first key switch row K1 and the second key switch row K2, and the second key switch row K2 and the third key switch. It exists between the row K3 and between the third keyswitch row K3 and the fourth keyswitch row K4. Therefore, in the folded state shown in FIG. 17 (A), together with the shape of the key tops 134 in each key switch row, as shown in FIG. The adjacent units at the keyboard unit 103 and the second keyboard unit 104 —A gap S will be formed between the switch rows.
本実施形態に係るキーボード 1 0 1では、背もたれ部材 1 6 6の一方のワイヤ部 材 1 6 6 Aを各キ一ボードュニヅト 1 0 3、 1 0 4における第 1キ一スィヅチ列 K 1と第 2キースィヅチ列 K 2との間に生じる間隙 Sに収納し、同様に支持ワイャ 1 6 6 Cを第 2キースィッチ列 K 2と第 3キースイッチ列 K 3との間に生じる間隙 Sに収納し、同様に他方のワイヤ部材 1 6 6 Aを第 3キースイッチ列 K 3と第 4キ —スィッチ列 K 4との間に生じる間隙 Sに収納している。 また、 ワイヤ部材 1 6 6 Bは、キートヅプ 1 3 4の頂面と第 1ギア部材 1 4 4の平面部との間には高低差が 存在し、 また、 かかる高低差は折畳状態で 2倍になることから、 第 1キーボードュ ニット 1 0 3と第 2キ一ボードュニヅト 1 0 4との間に生じる間隙に充分収納す ることができる。  In the keyboard 101 according to the present embodiment, one of the wire members 166A of the backrest member 166 is connected to the first key switch row K1 and the second key switch row K1 of each of the keyboard units 103 and 104. It is stored in the gap S generated between the key switch row K2 and the supporting wire 1666C is similarly stored in the gap S generated between the second key switch row K2 and the third key switch row K3, Similarly, the other wire member 16A is housed in a gap S generated between the third key switch row K3 and the fourth key switch row K4. In the wire member 1666B, there is a height difference between the top surface of the key top 134 and the plane portion of the first gear member 144, and the height difference is 2 Since it is doubled, it can be sufficiently accommodated in the gap generated between the first keyboard unit 103 and the second keyboard unit 104.
前記したように、背もたれ部材 1 6 6を構成する各ワイヤ部材 1 6 6 A、支持ヮ ィャ 1 6 6 Cを、 両キーボードュニヅト 1 0 3、 1 0 4の折畳状態で相互に対向す るキ一スイッチ列間に生じる間隙 Sに収納するとともに、ワイヤ部材 1 6 6 Bを両 キーボードュニット 1 0 3、 1 0 4間に生じる間隙に収納するように構成したので、 折畳状態における第 1キーボードュニヅト 1 0 3と第 2キ一ボードュニヅト 1 0 4とを重ね合わせた厚さを薄くすることができ、 また、背もたれ部材 1 6 6がキ一 ボード 1 0 1の外部に付設する必要がないことから、キーボード 1 0 1全体の小型 化を図ることができる。  As described above, the wire members 166A and the support members 166C constituting the backrest member 166 are connected to each other in a folded state of both keyboard units 103 and 104. And the wire member 166 B is housed in the gap between the keyboard units 103 and 104, so that it is folded. The thickness in which the first keyboard unit 103 and the second keyboard unit 104 in the tatami state are overlapped with each other can be reduced, and the back member 166 is the key board 101 Since there is no need to attach the keyboard to the outside, the entire keyboard 101 can be reduced in size.
更に、キ一ボード 1 0 1に対して背もたれ部材 1 6 6を収納するための特別の構 成を全く必要としないので、キーボード 1 0 1全体のコストを低減することができ る。  Further, since no special structure for storing the backrest member 166 with respect to the keyboard 101 is required, the cost of the entire keyboard 101 can be reduced.
次に、第 1キーボードュニヅト 1 0 3における各キースィ ヅチ 1 0 7及び第 2キ —ボードュニヅト 1 0 4における各キースィッチ 1 1 0とコントロール部 1 6 2 とを電気的に接続する構成について第 1 7図、第 1 8図及び第 2 1図に基づき説明 する。第 1 8図はコントロール部 1 6 2をキーボード 1 0 1との関係を示す説明図 であり、 第 1 8図 （A) はコントロール部 1 6 2を第 1キーボードュニヅト 1 0 3 から取り外した状態を示す説明図であり、 第 1 8図（B ) はコントロール部 1 6 2 と自在アームとが接続される状態を示す説明図である。 P T/JPO謂 28 Next, each key switch 107 in the first keyboard unit 103 and each key switch 110 in the second keyboard unit 104 are electrically connected to the control unit 162. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 17, 18 and 21. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the control unit 162 and the keyboard 101. FIG. 18 (A) shows the control unit 162 from the first keyboard unit 103. FIG. 18 (B) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the control section 162 and the free arm are connected to each other. PT / JPO so-called 28
49  49
第 1キ一ボードュニット 1 0 3における第 1ベース板 1◦ 5の周壁部材 1 2 3 の背面側に形成されたアーム支持部 1 2 5には、 自在アーム 1 6 7が回動可能に支 持されている。 自在アーム 1 6 7は、 アーム支持部 1 2 5に第 1連結ピン 1 6 8 A を介して一端が回動可能に支持された中空状の第 1アーム部材 1 6 7 A、及び、 第 1アーム部材 1 6 7 Aの他端に第 2連結ピン 1 6 8 Bを介して回動可能に支持さ れた中空状の第 2アーム部材 1 6 7 Bから構成されている。  A universal arm 1667 is rotatably supported by an arm support portion 125 formed on the back side of the peripheral wall member 123 of the first base plate 1◦5 in the first key unit 103. Have been. The universal arm 167 has a hollow first arm member 167A, one end of which is rotatably supported by an arm support portion 125 via a first connecting pin 168A, and It is composed of a hollow second arm member 167B rotatably supported at the other end of the arm member 167A via a second connecting pin 168B.
ここに、第 2キ一ュ二ヅ ト 1 4 7の第 2支持板 1 0 9上に配設された複数の各キ 一スイッチ 1 1 0に対応するメンプレンスイッチに接続された信号線 1 6 9は、第 2 1図に示すように、第 2支持板 1 0 9に形成された中空状の周壁部材 1 5 6から 第 2ベース板 1 0 8に形成された中空状の周壁部材 1 2 4、軸受部材 1 1 8、 軸受 1 1 8 B、軸受部材 1 1 4、第 1ベース板 1 0 5の周壁部材 1 2 3を経てアーム支 持部 1 2 5まで揷通案内されており、 また、第 1キーュニット 1 3 7の第 1支持板 1 0 6上に酉己設された複数の各キースィツチ 1 0 7に対応するメンブレンスィ ヅ チに接続された信号線（図示せず） は、 直接中空状の周壁部材 1 2 3からアーム支 持部 1 2 5まで揷通案内されている。  Here, the signal line 1 connected to the membrane switch corresponding to each of the plurality of key switches 110 provided on the second support plate 109 of the second kit 1147 is provided. As shown in FIG. 21, reference numeral 69 denotes a hollow peripheral wall member formed on the second support plate 109 to a hollow peripheral wall member formed on the second base plate 108. 24, bearing member 1 18, bearing 1 18 B, bearing member 1 14, through the peripheral wall member 1 2 3 of the first base plate 105, is guided through to the arm support 1 2 5 A signal line (not shown) connected to a membrane switch corresponding to each of the plurality of key switches 107 provided on the first support plate 106 of the first key unit 133 is However, it is directly guided from the hollow peripheral wall member 123 to the arm support part 125.
そして、第 2キ一ュニット 1 4 7からの信号線と第 1キーュニヅト 1 3 7からの 信号線とは、 アーム支持部 1 2 5にてまとめられ、 第 1アーム部材 1 6 7 Aから第 2アーム部材 1 6 7 Bまで案内されている。 このように案内される信号線は、第 2 アーム部材 1 6 7 Bの一面に設けられたコネクタ部材 1 7 0 (第 1 8図（A)参照） に接続されている。  Then, the signal line from the second unit 1 47 and the signal line from the first unit 1 37 are combined by the arm support portion 125, and the second arm 1 It is guided to the arm member 16 7 B. The signal line guided in this manner is connected to a connector member 170 (see FIG. 18 (A)) provided on one surface of the second arm member 167B.
また、 コントロール部 1 6 2において、 第 1キーボードュニヅト 1 0 3の側端縁 に対向する面には、 2つの突起 1 7 1が形成されており、 各突起 1 7 1は第 1キー ボードュニヅト 1 0 3の第 1支持板 1 0 6における周壁部材 1 4 6に形成された 位置決め孔 （図示せず） に対して、 着脱可能に嵌合される。 これにより、 コント口 ール部 1 6 2は、 第 1キーボ一ドュニヅト 1 0 3に対して着脱可能に並設される。 また、 コントロール部 1 6 2の端面にはコネクタ部材 1 7 2が設けられており、 か かるコネクタ部材 1 7 2は、第 2アーム部材 1 6 7 Bのコネクタ部材 1 7◦に接続 される。  In the control section 162, two projections 171 are formed on a surface facing the side edge of the first keyboard unit 103, and each projection 1 71 is a first projection. It is detachably fitted into a positioning hole (not shown) formed in the peripheral wall member 144 of the first support plate 106 of the keyboard unit 103. As a result, the control section 162 is removably juxtaposed to the first keyboard unit 103. Further, a connector member 172 is provided on an end face of the control section 162, and the connector member 172 is connected to the connector member 17 ° of the second arm member 167B.
前記したように、コントロール部 1 6 2の各突起 1 7 1は第 1キーボードュニヅ ト 1 0 3の周壁部材 1 4 6における位置決め孔に対して着脱可能に嵌合されてお り、 また、 コントロール部 1 6 2のコネクタ部材 1 7 2と第 2アーム部材 1 6 7 B のコネクタ部材 1 7 0とは接離可能であるから、 コントロール部 1 6 2は、第 1キ 一ボードュニット 1 0 3に対して着脱可能に構成されており、これにより P D A等 の各種の携帯電子機器に対応してコントロール部 1 6 2を複数用意しておけば、コ ントロール部 1 6 2のみを交換することにより、同一のキ一ボード 1 0 1を使用し て各種の携帯電子機器にデータ入力を行うことができ、携帯電子機器に対応してキ 一ボード 1 0 1を購入する無駄を排してユーザの負担を軽減することができる。ま た、 キ一ボ一ド 1 0 1の製造者は、各種携帯電子機器毎にキーボード 1 0 1を製造 する必要がなくなり、複数種類のキ一ボード製造に必要な投資費用や管理費用を低 減することができる。 As described above, each projection 17 1 of the control section 16 2 is connected to the first keyboard menu. G is detachably fitted to the positioning hole of the peripheral wall member 160 of the third arm 103, and the connector member 172 of the control section 162 and the connector of the second arm member 1667B. The control section 162 is configured to be detachable from the first keyboard unit 103 because it can be brought into contact with and separated from the member 170, so that it can be attached to various portable electronic devices such as PDAs. If a plurality of control units 162 are prepared correspondingly, data can be input to various portable electronic devices using the same keyboard 101 by replacing only the control unit 162. This can eliminate the waste of purchasing the keyboard 101 corresponding to the portable electronic device and reduce the burden on the user. Also, the manufacturer of the keyboard 101 eliminates the need to manufacture the keyboard 101 for each type of portable electronic device, and reduces the investment and management costs required to manufacture multiple types of keyboards. Can be reduced.
続いて、前記のように構成されたアーム部材 1 6 7の作用について第 1 8図及び 第 1 9図に基づき説明する。第 1 9図は自在アームの各種の使用状態を示す説明図 である。  Next, the operation of the arm member 167 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. FIG. 19 is an explanatory view showing various use states of the universal arm.
第 1 8図に示すように、 自在アーム 1 6 7において、 その第 1アーム部 1 6 7 A の一端は、 周壁部材 1 2 3の背面側（非操作者側） に形成されたアーム支持部 1 2 5にて第 1連結ピン 1 6 8 Aを介して回動可能に支持されており、 また、第 1ァ一 ム部材 1 6 7 Aの他端には第 2アーム部材 1 6 7 Bが第 2連結ピン 1 6 8 Bを介 して回動可能に支持されている。また、コントロール部 1 6 2は、前記したように、 第 1キーボードュニヅト 1 0 3に対して着脱可能に構成されていることから、コン トロール部 1 6 2は、自在アーム 1 6 7における回動自在性を利用して各種の使用 形態で使用することができる。  As shown in FIG. 18, one end of the first arm portion 167 A of the universal arm 167 is connected to an arm supporting portion formed on the back side (non-operator side) of the peripheral wall member 123. The first arm member 1667A is rotatably supported via a first connecting pin 1668A at 125.The second arm member 1667B is connected to the other end of the first arm member 1667A. Are rotatably supported via second connecting pins 168B. Further, as described above, since the control section 162 is configured to be detachable from the first keyboard unit 103, the control section 162 is provided with the universal arm 1667. It can be used in various usage forms by utilizing the rotatable nature of.
例えば、 第 1 9図に示すように、 コント口一ル部 1 6 2の各突起 1 7 1を周壁部 材 1 4 6の位置決め孔から外して、コントロール部 1 6 2をキ一ボ一ド 1 0 1の長 手方向に配置することにより、 第 1 9図に示す形態 (A)の状態で使用することが できる。 また、 形態（A)の状態から第 1アーム部材 1 6 7 Aを第 1連結ピン 1 6 8 Aを中心に時計方向に回動させると、コントロール部 1 6 2をキーボード 1 0 1 から離間した形態 (B ) の状態で使用することができる。更に、 形態（B ) の状態 から第 1アーム部材 1 6 7 Aを連結ピン 1 6 8 Aを中心として更に時計方向に回 動させて、キ一ボード 1 0 1の長手方向の略中央位置で且つキ一ボ一ド 1 0 1の側 縁（操作側と反対側の側縁） に近接させた形態（C)の状態で使用することができ る。 For example, as shown in FIG. 19, remove each projection 17 1 of the control section 16 2 from the positioning hole of the peripheral wall member 1 46, and remove the control section 16 2 from the keyboard. By arranging in the longitudinal direction of 101, it can be used in the state of the form (A) shown in FIG. When the first arm member 1667A is rotated clockwise around the first connecting pin 1668A from the state of the form (A), the control section 162 is separated from the keyboard 101. It can be used in form (B). Further, from the state of the form (B), the first arm member 167 A is further rotated clockwise about the connecting pin 168 A. (C) in a state in which it is moved to a position substantially at the center of the keyboard 101 in the longitudinal direction and close to the side edge of the keyboard 101 (side edge opposite to the operation side). Can be used with
ここに、コントロール部 1 6 2のコネクタ部材 1 6 4に P D A 1 7 3の接続端子 を接続するとともに、背もたれ部材 6 6により P D A 1 7 3を傾斜した状態で支持 し、第 1 9図における形態（B )の状態で使用する場合が第 2 2図に示されている。 また同様に、コント口一ル部 1 6 2のコネクタ部材 1 6 4に P D A 1 7 3の接続端 子を接続するとともに、背もたれ部材 1 6 6により P D A 1 7 3を傾斜した状態で 支持し、 第 1 9図における形態（C )の状態で使用する場合が第 2 3図に示されて いる。  Here, the connection terminal of the PDA 173 is connected to the connector member 164 of the control section 162, and the PDA 173 is supported in an inclined state by the backrest member 666. FIG. 22 shows the case of using in the state of (B). Similarly, the connection terminal of the PDA 173 is connected to the connector member 164 of the control section 162, and the PDA 173 is supported in an inclined state by the back member 166. FIG. 23 shows the case of using in the state of the form (C) in FIG.
前記したように、コントロール部 1 6 2を第 1キーボードュニヅト 1 0 3から着 脱可能に構成し、且つ、 コントロール部 1 6 2と第 1キーボードユニット 1 0 3と を自在アーム 1 6 7により連結するように構成したので、 自在アーム 1 6 7により 許容される範囲でコントロール部 1 6 2とキーボード 1 0 1との配置関係を自在 に変更することができる。従って、 キーボード 1 0 1に対する P D A 1 7 3の配置 位置をキーボード使用者の所望する位置に自在に変更して操作性をより向上する ことができる。  As described above, the control unit 16 2 is configured to be detachable from the first keyboard unit 103, and the control unit 16 2 and the first keyboard unit 103 are connected to the free arm 16. Since the configuration is such that the control unit 16 and the keyboard 101 are connected to each other, the arrangement relationship between the control unit 162 and the keyboard 101 can be freely changed within a range permitted by the universal arm 167. Therefore, the arrangement position of the PDA 173 with respect to the keyboard 101 can be freely changed to a position desired by the keyboard user, so that the operability can be further improved.
続いて、前記のように構成された自在アーム 1 6 7において、第 1アーム部材 1 6 7 Aとアーム支持部 1 2 5とを連結する第 1連結ピン 1 6 8 Aの連結構造、及び、 第 1アーム部材 1 6 7 Aと第 2アーム部材 1 6 7 Bとを連結する第 2連結ピン 1 6 8 Bの連結構造について、第 2 4図に基づき説明する。第 2 4図は第 1 7図（B ) に示す状態、 及び、 第 1 9図における形態 （C ) の状態をキーボード 1 0 1の背面 側から見て模式的に示す説明図である。  Subsequently, in the universal arm 1 67 configured as described above, a connecting structure of the first connecting pin 1 6 8 A connecting the first arm member 1 6 7 A and the arm supporting portion 1 2 5 and The connection structure of the second connection pin 168B for connecting the first arm member 167A and the second arm member 167B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the state shown in FIG. 17 (B) and the state of form (C) in FIG. 19 as viewed from the back side of the keyboard 101.
ここに、 第 2 4図において、 第 2アーム部材 1 6 7 8の厚さ11は、 コントロール 部 1 6 2のコネクタ部材 1 7 2に接続するためのコネクタ部材 1 7 0を設ける必 要性があること等の制約上、 キーボード 1 0 1の厚さ h (第 1ベース板 1 0 5、 第 2ベ一ス板 1 0 8の底面とキートップ 1 3 4の頂面との間の厚さ）よりも、大きい。 従って、 キーボード 1 0 1は、 第 1 7図 （B ) 、 ( C ) に示す状態で使用されるも のではないが、かかる状態では、キ一ボ一ド 1 0 1における各キースィツチ 1 0 7、 7028 Here, in FIG. 24, the thickness 11 of the second arm member 1678 requires the provision of a connector 170 for connection to the connector 1702 of the control section 162. Due to the restrictions, etc., the thickness of the keyboard 101 is h (the thickness between the bottom surface of the first base plate 105 and the second base plate 108 and the top surface of the key top 134) Greater than). Therefore, the keyboard 101 is not used in the state shown in FIGS. 17 (B) and 17 (C), but in such a state, each key switch 107 in the keyboard 101 is not used. , 7028
52  52
1 1 0の頂面がなす面は、 キーボード 1 0 1の設置面に平行な状態とはならず、 設 置面に対して若干傾斜した面となる。  The surface formed by the top surface of 110 is not parallel to the installation surface of keyboard 110, but is slightly inclined with respect to the installation surface.
かかる事情を勘案し、 本実施形態にかかるキーボ一ド 1 0 1では、 実際にキ一ボ ード 1 0 1が使用される状態においてキーボード 1 0 1の底面（第 1及び第 2ベ一 ス板 1 0 5、 1 0 8の底面） と第 2アーム部材 1 6 7 Bの底部とが同一面となるよ うに第 1連結ピン 1 6 8 A及び第 2連結ピン 1 6 8 Bの連結角度を傾斜させてい る。  In consideration of such circumstances, the keyboard 101 according to the present embodiment employs the bottom surface (the first and second bases) of the keyboard 101 in a state where the keyboard 101 is actually used. The connecting angle of the first connecting pin 168A and the second connecting pin 168B so that the bottom of the plates 105 and 108) and the bottom of the second arm member 1667B are flush with each other. Is inclined.
具体的には、 第 2 4図において、 アーム支持部 1 2 5と第 1アーム部材 1 6 7 A とを回動可能に連結する第 1連結ピン 1 6 8 Aは、垂線 Lに対して角度 Aだけ傾斜 されており、 また、 第 1アーム部材 1 6 7 Aと第 2ァ一ム部材 1 6 7 Bとを回動可 能に連結する第 2連結ピン 1 6 8 Bは、垂線 Lに対して角度 Bだけ傾斜されている。 ここに、 角度 Bは角度 Aよりも大きく設定されている。  Specifically, in FIG. 24, the first connecting pin 168 A that rotatably connects the arm supporting portion 125 and the first arm member 167 A is at an angle with respect to the perpendicular L. A, and a second connecting pin 168 B for rotatably connecting the first arm member 167 A and the second arm member 167 B to the vertical line L. It is inclined by angle B with respect to it. Here, the angle B is set larger than the angle A.
このように第 1連結ピン 1 6 8 Aを垂線 Lに対して角度 Aだけ傾斜させるとと もに、 第 2連結ピン 1 6 8 Bを垂線 Lに対して角度 Bだけ傾斜させることにより、 第 2アーム部材 1 6 7 Bは、 第 1 9図に示す形態 （C) の状態にコントロール部 1 6 2を配置した際に、 全体で傾斜された角度 （A + B ) に基づき、 厚さ （H— h) 分上方へ移動させることとなる。 これにより、 コントロール部 1 6 2の底部 （コン トロール部 1 6 2の底面は第 2アーム部材 1 6 7 Bの下端面と同一面となるよう に配置されている） とキーボード 1 0 1の底面とが同一面となる。  As described above, the first connecting pin 168A is tilted by the angle A with respect to the vertical line L, and the second connecting pin 168B is tilted by the angle B with respect to the vertical line L. 2 When the control part 16 2 is arranged in the state of the form (C) shown in FIG. 19, the arm member 1667 B has a thickness (A + B) based on the angle (A + B) inclined as a whole. H—h) will be moved upward by an amount. As a result, the bottom of the control section 16 2 (the bottom face of the control section 16 2 is arranged so as to be flush with the lower end face of the second arm member 1667 B) and the bottom face of the keyboard 101 Are on the same plane.
従って、第 2アーム部材 1 6 7の厚さ Hやコントロール部 1 6 2の厚さが、 キ一 ボードの厚さ hと同一でない場合においても、 第 1連結ピン 1 6 8 A、 第 2連結ピ ン 1 6 8 Bの連結角度を傾斜させることにより、キーボード 1 0 1の使用時に第 2 アーム部材 1 6 7 Bやコントロール部 1 6 2の底部とキーボード 1 0 1の底面と を同一面にしてキーボード 1における各キースィヅチ 1 0 7、 1 1 0の頂面がなす 面を、 キ一ボード 1 0 1の設置面に平行な状態にすることができ、 キーボード 1 0 1におけるキー操作性が低下してしまうことを防止できる。  Therefore, even when the thickness H of the second arm member 167 or the thickness of the control portion 162 is not the same as the thickness h of the keyboard, the first connection pin 168A and the second connection By tilting the connection angle of pin 168 B, the bottom of second arm member 167 B and control section 162 and the bottom of keyboard 101 are flush with each other when keyboard 101 is used. As a result, the surface formed by the top surfaces of the key switches 107 and 110 in the keyboard 1 can be parallel to the installation surface of the keyboard 101, and the key operability of the keyboard 101 decreases. Can be prevented.
尚、前記の例では、 第 1連結ピン 1 6 8 A及び第 2連結ピン 1 6 8 Bの連結角度 を傾斜させるように構成しているが、 これに限定されることはなく、 いずれか一方 の連結ピンの連結角度を傾斜させてもよい。 ( 3 ) 第 3実施形態 In the above example, the connection angle of the first connection pin 168A and the second connection pin 168B is configured to be inclined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be inclined. (3) Third embodiment
以下、本発明に係る折畳可能なキーボードについて本発明を具体化した第 3実施 形態に基づき図面を参照しつつ詳細に説明する。先ず、本第 3実施形態に係るキー ボードの概略構成について第 2 5図に基づき説明する。第 2 5図は折畳可能なキー ボ一ドを模式的に示す分解斜視図である。  Hereinafter, a foldable keyboard according to the present invention will be described in detail based on a third embodiment of the present invention with reference to the drawings. First, a schematic configuration of the keyboard according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view schematically showing a foldable keyboard.
第 2 5図において、 キーボード 2 0 1は、基本的に、 回動連結部 2 0 2を介して 相互に回動可能に連結された第 1キーボードュニヅト 2 0 3及び第 2キーボード ュニヅト 2 0 4から構成されている。第 1キーボードュニット 2 0 3は、第 1ベ一 ス板 2 0 5、第 1ベース板 2 0 5上で水平方向に回動可能に支持された第 1支持板 2 0 6、及び、第 1支持板 2 0 6上に配設された複数個のキースィツチ 2 0 7から 構成されている。 また、 第 2キーボードユニット 2 0 4は、 第 2ベース板 2 0 8、 第 2ベース板 2 0 8上で水平方向に回動可能に支持された第 2支持板 2 0 9、及び、 第 2支持板 2 0 9上に配設された複数個のキースィヅチ 2 1 0から構成されてい る。  In FIG. 25, a keyboard 201 is basically composed of a first keyboard unit 203 and a second keyboard unit which are rotatably connected to each other via a rotation connection unit 202. It consists of 204. The first keyboard unit 203 includes a first base plate 205, a first support plate 206 supported on the first base plate 205 so as to be rotatable in the horizontal direction, and a first base plate 205. It is composed of a plurality of key switches 207 arranged on one support plate 206. The second keyboard unit 204 includes a second base plate 208, a second support plate 209 supported on the second base plate 208 so as to be rotatable in a horizontal direction, and a second base plate 208. It is composed of a plurality of key switches 210 arranged on the support plate 209.
ここで、 先ず、 回動連結部 2 0 2の構成について説明する。第 1ベース板 2 0 5 はアルミ等の金属製薄板から形成されており、第 1ベース板 2 0 5の側端部 2 1 1 (第 2 5図における右側端部） における 2つの隅部 2 1 2には、 それそれ回動連結 部 2 0 2の一部を構成する樹脂製の軸受部材 2 1 3 , 2 1 4が設けられている。軸 受部材 2 1 3には、軸受孔 2 1 3 Aが形成された 2つの軸受 2 1 3 Bが離間して設 けられている。 また、 軸受部材 2 1 4においても同様に、 軸受孔 2 1 4 Aが形成さ れた 2つの軸受 2 1 4 Bが離間して設けられている。  Here, first, the configuration of the rotation connecting portion 202 will be described. The first base plate 205 is formed of a thin metal plate such as aluminum, and has two corners 2 1 at the side end 2 1 1 (the right end in FIG. 25) of the first base plate 205. The bearing 12 is provided with resin bearing members 2 13 and 2 14 which respectively constitute a part of the rotary connecting portion 202. The bearing member 2 13 has two bearings 2 13 B having a bearing hole 2 13 A formed apart from each other. Similarly, in the bearing member 214, two bearings 214B having a bearing hole 214A are separately provided.
第 2ベース板 2 0 8は、第 1ベ一ス板 2 0 5と同様、 アルミ等の金属薄板から形 成されており、 第 2ベース板 2 0 8の側端部 2 1 5 (第 2 5図における左側端部） における 2つの隅部 2 1 6には、それそれ回動連結部 2 0 2の一部を構成する樹脂 製の軸受部材 2 1 7、 2 1 8が設けられている。軸受部材 2 1 7には、 軸受孔 2 1 7 Aが形成された 1つの軸受 2 1 7 Bが設けられている。 また、軸受部材 2 1 8に おいても同様に軸受孔 2 1 8 Aが形成された 1つの軸受 2 1 8 Bが設けられてい る。そして、 軸受 2 1 7 Bは各軸受 2 1 3 Bの間に嵌入されるとともに、 各軸受け 2 1 3 Bの軸受孔 2 1 3 Aと軸受 2 1 7 Bの軸受孔 2 1 7 Aとが一直線に配置さ PC蘭謂 28 Like the first base plate 205, the second base plate 208 is made of a thin metal plate such as aluminum, and the second base plate 208 has a side end 2 15 (second At the two corners 2 16 at the left end in FIG. 5), resin bearing members 2 17, 2 18 which respectively constitute a part of the rotary connecting portion 202 are provided. . The bearing member 217 is provided with one bearing 217B in which a bearing hole 217A is formed. Also, in the bearing member 218, similarly, one bearing 218B having a bearing hole 218A formed therein is provided. The bearings 2 17 B are fitted between the bearings 2 13 B, and the bearing holes 2 13 A of the bearings 2 13 B and the bearing holes 2 17 A of the bearings 2 17 B are formed. Arranged in a straight line PC orchid 28
54  54
れ、 また、 軸受 2 1 8 Bは各軸受 2 1 4 Bの間に嵌入されるとともに、各軸受 2 1 4 Bの軸受孔 2 1 4 Aと軸受 2 1 8 Bの軸受孔 2 1 8 Aとが一直線に配置される。 このように一直線に配置された各軸受孔 2 1 3 As 2 1 7 As 2 1 4 A、 2 1 8 A に対して、 支持軸 2 1 9が揷嵌される。 これにより、 支持軸 2 1 9を介して第 1ベ ース板 2 0 5と第 2ベース板 2 0 8とは、相互に回動可能に支持される。かかる支 持軸 2 1 9に対しては、 3つの円板 2 2 1 A間を半円筒状の連結部 2 2 1 Bにて連 結した形状を有し、各円板 2 2 1 Aの中心部に摺動孔 2 2 0が形成された摺動部材 2 2 2が、摺動孔 2 2 0を介して摺動可能に揷嵌されている。かかる摺動部材 2 2 2は、第 1キーボードュニット 2 0 3と第 2キーボードュニヅト 2 0 4とを、相互 に同期して回動させるための部材であり、 その作用については後述する。 The bearings 2 18 B are inserted between the bearings 2 14 B, and the bearing holes 2 14 A of the bearings 2 14 B and the bearing holes 2 18 A of the bearings 2 18 B are provided. Are arranged in a straight line. The support shaft 219 is fitted in the bearing holes 2 13 As 2 17 As 2 14 A and 2 18 A arranged in a straight line as described above. As a result, the first base plate 205 and the second base plate 208 are rotatably supported via the support shaft 219. The supporting shaft 2 19 has a shape in which three disks 22 1 A are connected by a semi-cylindrical connecting portion 22 1 B, and each of the disks 2 21 A A sliding member 222 having a sliding hole 220 formed at the center is slidably fitted through the sliding hole 220. The sliding member 222 is a member for rotating the first keyboard unit 203 and the second keyboard unit 204 in synchronization with each other, and the operation thereof will be described later. I do.
尚、軸受部材 2 1 4には、 これと一体に中空状の周壁部材 2 2 3が形成されてお り、 また、 軸受部材 2 1 8には、 これと一体に中空状の周壁部材 2 2 4が形成され ている。周壁部材 2 2 4の内部には、第 2キ一ボードュニヅト 2 0 4に設けられた 各キースイッチ 2 1 0とコントロール部 2 6 2 (後述する） とを接続するための信 号線 2 6 9 (後述する） が挿通されており、 かかる信号線 2 6 9は、 中空状の軸受 部材 2 1 8、軸受 2 1 8 Bから外方に案内されるとともに支持軸 2 1 9に巻回され、 更に中空状の軸受部材 2 1 4から周壁部材 2 2 3に揷通案内される。また、周壁部 材 2 2 3の内部には、第 1キ一ボードュニット 2 0 3に設けられた各キースィツチ 2 0 7とコントロール部 2 6 2とを接続するための信号線（図示せず）が揷通され ており、 かかる信号線は、周壁部材 2 2 4を介して第 2キ一ボードュニヅト 2 0 4 側から案内されてくる信号線 2 6 9と合わせて、後述する自在アーム 2 6 7 (後述 する） に揷通案内される。 また、 周壁部材 2 2 3の背面側に形成されたアーム支持 部 2 2 5は中空状に形成されており、自在アーム 2 6 7を回動可能に支持するとと もに、前記のように案内されてくる各信号線を自在アーム 2 6 7に揷通案内するも のである。  The bearing member 214 has a hollow peripheral wall member 223 integrally formed therewith, and the bearing member 218 has a hollow peripheral wall member 222 integrally formed therewith. 4 is formed. Inside the peripheral wall member 224, a signal line 269 for connecting each key switch 210 provided on the second keyboard unit 204 to a control unit 262 (described later) is provided. The signal line 269 is guided outward from the hollow bearing member 218 and the bearing 218B and wound around the support shaft 219. It is guided from the hollow bearing member 214 to the peripheral wall member 222. A signal line (not shown) for connecting each key switch 207 provided in the first key unit 203 to the control unit 262 is provided inside the peripheral wall member 223. The signal line is connected to a signal line 269 guided from the second keyboard unit 204 via the peripheral wall member 224, and a free arm 267 (described later). (Described later). Further, an arm supporting portion 225 formed on the back side of the peripheral wall member 223 is formed in a hollow shape, supports the free arm 267 so as to be rotatable, and guides as described above. Each of the incoming signal lines is guided through the free arm 267.
第 1ペース板 2 0 5において、側端部 2 1 1とは反対側の側端部 2 2 6の近傍で 略中央位置には、 ネジ受部 2 2 7が形成されており、 このネジ受部 2 2 7には、 第 1支持板 2 0 6のネジ孔 2 2 8に遊嵌されるネジ 2 2 9が締結される。これにより、 第 1支持板 2 0 6はネジ 2 2 9及びネジ受部 2 2 7を支点として第 1ベース板 2 0 5上で水平方向に回動可能に取り付けられる。 また、 第 2ベース板 2 0 8におい て、側端部 2 1 5とは反対側の側端部 2 0 8 aより少し内側に入った（後述するコ ントロール部 2 6 2の幅分だけ内側の）略中央位置には、 ネジ受部 2 3 0が形成さ れており、 このネジ受部 2 3 0には、第 2支持板 2 0 9のネジ孔 2 3 1に遊嵌され るネジ 2 3 2が締結される。 これにより、 第 2支持板 2 0 9はネジ 2. 3 2、 ネジ受 部 2 3 0を支点として第 2ベース板 2 0 8上で水平方向に回動可能に取り付けら れる。 In the first pace plate 205, a screw receiving portion 227 is formed substantially at the center near the side end portion 226 opposite to the side end portion 211. A screw 229 loosely fitted into the screw hole 228 of the first support plate 206 is fastened to the part 227. As a result, the first support plate 206 becomes the first base plate 2 with the screw 229 and the screw receiving portion 227 as fulcrums. It is attached to be able to turn horizontally on 05. Also, the second base plate 208 entered slightly inside the side end portion 208 a on the opposite side to the side end portion 205 (only the inside width equal to the width of the control portion 262 described later). A screw receiving portion 230 is formed at a substantially central position of the screw receiving portion 230. The screw receiving portion 230 has a screw loosely fitted into the screw hole 2 31 of the second support plate 209. 2 32 is concluded. Thus, the second support plate 209 is mounted on the second base plate 208 so as to be rotatable in the horizontal direction with the screw 2.32 and the screw receiving portion 230 as fulcrums.
第 1キーボードュニット 2 0 3における第 1支持板 2 0 6はアルミ等の金属薄 板から形成されており、 かかる第 1支持板 2 0 6上には、 左手で操作される所定数 のキースィツチ 2 0 7が配設されている。 尚、 左手で操作されるキースィヅチ 2 0 7の数は、 国際規格 ( I S O 2 1 2 6及び I S〇 2 5 3 0 ) に基づいて定められて いる。  The first support plate 206 of the first keyboard unit 203 is formed of a thin metal plate such as aluminum, and a predetermined number of key switches operated by the left hand are placed on the first support plate 206. 207 are provided. Note that the number of key switches 207 operated by the left hand is determined based on international standards (ISO 21026 and IS2503).
また、第 1支持板 2 0 6には 1つのキ一スイッチ 2 0 7に対応して 4個の係止部 The first support plate 206 has four locking parts corresponding to one key switch 207.
2 3 3がプレス加工等により一体に形成されており、かかる第 1支持板 2 0 6上に は、 図示しない 3層構造を有するメンブレンスィヅチ（可動電極を有する上側シ一 ト、固定電極を有する下側シート及び上側シ一トと下側シート間に介挿され可動電 極と固定電極とを離間させるスィツチング孔を有するスぺ一サシートからなる）が 配置されている。 尚、 各係止部 2 3 3は、 メンプレンスイッチに形成された孔から 上方へ突出されている。 The first support plate 206 is provided with a membrane switch (not shown) having a three-layer structure (an upper sheet having a movable electrode and a fixed electrode). (Which comprises a lower sheet and a switching sheet interposed between the upper sheet and the lower sheet and having a switching hole for separating the movable electrode and the fixed electrode). Each of the locking portions 233 protrudes upward from a hole formed in the membrane switch.
そして、 各キースィッチ 2 0 7は、 基本的に、 キ一トップ 2 3 4、 キ一トップ 2 And each key switch 2 07 is basically a key top 2 3 4 and a key top 2
3 4の上下動を案内する一対のリンク 2 3 5、キ一トップ 2 3 4を上方へ付勢する とともにメンプレンスィヅチの可動電極と固定電極からなるスィッチング部に対 応してメンプレンスィツチ上に配置されたラバ一スプリング 2 3 6から構成され る。 ここに、 一対のリンク部材 2 3 5の各上端部はキ一トップ 2 3 4の下面に可動 状態で連結され、 また、 各下端部は係止部 2 3 3に可動状態で係止されている。非 押下時にキ一トップ 2 3 4はラバ一スプリング 2 3 6の付勢力を介して上方へ付 勢されて非押下位置に保持されており、ラバースプリング 2 3 6の付勢力に抗して キ一トップ 2 3 4を押下した際には、ラバースプリング 2 3 6がメンブレンスィ 'ッ チの可動電極を押圧してスぺ一ザのスィヅチング孔で固定電極に当接させ、 これに 07028 A pair of links 2 3 5 and key tops 2 3 4 that guide the vertical movement of 3 4 are urged upward, and a membrane switch corresponding to the switching part consisting of the movable electrode and the fixed electrode of the membrane switch. It consists of a rubber spring 2 36 arranged above. Here, each upper end of the pair of link members 235 is movably connected to the lower surface of the key top 234, and each lower end is movably locked by the locking portion 233. I have. When the key top 2 3 4 is not pressed, the key top 2 3 4 is urged upward through the urging force of the rubber spring 2 36 and is held at the non-pressed position, and is pressed against the urging force of the rubber spring 2 3 6. When the top 2 3 4 is pressed, the rubber spring 2 3 6 6 presses the movable electrode of the membrane switch to abut the fixed electrode through the switching hole of the switch. 07028
56  56
より所定のスィッチング動作が行われる。前記したキ一スィッチ 2 0 7と第 1支持 板 2 0 6とは、 第 1キーュニヅト 2 3 7を構成する。 尚、 キースィヅチ 2 0 7の構 成については公知であり、 ここでは詳細な説明を省略する。 More predetermined switching operation is performed. The above-mentioned key switch 207 and the first support plate 206 constitute a first key unit 237. The configuration of the key switch 207 is publicly known, and a detailed description is omitted here.
第 1支持板 2 0 6の一側（第 2 5図における右側） は、 その回動支点（ネジ孔 2 2 8に遊嵌されたネジ 2 2 9及びネジ受部 2 2 7 )を中心とする回転半径に合致す る円弧面 2 3 8が形成されており、 また、 円弧面 2 3 8の内側には、 円弧状の長溝 2 3 9が形成されている。長溝 2 3 9にはネジ 2 4 0が遊嵌され、 そのネジ 2 4 0 は第 1ベース板 2 0 5に形成されたネジ受部 2 4 1に締結されている。ここに、長 溝 2 3 9とネジ 2 4 0とは、第 1支持板 2 0 6が第 1ベース板 2 0 5上で水平方向 に回動する際に、 その回動動作が安定して行われるように案内する作用を行う。 また、第 1支持板 2 0 6にて円弧面 2 3 8が形成された側には、 円弧面 2 3 8と 同一曲率半径を有する円弧面 2 4 2を有し、その円弧面 2 4 2の内方にリンク配置 部 2 4 3が形成された第 1支持部材 2 4 4が配設されている。更に、第 1支持部材 2 4 4の円弧面 2 4 2には、複数個のロック溝 2 4 5が形成されており、 かかる口 ヅク溝 2 4 5は後述するロック機構 2 5 7の一部を構成する。  One side (the right side in FIG. 25) of the first support plate 206 is centered on its rotation fulcrum (the screw 229 loosely fitted into the screw hole 228 and the screw receiving portion 227). An arcuate surface 238 is formed that matches the turning radius of the arc, and an arc-shaped long groove 239 is formed inside the arcuate surface 238. A screw 240 is loosely fitted in the long groove 239, and the screw 240 is fastened to a screw receiving portion 241 formed in the first base plate 205. Here, the long groove 2 39 and the screw 2 40 are such that when the first support plate 206 rotates in the horizontal direction on the first base plate 205, the turning operation is stable. It acts as a guide to be performed. On the side of the first support plate 206 where the circular surface 2 38 is formed, there is a circular surface 2 42 having the same radius of curvature as the circular surface 2 38, and the circular surface 2 42 A first support member 244 having a link arranging portion 243 formed therein is provided inside. Further, a plurality of lock grooves 245 are formed on the arc surface 242 of the first support member 244, and the lock groove 245 is a part of a lock mechanism 257 described later. Is configured.
尚、前記のように、第 1支持板 2 0 6の円弧面 2 3 8と第 1支持部材 2 4 4の円 弧面 2 4 2とが同一の曲率半径を有するように構成したので、両円弧面 2 3 8、 2 4 2が相互に合致することとなり、 これにより各円弧面 2 3 8、 2 4 2間でずれが 発生することなく、第 1キ一ュニヅト 2 3 7を見栄え良くすることができる。また、 第 1支持部材 2 4 4は、 第 1支持板 2 0 6に配設する際に、 ネジ 2 4 0、 長溝 2 3 9を上方から覆うように配設されるので、 ネジ 2 4 0、長溝 2 3 9を外側から見え なくして第 1キ一ユニット 2 3 7を見栄え良く構成できる。  As described above, since the arc surface 2 38 of the first support plate 206 and the arc surface 2 42 of the first support member 2 44 have the same radius of curvature, The arc surfaces 2 3 8 and 2 4 4 match each other, so that there is no deviation between the arc surfaces 2 3 8 and 2 4 2, and the first key 2 3 7 can be made to look good. be able to. When the first support member 244 is disposed on the first support plate 206, the first support member 244 is disposed so as to cover the screw 240 and the long groove 239 from above. Thus, the first key unit 237 can be formed with a good appearance by making the long groove 239 invisible from the outside.
第 1支持板 2 0 6の周囲の一部を除いて、周壁部材 2 4 6が設けられており、 か かる周壁部材 2 4 6は、第 1支持板 2 0 6を第 1ベース板 2 0 5上に配置した際に、 第 1ベース板 2 0 5に設けられた周壁部材 2 2 3と協働して、円弧面 2 3 8を除く 第 1支持板 2 0 6の周囲を囲む周壁部材を構成する。  Except for a part around the first support plate 206, a peripheral wall member 246 is provided. The peripheral wall member 246 includes the first support plate 206 and the first base plate 206. 5 when arranged on the first base plate 205, cooperates with the peripheral wall member 222 provided on the first base plate 205, excluding the arc surface 238, the peripheral wall member surrounding the periphery of the first support plate 206. Is configured.
更に、第 2キ一ボードュニット 2 0 4おける第 2支持板 2 0 9は、前記第 1支持 板 2 0 6と同様、 アルミ等の金属薄板から形成されており、 かかる第 2支持板 2 0 9上には、 右手で操作される所定数のキースイッチ 2 1 0が配設されている。 尚、 右手で操作されるキースィツチ 2 1◦の数は、 国際規格（I S O 2 1 2 6及び I S 0 2 5 3 0 ) に基づいて定められており、 前記第 1支持板 2 0 6上に配設される左 手で操作されるキ一スイッチ 2 0 7の数よりも多くされている。 ここに、 キ一スィ ツチ 2 1 0は、 前記キ一スイッチ 2 0 7と同様の構成を有しているので、 その構成 要素についてはキースィヅチ 2 0 7と同一の番号を付して説明する。 Further, the second support plate 209 in the second key unit 204 is formed of a thin metal plate such as aluminum, similarly to the first support plate 206, and the second support plate 209 Above, a predetermined number of key switches 210 operated by the right hand are arranged. still, The number of key switches 21 ° operated with the right hand is determined based on international standards (ISO 2126 and IS 025030), and is arranged on the first support plate 206. This is larger than the number of key switches 207 operated by the left hand. Since the key switch 210 has the same configuration as the key switch 207, its components will be described with the same numbers as those of the key switch 207.
第 2支持板 2 0 9には 1つのキースイッチ 2 1 0に対応して 4個の係止部 2 3 3がプレス加工等により一体に形成されており、 かかる第 2支持板 2 0 9上には、 図示しない 3層構造を有するメンプレンスイッチ （可動電極を有する上側シート、 固定電極を有する下側シート及び上側シートと下側シート間に介挿され可動電極 と固定電極とを離間させるスィツチング孔を有するスぺーサシートからなる）が配 置されている。 尚、 各係止部 2 3 3は、 メンプレンスィッチに形成された孔から上 方へ突出されている。  Four locking portions 2 33 corresponding to one key switch 210 are integrally formed on the second support plate 209 by pressing or the like. There is a membrane switch (not shown) having a three-layer structure (an upper sheet having a movable electrode, a lower sheet having a fixed electrode, and a switching interposed between the upper sheet and the lower sheet to separate the movable electrode and the fixed electrode. (Made of a spacer sheet having holes). In addition, each locking part 2 33 protrudes upward from a hole formed in the membrane switch.
そして、 各キースイッチ 2 1 0は、 基本的に、 キートヅプ 2 3 4、 キ一トップ 2 3 4の上下動を案内する一対のリンク部材 2 3 5、キートップ 2 3 4を上方へ付勢 するとともにメンブレンスィツチの可動電極と固定電極からなるスィツチング部 に対応してメンプレンスイッチ上に配置されたラバ一スプリング 2 3 6から構成 される。 ここに、 一対のリンク部材 2 3 5の各上端部はキートヅプ 2 3 4の下面に 可動状態で連結され、また、各下端部は係止部 2 3 3に可動状態で係止されている。 非押下時にキートヅプ 2 3 4はラバ一スプリング 2 3 6の付勢力を介して上方へ 付勢されて非押下位置に保持さており、ラバースプリング 2 3 6の付勢力に抗して キ一トップ 2 3 4を押下した際には、ラバースプリング 2 3 6がメンブレンスィヅ チの可動電極を押圧してスぺーサのスィヅチング孔で固定電極に当接させ、 これに より所定のスィツチング動作が行われる。前記したキ一スィツチ 2 1 0と第 2支持 板 2 0 9とは、 第 2キーユニット 2 4 7を構成する。  Each key switch 2 10 basically urges the key top 2 3 4, the pair of link members 2 3 5 for guiding the vertical movement of the key top 2 3 4, and the key top 2 3 4 upward. In addition, it is composed of a rubber spring 236 arranged on the membrane switch corresponding to a switching part composed of a movable electrode and a fixed electrode of the membrane switch. Here, each upper end of the pair of link members 235 is movably connected to the lower surface of the key top 234, and each lower end is movably locked by the locking portion 233. When the key top 2 3 4 is not pressed, the key top 2 3 4 is urged upward through the urging force of the rubber spring 2 36 and is held at the non-pressed position, and the key top 2 opposes the urging force of the rubber spring 2 3 6 When 3 4 is pressed, the rubber spring 2 3 6 6 presses the movable electrode of the membrane switch and makes contact with the fixed electrode through the switching hole of the spacer, thereby performing a predetermined switching operation. . The key switch 210 and the second support plate 209 constitute a second key unit 247.
第 2支持板 2 0 9の一側 （第 2 5図における左側） は、 その回動支点 （ネジ孔 2 3 1に遊嵌されたネジ 2 3 2及びネジ受部 2 3 0 )を中心とする回転半径に合致す る円弧面 2 4 8が形成されており、 また、 円弧面 2 4 8の内側には、 円弧状の長溝 2 4 9が形成されている。長溝 2 4 9にはネジ 2 5 0が遊嵌され、 そのネジ 2 5 0 は第 2ベース板 2 0 8に形成されたネジ受部 2 5 1に締結されている。 ここに、 長 溝 2 4 9とネジ 2 5 0とは、第 2支持板 2 0 9が第 2ベース板 2 0 8上で水平方向 に回動する際に、 その回動動作が安定して行われるように案内する作用を行う。 また、第 2支持板 2 0 9にて円弧面 2 4 8が形成された側には、 円弧面 2 4 8と 同一曲率半径を有する円弧面 2 5 2を有し、その円弧面 2 5 2の内方にリンク配置 部 2 5 3が形成された第 2支持部材 2 5 4が配設されている。更に、第 2支持部材 2 5 4の円弧面 2 5 2には、 複数個の口ック溝 2 5 5 (第 2 6図参照） が形成され ており、 かかるロック溝 2 5 5は後述するロック機構 2 5 7の一部を構成する。 尚、前記のように、第 2支持板 2 0 9の円弧面 2 4 8と第 2支持部材 2 5 4の円 弧面 2 5 2とが同一の曲率半径を有するように構成したので、両円弧面 2 4 8、 2 5 2が相互に合致することとなり、 これにより各円弧面 2 4 8、 2 5 2間でずれが 発生することなく、第 2キーュニット 2 4 7を見栄え良くすることができる。また、 第 2支持部材 2 5 4は、 第 2支持板 2 0 9に配設する際に、 ネジ 2 5 0、 長溝 2 4 9を上方から覆うように配設されるので、 ネジ 2 5 0、長溝 2 4 9を外側から見え なくして第 2キーュニット 2 4 7を見栄え良く構成できる。 One side (the left side in FIG. 25) of the second support plate 209 is centered on its rotation fulcrum (the screw 23 32 and the screw receiving portion 230, which are loosely fitted in the screw holes 2 31). An arcuate surface 248 corresponding to the turning radius is formed, and an arc-shaped long groove 249 is formed inside the arcuate surface 248. A screw 250 is loosely fitted in the long groove 249, and the screw 250 is fastened to a screw receiving portion 251 formed in the second base plate 208. Where the long The groove 249 and the screw 250 are designed so that when the second support plate 209 is horizontally rotated on the second base plate 209, the rotation is stably performed. It acts as a guide. On the side of the second support plate 209 where the arc surface 248 is formed, there is an arc surface 252 having the same radius of curvature as the arc surface 248, and the arc surface 252 A second support member 254 having a link arranging portion 253 formed therein is provided inside. Further, a plurality of hook grooves 255 (see FIG. 26) are formed in the circular arc surface 252 of the second support member 2554, and such lock grooves 255 are described later. It constitutes a part of the lock mechanism 257. Note that, as described above, since the arc surface 2 48 of the second support plate 209 and the arc surface 25 2 of the second support member 255 have the same radius of curvature, The arc surfaces 2 4 8 and 2 5 2 coincide with each other, which makes it possible to improve the appearance of the second key unit 2 4 7 without causing a shift between the arc surfaces 2 4 8 and 2 5 2. it can. When the second support member 254 is disposed on the second support plate 209, the second support member 254 is disposed so as to cover the screw 250 and the long groove 249 from above. In addition, the second groove 247 can be formed with a good appearance by making the long groove 249 invisible from the outside.
第 2支持板 2 0 9の周囲の一部を除いて、中空状の周壁部材 2 5 6が設けられて おり、 かかる周壁部材 2 5 6は、第 2支持板 2 0 9を第 2ベース板 2 0 8上に配置 した際に、第 2ペース板 2 0 8に設けられた周壁部材 2 2 4と協働して、 円弧面 2 4 8を除く第 2支持板 2 0 9の周囲を囲む周壁部材を構成する。  Except for a part around the second support plate 209, a hollow peripheral wall member 256 is provided. The peripheral wall member 256 is formed by connecting the second support plate 209 to the second base plate. When placed on 208, it cooperates with the peripheral wall member 222 provided on the second pace plate 208 to surround the periphery of the second support plate 209 excluding the arc surface 248. A peripheral wall member is configured.
続いて、第 1ベース板 2 0 5と第 2ベース板 2 0 8上で、 それそれ第 1支持板 2 0 6及び第 2支持板 2 0 9を水平方向に回動するにつき、第 1支持板 2 0 6と第 2 支持板 2 0 9とを同期して回動させる同期機構、及び、 同期機構を介して回動され た第 1支持板 2 0 6、第 2支持板 2 0 9をその回動位置でロックするロック機構に ついて、第 2 6図及び第 2 7図に基づき説明する。第 2 6図は第 1支持板 2 0 6と 第 2支持板 2 0 9の回動動作を同期させる同期機構を拡大して示す説明図であり、 また、第 2 7図は第 1支持板 2 0 6及び第 2支持板 2 0 9を回動させていない状態 から最大回動位置まで回動させた状態に至る一連の状態を示す説明図であり、第 2 7図 （A) は回動させていない状態、 第 2 7図 （B ) は途中まで回動させた状態、 第 2 7図 （C ) は最大回動位置まで回動させた状態を示す。  Subsequently, the first support plate 206 and the second support plate 209 are horizontally rotated on the first base plate 205 and the second base plate 208, respectively. A synchronization mechanism for rotating the plate 206 and the second support plate 209 in synchronization with each other, and a first support plate 206 and a second support plate 209 rotated via the synchronization mechanism. A lock mechanism for locking at the rotation position will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG. 26 is an enlarged explanatory view showing a synchronizing mechanism for synchronizing the turning operation of the first support plate 206 and the second support plate 209, and FIG. 27 is a first support plate. FIG. 27A is an explanatory diagram showing a series of states from a state where the second support plate 209 and the second support plate 209 are not rotated to a state where the second support plate 209 is rotated to the maximum rotation position. FIG. 27 (B) shows a state in which it has not been moved, FIG. 27 (B) shows a state in which it has been rotated halfway, and FIG. 27 (C) shows a state in which it has been rotated to the maximum rotation position.
第 2 6図において、第 1支持部材 2 4 4に形成されたリンク配置部 2 4 3と摺動 部材 2 2 2における 2つの円板 2 2 1 Aの間に存在する連結部 2 2 1 B (第 2 6図 における下側の連結部 2 2 1 B ) との間には、第 1リンク部材 2 8 0が酉 3置されて おり、 かかる第 1リンク部材 2 8 0は、 リンク配置部 2 4 3側でネジ 2 8 1を介し て回動係止され、 また、連結部 2 2 1 B側で U字状のリンク止め部材 2 8 2の一端 を介して係止されている。また、第 2支持部材 2 5 4に形成されたリンク配置部 2 5 3と前記連結部 2 2 1 Bとの間には、 第 2リンク部材 2 8 3が配置されており、 かかる第 2リンク部材 2 8 3は、 リンク配置部 2 5 3側でネジ 2 8 4を介して回動 係止され、 また、連結部 2 2 1 B側で U字状のリンク止め部材 2 8 2の他端を介し て係止されている。 In FIG. 26, the link arrangement portion 2 43 formed on the first support member 244 slides. The first link member is provided between the connecting portion 2 2 1B (the lower connecting portion 2 2 1B in FIG. 26) existing between the two disks 22 1A in the member 22. The first link member 280 is rotatably locked via the screw 281 on the link arrangement portion 243 side, and the connecting portion 221 B The side is locked via one end of a U-shaped link stop member 28 2. Further, a second link member 283 is disposed between the link disposing portion 253 formed on the second support member 254 and the connecting portion 221B, and such a second link is provided. The member 283 is rotatably locked via a screw 284 on the link arrangement portion 253 side, and the other end of the U-shaped link stopper 282 on the connection portion 221 B side. It is locked through.
前記したように、 2つの第 1リンク部材 2 8 0、第 2リンク部材 2 8 3を使用し た同期機構では、摺動部材 2 2 2と第 1支持部材 2 4 4とは第 1リンク部材 2 8 0 を介してリンクされており、 また、摺動部材 2 2 2と第 2支持部材 2 5 4とは第 2 リンク部材 2 8 3を介してリンクされていることから、第 1キーュニヅト 2 3 7と 第 2キ一ュ二ヅ ト 2 4 7の一方が第 1ベ一ス板 2 0 5又は第 2ベース板 2 0 8上 で回動すると、 その回動力は、第 1リンク部材 2 8 0又は第 2リンク部材 2 8 3か ら支持軸 2 1 9上を摺動される摺動部材 2 2 2を介して他方のキ一ュニットに伝 達される。  As described above, in the synchronous mechanism using the two first link members 280 and the second link member 283, the sliding member 222 and the first support member 244 are formed by the first link member. 280, and the sliding member 222 and the second support member 254 are linked via the second link member 283, so that the first key unit 2 When one of the third and second cutouts 24 7 rotates on the first base plate 205 or the second base plate 208, the rotating power is increased by the first link member 2. The power is transmitted from the 80 or the second link member 283 to the other unit via the sliding member 222 that slides on the support shaft 219.
第 1支持板 2 0 6と第 2支持板 2 0 9を回動させていない状態においては、第 2 7図（A) に示すように、 支持板 2 0 6上に配列される各キースィツチ 2 0 7と支 持板 2 0 9上に配列される各キースィヅチ 2 1 0は、通常のキーボードと同一のキ —配列関係を有しており、 摺動部材 2 2 2は、 第 2 7図 （A) に示すように、 最も 上側に位置している。このようなキ一配列関係の状態でキーボード 2 0 1の操作を 所望する場合には、 勿論この状態でキーボードの操作を行うことができる。  In a state where the first support plate 206 and the second support plate 209 are not rotated, as shown in FIG. 27 (A), each key switch 2 arranged on the support plate 206 is not rotated. The key switches 210 arranged on the support plate 209 and the support plate 209 have the same key arrangement relationship as a normal keyboard, and the sliding members 222 are arranged as shown in FIG. As shown in A), it is located at the uppermost position. When the operation of the keyboard 201 is desired in such a key arrangement state, the keyboard operation can of course be performed in this state.
第 2 7図（A) に示す状態から、 第 1キ一ュニヅト 2 3 7又は第 2キ一ボ一ドュ ニット 2 4 7の一方を第 2 7図（A)における時計方向又は反時計方向へ回動させ ると、第 1支持部材 2 4 4のリンク配置部 2 4 3と摺動部材 2 2 2とは第 1リンク 部材 2 8 0を介してリンクされており、 また、第 2支持部材 2 5 4のリンク配置部 2 5 3と摺動部材 2 2 2とは第 2リンク部材 2 8 3を介してリンクされているこ とに基づき、 摺動部材 2 2 2は支持軸 2 1 9上を第 2 7図（A) における下側へ摺 03 07028 From the state shown in FIG. 27 (A), one of the first key unit 237 and the second key unit 247 is turned clockwise or counterclockwise in FIG. 27 (A). When rotated, the link arrangement portion 24 3 of the first support member 24 4 and the sliding member 222 are linked via the first link member 280. Based on the fact that the link arrangement portion 25 3 of 25 4 and the sliding member 22 2 are linked via the second link member 28 3, the sliding member 22 2 has a support shaft 21 9 Slide up to the bottom in Fig. 27 (A). 03 07028
60  60
動される。 これにより、 第 1支持板 2 0 6と第 2支持板 2 0 9とは、相互に同期し て、 それそれネジ 2 2 9、 ネジ受部 2 2 7を回動支点として時計方向に回動すると ともに、 ネジ 2 3 2、 ネジ受部 2 3 0を支点として反時計方向へ回動する。 このよ うに、第 1支持板 2 0 6と第 2支持板 2 0 9とを、若千回動させた状態が第 2 7図 ( B )に示されている。 このようなキー配列関係の状態でキ一ボード 2 0 1の操作 を所望する場合には、 この状態でキ一ボードの操作を行うことができる。 Be moved. As a result, the first support plate 206 and the second support plate 209 rotate in synchronization with each other, and rotate clockwise with the screw 229 and the screw receiving portion 227 as pivot points. At the same time, the screw rotates counterclockwise around the screw 2 32 and the screw receiving portion 230. FIG. 27 (B) shows a state in which the first support plate 206 and the second support plate 209 are rotated by a small amount. If the operation of the keyboard 201 is desired in such a key arrangement relationship, the operation of the keyboard can be performed in this state.
更に、 第 2 7図（B ) に示す状態から第 1支持板 2 0 6又は第 2支持板 2 0 9を 回動させると、 前記の場合と同様にして、 摺動部材 2 2 2は第 2 7図（B ) に示す 位置から更に下側へ支持軸 2 1 9上で摺動され、第 1支持板 2 0 6と第 2支持板 2 0 9とは、 相互に同期して、 それそれ時計方向、 反時計方向に回動する。 このよう にして第 1支持板 2 0 6及び第 2支持板 2 0 9を最大回動位置まで回動させた状 態が第 2 7図（C ) に示されている。 このようなキ一配列関係の状態でキーボード 2 0 1の操作を所望する場合には、この状態でキーボードの操作を行うことができ る。  Further, when the first support plate 206 or the second support plate 209 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 27 (B), the sliding member 222 is moved in the same manner as described above. 27 is further slid on the support shaft 219 from the position shown in FIG. 27 (B), and the first support plate 206 and the second support plate 209 are synchronized with each other, It rotates clockwise and counterclockwise. FIG. 27 (C) shows a state where the first support plate 206 and the second support plate 209 have been rotated to the maximum rotation position in this manner. When the operation of the keyboard 201 is desired in such a key arrangement state, the keyboard operation can be performed in this state.
従って、使用者がキーボード 2 0 1を使用する際に、第 1キ一ュニヅト 2 3 7又 は第 2キ一ュニット 2 4 7の一方を回動させることにより、他方のキーュニットを 一方のキ一ュニットと同期して回動させること 可能となる。 このように、極めて 簡単な操作により各キ一ュニット 2 3 7、 2 4 7を所望の操作状態に配置して、 個々の使用者にとって最適な操作形態でキーボード操作を行うことができる。 次に、前記のように第 1キーュニヅ ト 2 3 7及び第 2キ一ュ二ット 2 4 7を同期 回動させ所望回動位置でそれそれ第 1ペース板 2 0 5及び第 2ベース板 2 0 8に ロックするロヅク機構について第 2 6図に基づき説明する。  Therefore, when the user uses the keyboard 201, one of the first key unit 237 or the second key unit 247 is rotated so that the other key unit is turned to the other key unit. It can be rotated in synchronization with the unit. In this way, by arranging the units 237 and 247 in a desired operation state by an extremely simple operation, the keyboard operation can be performed in an operation mode optimal for each user. Next, as described above, the first key unit 237 and the second key unit 247 are synchronously rotated, and the first pace plate 205 and the second base plate are respectively rotated at desired rotation positions. A lock mechanism for locking at 208 will be described with reference to FIG.
ロック機構 2 5 7は、第 1ベース板 2 0 5と第 1キーュニヅト 2 3 7との間、及 び、第 2ベース板 2 0 8と第 2キーュニヅト 2 4 7との間に配設されるが、 いずれ のロック機構 2 5 7も同一の構成を有しているので、以下においては第 2ベ一ス板 2 0 8と第 2キーュニット 2 4 7との間に設けられたロック機構 2 5 7のみにつ いて説明することとする。尚、第 1ベース板 2 0 5と第 1キーュニット 2 3 7との 間に設けられたロック機構 2 5 7は、第 1キーュニヅト 2 3 7の第 1支持板 2 0 6 に配設された第 1支持部材 2 4 4の円弧面 2 4 2に形成された口ツク溝 2 4 5と、 第 1ベース板 2 0 5の隅部 2 1 2に設けられた軸受部材 2 1 3に形成された弾性 口ヅク片 （図示せず） とから構成されている。 The lock mechanism 257 is disposed between the first base plate 205 and the first key unit 237 and between the second base plate 208 and the second key unit 247. However, since each of the lock mechanisms 257 has the same configuration, the lock mechanism 250 provided between the second base plate 208 and the second key unit 247 will be described below. Only 7 will be explained. The lock mechanism 257 provided between the first base plate 205 and the first key unit 237 is a lock mechanism provided on the first support plate 206 of the first key unit 237. (1) a mouth groove 2 4 5 formed in an arc surface 2 4 2 of the support member 2 4 4; An elastic port piece (not shown) formed on a bearing member 21 provided at a corner 2 12 of the first base plate 205 is provided.
ここに、ロック機構 2 5 7は第 1キーュニヅト 2 3 7側と第 2キーュニヅト 2 4 7側の双方について設ける必要はなく、いずれか一方のみを設ける構成であっても よい。  Here, the lock mechanism 257 does not need to be provided on both the first key unit 237 side and the second key unit 247 side, and may be provided with only one of them.
第 2 6図に示すロック機構 2 5 7おいて、第 2ベース板 2 0 8の隅部 2 1 6に設 けられた軸受部材 2 1 7は中空状に形成されており、 その内部には、一対の保持部 2 5 8が設けられている。かかる一対の保持部 2 5 8の間には、金属製の弾性薄板 を「く」字状に折曲された弾性ロック片 2 5 9の両端が支持されている。 また、 第 2支持部材 2 5 4の円弧面 2 5 2に当接する軸受部材 2 1 7の凹状湾曲面 2 6 0 には、開口 2 6 1が形成されており、弾^!口ヅク片 2 5 9の先端は開口 2 6 1から 突出するように構成されている。このように開口 2 6 1から突出された弾性ロック 片 2 5 9の先端は、第 2支持部材 2 5 4の円弧面 2 5 2に形成された複数個のロッ ク溝 2 5 5の 1つに係止される。  In the lock mechanism 2 57 shown in FIG. 26, the bearing member 2 17 provided at the corner 2 16 of the second base plate 208 is formed in a hollow shape, and has a hollow inside. , A pair of holding portions 258 are provided. Between the pair of holding portions 258, both ends of an elastic lock piece 259 formed by bending a metal elastic thin plate in a く shape are supported. Further, an opening 26 1 is formed in the concave curved surface 260 of the bearing member 2 17 in contact with the arc surface 25 2 of the second support member 25 4, and an elastic piece 2 2 The tip of 59 is configured to protrude from the opening 26 1. The tip of the elastic lock piece 25 9 protruding from the opening 26 1 in this manner is one of a plurality of lock grooves 25 5 formed on the circular surface 25 2 of the second support member 25 4. Is locked.
前記したロック機構 2 5 7によれば、第 1キーュニヅト 2 3 7と第 2キーュニヅ ト 2 4 7とを相互に同期させて所望の回動位置まで回動させた後、その回動位置に て弾性ロック片 2 5 9の先端を第 2支持部材 2 5 4のロック溝 2 5 5に係止する ことによりロックすることができる。従って、個々の使用者にとって最適な操作形 態に固定した状態でキ一ボード操作を安定して行うことができる。  According to the above-described lock mechanism 257, the first key unit 237 and the second key unit 247 are synchronized with each other and rotated to a desired rotation position, and then at the rotation position. Locking can be performed by locking the tip of the elastic lock piece 255 to the lock groove 255 of the second support member 255. Therefore, the keyboard operation can be stably performed in a state where the operation mode is optimal for each user.
また、 ロヅク機構 2 5 7は、第 2支持部材 2 5 4の円弧面 2 5 2に形成された口 ック溝 2 5 5と、第 2ベース板 2 0 8の軸受部 2 1 7に配設された弾性口ヅク片 2 5 9とから簡単に構成されているので、第 1キ一ュニヅト 2 3 7及び第 2キ一ュ二 ヅト 2 4 7のロヅク機構 2 5 7を低いコス卜で実現することができる。 また、 ロヅ ク溝 2 5 5は、第 2支持部材 2 5 4の円弧面 2 5 2に形成されることから、 かかる 円弧面 2 5 2の形成時に口ヅク溝 2 5 5を形成することが可能となり、これによつ てもコストの低廉化を図ることができる。  In addition, the lock mechanism 255 is provided in an opening groove 255 formed in the circular arc surface 250 of the second support member 254 and a bearing portion 217 of the second base plate 208. Since it is easily composed of the elastic port pieces 255 provided, the lock mechanism 257 of the first and second ports 237 and 247 can be reduced in cost. Can be realized. In addition, since the lock groove 255 is formed on the circular surface 252 of the second support member 2554, it is necessary to form the groove 25 when the circular surface 25 is formed. This makes it possible to reduce costs.
続いて、前記キーボード 2 0 1に設けられている周辺構造について、第 2 8図乃 至第 3 5図に基づき説明する。  Next, the peripheral structure provided on the keyboard 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 35. FIG.
前記したキーボード 2 0 1において、第 1キーボードュニット 2 0 3の第 1支持 板 2 0 6には、 前記したように、 国際規格 （I S 0 2 1 2 6及び I S O 2 5 3 0 ) に従って左手で操作される所定数のキ一スィッチ 7が配列されており、 また、 第 2 キーボードュニット 2 0 4の第 2支持板 2 0 9には、国際規格に従って右手で操作 される所定数のキースィツチ 2 1 0が配列されているが、左手で操作されるキース ィヅチ 2 0 7の数は、 右手で操作されるキ一スィツチ 2 1 0の数よりも少ない。 こ れに基づき、 第 2 7図に示すように、第 1キーボードュニット 2 0 3の長手方向に おける長さは、第 2キーボードュニット 2 0 4の長手方向における長さよりも短く 構成されている。 In the keyboard 201 described above, the first support of the first keyboard unit 203 is provided. As described above, a predetermined number of key switches 7 operated by the left hand are arranged on the plate 206 in accordance with international standards (IS 0 212 and ISO 250). 2 A predetermined number of key switches 210 operated by the right hand are arranged on the second support plate 209 of the keyboard unit 204 in accordance with international standards, but the key switches 210 operated by the left hand are arranged. Is less than the number of key switches 210 operated by the right hand. Based on this, as shown in FIG. 27, the length of the first keyboard unit 203 in the longitudinal direction is configured to be shorter than the length of the second keyboard unit 204 in the longitudinal direction. I have.
このままでは、第 1キーボードュニヅト 2 0 3と第 2キーボードュニヅト 2 0 4 とを相互に折り畳んだ場合に、 両者の長さがアンバランスとなって、 キーボード 2 0 1の携帯性も良くないことから、 本実施形態に係るキーボード 2 0 1では、 第 2 8図 （A) 乃至第 2 8図 （C ) に示すように、 第 1キーボードュニヅト 2 0 3の一 側端縁（第 2キーボードュニット 2 0 4と回動可能に連結される側と反対側の端縁 で、 第 2 8図における左側端縁） に、 キ一ボード 2 0 1の制御を行うコントロール 部 2 6 2を並設するとともに、第 1キーボードュニヅト 2 0 3とコントロール部 2 6 2とを加えた長手方向の長さが第 2キーボードュニット 2 0 4の長手方向にお ける長さと同一長さとなるように構成している。  In this state, when the first keyboard unit 203 and the second keyboard unit 204 are folded together, their lengths become unbalanced, and the keyboard 201 is carried. Therefore, in the keyboard 201 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 28 (A) to 28 (C), one of the first keyboard units 203 is not provided. The keyboard 201 is controlled at a side edge (an edge opposite to the side rotatably connected to the second keyboard unit 204 and the left edge in FIG. 28). The control section 262 is juxtaposed, and the length in the longitudinal direction of the first keyboard unit 203 and the control section 262 is added in the longitudinal direction of the second keyboard unit 204. It is configured to have the same length as the length to be cut.
このように構成することにより、第 1キーボードュニット 2 0 3と第 2キーボー ドュニット 2 0 4との長さ相違に起因して、第 1キーボードュニヅト 2 0 3に発生 するスペースを有効に利用することができ、コントロール部 2 6 2をキーボード 2 0 1の下部や側部に配設する場合に比して、キーボード 2 0 1の薄型化を図ること ができ、 また、 小型化を図ることができる。  With this configuration, the space generated in the first keyboard unit 203 due to the difference in length between the first keyboard unit 203 and the second keyboard unit 204 can be made effective. The keyboard 201 can be made thinner and more compact than when the control unit 26 2 is provided below or on the side of the keyboard 201. Can be planned.
ここに、 第 2 8図 （A) は、 キーボード 2 0 1の非使用時に軸受部材 2 1 3の各 軸受 2 1 3 Bの軸受孔 2 1 3 Aと軸受部材 2 1 7の軸受 2 1 7 Bの軸受孔 2 1 7 A、及び、軸受部材 2 1 の各軸受 2 1 4 Bの軸受孔 2 1 4 Aと軸受部材 2 1 8の 軸受 2 1 8 Bの軸受孔 2 1 8 Aに渡って挿通される支持軸 2 1 9を介して両キー ボードュニット 2 0 3、 2 0 4が近接する方向に回動して重ね合わせた折畳状態を 示しており、第 1キーボードュニット 2 0 3とコントロール部 2 6 2とを加えた長 手方向の長さは第 2キーボードュニット 2 0 4の長さと同一にされてコンパクト に構成されていることが分かる。 Here, Fig. 28 (A) shows the bearing holes 2 13 A of the bearings 2 13 B of the bearing members 2 13 and the bearings 2 17 of the bearing members 2 17 when the keyboard 201 is not used. B bearing hole 2 17 A and bearing member 2 1 bearing 2 14 B bearing hole 2 14 A and bearing member 2 18 bearing 2 18 B bearing hole 2 18 A This shows a folded state in which both keyboard units 203 and 204 are rotated in the direction in which they approach each other via the support shaft 219 which is inserted through the first keyboard unit 203. And the control section 26 2 are added, and the length in the lateral direction is the same as the length of the second keyboard unit 204. It can be seen that the configuration is as follows.
また、 第 2 8図（B ) は、 キーボード 2 0 1の使用時に支持軸 2 1 9を介して両 キーボードュニット 2 0 3、 2 0 4が離間する方向に回動した水平状態を示してお り、第 1キーボードュニット 2 0 3とコントロール部 2 6 2とを加えた長手方向の 長さは第 2キーボードュニヅト 2 0 4の長さと同一にされて、支持軸 2 1 9を基準 にキーボード 2 0 1における左右のバランスがとれていることが分かる。  Further, FIG. 28 (B) shows a horizontal state in which the keyboard units 203 and 204 are turned in a direction separating from each other via the support shaft 219 when the keyboard 201 is used. The length of the first keyboard unit 203 and the control unit 262 in the longitudinal direction are the same as the length of the second keyboard unit 204, and the support shaft 219 It can be seen that the left and right balance of the keyboard 201 is balanced on the basis of.
コントロール部 2 6 2の略中央部には、 第 2 8図 （C ) に示すように、 蓋部材 2 6 3が開閉可能に取り付けられており、 かかる蓋部材 2 6 3の裏面側には、 P D A 等の各種携帯電子機器が接続されるコネクタ 2 6 4が配設されている。コネクタ 2 6 4には、コントロール部 2 6 2に内蔵されてキ一ボード 2 0 1の制御を行うため のコントロールュニヅト （図示せず） と接続されたフレキシブル基板 2 6 5が接続 されている。 また、 コネクタ部材 2 6 4の近傍で蓋部材 2 6 3の両側には、 一対の ワイヤ部材 2 6 6 Aが固着されており、両ワイヤ部材 2 6 6 Aの外端部間にはワイ ャ部材 2 6 6 Bが回動可能に掛装されている。更に、 ワイヤ部材 2 6 6 Bの中央位 置には支持ワイヤ 2 6 6 Cが固着されている。各ワイヤ部材 2 6 6 Aは、第 2 8図 ( C )に示す状態まで蓋部材 2 6 3と共に回動され、 この状態で支持ワイヤ 2 6 6 Cを後方に回動させることにより、 P D A等の携帯電子機器を傾斜した状態で支持 することができる。 ここに、 ワイヤ部材 2 6 6 A、 2 6 6 B、 2 6 6 Cは、 P D A 等の携帯電子機器を傾斜した状態で支持する背もたれ部材 2 6 6を構成する。 このように、コントロール部 2 6 2に回動可能に取り付けられた蓋部材 2 6 3に コネクタ部材 2 6 4を配設するとともに、コネクタ部材 2 6 4の近傍で蓋部材 2 6 3に背もたれ部材 2 6 6を設けることにより、ケーブル等を必要とすることなく P D A等の携帯電子機器を直接コネクタ部材 2 6 4に接続した状態で、携帯電子機器 を傾斜させて支持することができる。  As shown in FIG. 28 (C), a cover member 263 is attached to the substantially central portion of the control portion 262 so as to be openable and closable. A connector 264 for connecting various portable electronic devices such as PDAs is provided. The connector 2 264 is connected to a flexible board 265 which is built in the control section 262 and is connected to a control unit (not shown) for controlling the key board 201. ing. Further, a pair of wire members 266 A is fixed to both sides of the lid member 263 in the vicinity of the connector member 264, and a wire is provided between the outer ends of both wire members 266 A. The member 26B is rotatably mounted. Further, a support wire 266C is fixed at the center of the wire member 266B. Each wire member 266A is rotated together with the lid member 263 until the state shown in FIG. 28 (C), and by rotating the support wire 266C backward in this state, the PDA and the like are turned off. The portable electronic device can be supported in an inclined state. Here, the wire members 266A, 266B, and 266C constitute a backrest member 266 that supports a portable electronic device such as a PDA in an inclined state. As described above, the connector member 264 is provided on the lid member 263 rotatably attached to the control portion 262, and the back member is attached to the lid member 263 near the connector member 264. By providing the 266, the portable electronic device such as a PDA can be supported by being inclined while the portable electronic device such as a PDA is directly connected to the connector member 264 without requiring a cable or the like.
ここで、第 1キーボードュニット 2 0 3と第 2キーボードュニット 2 0 4を第 2 8図（A) に示すように折り畳んだ時に、 前記のように構成される背もたれ部材 2 6 6が、 各キーボードユニット 2 0 3、 2 0 4間で収納される構成について、 第 2 8図 （B )及び第 3 1図に基づき説明する。第 3 1図は第 2 8図 （A) に示す折畳 状態で各キーボードュニット 2 0 3、 2 0 4の長手方向に直交する方向（短手方向） に切断して示す拡大断面図である。 Here, when the first keyboard unit 203 and the second keyboard unit 204 are folded as shown in FIG. 28 (A), the backrest member 2666 configured as described above, The configuration accommodated between the keyboard units 203 and 204 will be described with reference to FIG. 28 (B) and FIG. Fig. 31 is the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of each keyboard unit 203, 204 in the folded state shown in Fig. 28 (A) (transverse direction). FIG.
第 2 8図 （B ) に示すように、 第 1キ一ボ一ドュニヅト 2 0 3において、 上側か ら第 1キースィツチ列 K 1と第 2キースィツチ列 K 2との間、第 2キースィツチ列 K 2と第 3キースィツチ列 K 3との間、 及び、 第 3キースィツチ列 K 3と第 4キ一 スイッチ列 K 4との間には、 それそれ一定のクリアランスが存在する。 また、 この 関係は、 第 2キーボードュニット 2 0 4においても同様に、第 1キ一スィヅチ列 K 1と第 2キ一スイッチ列 K 2との間、第 2キ一スィヅチ列 K 2と第 3キースィツチ 列 K 3との間、 及び、第 3キースイッチ列 K 3と第 4キ一スィッチ列 K 4との間に 存在する。従って、 第 2 8図 （A) に示す折畳状態では、 各キースィツチ列におけ るキ一トップ 2 3 4の形状とも相まって、 第 3 1図に示すように、相互に対向する 第 1キーボードュニット 2 0 3と第 2キーボードュニット 2 0 4にて隣接するキ ースィツチ列間には、 間隙 Sが形成されることとなる。  As shown in FIG. 28 (B), at the first keyboat duct 203, between the first key switch row K1 and the second key switch row K2 from the upper side, the second key switch row K2 There is a certain clearance between the first key switch row K3 and the third key switch row K3, and between the third key switch row K3 and the fourth key switch row K4. Similarly, this relationship also applies to the second keyboard unit 204 between the first key switch row K1 and the second key switch row K2, and the second key switch row K2 and the second key switch row K2. It exists between the third key switch row K3 and between the third key switch row K3 and the fourth key switch row K4. Therefore, in the folded state shown in FIG. 28 (A), the shape of the key tops 234 in each key switch row, as shown in FIG. A gap S is formed between the adjacent key switches in the knit 203 and the second keyboard unit 204.
本実施形態に係るキーボード 2 0 1では、背もたれ部材 2 6 6の一方のワイヤ部 材 2 6 6 Aを各キーボードュニヅト 2 0 3、 2 0 4における第 1キ一スィツチ列 K 1と第 2キースィヅチ列 K 2との間に生じる間隙 Sに収納し、同様に支持ワイヤ 2 6 6 Cを第 2キ一スィツチ列 K 2と第 3キースィツチ列 K 3との間に生じる間隙 Sに収納し、同様に他方のワイヤ部材 2 6 6 Aを第 3キースィッチ列 K 3と第 4キ 一スイッチ列 K 4との間に生じる間隙 Sに収納している。 また、 ワイヤ部材 2 6 6 Bは、キートヅプ 2 3 4の頂面と第 1支持部材 2 4 4の平面部との間には高低差が 存在し、 また、 かかる高低差は折畳状態で 2倍になることから、 第 1キーボードュ ニット 2 0 3と第 2キーボードュニット 2 0 4との間に生じる間隙に充分収納す ることができる。  In the keyboard 201 according to the present embodiment, one wire member 266 A of the backrest member 266 is connected to the first key switch row K 1 in each of the keyboard units 203 and 204. It is stored in the gap S generated between the second key switch row K2 and the support wire 266C is stored in the gap S generated between the second key switch row K2 and the third key switch row K3. Similarly, the other wire member 266A is housed in the gap S generated between the third key switch row K3 and the fourth key switch row K4. In the wire member 2666B, there is a height difference between the top surface of the key top 23 and the plane portion of the first support member 2444. Since it is doubled, it can be sufficiently accommodated in the gap generated between the first keyboard unit 203 and the second keyboard unit 204.
前記したように、 背もたれ部材 2 6 6を構成する各ワイヤ部材 2 6 6 A、 支持ヮ ィャ 2 6 6 Cを、 両キーボードュニヅ ト 2 0 3、 2 0 4の折畳状態で相互に対向す るキースィツチ列間に生じる間隙 Sに収納するとともに、ワイヤ部材 2 6 6 Bを両 キーボードュニット 2 0 3、 2 0 4間に生じる間隙に収納するように構成したので、 折畳状態における第 1キ一ボードュニット 2 0 3と第 2キーボードュニヅト 2 0 4とを重ね合わせた厚さを薄くすることができ、 また、 背もたれ部材 2 6 6がキ一 ボ一ド 2 0 1の外部に付設する必要がないことから、キ一ボード 2 0 1全体の小型 化を図ることができる。 As described above, the respective wire members 2666A and the support pins 266C constituting the backrest member 266 are opposed to each other in the folded state of the keyboard units 203 and 204. And the wire member 266 B is housed in the gap formed between the keyboard units 203 and 204, so that the first member in the folded state is The thickness of the keyboard unit 203 and the second keyboard unit 204 can be reduced, and the backrest member 266 can be attached to the outside of the keyboard 201. Since there is no need to attach it, the size of the key board 2 Can be achieved.
更に、キ一ボード 2 0 1に対して背もたれ部材 2 6 6を収納するための特別の構 成を全く必要としないので、キーボード 2 0 1全体のコストを低減することができ る。  Further, since no special configuration for storing the backrest member 266 with respect to the keyboard 201 is required, the cost of the keyboard 201 as a whole can be reduced.
次に、第 1キーボードュニット 2 0 3における各キ一スィツチ 2 0 7及び第 2キ —ボードュニヅト 2 0 4における各キースィツチ 2 1 0とコントロール部 2 6 とを電気的に接続する構成について第 2 8図、第 2 9図及び第 3 2図に基づき説明 する。第 2 9図はコントロール部 2 6 2とキーボード 2 0 1との関係を示す説明図 であり、 第 2 9図（A) はコントロール部 2 6 2を第 1キーボードュニット 2 0 3 から取り外した状態を示す説明図であり、 第 2 9図 （B ) はコントロール部 2 6 2 と自在アームとが接続される状態を示す説明図である。  Next, the second embodiment relates to a configuration in which each key switch 207 in the first keyboard unit 203 and each key switch 210 in the second keyboard unit 204 and the control unit 26 are electrically connected. Explanation will be made based on FIGS. 8, 29 and 32. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the control unit 262 and the keyboard 201. FIG. 29A shows the control unit 262 removed from the first keyboard unit 203. FIG. 29 (B) is an explanatory view showing a state where the control section 262 and the free arm are connected.
第 1キ—ボードュニット 2 0 3における第 1ベース板 2 0 5の周壁部材 2 2 3 の背面側に形成されたアーム支持部 2 2 5には、自在アーム 2 6 7が回動可能に支 持されている。 自在アーム 2 6 7は、 アーム支持部 2 2 5に第 1連結ピン 2 6 8 A を介して一端が回動可能に支持された中空状の第 1アーム部材 2 6 7 A、及び、第 1アーム部材 2 6 7 Aの他端に第 2連結ピン 2 6 8 Bを介して回動可能に支持さ れた中空状の第 2アーム部材 2 6 7 Bから構成されている。  A free arm 2667 is rotatably supported by an arm supporting portion 222 formed on the back side of the peripheral wall member 222 of the first base plate 205 in the first key board unit 203. Have been. The universal arm 2667 includes a hollow first arm member 2667A, one end of which is rotatably supported by an arm supporting portion 225 via a first connecting pin 2688A, and a first arm. It is composed of a hollow second arm member 267B rotatably supported at the other end of the arm member 267A via a second connecting pin 268B.
ここに、第 2キ一ュ二ヅ ト 2 4 7の第 2支持板 2 0 9上に配設された複数の各キ —スィッチ 2 1 0に対応するメンブレンスイッチに接続された信号線 2 6 9は、第 3 2図に示すように、第 2支持板 2 0 9に形成された中空状の周壁部材 2 5 6から 第 2ベース板 2 0 8に形成された中空状の周壁部材 2 2 4、軸受部材 2 1 8、軸受 2 1 8 B、軸受部材 2 1 4、第 1ベース板 2 0 5の周壁部材 2 2 3を経てアーム支 持部 2 2 5まで揷通案内されており、 また、第 1キ一ュニヅト 2 3 7の第 1支持板 2 0 6上に配設された複数の各キースィツチ 2 0 7に対応するメンブレンスィヅ チに接続された信号線（図示せず） は、 直接中空状の周壁部材 2 2 3からアーム支 持部 2 2 5まで挿通案内されている。  Here, a signal line 26 connected to a membrane switch corresponding to each of a plurality of keys 210 disposed on the second support plate 209 of the second unit 24 7 9, as shown in FIG. 32, the hollow peripheral wall member 2 56 formed on the second support plate 209 to the hollow peripheral wall member 2 2 formed on the second base plate 208 are formed. 4.Bearing member 218, bearing 218B, bearing member 214, and through the peripheral wall member 223 of the first base plate 205, are guided through to the arm supporting portion 225. Further, a signal line (not shown) connected to a membrane switch corresponding to each of the plurality of key switches 207 provided on the first support plate 206 of the first unit 237 is However, it is inserted and guided directly from the hollow peripheral wall member 223 to the arm support 225.
そして、第 2キーュニット 2 4 7からの信号線と第 1キ一ュニヅト 2 3 7からの 信号線とは、 アーム支持部 2 2 5にてまとめられ、第 1アーム部材 2 6 7 Aから第 2アーム部材 2 6 7 Bまで案内されている。 このように案内される信号線は、第 2 アーム部材 2 6 7 Bの一面に設けられたコネクタ部材 2 7 0 (第 2 9図（A)参照） に接続されている。 The signal line from the second key unit 247 and the signal line from the first key unit 237 are put together by the arm support section 25, and the signal line from the first arm member 267A to the second It is guided to the arm member 2667B. The signal line guided in this way is The arm member 267B is connected to a connector member 270 (see FIG. 29 (A)) provided on one surface of the arm member 267B.
また、 コントロール部 2 6 2において、第 1キーボ一ドュニット 2 0 3の側端縁 に対向する面には、 2つの突起 2 7 1が形成されており、各突起 2 7 1は第 1キー ボードュニット 2 0 3の第 1支持板 2 0 6における周壁部材 2 4 6に形成された 位置決め孔（図示せず） に対して、 着脱可能に嵌合される。 これにより、 コント口 —ル部 2 6 2は、 第 1キーボードュニット 2 0 3に対して着脱可能に並設される。 また、 コントロール部 2 6 2の端面にはコネクタ部材 2 7 2が設けられており、 か かるコネクタ部材 2 7 2は、第 2アーム部材 2 6 7 Bのコネクタ部材 2 7 0に接続 される。  Also, in the control part 26 2, two projections 27 1 are formed on a surface facing the side edge of the first keyboard unit 203, and each projection 2 71 is a first keyboard unit. It is detachably fitted into a positioning hole (not shown) formed in the peripheral wall member 246 of the first support plate 206 of 203. As a result, the control unit 262 is removably juxtaposed with the first keyboard unit 203. Further, a connector member 272 is provided on an end face of the control portion 262, and the connector member 272 is connected to the connector member 270 of the second arm member 267B.
前記したように、コントロール部 2 6 2の各突起 2 7 1は第 1キーボ一ドュニッ ト 2 0 3の周壁部材 2 4 6における位置決め孔に対して着脱可能に嵌合されてお り、 また、 コントロール部 2 6 2のコネクタ部材 2 7 2と第 2アーム部材 2 6 7 B のコネクタ部材 2 7 0とは接離可能であるから、 コントロール部 2 6 2は、第 1キ —ボードユニット 2 0 3に対して着脱可能に構成されており、これにより P D A等 の各種の携帯電子機器に対応してコントロール部 2 6 2を複数用意しておけば、コ ントロール部 2 6 2のみを交換することにより、同一のキーボード 2 0 1を使用し て各種の携帯電子機器にデ一夕入力を行うことができ、携帯電子機器に対応してキ 一ボード 2 0 1を購入する無駄を排してユーザの負担を軽減することができる。ま た、 キーボ一ド 2 0 1の製造者は、各種携帯電子機器毎にキーボード 2 0 1を製造 する必要がなくなり、複数種類のキーボード製造に必要な投資費用や管理費用を低 減することができる。  As described above, each of the projections 27 1 of the control portion 26 2 is detachably fitted to the positioning hole of the peripheral wall member 24 6 of the first keyboard unit 203. The connector part 27 of the control part 26 2 and the connector part 27 0 of the second arm member 26 67 B can be brought into contact with and separated from each other. 3 can be attached to and detached from, so that if multiple control units 26 2 are prepared for various portable electronic devices such as PDAs, only the control unit 26 2 can be replaced. This allows the user to input data to various portable electronic devices using the same keyboard 201, and eliminates the waste of purchasing a keyboard 201 corresponding to the portable electronic device. Burden can be reduced. Also, the keyboard 201 manufacturer does not need to manufacture the keyboard 201 for each type of portable electronic device, and can reduce the investment and management costs required for manufacturing multiple types of keyboards. it can.
'続いて、前記のように構成されたアーム部材 2 6 7の作用について第 2 9図及び 第 3 0図に基づき説明する。第 3 0図は自在アームの各種の使用状態を示す説明図 である。  Next, the operation of the arm member 267 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. FIG. 30 is an explanatory view showing various use states of the free arm.
第 2 9図に示すように、 自在アーム 2 6 7において、 その第 1アーム部 2 6 7 A の一端は、 周壁部材 2 2 3の背面側（非操作者側） に形成されたアーム支持部 2 2 5にて第 1連結ピン 2 6 8 Aを介して回動可能に支持されており、 また、第 1ァー ム部材 2 6 7 Aの他端には第 2アーム部材 2 6 7 Bが第 2連結ピン 2 6 8 Bを介 して回動可能に支持されている。また、コントロール部 2 6 2は、前記したように、 第 1キーボードュニヅト 2 0 3に対して着脱可能に構成されていることから、コン トロール部 2 6 2は、 自在アーム 2 6 7における回動自在性を利用して各種の使用 形態で使用することができる。 As shown in FIG. 29, in the universal arm 267, one end of the first arm portion 267A is connected to an arm supporting portion formed on the rear side (non-operator side) of the peripheral wall member 23. The first arm member 2667A is rotatably supported via a first connecting pin 2668A at 225, and the second arm member 2667B is connected to the other end of the first arm member 2667A. Through the second connecting pin 2 6 8 B And is rotatably supported. Further, as described above, since the control section 262 is configured to be detachable from the first keyboard unit 203, the control section 262 includes the universal arm 267. It can be used in various usage forms by utilizing the rotatable nature of.
例えば、第 3 0図に示すように、 コントロール部 2 6 2の各突起 2 7 1を周壁部 材 2 4 6の位置決め孔から外して、コントロール部 2 6 2をキーボード 2 0 1の長 手方向に配置することにより、 第 3 0図に示す形態（A)の状態で使用することが できる。 また、 形態（A)の状態から第 1アーム部材 2 6 7 Aを第 1連結ピン 2 6 8 Aを中心に時計方向に回動させると、コントロール部 2 6 2をキーボード 2 0 1 から離間した形態（B ) の状態で使用することができる。 更に、 形態 ( B ) の状態 から第 1アーム部材 2 6 7 Aを連結ピン 2 6 8 Aを中心として更に時計方向に回 動させて、キーボード 2 0 1の長手方向の略中央位置で且つキーボード 2 0 1の側 縁（操作側と反対側の側縁） に近接させた形態（C )の状態で使用することができ る。  For example, as shown in FIG. 30, remove the projections 27 1 of the control section 26 2 from the positioning holes of the peripheral wall member 24 6, and move the control section 26 2 in the longitudinal direction of the keyboard 201. By arranging them in a position, they can be used in the state of the form (A) shown in FIG. Further, when the first arm member 2667A is rotated clockwise about the first connecting pin 2668A from the state of the form (A), the control section 2662 is separated from the keyboard 201. It can be used in the form (B). Further, from the state of the form (B), the first arm member 2667A is further rotated clockwise about the connection pin 2668A, and is substantially at the center position in the longitudinal direction of the keyboard 201 and the keyboard. It can be used in the form (C) close to the side edge of 201 (side edge opposite to the operation side).
ここに、コントロール部 2 6 2のコネクタ部材 2 6 4に P D A 2 7 3の接続端子 を接続するとともに、背もたれ部材 2 6 6により P D A 2 7 3を傾斜した状態で支 持し、 第 3 0図における形態 ( B ) の状態で使用する場合が第 3 3図に示されてい る。また同様に、 コントロール部 2 6 2のコネクタ部材 2 6 4に P D A 2 7 3の接 続端子を接続するとともに、背もたれ部材 2 6 6により P D A 2 7 3を傾斜した状 態で支持し、 第 3 0図における形態（C)の状態で使用する場合が第 3 4図に示さ れている。  Here, the connection terminal of the PDA 273 is connected to the connector member 264 of the control part 262, and the PDA 273 is supported by the backrest member 266 in an inclined state. FIG. 33 shows the case of using in the state of the form (B) in FIG. Similarly, the connection terminal of the PDA 273 is connected to the connector member 264 of the control part 262, and the PDA 273 is supported by the backrest member 266 in an inclined state. FIG. 34 shows the case of using in the state of form (C) in FIG.
前記したように、コントロール部 2 6 2を第 1キーボードュニット 2 0 3から着 脱可能に構成し、且つ、 コントロール部 2 6 2と第 1キーボードュニヅ ト 2 0 3と を自在アーム 2 6 7により連結するように構成したので、 自在アーム 2 6 7により 許容される範囲でコントロール部 2 6 2とキーボード 2 0 1との配置関係を自在 に変更することができる。従って、 キーボード 2 0 1に対する P D A 2 7 3の配置 位置をキーボード使用者の所望する位置に自在に変更して操作性をより向上する ことができる。  As described above, the control unit 262 is configured to be detachable from the first keyboard unit 203, and the control unit 262 and the first keyboard unit 203 are controlled by the free arm 267. Since they are configured to be connected, the positional relationship between the control unit 262 and the keyboard 201 can be freely changed within the range allowed by the universal arm 2667. Therefore, the arrangement position of the PDA 273 with respect to the keyboard 201 can be freely changed to a position desired by the keyboard user, so that the operability can be further improved.
続いて、前記のように構成された自在アーム 2 6 7において、第 1アーム部材 2 PC漏删 28 Subsequently, in the universal arm 2 67 configured as described above, the first arm member 2 PC leak 28
68  68
6 7 Aとアーム支持部 2 2 5とを連結する第 1連結ピン 2 6 8 Aの連結構造、及び、 第 1アーム部材 2 6 7 Aと第 2アーム部材 2 6 7 Bとを連結する第 2連結ピン 2 6 8 Bの連結構造について、第 3 5図に基づき説明する。第 3 5図は第 2 8図（B ) に示す状態、 及び、 第 3 0図における形態 （C ) の状態をキーボード 2 0 1の背面 側から見て模式的に示す説明図である。  The connecting structure of the first connecting pin 2668A connecting the 6A and the arm supporting portion 225, and the second connecting member connecting the first arm member 2667A and the second arm member 2667B. The connecting structure of the two connecting pins 268B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the state shown in FIG. 28 (B) and the state of form (C) in FIG. 30 as viewed from the back side of the keyboard 201.
ここに、 第 3 5図において、 第 2アーム部材 2 6 7 8の厚さ11は、 コントロール 部 2 6 2のコネクタ部材 2 7 2に接続するためのコネクタ部材 2 7 0を設ける必 要性があること等の制約上、 キーボード 2 0 1の厚さ h (第 1ペース板 2 0 5、 第 2ベース板 2 0 8の底面とキ一トップ 2 3 4の頂面との間の厚さ）よりも、大きい。 従って、 キ一ボード 2 0 1は、 第 2 8図 （B ) 、 ( C ) に示す状態で使用されるも のではないが、かかる状態では、キ一ボード 2 0 1における各キ一スィツチ 2 0 7、 2 1 0の頂面がなす面は、 キーボード 2 0 1の設置面に平行な状態とはならず、 設 置面に対して若干傾斜した面となる。  Here, in FIG. 35, the thickness 11 of the second arm member 2678 requires that a connector member 270 for connecting to the connector member 272 of the control section 262 be provided. Due to the restrictions, etc., the thickness of the keyboard 201 is h (the thickness between the bottom surface of the first pace plate 205 and the bottom surface of the second base plate 208 and the top surface of the key top 234) Greater than. Therefore, the key board 201 is not used in the state shown in FIGS. 28 (B) and (C), but in such a state, each key switch 2 in the key board 201 is not used. The surface formed by the top surfaces of 07 and 210 is not parallel to the installation surface of the keyboard 201 and is slightly inclined with respect to the installation surface.
かかる事情を勘案し、 本実施形態にかかるキーボード 2 0 1では、 実際にキ一ボ ード 2 0 1が使用される状態においてキ一ボ一ド 2 0 1の底面（第 1及び第 2ベー ス板 2 0 5、 2 0 8の底面） と第 2ァ一ム部材 2 6 7 Bの底部とが同一面となるよ うに第 1連結ピン 2 6 8 A及び第 2連結ピン 2 6 8 Bの連結角度を傾斜させてい る。  In consideration of such circumstances, in the keyboard 201 according to the present embodiment, the bottom surface of the keyboard 201 (the first and second bases) is used when the keyboard 201 is actually used. 1st connecting pin 268A and 2nd connecting pin 268B so that the bottom of the second arm member 2667B and the bottom of the second arm member 2667B are flush with each other. The connecting angle of is inclined.
具体的には、 第 3 5図において、 アーム支持部 2 2 5と第 1アーム部材 2 6 7 A とを回動可能に連結する第 1連結ピン 2 6 8 Aは、垂線 Lに対して角度 Aだけ傾斜 されており、 また、 第 1アーム部材 2 6 7 Aと第 2アーム部材 2 6 7 Bとを回動可 能に連結する第 2連結ピン 2 6 8 Bは、垂線 Lに対して角度 Bだけ傾斜されている。 ここに、 角度 Bは角度 Aよりも大きく設定されている。  Specifically, in FIG. 35, the first connecting pin 268A for rotatably connecting the arm supporting portion 225 and the first arm member 267A is at an angle with respect to the perpendicular L. A, and a second connecting pin 268 B rotatably connects the first arm member 267 A and the second arm member 267 B to the perpendicular L. It is tilted by angle B. Here, the angle B is set larger than the angle A.
このように第 1連結ピン 2 6 8 Aを垂線 Lに対して角度 Aだけ傾斜させるとと もに、 第 2連結ピン 2 6 8 Bを垂線 Lに対して角度 Bだけ傾斜させることにより、 第 2アーム部材 2 6 7 Bは、 第 3 0図に示す形態 （C ) の状態にコントロール部 2 6 2を配置した際に、 全体で傾斜された角度 （A + B ) に基づき、 厚さ （H— h) 分上方へ移動させることとなる。 これにより、 コントロール部 2 6 2の底部 （コン トロール部 2 6 2の底面は第 2アーム部材 2 6 7 Bの下端面と同一面となるよう に配置されている） とキ一ボード 2 0 1の底面とが同一面となる。 As described above, the first connecting pin 268 A is inclined by the angle A with respect to the perpendicular L, and the second connecting pin 268 B is inclined by the angle B with respect to the perpendicular L. When the control unit 26 2 is arranged in the state (C) shown in FIG. 30, the two-arm member 2667 B has a thickness (A + B) based on the angle (A + B) inclined as a whole. H—h) will be moved upward by an amount. As a result, the bottom of the control section 26 2 (the bottom surface of the control section 26 2 is flush with the lower end face of the second arm member 2667 B). And the bottom of the keyboard 201 are flush with each other.
従って、第 2アーム部材 2 6 7の厚さ Hやコントロール部 2 6 2の厚さが、 キー ボードの厚さ hと同一でない場合においても、第 1連結ピン 2 6 8 A、第 2連結ピ ン 2 6 8 Bの連結角度を傾斜させることにより、キ一ボード 2 0 1の使用時に第 2 アーム部材 2 6 7 Bやコントロール部 2 6 2の底部とキ一ボード 2 0 1の底面と を同一面にしてキーボード 2 0 1における各キ一スィヅチ 2 0 7、 2 1 0の頂面が なす面を、 キ一ボード 2 0 1の設置面に平行な状態にすることができ、 キーボード 2 0 1におけるキ一操作性が低下してしまうことを防止できる。  Therefore, even when the thickness H of the second arm member 267 and the thickness of the control portion 262 are not the same as the thickness h of the keyboard, the first connecting pin 268A and the second connecting pin When the key board 201 is used, the bottom of the second arm member 267 B and the control section 262 and the bottom of the key board 201 are disengaged by inclining the connecting angle of the key board 221. The surface formed by the top surface of each key switch 207 and 210 of the keyboard 201 on the same surface can be parallel to the installation surface of the keyboard 201, and the keyboard 207 The key operability in 1 can be prevented from lowering.
尚、前記の例では、第 1連結ピン 2 6 8 A及び第 2連結ピン 2 6 8 Bの連結角度 を傾斜させるように構成しているが、 これに限定されることはなく、いずれか一方 の連結ビンの連結角度を傾斜させてもよい。  In the above-described example, the connection angle of the first connection pin 268A and the second connection pin 268B is configured to be inclined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be inclined.
( 4 ) 第 4実施形態  (4) Fourth embodiment
以下、本発明に係る折畳可能なキーボードについて本発明を具体化した第 4実施 形態に基づき図面を参照しつつ詳細に説明する。先ず、本第 4実施形態に係るキ一 ボードの概略構成について第 3 6図に基づき説明する。第 3 6図は折畳可能なキ一 ボードを模式的に示す分解斜視図である。  Hereinafter, a foldable keyboard according to the present invention will be described in detail based on a fourth embodiment of the present invention with reference to the drawings. First, a schematic configuration of a keyboard according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view schematically showing a foldable keyboard.
第 3 6図において、 キ一ボード 3 0 1は、 基本的に、 回動連結部 3 0 2を介して 相互に回動可能に連結された第 1キーボードュニット 3 0 3及び第 2キーボード ユニット 3 0 4から構成されている。第 1キーボードュニヅト 3 0 3は、第 1ベー ス板 3 0 5、第 1ベース板 3 0 5上で水平方向に回動可能に支持された第 1支持板 3 0 6、及び、第 1支持板 3 0 6.上に配設された複数個のキ一スィツチ 3 0 7から 構成されている。 また、 第 2キーボードユニット 3 0 4は、 第 2ベース板 3 0 8、 第 2ベース板 3 0 8上で水平方向に回動可能に支持された第 2支持板 3 0 9、及び、 第 2支持板 3 0 9上に配設された複数個のキースィヅチ 3 1 0から構成されてい る。  In FIG. 36, the keyboard 301 is basically composed of a first keyboard unit 303 and a second keyboard unit which are rotatably connected to each other via a rotary connection portion 302. It consists of 304. The first keyboard unit 303 includes a first base plate 300, a first support plate 303 supported rotatably in the horizontal direction on the first base plate 305, and The first support plate 300 includes a plurality of key switches 307 disposed on the first support plate 306. The second keyboard unit 304 includes a second base plate 308, a second support plate 309 supported on the second base plate 308 so as to be rotatable in the horizontal direction, and a second base plate 308. It is composed of a plurality of key switches 310 arranged on the support plate 309.
ここで、 先ず、 回動連結部 3 0 2の構成について説明する。第 1ベース板 3 0 5 はアルミ等の金属製薄板から形成されており、第 1ベース板 3 0 5.の側端部 3 1 1 (第 3 6図における右側端部）には、樹脂製で中空状の軸受部材 3 1 2が設けられ ている。かかる軸受部材 3 1 2の両端には、 それぞれ回動連結部 3 0 2の一部を構 成する軸受部 3 1 3、 3 1 4が一体に形成されており、 また、 軸受部材 3 1 2の内 側には、後述する第 1支持板 3 0 6の円弧面 3 3 8と同一の曲率半径を有する円弧 面 3 8 0が設けられている。軸受部 3 1 3には、軸受孔 3 1 3 Aが形成された 2つ の軸受 3 1 3 Bが離間して設けられている。また、軸受部 3 1 4においても同様に、 軸受孔 3 1 4 Aが形成された 2つの軸受 3 1 4 Bが離間して設けられている。 第 2ベース板 3 0 8は、第 1ベース板 3 0 5と同様、 アルミ等の金属薄板から形 成されており、 第 2ベース板 3 0 8の側端部 3 1 5 (第 3 6図における左側端部） には、樹脂製の軸受部材 3 1 6が設けられている。かかる軸受部材 3 1 6の両端に は、 それそれ回動連結部 3 0 2の一部を構成する軸受部 3 1 7 , 3 1 8がー体に形 成されており、 また、 軸受部材 3 1 6の内側には、 後述する第 2支持板 3 0 9の円 弧面 3 4 8と同一の曲率半径を有する円弧面 3 8 1が設けられている。軸受部 3 1 7には、軸受孔 3 1 7 Aが形成された 1つの軸受 3 1 7 Bが設けられている。また、 軸受部 3 1 8においても同様に、軸受孔 3 1 8 Aが形成された 1つの軸受 3 1 8 B が設けられている。そして、軸受 3 1 7 Bは各軸受 3 1 3 Bの間に嵌入されるとと もに、各軸受け 3 1 3 Bの軸受孔 3 1 3 Aと軸受 3 1 7 Bの軸受孔 3 1 7 Aとが一 直線に配置され、また、軸受 3 1 8 Bは各軸受 3 1 4 Bの間に嵌入されるとともに、 各軸受 3 1 4 Bの軸受孔 3 1 4 Aと軸受 3 1 8 Bの軸受孔 3 1 8 Aとが一直線に 配置される。 このように一直線に配置された各軸受孔 3 1 3 As 3 1 7 Aに対して は支持軸 3 1 9 Aが挿嵌され、 また、 各軸受孔 3 1 4 A、 3 1 8 Aに対しては支持 軸 3 1 9 Bが揷嵌される。 これにより、支持軸 3 1 9 A及び 3 1 9 Bを介して第 1 ベ一ス板 3 0 5と第 2ベース板 3 0 8とは、 '相互に回動可能に支持される。 Here, first, the configuration of the rotation connecting portion 302 will be described. The first base plate 300 is formed of a thin metal plate such as aluminum, and the side end 311 of the first base plate 300 (the right end in FIG. 36) is made of resin. And a hollow bearing member 312 is provided. At both ends of the bearing member 312, a part of the rotation connection portion 302 is formed. The bearings 3 13 and 3 14 are integrally formed, and an inner surface of the bearing member 3 12 has the same shape as an arc surface 3 38 of a first support plate 30 6 described later. An arc surface 380 having a radius of curvature is provided. The bearing portion 313 is provided with two bearings 313B each having a bearing hole 313A formed apart. Similarly, also in the bearing portion 3 14, two bearings 3 14 B in which the bearing holes 3 14 A are formed are separately provided. The second base plate 308, like the first base plate 305, is formed of a thin metal plate, such as aluminum, and has a side end portion 315 of the second base plate 308 (FIG. 36). , A resin bearing member 316 is provided. At both ends of the bearing member 3 16, bearing portions 3 17 and 3 18 which respectively constitute a part of the rotation connecting portion 302 are formed in a body. An arc surface 381 having the same radius of curvature as an arc surface 348 of a second support plate 309 described later is provided inside the 16. The bearing part 317 is provided with one bearing 317B in which a bearing hole 317A is formed. Similarly, in the bearing portion 318, one bearing 318B having a bearing hole 318A is provided. Then, the bearings 3 17 B are inserted between the bearings 3 13 B, and the bearing holes 3 13 A of the bearings 3 13 B and the bearing holes 3 17 B of the bearings 3 17 B are provided. A is arranged in a straight line, bearings 3 18 B are fitted between bearings 3 14 B, and bearing holes 3 14 A of bearings 3 14 B and bearings 3 18 B Bearing holes 3 18 A are arranged in a straight line. The support shaft 319 A is inserted into the bearing holes 3 13 As 3 17 A arranged in a straight line as described above, and the bearing holes 3 14 A and 3 18 A are inserted into the bearing holes 3 13 As 3 17 A. The support shaft 3 19 B is fitted. Thus, the first base plate 300 and the second base plate 308 are supported so as to be mutually rotatable via the support shafts 319A and 319B.
また、第 1ベース板 3 0 5には、第 1キーボードュニット 3 0 3に設けられた各 キ一スィツチ 3 0 7とコントロール部 3 6 2 (後述する） とを接続するための信号 線（図示せず） を案内配置するための案内溝 3 2 3が形成されており、 かかる信号 線は、案内溝 3 2 3に案内配置されるとともに、 中空状の軸受部材 3 1 2を経て自 在アーム 3 6 7 (後述する） に揷通案内される。 また、 軸受部材 3 1 2の背面側に 形成されたアーム支持部 3 2 5は中空状に形成されており、自在アーム 3 6 7を回 動可能に支持するとともに、前記のように案内されてくる信号線を自在アーム 3 6 7に揷通案内するものである。第 2ベース板 3 0 8には、第 2キーボードュニヅト 3 0 4に設けられた各キースィツチ 3 1 0とコントロール部 3 6 2とを接続する ための信号線 （図示せず） を案内配置するための案内溝 3 2 4が形成されており、 かかる信号線は、案内溝 3 2 4に案内配置されるとともに、中空状の軸受部 3 1 8、 軸受 3 1 8 Bから外方に案内され、更に中空状の軸受部 3 1 4からアーム支持部 3 2 5を経て自在アーム 3 6 7に揷通案内される。 Further, the first base plate 305 has a signal line (hereinafter, referred to as a signal line) for connecting each key switch 307 provided on the first keyboard unit 303 with a control unit 362 (described later). A guide groove 3 23 for guiding and arranging the signal line (not shown) is formed, and such a signal line is guided and arranged in the guide groove 323 and passes through a hollow bearing member 3 12. It is guided through the arm 3 6 7 (described later). Further, an arm supporting portion 325 formed on the back side of the bearing member 312 is formed in a hollow shape, rotatably supports the free arm 367, and is guided as described above. The incoming signal line is guided through the free arm 367. The second base plate 308 has a second keyboard unit A guide groove 324 for guiding and arranging a signal line (not shown) for connecting each key switch 310 provided on 304 to the control section 362 is formed. The wire is guided and arranged in the guide groove 3 2 4, is guided outward from the hollow bearing 3 18, the bearing 3 18 B, and is further extended from the hollow bearing 3 14 to the arm support 3. After passing through 25, it is guided to the free arm 3 6 7.
第 1ベース板 3 0 5において、側端部 3 1 1とは反対側の側端部 3 2 6の近傍内 側で略中央位置には、ネジ受部 3 2 7が形成されており、このネジ受部 3 2 7には、 第 1支持板 3 0 6のネジ孔 3 2 8に遊嵌されるネジ 3 2 9が締結される。これによ り、第 1支持板 3 0 6はネジ 3 2 9及びネジ受 3 2 7を支点として第 1ベース板 3 0 5上で水平方向に回動可能に取り付けられる。 また、第 2ベース板 3 0 8におい て、側端部 3 1 5とは反対側の側端部 3 0 8 aより少し内側に入った （後述するコ ントロール部 3 6 2の幅分だけ内側の）略中央位置には、 ネジ受部 3 3 0が形成さ れており、 このネジ受部 3 3 0には、 第 2支持板 3 0 9のネジ孔 3 3 1に遊嵌され るネジ 3 3 2が締結される。 これにより、 第 2支持板 3 0 9はネジ 3 3 2、 ネジ受 部 3 3 0を支点として第 2ペース板 3 0 8上で水平方向に回動可能に取り付けら れる。  In the first base plate 300, a screw receiving portion 327 is formed at a substantially central position inside the vicinity of the side end portion 326 opposite to the side end portion 331. A screw 329 loosely fitted in the screw hole 328 of the first support plate 306 is fastened to the screw receiving portion 327. As a result, the first support plate 306 is mounted on the first base plate 305 so as to be horizontally rotatable about the screw 329 and the screw receiver 327. In the second base plate 308, it is slightly inside the side end 308 a opposite to the side end 315 (inside by the width of the control part 362 described later). At approximately the center position, a screw receiving portion 330 is formed. The screw receiving portion 330 has a screw loosely fitted into the screw hole 331 of the second support plate 309. 3 3 2 is concluded. As a result, the second support plate 309 is attached to the second pace plate 308 so as to be rotatable in the horizontal direction with the screw 33 and the screw receiving portion 330 as a fulcrum.
このように、ネジ 3 2 9が締結されるネジ受部 3 2 7は第 1ベ一ス板 3 0 5の側 端部 3 1 1よりも内側に形成されるとともに、ネジ 3 3 2が締結されるネジ受部 3 3 0は第 2ベース板 3 0 8の側端部 3 0 8 aよりも内側に形成されていることか ら、 ネジ 3 2 9は第 1キ一ュ二ヅ ト 3 3 7の内部に配設され、 且つ、 ネジ 3 3 2は 第 2キ一ュニヅト 3 4 7の内部に配設されることとなり、各ネジ 3 2 9、 3 3 2が 各キ一ユニット 3 3 7、 3 4 7の外部に設けられる場合に比して、 各ネジ 3 2 9、 3 3 2に異物が衝突したり入ったりすることを確実に防止することができる。これ により、 第 1ベース板 3 0 5及び第 2ベース板 3 0 8上で、 それそれ第 1キ一ュ二 ヅ ト 3 3 7及び第 2キーュニヅ ト 3 4 7を安定して回動支持することができる。ま た、 各ネジ 3 2 9、 3 3 2を各キーユニット 3 3 7、 3 4 7の内部に酉 3設して各キ 一ュニヅ ト 3 3 7、 3 4 7の外部に出ないように構成することにより、 各キーボー ドュニヅ ト 3 0 3、 3 0 4の小型化を図ることができる。  Thus, the screw receiving portion 3 27 to which the screw 3 209 is fastened is formed inside the side end 3 11 of the first base plate 3 05 and the screw 3 3 2 is fastened. Since the screw receiving portion 330 to be formed is formed inside the side end portion 308 a of the second base plate 308, the screw 329 is formed on the first cutout 3. 3 7 and screws 3 3 2 are disposed inside the second key unit 3 4 7, and each screw 3 2 9 and 3 3 2 is attached to each key unit 3 3 It is possible to reliably prevent foreign matter from colliding with or entering each of the screws 32 9 and 33 32 as compared with the case where it is provided outside of 7 and 34 7. Thereby, the first cutout 3337 and the second cutout 3347 are stably and rotationally supported on the first base plate 304 and the second base plate 310, respectively. be able to. Also, set the screws 3 239 and 332 inside the key units 337 and 347 so that they do not go out of the units 337 and 347. With this configuration, the size of each keyboard unit 303 and 304 can be reduced.
第 1キーボードユニット 3 0 3における第 1支持板 3 0 6はアルミ等の金属薄 板から形成されており、 かかる第 1支持板 3 0 6上には、左手で操作される所定数 のキースィツチ 3 0 7が配設されている。 尚、 左手で操作されるキ一スィヅチ 3 0 7の数は、 国際規格 ( I S 0 2 1 2 6及び I S 0 2 5 3 0 ) に基づいて定められて いる。 The first support plate 303 of the first keyboard unit 303 is made of a thin metal such as aluminum. A predetermined number of key switches 307 operated by the left hand are arranged on the first support plate 306 formed of a plate. Note that the number of keys 307 operated by the left hand is determined based on international standards (IS02126 and IS0250).
また、第 1支持板 3 0 6には 1つのキースィヅチ 3 0 7に対応して 4個の係止部 3 3 3がプレス加工等により一体に形成されており、かかる第 1支持板 3 0 6上に は、 図示しない 3層構造を有するメンブレンスイッチ（可動電極を有する上側シ一 ト、固定電極を有する下側シ一ト及び上側シートと下側シート間に介挿され可動電 極と固定電極とを離間させるスィツチング孔を有するスぺ一サシートからなる）が 配置されている。 尚、 各係止部 3 3 3は、 メンブレンスィツチに形成された孔から 上方へ突出されている。  Further, four locking portions 3333 corresponding to one key switch 307 are integrally formed on the first support plate 306 by press working or the like. On the upper side are a membrane switch (not shown) having a three-layer structure (an upper sheet having a movable electrode, a lower sheet having a fixed electrode, and a movable electrode and a fixed electrode interposed between the upper sheet and the lower sheet. (Made of a spacer sheet having a switching hole for separating the sheet). Each of the locking portions 3 33 protrudes upward from a hole formed in the membrane switch.
そして、 各キースイッチ 3 0 7は、 基本的に、 キートヅプ 3 3 4、 キートップ 3 3 4の上下動を案内する一対のリンク部材 3 3 5、キ一トップ 3 3 4を上方へ付勢 するとともにメンプレンスィツチの可動電極と固定電極からなるスィツチング部 に対応してメンプレンスィツチ上に配置されたラバースプリング 3 3 6から構成 される。 ここに、一対のリンク部材 3 3 5の各上端部はキートップ 3 3 4の下面に 可動状態で連結され、また、各下端部は係止部 3 3 3に可動状態で係止されている。 非押下時にキ一トップ 3 3 4はラバースプリング 3 3 6の付勢力を介して上方へ 付勢されて非押下位置に保持されており、ラバ一スプリング 3 3 6の付勢力に抗し てキ一トップ 3 3 4を押下した際には、ラバ一スプリング 3 3 6がメンブレンスィ ツチの可動電極を押圧してスぺーザのスィツチング孔で固定電極に当接させ、 これ により所定のスィヅチング動作が行われる。前記したキースィッチ 3 0 7と第 1支 持板 3 0 6とは、 第 1キーュニット 3 3 7を構成する。 尚、 キ一スィツチ 3 0 7の 構成については公知であり、 ここでは詳細な説明を省略する。  Each key switch 3 07 basically urges a pair of link members 3 3 5 and a key top 3 3 4 for guiding the key top 3 3 4 and the key top 3 3 4 to move up and down. In addition, it comprises a rubber spring 336 arranged on the membrane switch corresponding to a switching portion composed of a movable electrode and a fixed electrode of the membrane switch. Here, each upper end of the pair of link members 3 35 is movably connected to the lower surface of the key top 3 3 4, and each lower end is movably locked by the locking portion 3 3 3 . When the key top 3 3 4 is not pressed, the key top 3 3 4 is urged upward through the urging force of the rubber spring 3 3 6 and is held at the non-pressed position, and is pressed against the urging force of the rubber spring 3 3 6. When the top 3 3 4 is pressed, the rubber spring 3 3 6 6 presses the movable electrode of the membrane switch and abuts the fixed electrode through the switching hole of the spacer, thereby performing a predetermined switching operation. Done. The above-mentioned key switch 307 and the first support plate 306 constitute a first key unit 337. The configuration of the key switch 307 is publicly known, and the detailed description is omitted here.
第 1支持板 3 0 6の一側 （第 3 6図における右側） は、 その回動支点 （ネジ孔 3 2 8に遊嵌されたネジ 3 2 9及びネジ受 3 2 7 )を中心とする回転半径に合致する 円弧面 3 3 8が形成されており、 また、 円弧面 3 3 8の内側には、 円弧状の長溝 3 3 9が形成されている。長溝 3 3 9にはネジ 3 4 0が遊嵌され、 そのネジ 3 4 0は 第 1ペース板 3 0 5に形成されたネジ受部 3 4 1に締結されている。 ここに、 長溝 T JP03/07028 One side (the right side in FIG. 36) of the first support plate 306 is centered on the rotation fulcrum (the screw 3 229 and the screw receiver 3 2 7 loosely fitted into the screw hole 3 288). An arcuate surface 338 corresponding to the turning radius is formed, and an arc-shaped long groove 339 is formed inside the arcuate surface 338. A screw 340 is loosely fitted in the long groove 339, and the screw 340 is fastened to a screw receiving portion 341 formed on the first pace plate 305. Where the long groove T JP03 / 07028
73  73
3 3 9とネジ 3 4 0とは、第 1支持板 3 0 6が第 1ベース板 3 0 5上で水平方向に 回動する際に、 その回動動作が安定して行われるように案内する作用を行う。 また、 第 1支持板 3 0 6にて円弧面 3 3 8が形成された側には、 円弧面 3 3 8と 同一曲率半径を有する円弧面 3 4 2を有し、その円弧面 3 4 2の下側に複数のロッ ク溝 3 4 5が形成され、 また、 円弧面 3 4 2の上側に各ロック溝 3 4 5に対応する 位置に目盛り 3 4 3が形成された第 1支持部材 3 4 4が配設されている。かかる口 ヅク溝 3 4 5は後述するロヅク機構 3 5 7の一部を構成する。  The 339 and the screw 3400 guide the first support plate 303 so that when the first support plate 360 rotates in the horizontal direction on the first base plate 305, the rotation operation is performed stably. Perform the action of On the side of the first support plate 303 on which the arc surface 338 is formed, there is an arc surface 342 having the same radius of curvature as the arc surface 338. The first support member 3 has a plurality of lock grooves 345 formed on the lower side, and graduations 344 formed at positions corresponding to the lock grooves 345 on the upper side of the arc surface 342. 4 4 are arranged. The opening groove 345 forms a part of a locking mechanism 357 described later.
尚、 前記のように、第 1支持板 3 0 6の円弧面 3 3 8と第 1支持部材 3 4 4の円 弧面 3 4 2とが同一の曲率半径を有するように構成したので、 両円弧面 3 3 8、 3 4 2が相互に合致することとなり、 これにより各円弧面 3 3 8、 3 4 2間でずれが 発生することなく、第 1キーュニット 3 3 7を見栄え良くすることができる。また、 第 1支持部材 3 4 4は、 第 1支持板 3 0 6に配設する際に、 ネジ 3 4 0、 長溝 3 3 9を上方から覆うように配設されるので、 ネジ 3 4 0、 長溝 3 3 9を外側から見え なくして第 1キーュニット 3 3 7を見栄え良く構成できる。第 1支持板 3 0 6の周 囲には、 周壁部材 3 4 6が設けられている。  As described above, since the arc surface 338 of the first support plate 303 and the arc surface 342 of the first support member 344 have the same radius of curvature, The arc surfaces 3 3 8 and 3 4 2 coincide with each other, thereby making it possible to improve the appearance of the first key unit 3 3 7 without causing a shift between the arc surfaces 3 3 8 and 3 4 2. it can. When the first support member 3 4 4 is disposed on the first support plate 3 06, it is disposed so as to cover the screw 3 4 0 and the long groove 3 39 from above. However, it is possible to make the first key unit 337 look good by making the long groove 339 invisible from the outside. A peripheral wall member 346 is provided around the first support plate 360.
更に、 第 2キーボ一ドュニヅト 3 0 4おける第 2支持板 3 0 9は、前記第 1支持 板 3 0 6と同様、 アルミ等の金属薄板から形成されており、 かかる第 2支持板 3 0 9上には、 右手で操作される所定数のキースイッチ 3 1 0が配設されている。 尚、 右手で操作されるキースィヅチ 3 1 0の数は、 国際規格 ( I S 0 2 1 2 6及び I S 0 2 5 3 0 ) に基づいて定められており、前記第 1支持板 3 0 6上に配設される左 手で操作されるキ一スィツチ 3 0 7の数よりも多くされている。 ここに、 キースィ ツチ 3 1 0は、前記キ一スィツチ 3 0 7と同様の構成を有しているので、 その構成 要素についてはキースィッチ 3 0 7と同一の番号を付して説明する。  Further, the second support plate 309 in the second keyboard panel 304 is formed of a thin metal plate such as aluminum similarly to the first support plate 306, and the second support plate 309 Above, a predetermined number of key switches 310 operated by the right hand are arranged. The number of key switches 310 operated by the right hand is determined based on international standards (IS 0 2 126 and IS 0 2 5 3 0), and is provided on the first support plate 3 06. The number is greater than the number of left-hand operated switches 307 provided. Here, the key switch 310 has the same configuration as that of the key switch 307, and the components thereof will be described with the same reference numerals as those of the key switch 307.
第 2支持板 3 0 9には 1つのキースィヅチ 3 1 0に対応して 4個の係止部 3 3 3がプレス加工等により一体に形成されており、 かかる第 2支持板 3 0 9上には、 図示しない 3層構造を有するメンブレンスィヅチ (可動電極を有する上側シート、 固定電極を有する下側シート及び上側シートと下側シート間に介挿され可動電極 と固定電極とを離間させるスィヅチング孔を有するスぺーサシートからなる）が配 置されている。 尚、 各係止部 3 3 3は、 メンプレンスィッチに形成された孔から上 方へ突出されている。 Four locking portions 3333 corresponding to one key switch 310 are integrally formed on the second support plate 309 by pressing or the like, and are formed on the second support plate 309. Is a membrane switch (not shown) having a three-layer structure (an upper sheet having a movable electrode, a lower sheet having a fixed electrode, and a switching hole interposed between the upper sheet and the lower sheet to separate the movable electrode and the fixed electrode. (Consisting of a spacer sheet having the following formula). In addition, each locking part 3 3 3 is above the hole formed in the membrane switch. It is protruded toward.
そして、 各キ一スィヅチ 3 1 0は、 基本的に、 キ一トップ 3 3 4、 キ一トップ 3 And each key switch 310 is basically a key top 3 3 4 and a key top 3
3 4の上下動を案内する一対のリンク部材 3 3 5、キートヅプ 3 3 4を上方へ付勢 するとともにメンブレンスィツチの可動電極と固定電極からなるスィヅチング部 に対応してメンプレンスィヅチ上に配置されたラバ一スプリング 3 3 6から構成 される。 ここに、 一対のリンク部材 3 3 5の各上端部はキ一トップ 3 3 4の下面に 可動状態で連結され、また、各下端部は係止部 3 3 3に可動状態で係止されている。 非押下時にキートップ 3 3 4はラバ一スプリング 3 3 6の付勢力を介して上方へ 付勢されて非押下位置に保持さており、ラバースプリング 3 3 6の付勢力に杭して キ一トップ 3 3 4を押下した際には、 ラバースプリング 3 3 6がメンプレンスイツ チの可動電極を押圧してスぺ一ザのスィヅチング孔で固定電極に当接させ、これに より所定のスィツチング動作が行われる。前記したキ一スィツチ 3 1 0と第 2支持 板 3 0 9とは、 第 2キーュニット 3 4 7を構成する。 A pair of link members for guiding the up and down movement of 3 4 3 3 5 and the key top 3 3 4 are urged upward and are arranged on the membrane switch corresponding to the switching part consisting of the movable electrode and the fixed electrode of the membrane switch. It consists of a rubber spring 3 3 6 Here, the respective upper ends of the pair of link members 335 are movably connected to the lower surface of the key top 334, and the respective lower ends are movably locked to the locking portions 333. I have. When not pressed, the key top 3 3 4 is urged upward through the urging force of the rubber spring 3 3 6 and held at the non-pressed position. When 3 3 4 is pressed, the rubber spring 3 3 6 6 presses the movable electrode of the membrane switch and abuts on the fixed electrode through the switching hole of the switcher, thereby performing a predetermined switching operation. . The key switch 310 and the second support plate 309 constitute a second key unit 347.
第 2支持板 3 0 9の一側 （第 3 6図における左側） は、 その回動支点 （ネジ孔 3 3 1に遊嵌されたネジ 3 3 2及びネジ受 3 3 0 )を中心とする回転半径に合致する 円弧面 3 4 8が形成されており、 また、 円弧面 3 4 8の内側には、 円弧状の長溝 3 One side (the left side in FIG. 36) of the second support plate 309 is centered on its rotation fulcrum (the screw 332 and the screw receiver 3330 loosely fitted into the screw hole 331). An arc-shaped surface 348 corresponding to the turning radius is formed, and an arc-shaped long groove 3 is formed inside the arc-shaped surface 348.
4 9が形成されている。長溝 3 4 9にはネジ 3 5 0が遊嵌され、 そのネジ 3 5 0は 第 2ペース板 3 0 8に形成されたネジ受部 3 5 1に締結されている。 ここに、 長溝 3 4 9とネジ 3 5 0とは、第 2支持板 3 0 9が第 2ベース板 3 0 8上で水平方向に 回動する際に、 その回動動作が安定して行われるように案内する作用を行う。 また、第 2支持板 3 0 9にて円弧面 3 4 8が形成された側には、 円弧面 3 4 8と 同一曲率半径を有する円弧面 3 5 2を有し、その円弧面 3 5 2の下側に複数のロッ ク溝 3 5 5 (第 3 7図参照） が形成され、 また、 円弧面 3 5 2の上側に各ロック溝 3 5 5に対応する位置に目盛り 3 5 3が形成された第 2支持部材 3 5 4が配設さ れている。 かかるロック溝 3 5 5は後述するロック機構 3 5 7の一部を構成する。 尚、前記のように、 第 2支持板 3 0 9の円弧面 3 4 8と第 2支持部材 3 5 4の円 弧面 3 5 2とが同一の曲率半径を有するように構成したので、 両円弧面 3 4 8、 34 9 are formed. A screw 350 is loosely fitted in the long groove 349, and the screw 350 is fastened to a screw receiving portion 351 formed in the second pace plate 308. Here, the long groove 349 and the screw 350 are stable when the second support plate 309 is rotated on the second base plate 308 in the horizontal direction. It acts to guide you to be heard. On the side of the second support plate 309 on which the arc surface 348 is formed, there is an arc surface 352 having the same radius of curvature as the arc surface 348, and the arc surface 352 is provided. Lock grooves 35 5 (see Fig. 37) are formed on the lower side, and scales 35 3 are formed on the upper side of the arc surface 35 2 at positions corresponding to the lock grooves 35 5. The provided second support member 354 is provided. The lock groove 355 forms a part of a lock mechanism 357 described later. As described above, since the arc surface 348 of the second support plate 309 and the arc surface 352 of the second support member 354 have the same radius of curvature, Arc surface 3 4 8, 3
5 2が相互に合致することとなり、 これにより各円弧面 3 4 8、 3 5 2間でずれが 発生することなく、第 2キーュニット 3 4 7を見栄え良くすることができる。また、 T JP03/07028 5 2 coincide with each other, whereby the second key unit 3 47 can be made to look good without causing any displacement between the arc surfaces 3 48 and 3 52. Also, T JP03 / 07028
75  75
第 2支持部材 3 5 4は、 第 2支持板 3 0 9に配設する際に、 ネジ 3 5 0、長溝 3 4 9を上方から覆うように配設されるので、 ネジ 3 5 0、長溝 3 4 9を外側から見え なくして第 2キ一ュニヅト 3 4 7を見栄え良く構成できる。第 2支持板 3 0 9の周 囲には、 周壁部材 3 5 6が設けられている。 When the second support member 354 is disposed on the second support plate 309, it is disposed so as to cover the screw 350 and the long groove 349 from above. The second key unit 347 can be formed with a good appearance by making the 3449 invisible from the outside. A peripheral wall member 356 is provided around the second support plate 309.
続いて、第 1ベース板 3 0 5と第 2ペース板 3 0 8上で、 それそれ第 1支持板 3 0 6及び第 2支持板 3 0 9を水平方向に回動するにつき、第 1支持板 3 0 6と第 2 支持板 3 0 9とを相互に独立して回動させた後、その回動位置にて第 1支持板 3 0 6、第 2支持板 3 0 9をロヅクするロック機構について、第 3 7図に基づき説明す る。第 3 7図は第 1支持板 3 0 6と第 2支持板 3 0 9の回動動作を独立して行った 後、その回動位置で第 1支持板 3 0 6及び第 2支持板 3 0 9をロックするロック機 構を拡大して示す説明図である。  Subsequently, the first support plate 310 and the second support plate 310 are horizontally rotated on the first base plate 300 and the second pace plate 310, respectively. After the plate 303 and the second support plate 309 are rotated independently of each other, the lock for locking the first support plate 306 and the second support plate 309 at the rotation position is provided. The mechanism will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 shows that the first support plate 303 and the second support plate 310 are rotated independently after the first support plate 310 and the second support plate 310 are rotated. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a lock mechanism for locking 09 in an enlarged manner.
第 3 7図において、 ロック機構 3 5 7は、第 1ベース板 3 0 5と第 1キーュニヅ ト 3 3 7との間、及び、第 2ベース板 3 0 8と第 2キ一ュニヅト 3 4 7との間に配 設されているが、 いずれのロック機構 3 5 7も同一の構成を有している。  In FIG. 37, the lock mechanism 357 is provided between the first base plate 305 and the first key unit 337, and between the second base plate 308 and the second key unit 347. The lock mechanisms 357 have the same configuration.
第 1キ一ボードュニヅト 3 0 3側で第 1ベース板 3 0 5と第 1キーュニット 3 The first base plate 300 and the first key unit 3 on the first key unit 303 side
3 7との間に設けられたロック機構 3 5 7は、第 1キーュニヅト 3 3 7の第 1支持 板 3 0 6に配設された第 1支持部材 3 4 4の円弧面 3 4 2の下側に形成された口 ヅク溝 3 4 5と、第 1ベース板 3 0 5に設けられた軸受部材 3 1 2の円弧面 3 8 0 における略中央位置に形成されたロック片 3 5 9とから構成されている。 The lock mechanism 357 provided between the first support member 370 and the first support plate 306 of the first keyunit 337 is located below the circular arc surface 342 of the first support member 344. The lock groove 345 formed on the side of the side and the lock piece 359 formed at a substantially central position on the arcuate surface 3800 of the bearing member 312 provided on the first base plate 30.5. It is configured.
ここに、 口ック機構 3 5 7は、第 1キーュニット 3 3 7及び第 2キーュニヅト 3 Here, the locking mechanism 357 is composed of the first key unit 337 and the second key unit
4 7が相互に独立して回動可能に構成されていることから、第 1キーュニット 3 3 7側と第 2キーュニット 3 4 7側の双方について設ける必要がある。 Since the switches 47 are configured to be rotatable independently of each other, it is necessary to provide both the first key unit 337 side and the second key unit 347 side.
また、第 1ペース板 3 0 5に設けられた軸受部材 3 1 2は中空状に形成されてお り、 その内部には、 一対の保持部 3 5 8が設けられている。かかる一対の保持部 3 5 8の間には、 金属製の弾性薄板を「く」字状に折曲されたロヅク片 3 5 9の両端 が支持されている。 また、第 1支持部材 3 4 4の円弧面 3 4 2に当接する軸受部材 3 1 2の円弧面 3 8 0には、開口 3 6 1が形成されており、 口ヅク片 3 5 9の先端 は開口 3 6 1から突出するように構成されている。このように開口 3 6 1から突出 されたロック片 3 5 9の先端は、第 1支持部材 3 4 4の円弧面 3 4 2に形成された 8 Further, the bearing member 312 provided on the first pace plate 3505 is formed in a hollow shape, and a pair of holding portions 358 is provided therein. Between the pair of holding portions 358, both ends of a lock piece 359 obtained by bending a metal elastic thin plate in a “く” shape are supported. In addition, an opening 361 is formed in the arc surface 3800 of the bearing member 312 that abuts against the arc surface 342 of the first support member 344, and an end of the opening piece 359 is formed. Is configured to protrude from the opening 36 1. The tip of the lock piece 359 protruding from the opening 361 in this way is formed on the arcuate surface 3422 of the first support member 3444 8
76  76
複数個のロック溝 3 4 5の 1つに係止される。 Locked into one of the lock grooves 3 4 5.
同様に、第 2キーボードュニヅト 3 0 4側で第 2ペース板 3 0 8と第 2キ一ュ二 ヅ ト 3 4 7との間に設けられたロヅク機構 3 5 7は、第 2キーュニヅト 3 4 7の第 2支持板 3 0 9に配設された第 2支持部材 3 5 4の円弧面 3 5 2の下側に形成さ れたロヅク溝 3 5 5と、第 2ベース板 3 0 8に設けられた軸受部材 3 1 6の円弧面 3 8 1における略中央位置に形成された口ヅク片 3 5 9とから構成されている。 また、第 2ベース板 3 0 8に設けられた軸受部材 3 1 6は中空状に形成されてお り、 その内部には、 一対の保持部 3 5 8が設けられている。 かかる一対の保持部 3 5 8の間には、 金属製の弾性薄板を「く」字状に折曲されたロック片 3 5 9の両端 が支持されている。 また、 第 2支持部材 3 5 4の円弧面 3 5 2に当接する軸受部材 3 1 6の円弧面 3 8 1には、 開口 3 6 1が形成されており、 口ヅク片 3 5 9の先端 は開口 3 6 1から突出するように構成されている。このように開口 3 6 1から突出 されたロック片 3 5 9の先端は、第 2支持部材 3 5 4の円弧面 3 5 2に形成された 複数個のロック溝 3 5 5の 1つに係止される。  Similarly, a lock mechanism 357 provided between the second pace plate 308 and the second cutout 347 on the second keyboard unit 304 side has a second lock mechanism. A lock groove formed in the lower side of the arcuate surface of the second support member disposed on the second support plate of the key unit and a second base plate An orifice piece 359 formed at a substantially central position on the arc surface 381 of the bearing member 316 provided on the reference numeral 08 is provided. Further, the bearing member 316 provided on the second base plate 308 is formed in a hollow shape, and a pair of holding portions 358 are provided therein. Between the pair of holding portions 358, both ends of a lock piece 359 formed by bending a metal elastic thin plate in a “く” shape are supported. Further, an opening 361 is formed in the arc surface 381 of the bearing member 316 which is in contact with the arc surface 3552 of the second support member 3554, and the tip of the opening piece 359 is formed. Is configured to protrude from the opening 36 1. The tip of the lock piece 359 protruding from the opening 361 in this manner is engaged with one of the plurality of lock grooves 3555 formed in the arc surface 352 of the second support member 3554. Is stopped.
前記したロック機構 3 5 7によれば、第 1キーュニヅト 3 3 7と第 2キーュニヅ ト 3 4 7とを相互に独立して所望の回動位置まで回動させた後、その回動位置にて ロック片 3 5 9の先端を第 1支持部材 3 4 4のロック溝 3 4 5に係止することに より第 1キ一ュニヅ ト 3 3 7をロックすることができる。 また、 ロック片 3 5 9の 先端を第 2支持部材 3 5 4のロック溝 3 5 5に係止することにより第 2キーュニ ヅ ト 3 4 7をロックすることができる。  According to the above-described lock mechanism 357, the first key unit 337 and the second key unit 347 are independently rotated to a desired rotation position, and then at the rotation position. By locking the tip of the lock piece 359 in the lock groove 345 of the first support member 344, the first kite 337 can be locked. In addition, the second key unit 347 can be locked by locking the tip of the lock piece 359 in the lock groove 3555 of the second support member 3554.
従って、個々の使用者にとって最適な操作形態に固定した状態でキーボード操作 を安定して行うことができる。  Therefore, it is possible to stably perform the keyboard operation in a state where the operation mode is fixed to the optimum one for each user.
また、 ロヅク機構 3 5 7は、第 1支持部材 3 4 4の円弧面 3 4 2に形成された口 ヅク溝 3 4 5と第 1ベース板 3 0 5の軸受部材 3 1 2に形成されたロック片 3 5 9、及び、 第 2支持部材 3 5 4の円弧面 3 5 2に形成されたロック溝 3 5 5と第 2 ベース板 3 0 8の軸受部材 3 1 6に形成されたロック片 3 5 9から簡単に構成さ れているので、第 1キーュニヅ ト 3 3 7及び第 2キ一ュニヅト 3 4 7のロック機構 3 5 7を低いコストで実現することができる。 また、 ロック溝 3 4 5、 3 5 5は、 第 1支持部材 3 4 4、 第 2支持部材 3 5 4の円弧面 3 4 2、 3 5 2に形成されるこ とから、 これらの円弧面 3 4 2、 3 5 2の形成と同時にロック溝 3 4 5、 3 5 5を 形成することが可能となり、 これによつてもコストの低廉化を図ることができる。 続いて、第 1キ一ュニヅト 3 3 7及ぴ第 2キーュニヅト 3 4 7を回動させる各種 の態様について第 3 8図及び第 3 9図に基づき説明する。第 3 8図及び第 3 9図は 第 1キーュニヅト 3 3 7及び第 2キーュニヅト 3 4 7を回動させていない状態か ら所望の回動位置まで回動させた状態を示す説明図であり、 第 3 8図（A) は第 1 キーュニヅト 3 3 7及ぴ第 2キーュニヅト 3 4 7を回動させていない状態、第 3 8 図（B ) は第 1キーュニヅト 3 3 7を時計方向に、 第 2キーュニヅト 3 4 7を反時 計方向に回動させた状態を示し、 更に、 第 3 9図 （A) は第 3 8図（A) の状態か ら第 1キ一ュニヅト 3 3 7のみを時計方向に回動させた状態、 第 3 9図（B ) は第 3 9図（A)の状態から第 2キ一ュニヅト 3 4 7を時計方向に回動させた状態を示 す。 Further, the lock mechanism 357 is formed in an opening groove 345 formed in the circular arc surface 342 of the first support member 344 and a bearing member 321 of the first base plate 305. The lock piece 359, the lock groove 355 formed in the arcuate surface 352 of the second support member 3554, and the lock piece formed in the bearing member 316 of the second base plate 310 Since the configuration is simple from the configuration of the 359, the lock mechanism 357 of the first keyunit 337 and the second keyunit 347 can be realized at low cost. Further, the lock grooves 345 and 355 are formed on the arc surfaces 342 and 352 of the first support member 344 and the second support member 354, respectively. Therefore, it is possible to form the lock grooves 345, 355 at the same time as the formation of the arc surfaces 342, 352, and thus the cost can be reduced. Next, various modes of rotating the first key unit 337 and the second key unit 347 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. FIGS. 38 and 39 are explanatory diagrams showing a state in which the first key unit 337 and the second key unit 347 are turned from a state where they are not turned to a desired turning position. Fig. 38 (A) shows a state in which the first key unit 33 7 and the second key unit 3 47 are not rotated, and Fig. 38 (B) shows a state in which the first key unit 33 7 is turned clockwise. 2 shows a state in which the key unit 347 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction, and FIG. 39 (A) shows only the first key unit 337 from the state shown in FIG. 38 (A). FIG. 39 (B) shows a state in which the second unit 3347 is rotated clockwise from the state in FIG. 39 (A).
第 1キーュニヅ ト 3 3 7の第 1支持板 3 0 6と第 2キーュニヅ ト 3 4 7の第 2 支持板 3 0 9を回動させていない状態においては、 第 3 8図 （A) に示すように、 支持板 1 0 6上に配列される各キースィツチ 3 0 7と支持板 3 0 9上に配列され る各キ一スィツチ 3 1 0は、通常のキーボードと同一のキ一配列関係を有している。 このとき、軸受部材 3 1 2に支持されたロック片 3 5 9は、第 1支持部材 3 4 4に おける円弧面 3 4 2の下側に形成された複数のロック溝 3 4 5における中央の口 ヅク溝 3 4 5に係止されており、 また、軸受部材 3 1 6に支持されたロック片 3 5 9は、第 2支持部材 3 5 4における円弧面 3 5 2の下側に形成された複数のロック 溝 3 5 9における中央のロック溝 3 5 5に係止されている。かかる係止状態は、第 1支持部材 3 4 4の目盛り 3 4 3、及び、第 2支持部材 3 5 4の目盛り 3 5 3を見 ることにより確認することができる。  FIG. 38 (A) shows the state in which the first support plate 303 of the first key unit 3337 and the second support plate 309 of the second key unit 347 are not rotated. As described above, each key switch 307 arranged on the support plate 106 and each key switch 310 arranged on the support plate 309 have the same key arrangement relationship as a normal keyboard. are doing. At this time, the lock piece 359 supported by the bearing member 312 is located at the center of the plurality of lock grooves 345 formed on the lower side of the arc surface 342 of the first support member 3444. The lock piece 359, which is locked in the opening groove 345 and supported by the bearing member 316, is formed on the lower side of the circular arc surface 352 in the second support member 354. It is locked in the central lock groove 355 among the plurality of lock grooves 359. Such a locked state can be confirmed by looking at the scale 3 43 of the first support member 3 4 4 and the scale 3 53 of the second support member 3 5 4.
前記したようなキー配列関係の状態でキーボード 3 0 1の操作を所望する場合 には、 勿論この状態でキ一ボードの操作を行うことができる。  When the operation of the keyboard 301 is desired in the state of the key arrangement as described above, the keyboard can be operated in this state.
第 3 8図 （A) に示す状態から、 第 1キーュニヅト 3 3 7の第 1支持板 3 0 6及 び第 2キーュニット 3 4 7の第 2支持板 3 0 9を、相互に独立してそれそれ第 3 8 図 （A) における時計方向及び反時計方向へ回動させると、 軸受部材 3 1 2のロッ ク片 3 5 9と係止するロック溝 3 4 5が順次回動方向に移動していき、 また、軸受 部材 3 1 6のロック片 3 5 9と係止するロック溝 3 5 5が順次回動方向に移動し ていく。軸受部材 3 1 2のロック片 3 5 9が回動方向側の端部位置にあるロック溝From the state shown in Fig. 38 (A), the first support plate 306 of the first key unit 33 7 and the second support plate 309 of the second key unit 347 are independently moved from each other. When it is turned clockwise and counterclockwise in Fig. 38 (A), the lock groove 345 engaging with the lock piece 359 of the bearing member 312 moves sequentially in the turning direction. And also bearing The lock groove 355 which locks with the lock piece 359 of the member 316 moves sequentially in the rotating direction. Lock groove with the lock piece 3 5 9 of the bearing member 3 1 2 at the end position on the rotation direction side
3 4 5に係止し、 また、軸受部材 3 1 6のロック片 3 5 9が回動方向側の端部位置 にあるロック溝 3 5 5に係止すると、第 1キ一ュニヅト 3 3 7及び第 2キ一ュニヅ ト 3 4 7は第 3 8図 （B ) に示す状態になる。 When the lock piece 359 of the bearing member 316 is locked in the lock groove 355 at the end position on the rotation direction side, the first kite 337 And the second kite 347 is in the state shown in FIG. 38 (B).
前記した軸受部材 3 1 2の口ヅク片 3 5 9と第 1支持部材 3 4 4のロック溝 3 The above described bearing member 3 1 2 of the opening 3 5 9 and the first supporting member 3 4 4 of the lock groove 3 4
4 5との間の係止状態、及び、軸受部材 3 1 6のロック片 3 5 9と第 2支持部材 34 and the locking piece 3 5 9 of the bearing member 3 16 and the second support member 3
5 4のロック溝 3 5 5との間の係止状態は、 第 1支持部材 3 4 4の目盛り 3 4 3、 及び、第 2支持部材 3 5 4の目盛り 3 5 3を見ることにより確認することができる c 前記したようなキー配列関係の状態でキーボード 3 0 1の操作を所望する場合 には、 この状態でキーボードの操作を行うことができる。 The locking state between the lock groove 3 5 5 of 5 4 is confirmed by checking the scale 3 4 3 of the first support member 3 4 4 and the scale 3 5 3 of the second support member 3 5 4 C) When the operation of the keyboard 301 is desired in the state of the key arrangement as described above, the operation of the keyboard can be performed in this state.
更に、 第 3 8図（A) に示す状態から第 1キ一ュニヅト 3 3 7のみを独立して回 動することもできる。第 3 8図 （A) に示す状態から、 第 1キーュニヅト 3 3 7の 第 1支持板 3 0 6のみを、第 2キーュニヅ ト 3 4 7の第 2支持板 3 0 9とは独立し て、 第 3 8図（A) における時計方向へ回動させると、 軸受部材 3 1 2の口ヅク片 3 5 9と係止するロック溝 3 4 5が順次回動方向に移動していき、軸受部材 3 1 2 のロック片 3 5 9が回動方向側の端部位置にあるロック溝 3 4 5に係止すると、第 1キーュニット 3 3 7及び第 2キ一ュ二ヅ ト 3 4 7は第 3 9図（A)に示す状態に なる。  In addition, only the first unit 3337 can be independently rotated from the state shown in FIG. 38 (A). From the state shown in FIG. 38 (A), only the first support plate 306 of the first key unit 33 7 is independent of the second support plate 309 of the second key unit 3 47, When it is rotated clockwise in FIG. 38 (A), the lock grooves 345 engaging with the mouthpieces 359 of the bearing member 312 move sequentially in the rotating direction, and When the lock pieces 359 of 312 are locked in the lock grooves 345 at the end positions on the rotation direction side, the first keyunit 337 and the second keyunit 347 are not locked. 39 The state shown in Fig. 9 (A) is obtained.
第 3 9図（A) に示す状態における軸受部材 3 1 2のロック片 3 5 9と第 1支持 部材 3 4 4のロック溝 3 4 5との間の係止状態、及び、軸受部材 3 1 6のロック片 3 5 9と第 2支持部材 3 5 4のロック溝 3 5 5との間の係止状態は、第 1支持部材 In the state shown in FIG. 39 (A), the locking state between the lock piece 359 of the bearing member 312 and the lock groove 345 of the first support member 344, and the bearing member 31 The locking state between the lock piece 35 of FIG. 6 and the lock groove 35 of the second support member 35
3 4 4の目盛り 3 4 3、及び、第 2支持部材 3 5 4の目盛り 3 5 3を見ることによ り確認することができる。 It can be confirmed by looking at the scale 3 4 3 of the 3 4 4 and the scale 3 53 of the second support member 3 5 4.
前記したようなキー配列関係の状態でキーボード 3 0 1の操作を所望する場合 には、 この状態でキーボードの操作を行うことができる。  When the operation of the keyboard 301 is desired in the state of the key arrangement as described above, the operation of the keyboard can be performed in this state.
前記にて説明したように、 口ヅク片 3 5 9とロック溝 3 4 5 , 3 5 5から構成さ れるロック機構 3 5 7を介して第 1キーュニット 3 3 7及び第 2キ一ュニヅト 3 As described above, the first key unit 337 and the second key unit 3 are connected via the lock mechanism 3557 composed of the mouth piece 359 and the lock grooves 345,355.
4 7を所望の回動位置で相互に独立してロックすることができ、極めて簡単な操作 により各キーボードュニット 3 3 7、 3 4 7を独立して所望の操作状態に配置する ことにより、個々の使用者にとって最適な操作形態に固定した状態でキ一ボ一ド操 作を安定して行うことができる。 4 7 can be locked independently of one another in the desired pivot position, making operation extremely simple The keyboard units 3 3 7 and 3 4 7 are independently arranged in a desired operation state, thereby stabilizing the keyboard operation in a state in which the operation form is optimal for each user. Can be done.
また、第 1キーュニヅト 3 3 7側でロック片 3 5 9と各ロック溝 3 4 5との間に おける係止状態、及び、第 2キーュニヅト 3 4 7側でロック片 3 5 9と各ロック溝 Also, the locking state between the lock piece 359 and each lock groove 345 on the first key unit 337 side, and the lock piece 359 and each lock groove on the second key unit 347 side
3 5 5との間における係止状態は、第 1支持部材 3 4 4における円弧面 3 4 2の上 側に形成された目盛り 3 4 3、及び、第 2支持部材 3 5 4における円弧面 3 5 2の 上側に形成された目盛り 3 5 3をキ一ボード 3 0 1の上方から視認することによ り確認することができる。 このように、第 1支持部材 3 4 4には各ロック溝 3 4 5 に対応する位置に目盛り 3 4 3が設けられるとともに、第 2支持部材 3 5 4には各 ロック溝 3 5 5に対応する位置に目盛り 3 5 3が設けられているので、第 1キーュ ニット 3 3 7及び第 2キーュニヅト 3 4 7を回動させる際に、 目盛り 3 4 3、 3 5 3を見ながら各キーュニット 3 3 7、 3 4 7を回動させることにより各キーュニヅ ト 3 3 7、 3 4 7の回動角度を簡単且つ容易に調整することができる。 The locking state between the third support member 3 5 5 and the arc surface 3 4 3 on the first support member 3 4 4 and the scale 3 4 3 formed on the upper side of the second support member 3 5 4 The scale 35 3 formed on the upper side of 52 can be confirmed by visually recognizing it from above the keyboard 301. As described above, the scales 3 4 3 are provided at positions corresponding to the lock grooves 3 4 5 on the first support member 3 4 4, and the scales 3 4 3 are provided on the second support member 3 5 4 corresponding to the lock grooves 3 5 5. The scale 3 5 3 is provided at the position where the key unit 3 3 7 and the second key unit 3 4 7 are rotated, while looking at the scales 3 4 3 and 3 5 3 when turning the first key unit 3 3 7 and the second key unit 3 4 7. By rotating 7, 347, the rotation angle of each key unit 337, 347 can be adjusted easily and easily.
続いて、前記キーボード 3 0 1に設けられている周辺構造について、第 4 0図第 Next, the peripheral structure provided on the keyboard 301 will be described with reference to FIG.
4 5図に基づき説明する。 This will be described with reference to FIG.
前記したキーボード 3 0 1において、第 1キーボードュニヅト 3 0 3の第 1支持 板 3 0 6には、 前記したように、 国際規格 ( I S 0 2 1 2 6及び I S 0 2 5 3 0 ) に従って左手で操作される所定数のキ一スィツチ 3 0 7が配列されており、 また、 第 2キーボードュニヅト 3 0 4の第 2支持板 3 0 9には、国際規格に従って右手で 操作される所定数のキースィツチ 3 1 0が配列されているが、左手で操作されキ一 スィツチ 3 0 7の数は、 右手で操作されるキースィツチ 3 1 0の数よりも少ない。 これに基づき、 第 3 8図、 第 3 9図に示すように、 第 1キーボードュニヅト 3 0 3 の長手方向における長さは、第 2キーボードュニット 3 0 4の長手方向における長 さよりも短く構成されている。  In the keyboard 301 described above, the first support plate 303 of the first keyboard unit 303 has, as described above, the international standard (IS 0 2 1 2 6 and IS 0 2 3 5 0) ), A predetermined number of switches 307 which are operated by the left hand according to) are arranged on the second support plate 309 of the second keyboard unit 304 with the right hand according to international standards. Although a predetermined number of key switches 310 operated are arranged, the number of key switches 307 operated by the left hand is smaller than the number of key switches 310 operated by the right hand. Based on this, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the length of the first keyboard unit 304 in the longitudinal direction is larger than the length of the second keyboard unit 304 in the longitudinal direction. Is also short.
このままでは、第 1キーボードュニヅト 3 0 3と第 2キーボードュニヅト 3 0 4 とを相互に折り畳んだ場合に、両者の長さがアンバランスとなって、 キーボード 3 0 1の携帯性も良くないことから、本実施形態に係るキーボード 3 0 1では、第 4 0図（A)乃至第 4 0図 （C ) に示すように、 第 1キーボードュニット 3 0 3の一 側端縁（第 2キーボードュニット 3 0 4と回動可能に連結される側と反対側の端縁 で、 第 4 0図における左側端縁） に、 キーボード 3 0 1の制御を行うコントロール 部 3 6 2を並設するとともに、第 1キーボードュニヅト 3 0 3とコントロール部 3 6 2とを加えた長手方向の長さが第 2キーボードュニット 3 0 4の長手方向にお ける長さと同一長さとなるように構成している。 In this state, when the first keyboard unit 303 and the second keyboard unit 304 are folded together, their lengths become unbalanced, and the keyboard 301 is carried. Therefore, in the keyboard 301 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 40 (A) to 40 (C), one of the first keyboard units 303 is not provided. A control portion for controlling the keyboard 301 is provided on a side edge (an edge opposite to the side rotatably connected to the second keyboard unit 304 and the left edge in FIG. 40). The length of the second keyboard unit 304 in the longitudinal direction is the sum of the length of the second keyboard unit 304 and the first keyboard unit 303 and the control unit 362. It is configured to have the same length as
このように構成することにより、第 1キーボードュニット 3 0 3と第 2キ一ボ一 ドュニヅト 3 0 4との長さの相違に起因して、第 1キーボードュニヅト 3 0 3に発 生するスペースを有効に利用することができ、コントロール部 3 6 2をキーボード 3 0 1の下部や側部に配設する場合に比して、キーボ一ド 3 0 1の薄型化を図るこ とができ、 また、 小型化を図ることができる。  With this configuration, the first keyboard unit 303 is generated due to the difference in length between the first keyboard unit 303 and the second keyboard unit 304. This makes it possible to make effective use of the space created, and makes the keyboard 301 thinner than when the control section 36 2 is arranged below or on the side of the keyboard 301. And miniaturization can be achieved.
ここに、 第 4 0図 （A) は、 キーボード 3 0 1の非使用時に軸受部材 3 1 3の各 軸受 3 1 3 Bの軸受孔 3 1 3 Aと軸受部材 3 1 7の軸受 3 1 7 Bの軸受孔 3 1 7 A、及び、軸受部 3 1 4の各軸受 3 1 4 Bの軸受孔 3 1 4 Aと軸受部 3 1 8の軸受 3 1 8 Bの軸受孔 3 1 8 Aに渡ってそれぞれ揷通される支持軸 3 1 9 A、 3 1 9 B を介して両キ一ボードュニヅト 3 0 3、 3 0 4が近接する方向に回動して重ね合わ せた折畳状態を示しており、第 1キーボードュニヅト 3 0 3とコントロール部 3 6 2とを加えた長手方向の長さは第 2キーボード 4ニット 3 0 4の長さと同一にさ れてコンパクトに構成されていることが分かる。  Here, Fig. 40 (A) shows the bearing holes 3 13 A of the bearings 3 13 B of the bearing members 3 13 and the bearings 3 17 of the bearing members 3 17 when the keyboard 301 is not used. B bearing hole 3 17 A and bearing part 3 1 4 each bearing 3 1 4 B bearing hole 3 14 A and bearing part 3 18 bearing 3 18 B bearing hole 3 18 A The folded state is shown in which both keyboard units 303, 304 are turned in the direction of approach and overlapped via the support shafts 319A, 319B which are respectively passed through. The length of the first keyboard unit 303 and the control unit 362 in the longitudinal direction is the same as the length of the second keyboard 4nit 304, making it compact. You can see that.
また、 第 4 0 (B ) は、 キーボード 3 0 1の使用時に支持軸 3 1 9 A、 3 1 9 B を介して両キーボードュニット 3 0 3、 3 0 4が離間する方向に回動した水平状態 を示しており、第 1キ一ボードュニット 3 0 3とコントロール部 3 6 2とをカロえた 長手方向の長さは第 2キーボードュニット 3 0 4の長さと同一にされて、支持軸 3 1 9 A、 3 1 9 Bを基準にキーボード 3 0 1における左右のバランスがとれている ことが分かる。  In addition, in the 40th (B), when the keyboard 301 is used, the keyboard units 303 and 304 are turned in a direction in which the keyboard units 310 and 304 are separated via the support shafts 319A and 319B. The horizontal state is shown, and the first key unit 303 and the control unit 362 are heated. The length in the longitudinal direction is the same as the length of the second keyboard unit 304, and the support shaft 3 is provided. It can be seen that the left and right sides of the keyboard 301 are balanced with respect to 19 A and 319 B.
コントロール部 3 6 2の略中央部には、 第 4 0図 （C ) に示すように、 蓋部材 3 6 3が開閉可能に取り付けられており、 かかる蓋部材 3 6 3の裏面側には、 P D A 等の各種携帯電子機器が接続されるコネクタ部材 3 6 4が配設されている。コネク 夕部材 3 6 4には、コントロール部 3 6 2に内蔵されてキ一ボ一ド 3 0 1の制御を 行うためのコントロールユニット （図示せず） と接続されたフレキシブル基板 3 6 5が接続されている。また、コネクタ部材 3 6 4の近傍で蓋部材 3 6 3の両側には、 一対のワイヤ部材 3 6 6 Aが固着されており、両ワイヤ部材 3 6 6 Aの外端部間に はワイヤ部材 3 6 6 Bが回動可能に掛装されている。更に、 ワイヤ部材 3 6 6 Bの 中央位置には支持ワイヤ 3 6 6 Cが固着されている。各ワイヤ部材 3 6 6 Aは、第 4 0図（C) に示す状態まで蓋部材 3 6 3と共に回動され、 この状態で支持ワイヤ 3 6 6 Cを後方に回動させることにより、 P D A等の携帯電子機器を傾斜した状態 で支持することができる。 ここに、 ワイヤ部材 3 6 6 A、 3 6 6 B、 3 6 6 Cは、 P D A等の携帯電子機器を傾斜した状態で支持する背もたれ部材 3 6 6を構成す る。 As shown in FIG. 40 (C), a cover member 363 is attached to the substantially central portion of the control portion 362 so as to be openable and closable, and on the back side of the cover member 363, A connector member 364 for connecting various portable electronic devices such as PDAs is provided. The connecting member 364 has a flexible board 356 connected to a control unit (not shown) built in the control section 362 for controlling the keyboard 301. 5 is connected. A pair of wire members 366 A are fixed to both sides of the lid member 363 near the connector member 364, and a wire member is provided between the outer ends of both wire members 366 A. 3 6 6 B is rotatably mounted. Further, a support wire 366C is fixed at a center position of the wire member 366B. Each wire member 366 A is rotated together with the lid member 363 until the state shown in FIG. 40 (C), and by rotating the support wire 366 C rearward in this state, the PDA or the like is turned off. Portable electronic devices can be supported in an inclined state. Here, the wire members 3666A, 3666B and 3666C constitute a backrest member 3666 that supports a portable electronic device such as a PDA in an inclined state.
このように、コントロール部 3 6 2に回動可能に取り付けられた蓋部材 3 6 3に コネクタ部材 3 6 4を配設するとともに、コネクタ部材 3 6 4の近傍で蓋部材 3 6 3に背もたれ部材 3 6 6を設けることにより、ケーブル等を必要とすることなく P D A等の携帯電子機器を直接コネクタ部材 3 6 4に接続した状態で、携帯電子機器 を傾斜させて支持することができる。  As described above, the connector member 36 4 is disposed on the lid member 36 3 rotatably attached to the control section 36 2, and the back member is attached to the lid member 36 3 near the connector member 36 4. By providing the 366, the portable electronic device such as a PDA can be tilted and supported while the portable electronic device such as a PDA is directly connected to the connector member 364 without requiring a cable or the like.
ここで、第 1キーボードュニヅ ト 3 0 3と第 2キーボードュニヅト 3 0 4を第 4 0図 （A) に示すように折り畳んだ時に、 前記のように構成される背もたれ部材 3 6 6が、 各キ一ボードュニット 3 0 3、 3 0 4間で収納される構成について、 第 4 0図 （B )及び第 4 3図に基づき説明する。第 4 3図は第 4 0図 （A) に示す折畳 状態で各キーボードュニット 3 0 3、 3 0 4の長手方向に直交する方向（短手方向） に切断して示す拡大断面図である。  Here, when the first keyboard unit 303 and the second keyboard unit 304 are folded as shown in FIG. 40 (A), the back member 3666 configured as described above is formed. The configuration accommodated between the key units 303, 304 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 (B) and 43. FIG. FIG. 43 is an enlarged sectional view of the keyboard unit 303, 304 cut in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction (transverse direction) in the folded state shown in FIG. 40 (A). is there.
第 4 0図 （B ) に示すように、 第 1キーボードュニヅト 3 0 3において、 上側か ら第 1キースィツチ列 K 1と第 2キースィツチ列 K 2との間、第 2キ一スィヅチ列 K 2と第 3キ一スィヅチ列 K 3との間、及び、第 3キ一スィツチ列 K 3と第 4キー スイッチ列 K 4との間には、 それそれ一定のクリアランスが存在する。 また、 この 関係は、第 2キーボードュニヅ ト 3 0 4においても同様に、第 1キースィツチ列 K 1と第 2キ一スィツチ列 K 2との間、第 2キースィヅチ列 K 2と第 3キ一スィツチ 列 K 3との間、及ぴ、第 3キ一スイッチ列 K 3と第 4キースイッチ列 K 4との間に 存在する。従って、 第 4 0図 （A) に示す折畳状態では、 各キ一スィツチ列におけ るキートップ 3 3 4の形状とも相まって、第 4 3図に示すように、相互に対向する 第 1キーボードュニット 3 0 3と第 2キーボードュニット 3 0 4にて隣接するキ ースィツチ列間には、 間隙 Sが形成されることとなる。 As shown in FIG. 40 (B), in the first keyboard unit 303, between the first key switch row K1 and the second key switch row K2 from the upper side, the second key switch row A certain clearance exists between K2 and the third key row K3, and between the third key row K3 and the fourth key switch row K4. This relationship also applies to the second keyboard unit 304, between the first key switch row K1 and the second key switch row K2, and between the second key switch row K2 and the third key switch row. K3 and between the third key switch row K3 and the fourth key switch row K4. Therefore, in the folded state shown in FIG. 40 (A), the key tops 334 in each key row are coupled to each other as shown in FIG. A gap S is formed between adjacent key switches in the first keyboard unit 303 and the second keyboard unit 304.
本実施形態に係るキーボード 3 0 1では、背もたれ部材 3 6 6の一方のワイヤ部 材 3 6 6 Aを各キーボードュニヅト 3 0 3、 3 0 4における第 1キースィヅチ列 K 1と第 2キースイッチ列 K 2との間に生じる間隙 Sに収納し、同様に支持ワイヤ 3 6 6 Cを第 2キースィツチ列 K 2と第 3キースィヅチ列 K 3との間に生じる間隙 Sに収納し、同様に他方のワイヤ部材 3 6 6 Aを第 3キースイッチ列 K 3と第 4キ —スイッチ列 K 4との間に生じる間隙 Sに収納している。 また、 ワイヤ部材 3 6 6 Bは、キ一トップ 3 3 4の頂面と第 1支持部材 3 4 4の平面部との間には高低差が 存在し、 また、 かかる高低差は折畳状態で 2倍になることから、 第 1キ一ボ一ドュ ニット 3 0 3と第 2キーボードュニット 3 0 4との間に生じる間隙に充分収納す ることができる。  In the keyboard 301 according to the present embodiment, one of the wire members 3666 A of the backrest member 36 6 is connected to the first key switch row K 1 and the second key switch row K 3 in each of the keyboard units 303 and 304. It is stored in the gap S generated between the key switch row K2, and the support wire 3666C is stored in the gap S generated between the second key switch row K2 and the third key switch row K3, and similarly. The other wire member 3666A is housed in the gap S generated between the third key switch row K3 and the fourth key switch row K4. Further, the wire member 3666B has a height difference between the top surface of the key top 334 and the plane portion of the first support member 3444, and the height difference is in a folded state. Therefore, it can be sufficiently accommodated in the gap generated between the first keyboard unit 303 and the second keyboard unit 304.
前記したように、 背もたれ部材 3 6 6を構成する各ワイヤ部材 3 6 6 A、 支持ヮ ィャ 3 6 6 Cを、 両キーボードュニヅト 3 0 3、 3 0 4の折畳状態で相互に対向す るキースィッチ列間に生じる間隙 Sに収納するとともに、ワイヤ部材 3 6 6 Bを両 キーボードュニヅト 3 0 3、 3 0 4間に生じる間隙に収納するように構成したので、 折畳状態における第 1キーボードュニット 3 0 3と第 2キーボードュニット 3 0 4とを重ね合わせた厚さを薄くすることができ、 また、 背もたれ部材 3 6 6がキー ボ一ド 3 0 1の外部に付設する必要がないことから、キ一ボード 3 0 1全体の小型 化を図ることができる。  As described above, the respective wire members 3666A and the support pins 366C constituting the backrest member 366 are connected to each other in a folded state of both keyboard units 303, 304. And the wire member 366 B is housed in the gap between the keyboard units 303 and 304, as well as housed in the gap S created between the key switch rows facing each other. The thickness of the first keyboard unit 303 and the second keyboard unit 304 in the folded state can be reduced in thickness, and the back member 36 6 can be used as a keyboard 30 1 Since there is no need to attach the key board outside, the size of the entire keyboard 301 can be reduced.
更に、キーボード 3 0 1に対して背もたれ部材 3 6 6を収納するための特別の構 成を全く必要としないので、キ一ボード 3 0 1全体のコストを低減することができ る  Further, since no special structure is required for storing the backrest member 3666 with respect to the keyboard 301, the cost of the entire keyboard 301 can be reduced.
次に、第 1キーボードュニヅト 3 0 3における各キースィツチ 3 0 7及び第 2キ 一ボードュニット 3 0 4における各キースィツチ 3 1 0とコントロール部 3 6 2 とを電気的に接続する構成について第 4 0図乃至第 4 2図に基づき説明する。第 4 1図はコントロール部 3 6 2をキーボード 3 0 1との関係を示す説明図であり、第 4 1図（A) はコントロール部 3 6 2を第 1キーボードュニット 3 0 3から取り外 した状態を示す説明図であり、 第 4 1図 （B ) はコントロール部 3 6 2と自在ァ一 ムとが接続される状態を示す説明図である。 Next, a configuration for electrically connecting each key switch 307 in the first keyboard unit 303 and each key switch 310 in the second keyboard unit 304 to the control unit 362 will be described. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42. Fig. 41 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the control unit 362 and the keyboard 301, and Fig. 41 (A) shows the control unit 362 removed from the first keyboard unit 303. FIG. 41 (B) shows the control unit 36 2 and the universal unit. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where the system is connected to a system.
第 1キーボードュニヅト 3 0 3における第 1ベース板 3 0 5の軸受部材 3 1 2 の背面側に形成されたアーム支持部 3 2 5には、 自在アーム 3 6 7が回動可能に支 持されている。 自在アーム 3 6 7は、 アーム支持部 3 2 5に第 1連結ピン 3 6 8 A を介して一端が回動可能に支持された中空状の第 1アーム部材 3 6 7 As及び、第 1ァ一ム部材 3 6 7 Aの他端に第 2連結ピン 3 6 8 Bを介して回動可能に支持さ れた中空状の第 2アーム部材 3 6 7 Bから構成されている。  A universal arm 3667 is rotatable on an arm support portion 325 formed on the back side of the bearing member 312 of the first base plate 300 in the first keyboard unit 303. Supported. The free arm 367 includes a hollow first arm member 3667As, one end of which is rotatably supported by an arm support portion 3225 via a first connecting pin 3668A, and a first arm. It is composed of a hollow second arm member 365 B which is rotatably supported at the other end of the one-piece member 365 A via a second connecting pin 365 B.
ここに、第 2キーュニヅ ト 3 4 7の第 2支持板 3 0 9上に配設された複数の各キ ースィツチ 3 1 0に対応するメンブレンスィツチに接続された信号線は、前記した ように、 案内溝 3 2 4に案内配置されるとともに、 中空状の軸受部 3 1 8、 軸受 3 1 8 Bから外方に案内され、更に中空状の軸受部 3 1 4からアーム支持部 3 2 5を 経て自在アーム 3 6 7に揷通案内される。 また、第 1キーュニット 3 3 7の第 1支 持板 3 0 6上に配設された複数の各キースィツチ 3 0 7に対応するメンブレンス ィヅチに接続された信号線（図示せず） は、 案内溝 3 2 3に案内配置されるととも に、 中空状の軸受部材 3 1 2を経て自在アーム 3 6 7に揷通案内される。 また、 軸 受部材 3 1 2の背面側に形成されたアーム支持部 3 2 5は中空状に形成されてお り、 自在アーム 3 6 7を回動可能に支持するとともに、前記のように案内されてく る信号線を自在アーム 3 6 7に揷通案内するものである。  Here, the signal lines connected to the membrane switches corresponding to the plurality of switches 310 provided on the second support plate 309 of the second key unit 347 are, as described above, While being guided in the guide groove 3 2 4, it is guided outward from the hollow bearing portion 3 18 and the bearing 3 18 B, and further, the arm support portion 3 25 from the hollow bearing portion 3 14. Through the universal arm 3 6 7. In addition, a signal line (not shown) connected to a membrane switch corresponding to each of the plurality of key switches 300 arranged on the first support plate 300 of the first key unit 3337 is provided as a guide. While being guided in the groove 3 23, it is guided through the hollow bearing member 3 12 to the free arm 3 6.7. Further, an arm supporting portion 325 formed on the back side of the bearing member 312 is formed in a hollow shape, and rotatably supports the universal arm 367, and guides the arm 367 as described above. The resulting signal line is guided through the free arm 366.
そして、第 2キーュニヅト 3 4 7からの信号線と第 1キ一ュニヅト 3 3 7からの 信号線とは、 アーム支持部 3 2 5にてまとめられ、第 1アーム部材 3 6 7 Aから第 2アーム部材 3 6 7 Bまで案内されている。 このように案内される信号線は、第 2 アーム部材 3 6 7 Bの一面に設けられたコネクタ部材 3 7 0 (第 4 1図（A)参照） に接続されている。  Then, the signal line from the second key unit 347 and the signal line from the first key unit 337 are combined by the arm support part 325, and the second arm 366A is connected to the second arm. It is guided to the arm member 367B. The signal line guided in this manner is connected to a connector member 370 (see FIG. 41 (A)) provided on one surface of the second arm member 369B.
また、 コントロール部 3 6 2において、第 1キーボ一ドュニット 3 0 3の側端縁 に対向する面には、 2つの突起 3 7 1が形成されており、 各突起 3 7 1は第 1キー ボードュニヅト 3 0 3の第 1支持板 3 0 6における周壁部材 3 4 6に形成された 位置決め孔（図示せず） に対して、 着脱可能に嵌合される。 これにより、 コント口 —ル部 3 6 2は、 第 1キーボードュニット 3 0 3に対して着脱可能に並設される。 また、 コントロール部 3 6 2の端面にはコネクタ部材 3 7 2が設けられており、 か かるコネクタ部材 3 7 2は、第 2アーム部材 3 6 7 Bのコネクタ部材 3 7 0に接続 される。 In the control section 362, two projections 371 are formed on a surface facing the side edge of the first keyboard unit 303, and each projection 371 is a first keyboard unit. It is detachably fitted into a positioning hole (not shown) formed in the peripheral wall member 346 of the first support plate 303 of 303. As a result, the control unit 362 is detachably arranged in parallel with the first keyboard unit 303. In addition, a connector member 372 is provided on the end face of the control part 362, and The connector member 372 is connected to the connector member 370 of the second arm member 370B.
前記したように、コントロール部 3 6 2の各突起 3 7 1は第 1キーボードュニヅ ト 3 0 3の周壁部材 3 4 6における位置決め孔に対して着脱可能に嵌合されてお り、 また、 コントロール部 3 6 2のコネクタ部材 3 7 2と第 2アーム部材 3 6 7 B のコネクタ部材 3 7 0とは接離可能であるから、 コントロール部 3 6 2は、第 1キ 一ボードュニヅト 3 0 3に対して着脱可能に構成されており、これにより P D A等 の各種の携帯電子機器に対応してコントロール部 3 6 2を複数用意しておけば、コ ントロール部 3 6 2のみを交換することにより、同一のキーボード 3 0 1を使用し て各種の携帯電子機器にデ一夕入力を行うことができ、携帯電子機器に対応してキ —ボード 3 0 1を購入する無駄を排してユーザの負担を軽減することができる。ま た、 キ一ボ一ド 3 0 1の製造者は、 各種携帯電子機器毎にキーボード 3 0 1を製造 する必要がなくなり、複数種類のキーボード製造に必要な投資費用や管理費用を低 減することができる。  As described above, each protrusion 371 of the control portion 362 is removably fitted into a positioning hole in the peripheral wall member 346 of the first keyboard unit 303, and Since the connector member 3652 and the connector member 360 of the second arm member 3607B can be brought into contact with and separated from each other, the control section 3652 is in contact with the first key board unit 303. If multiple control units are prepared for various portable electronic devices such as PDAs, the same unit can be replaced by replacing only the control unit. The keyboard 301 can be used to input data to various portable electronic devices overnight, eliminating the need to purchase a keyboard 301 compatible with portable electronic devices and reducing the burden on the user. Can be reduced. In addition, the manufacturer of the keyboard 301 eliminates the need to manufacture the keyboard 301 for each type of portable electronic device, thereby reducing investment and management costs required for manufacturing multiple types of keyboards. be able to.
続いて、前記のように構成されたアーム部材 3 6 7の作用について第 4 1図及び 第 4 2図に基づき説明する。第 4 2図は自在アームの使用状態を示す説明図である c 第 4 1図に示すように、 自在アーム 3 6 7において、 その第 1アーム部 3 6 7 A の一端は、 軸受部材の背面側 （非操作者側） に形成されたアーム支持部 3 2 5にて 第 1連結ビン 3 6 8 Aを介して回動可能に支持されており、 また、第 1アーム部材 3 6 7 Aの他端には第 2アーム部材 3 6 7 Bが第 2連結ピン 3 6 8 Bを介して回 動可能に支持されている。 また、 コントロール部 3 6 2は、 前記したように、 第 1 キーボードュニット 3 0 3に対して着脱可能に構成されていることから、コント口 ール部 3 6 2は、 自在アーム 3 6 7における回動自在性を利用して各種の使用形態 で使用することができる。  Next, the operation of the arm member 365 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. FIG. Fig. 42 is an explanatory view showing the use state of the universal arm. C As shown in Fig. 41, in the universal arm 367, one end of the first arm portion 367A is connected to the back of the bearing member. The arm support section 325 formed on the side (non-operator side) is rotatably supported via a first connection bin 3668A. At the other end, a second arm member 365B is rotatably supported via a second connecting pin 365B. Further, as described above, since the control section 362 is configured to be detachable from the first keyboard unit 303, the control section 362 is provided with a free arm 367. It can be used in various usage forms by utilizing the rotatable nature in.
例えば、 第 4 2図に示すように、 コントロール部 3 6 2の各突起 3 7 1を周壁部 材 3 4 6の位置決め孔から外し、第 1アーム部材 3 6 7 Aを第 1連結ピン 3 6 8 A を中心に時計方向に回動させると、コントロール部 3 6 2をキ一ボード 3 0 1から 離間した状態で使用することができる。  For example, as shown in FIG. 42, each projection 3 71 of the control section 36 2 is removed from the positioning hole of the peripheral wall member 34 6 and the first arm member 36 7 A is connected to the first connecting pin 36. By rotating clockwise about 8 A, the control unit 362 can be used while being separated from the keyboard 301.
ここに、コントロール部 3 6 2のコネクタ部材 3 6 4に P D A 3 7 3の接続端子 T JP03/07028 Here, the connection terminal of the PDA 3 7 3 is connected to the connector 3 6 4 of the control section 3 6 2 T JP03 / 07028
85  85
を接続するとともに、背もたれ部材 3 6 6により P D A 3 7 3を傾斜した状態で支 持し、 第 4 2図に示す状態で使用する場合が第 4 4図に示されている。 FIG. 44 shows a case where the PDA 373 is supported in an inclined state by the backrest member 366 and used in the state shown in FIG.
前記したように、コントロール部 3 6 2を第 1キーボードュニット 3 0 3から着 脱可能に構成し、且つ、 コントロール部 3 6 2と第 1キーボードュニヅト 3 0 3と を自在アーム 3 6 7により連結するように構成したので、 自在アーム 3 6 7により 許容される範囲でコントロール部 3 6 2とキーボード 3 0 1との配置関係を自在 に変更することができる。従って、 キーボード 3 0 1に対する P D A 3 7 3の配置 位置をキーボード使用者の所望する位置に自在に変更して操作性をより向上する ことができる。  As described above, the control unit 362 is configured to be detachable from the first keyboard unit 303, and the control unit 362 and the first keyboard unit 303 are connected to the free arm 3 Since the configuration is such that they are connected by the connecting arm 67, the arrangement relationship between the control section 362 and the keyboard 301 can be freely changed within a range permitted by the universal arm 365. Therefore, the operability can be further improved by freely changing the arrangement position of the PDA 373 with respect to the keyboard 301 to a position desired by the keyboard user.
続いて、 前記のように構成された自在アーム 3 6 7において、 第 1アーム部材 3 6 7 Aとアーム支持部 3 2 5とを連結する第 1連結ピン 3 6 8 Aの連結構造、及び、 第 1アーム部材 3 6 7 Aと第 2アーム部材 3 6 7 Bとを連結する第 2連結ピン 3 6 8 Bの連結構造について、第 4 5図に基づき説明する。第 4 5図は第 4 0図（B ) に示す状態をキーボード 3 0 1の背面側から見て模式的に示す説明図である。  Subsequently, in the universal arm 367 configured as described above, a connection structure of the first connection pin 3668A connecting the first arm member 367A and the arm support portion 3225, and The connecting structure of the second connecting pin 368B for connecting the first arm member 366A and the second arm member 366B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the state shown in FIG. 40 (B) when viewed from the back side of the keyboard 301. FIG.
ここに、 第 4 5図において、 第 2アーム部材 3 6 7 8の厚さ11は、 コントロール 部 3 6 2のコネクタ部材 3 7 2に接続するためのコネクタ部材 3 7 0を設ける必 要性があること等の制約上、 キーボード 3 0 1の厚さ h (第 1ベース板 3 0 5、 第 2ペース板 3 0 8の底面とキ一トップ 3 3 4の頂面との間の厚さ）よりも、大きい。 従って、 キーボード 3 0 1は、 第 4 0 ( B )、 ( C ) に示す状態で使用されるもの ではないが、 かかる状態では、 キーボード 3 0 1における各キ一スィヅチ 3 0 7、 3 1 0の頂面がなす面は、 キーボード 3 0 1の設置面に平行な状態とはならず、 設 置面に対して若干傾斜した面となる。  Here, in FIG. 45, the thickness 11 of the second arm member 368 is required to provide a connector member 370 for connecting to the connector member 372 of the control part 362. Due to restrictions, etc., the thickness of the keyboard 301 is h (the thickness between the bottom surface of the first base plate 305, the second pace plate 308 and the top surface of the key top 334) Greater than. Therefore, the keyboard 301 is not used in the state shown in FIGS. 40 (B) and (C), but in such a state, each key switch 307, 310 of the keyboard 301 is used. The top surface does not become parallel to the installation surface of the keyboard 301, but is slightly inclined with respect to the installation surface.
かかる事情を勘案し、 本実施形態にかかるキーボード 3 0 1では、 実際にキ一ボ —ド 3◦ 1が使用される状態においてキーボード 3 0 1の底面（第 1及び第 2ベー ス板 3 0 5、 3 0 8の底面） と第 2アーム部材 3 6 7 Bの底部とが同一面となるよ うに第 1連結ビン 3 6 8 A及ぴ第 2連結ピン 3 6 8 Bの連結角度を傾斜させてい る o  In consideration of such circumstances, the keyboard 301 according to the present embodiment has the bottom surface (the first and second base plates 301) of the keyboard 301 when the keyboard 3◦1 is actually used. The connection angle of the first connection bin 368 A and the second connection pin 368 B is inclined so that the bottom of the second arm member 366 B and the bottom of the second arm member 370 B are flush with each other. Let me o
具体的には、 第 4 5図において、 アーム支持部 3 2 5と第 1アーム部材 3 6 7 A とを回動可能に連結する第 1連結ピン 3 6 8 Aは、垂線 Lに対して角度 Aだけ傾斜 PC謂細 28 More specifically, in FIG. 45, the first connecting pin 368 A for rotatably connecting the arm supporting portion 3 225 and the first arm member 366 A is at an angle with respect to the perpendicular L. A only tilt PC so-called fine 28
86  86
されており、 また、第 1アーム部材 3 6 7 Aと第 2アーム部材 3 6 7 Bとを回動可 能に連結する第 2連結ピン 3 6 8 Bは、垂線 Lに対して角度 Bだけ傾斜されている。 ここに、 角度 Bは角度 Aよりも大きく設定されている。 In addition, the second connecting pin 368 B that rotatably connects the first arm member 366 A and the second arm member 366 B only has an angle B with respect to the perpendicular L. It is inclined. Here, the angle B is set larger than the angle A.
このように第 1連結ピン 3 6 8 Aを垂線 Lに対して角度 Aだけ傾斜させるとと もに、 第 2連結ピン 3 6 8 Bを垂線 Lに対して角度 Bだけ傾斜させることにより、 第 2アーム部材 3 6 7 Bは、 全体で傾斜された角度 （A + B ) に基づき、 厚さ （H - h)分上方へ移動させることとなる。 これにより、 コントロール部 3 6 2の底部 (コント口一ル部 3 6 2の底面は第 2ァ一ム部材 3 6 7 Bの下端面と同一面とな るように配置されている） とキーボード 3 0 1の底面とが同一面となる。  As described above, by tilting the first connecting pin 368 A by the angle A with respect to the perpendicular L and by tilting the second connecting pin 368 B by the angle B with respect to the perpendicular L, The two-arm member 367B is moved upward by the thickness (H-h) based on the angle (A + B) inclined as a whole. As a result, the bottom of the control portion 362 (the bottom surface of the control portion 362 is arranged so as to be flush with the lower end surface of the second arm member 366B) and the keyboard The bottom surface of 301 is the same plane.
従って、第 2アーム部材 3 6 7の厚さ Hやコントロール部 3 6 2の厚さが、 キ一 ボードの厚さ hと同一でない場合においても、第 1連結ピン 3 6 8 A、第 2連結ピ ン 3 6 8 Bの連結角度を傾斜させることにより、キーボード 3 0 1の使用時に第 2 アーム部材 3 6 7 Bやコントロール部 3 6 2の底部とキーボード 3 0 1の底面と を同一面にしてキーボード 3 0 1における各キースィヅチ 3 0 7、 3 1 0の頂面が なす面を、 キーボ一ド 3 0 1の設置面に平行な状態にすることができ、 キーボード 3 0 1におけるキー操作性が低下してしまうことを防止できる。  Therefore, even when the thickness H of the second arm member 366 or the thickness of the control portion 362 is not the same as the thickness h of the keyboard, the first connection pin 368 A and the second connection By tilting the connection angle of the pin 36 8 B, the bottom of the second arm member 36 7 B and the control section 36 2 and the bottom of the keyboard 31 are flush with each other when using the keyboard 31. The surface formed by the top surfaces of the key switches 3107 and 310 in the keyboard 301 can be made parallel to the installation surface of the keyboard 301, and the key operability of the keyboard 301 Can be prevented from decreasing.
尚、前記の例では、第 1連結ピン 3 6 8 A及び第 2連結ピン 3 6 8 Bの連結角度 を傾斜させるように構成しているが、 これに限定されることはなく、 いずれか一方 の連結ピンの連結角度を傾斜させてもよい。  In the above example, the connection angle of the first connection pin 368 A and the second connection pin 368 B is configured to be inclined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be inclined.
本発明は前記実施形態に限定されるものではなく、本発明の要旨を逸脱しない範 囲内で種々の改良、 変更が可能であることは勿論である。  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it goes without saying that various improvements and modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention.
例えば、前記実施形態においては、第 1キ一ボードュニット 3 0 3側で第 1ベー ス板 3 0 5と第 1キーュニット 3 3 7との間、及び、第キーボードュニヅト 3 0 4 側で第 2ベース板 3 0 8と第 2キーュニヅト 3 4 7との間にロヅク機構 3 5 7を 設けるように構成したが、第 4 6図に示すように、第 1ベース板 3 0 5に設けられ た軸受部材 3 1 2に配設した制動部材及び第 2ベース板 3 0 8に設けられた軸受 部材 3 1 6に配設された制動部材を、それそれ第 1支持部材 3 4 4の円弧面 3 4 2 及び第 2支持部材 3 5 4の円弧面 3 5 2に当接することにより、第 1キーュニット 3 3 7及び第 2キーュニット 3 4 7の回動位置を保持するように構成してもよい。 ここで、第 4 6図に基づき、第 1キーュニッ ト 3 3 7及び第 2キ一ュニヅ ト 3 4 7の回動位置を保持する保持機構について説明する。第 4 6図は第 1キ一ュニヅ 卜 3 3 7及び第 2キ一ュニット 3 4 7の回動位置を保持する保持機構を拡大して示 す説明図である。 尚、 以下の説明においては、 前記実施形態における要素、 部材と 同一の要素、 部材に同一の符号を付して説明することとする。 For example, in the above-described embodiment, between the first base plate 303 and the first key unit 330 on the first keyboard unit 303 side, and on the keyboard unit 304 side. Although the lock mechanism 357 is provided between the second base plate 308 and the second key unit 347, as shown in FIG. 46, the lock mechanism 357 is provided on the first base plate 305. The braking member provided on the bearing member 3 12 and the braking member provided on the bearing member 3 16 provided on the second base plate 3 08 are respectively connected to the arc surfaces of the first support member 3 4 4. The rotation position of the first key unit 3 37 and the second key unit 3 47 may be maintained by contacting the circular surface 3 52 of the 3 4 2 and the second support member 3 54. . Here, based on FIG. 46, a holding mechanism for holding the turning positions of the first key unit 337 and the second key unit 347 will be described. FIG. 46 is an explanatory view showing, in an enlarged manner, a holding mechanism for holding the rotating positions of the first unit 3337 and the second unit 347. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements and members as those in the above embodiment.
第 4 6図において、第 1キーュニット 3 3 7側における軸受部材 3 1 2の円弧面 3 8 0の略中央位置には、凹状のパッド保持部 3 8 2が形成されており、 かかるパ ヅド保持部 3 8 2には、フェルト材等から形成された制動パッド 3 8 3が固着され ている。制動パッド 3 8 3は、第 1支持部材 3 4 4の円弧面 3 4 2に当接されてい る。制動パヅド 3 8 3と円弧面 3 4 2とから保持機構 3 8 4が構成される。 尚、 本 保持機構 3 8 4は、制動パッド 3 8 3を第 1支持部材 3 4 4の円弧面 3 4 2に当接 させ、両者間に発生する摩擦力を介して第 1キーュニヅト 3 3 7をその回動位置で 保持する構成であることから、保持機構 3 8 4を構成する第 1支持部材 3 4 4の円 弧面 3 4 2には、前記実施形態の場合と異なり、 ロック溝 3 4 5は形成されていな い。  In FIG. 46, a concave pad holding portion 382 is formed substantially at the center of the arc surface 380 of the bearing member 312 on the first key unit 337 side, and the pad A braking pad 383 made of a felt material or the like is fixed to the holding portion 3822. The brake pad 383 is in contact with the arc surface 342 of the first support member 344. A holding mechanism 384 is constituted by the brake pad 383 and the arc surface 342. In addition, the holding mechanism 384 contacts the brake pad 383 with the arc surface 342 of the first support member 344, and the first key unit 337 via the frictional force generated therebetween. Is held at its rotational position, unlike the embodiment described above, the arcuate surface 3 42 of the first support member 3 4 4 that forms the holding mechanism 3 84 4 5 is not formed.
また同様に、第 2ュニット 3 4 7側において、軸受部材 3 1 6の円弧面 3 8 1の 略中央位置には、 凹状のパヅド保持部 3 8 2が形成されており、 かかるパッド保持 部 3 8 2には、 フェルト材等から形成された制動パヅド 3 8 3が固着されている。 制動パッド 3 8 3は、第 2支持部材 3 5 4の円弧面 3 5 2に当接されている。制動 パッド 3 8 3と円弧面 3 5 2とから保持機構 3 8 4が構成される。尚前記の場合と 同様、本保持機構 3 8 4は、制動パッド 3 8 3を第 2支持部材 3 5 4の円弧面 3 5 2に当接させ、両者間に発生する摩擦力を介して第 2キーュニット 3 4 7をその回 動位置で保持する構成であることから、保持機構 3 8 4を構成する第 2支持部材 3 5 4の円弧面 3 5 2には、前記実施形態の場合と異なり、 ロック溝 3 5 5は形成さ れていない。  Similarly, on the second unit 347 side, a concave pad holding portion 382 is formed at a substantially center position of the circular arc surface 381 of the bearing member 316, and the pad holding portion 3 A braking pad 3 83 made of felt material or the like is fixed to 82. The brake pad 383 is in contact with the arc surface 352 of the second support member 354. The holding mechanism 384 is constituted by the braking pad 383 and the arc surface 352. Note that, similarly to the above case, the main holding mechanism 384 contacts the brake pad 383 with the arc surface 352 of the second support member 354, and applies the frictional force generated between the two. 2 Since the key unit 3 47 is held at the rotation position, the arc surface 3 52 of the second support member 3 54 forming the holding mechanism 3 84 is different from that of the above-described embodiment. The lock groove 355 is not formed.
前記第 1ベース板 3 0 5と第 1キーュニット 3 3 7との間、及び、第 2ベース板 3 0 8と第 2キーュニット 3 4 7との間に、それそれ設けられた保持機構 3 8 4に おいては、第 1キーュニット 3 3 7を所望の回動位置で保持するについて、第 1ベ ース板 3 0 5の軸受部材 3 1 2の円弧面 3 8 0に形成されたパヅド保持部 3 8 2 03 07028 Holding mechanisms 3 8 4 provided between the first base plate 3 05 and the first key unit 3 3 7, and between the second base plate 3 08 and the second key unit 3 4 7, respectively. In order to hold the first key unit 337 at a desired rotation position, the pad holding portion formed on the arcuate surface 380 of the bearing member 312 of the first base plate 305 will be described. 3 8 2 03 07028
88  88
に固着された制動パッド 3 8 3を第 1支持部材 3 4 4の円弧面 3 4 2に当接する ことにより保持し、 また、第 2キーュニット 3 4 7を所望の回動位置で保持するに ついて、第 2ペース板 3 0 8の軸受部材 3 1 6の円弧面 3 8 1に形成されたパヅド 保持部 3 8 2に固着された制動パッド 3 8 3を第 2支持部材 3 5 4の円弧面 3 5 2に当接することにより保持しており、制動パヅド 3 8 3と第 1支持部材 3 4 4に おける円弧面 3 4 2との当接位置及び制動パッド 3 8 3と第 2支持部材 3 5 4に おける円弧面 3 5 2との当接位置は、 それそれ無段階で移動可能となる。従って、 第 1キ一ュ二ヅト 3 3 7及び第 2キ一ュ二ット 3 4 7を所望の回動位置で相互に 独立して保持するに際して、 回動位置の選択を自在に行うことができ、個々の使用 者にとって更に最適な操作形態に固定した状態でキーボード操作を安定して行う ことができる。 また、 第 1及び第 2キーユニット 3 3 7、 3 4 7における保持機構 3 8 4は、 いずれについても制動パヅド 3 8 3と各支持部材 3 4 4、 3 5 4の円弧 面 3 4 2、 3 5 2とから簡単に構成されているので、第 1及び第 2キーュニット 3 3 7 , 3 4 7の保持機構を低いコストで実現することができる。 産業上の利用可能性 The brake pad 3 8 3 fixed to the first support member 3 4 4 is held by contacting the arc surface 3 4 2 of the first support member 3 4 4, and the second key unit 3 4 7 is held at a desired rotation position. The brake pad 383 fixed to the pad holding portion 382 formed on the arc surface 3181 of the bearing member 316 of the second pace plate 3108 is connected to the arc surface of the second support member 354. The contact position between the braking pad 3 83 and the circular surface 3 42 on the first support member 3 4 4 and the contact position between the braking pad 3 8 3 and the second support member 3 The contact position with the arc surface 3 52 at 54 can be moved steplessly. Therefore, when the first cutout 3337 and the second cutout 347 are held independently of each other at a desired rotation position, the rotation position can be freely selected. The keyboard operation can be stably performed in a state where the operation mode is more optimal for each user. In addition, the holding mechanism 384 of the first and second key units 337, 347 is provided with the brake pad 3833 and the arcuate surface 3424 of each support member 344, 354. Since the structure is simple, the holding mechanism of the first and second key units 337, 347 can be realized at low cost. Industrial applicability
2つのキーボードュニッ卜の折畳状態を開放した後、極めて簡単な操作により各 キーボードュニットを所望の操作状態に配置することができる折畳可能なキ一ボ ードを提供することができる。  After releasing the folded state of the two keyboard units, it is possible to provide a foldable keyboard that can arrange each keyboard unit in a desired operation state by extremely simple operation. .

Claims

請 求 の 範 囲 The scope of the claims
1 . 第 1キーボードュニットと第 2キーボードユニットとの間に回動連結部を設 け、キ一ボードの使用時には回動連結部を介して両ュニットが離間する方向に回動 されて水平状態になるとともに、キーボードの非使用時には回動連結部を介して両 ュニットが近接する方向に回動されて重ね合わせた状態になる折畳可能なキーボ ードにおいて、 1. A pivot connection is provided between the first keyboard unit and the second keyboard unit. When the keyboard is used, both units are pivoted away from each other via the pivot connection so that the keyboard unit is horizontal. In addition, when the keyboard is not used, the foldable keyboard is turned in the direction in which the two units are brought close to each other via the rotation connecting portion so that they are overlapped with each other.
前記第 1キーボードュニットは、第 1ベース板と、第 1ベース板上で水平方向に 回動可能に配設された第 1支持板に複数のキースィツチが配列された第 1キ一ュ ニットとを有し、  The first keyboard unit includes a first base plate, and a first unit in which a plurality of key switches are arranged on a first support plate disposed rotatably in a horizontal direction on the first base plate. Has,
前記第 2キーボードュニットは、第 2ベース板と、第 2ベース板上で水平方向に 回動可能に配設された第 2支持板に複数のキ一スィツチが配列された第 2キーュ ニヅ卜とを有し、  The second keyboard unit includes a second base plate and a second key unit in which a plurality of switches are arranged on a second support plate disposed rotatably in the horizontal direction on the second base plate. And have
前記回動連結部は、前記第 1ベース板と第 2ベース板とを回動可能に支持する支 持軸を有し、  The rotation connecting portion has a support shaft that rotatably supports the first base plate and the second base plate,
前記第 1支持板の一側に配設されるとともに所定の円弧面が形成され、その円弧 面に第 1ギア歯部が形成された第 1ギア部材と、  A first gear member disposed on one side of the first support plate and having a predetermined arc surface formed thereon, and a first gear tooth portion formed on the arc surface;
前記第 2支持板の一側に配設されるとともに所定の円弧面が形成され、その円弧 面に前記第 1ギア歯部に嚙合する第 2ギア歯部が形成された第 2ギア部材とを備 えたことを特徴とする折畳可能なキ一ボード。  A second gear member provided on one side of the second support plate and having a predetermined arc surface formed thereon, and having a second gear tooth portion formed on the arc surface to be engaged with the first gear tooth portion; A foldable key board that has been provided.
2 . 前記第 1ペース板と第 1キーユニットとの間、 又は、 第 2ベース板と第 2キ —ュニットとの間に配設され、第 1ベ一ス板又は第 2ベ一ス板に対して、第 1キー ュニヅト又は第 2キーュニヅトを所望の回動位置でロックするロヅク機構を備え たことを特徴とする請求の範囲 1に記載の折畳可能なキーボード。  2. It is disposed between the first pace plate and the first key unit or between the second base plate and the second unit, and is provided on the first base plate or the second base plate. 2. The foldable keyboard according to claim 1, further comprising a lock mechanism for locking the first key unit or the second key unit at a desired rotation position.
3 . 前記口ック機構は、前記第 1ギア部材又は第 2ギア部材における円弧面に形 成されたロヅク溝と、前記第 1ベース板又は第 2ベース板に設けられ口ヅク溝に係 止するロック片とから構成されることを特徴とする請求の範囲 2に記載の折畳可 能なキーボード。  3. The hook mechanism is engaged with a lock groove formed on an arc surface of the first gear member or the second gear member, and with a lock groove provided on the first base plate or the second base plate. 3. The foldable keyboard according to claim 2, wherein the keyboard is composed of a lock piece that performs locking.
4 . 前記第 1キーュニヅ卜の第 1支持板は所定の回動支点で第 1ベース板にて回 動可能に配置されるとともに、第 1支持板の一側には回動支点を中心とする回転半 径に合致する円弧面が形成され、 4. The first support plate of the first key unit is turned on the first base plate at a predetermined pivot point. While being movably arranged, an arc surface is formed on one side of the first support plate that matches the radius of rotation about the rotation fulcrum,
前記第 1ギア部材の円弧面は、前記第 1支持板の円弧面と同一の曲率半径を有す ることを特徴とする請求の範囲 1に記載の折畳可能なキーボード。  The foldable keyboard according to claim 1, wherein an arc surface of the first gear member has the same radius of curvature as an arc surface of the first support plate.
5 . 前記第 2キ一ュニットの第 2支持板は所定の回動支点で第 2ベース板にて回 動可能に配置されるとともに、第 2支持板の一側には回動支点を中心とする回転半 径に合致する円弧面が形成され、 5. The second support plate of the second unit is rotatably arranged on the second base plate at a predetermined rotation fulcrum, and one side of the second support plate is centered on the rotation fulcrum. An arc surface corresponding to the rotating radius is formed,
前記第 2ギア部材の円弧面は、前記第 2支持板の円弧面と同一の曲率半径を有す ることを特徴とする請求の範囲 1に記載の折畳可能なキーボード。  The foldable keyboard according to claim 1, wherein the arc surface of the second gear member has the same radius of curvature as the arc surface of the second support plate.
6 .前記第 1ギア部材に形成された第 1ギア歯部は、第 1ギア部材の上面よりも下 側に位置する下歯と第 1ギァ部材の上面よりも上側に位置する上歯とからなる複 数の第 1ギア歯を有し、 6.The first gear teeth formed on the first gear member are composed of lower teeth located below the upper surface of the first gear member and upper teeth located above the upper surface of the first gear member. Having a plurality of first gear teeth,
前記第 2ギア部材に形成された第 2ギア歯部は、第 2ギア部材の上面よりも下側 位置にする下歯と第 2ギア部材の上面よりも上側に位置する上歯とからなる複数 の第 2ギア歯を有し、  The second gear tooth portion formed on the second gear member includes a plurality of lower teeth located below the upper surface of the second gear member and upper teeth located above the upper surface of the second gear member. Of the second gear teeth,
前記複数の第 1ギア歯及び第 2ギア歯は、それそれにおける上歯及び下歯を介し て相互に嚙合されていることを特徴とする請求の範囲 1に記載の折畳可能なキー ボード。  The foldable keyboard according to claim 1, wherein the plurality of first gear teeth and the second gear teeth are mutually connected via upper teeth and lower teeth in each of the first gear teeth and the second gear teeth.
7 . 第 1キ一ボードュニッ卜と第 2キーボードュニッ卜との間に回動連結部を設 け、キーボードの使用時には回動連結部を介して両ュニットが離間する方向に回動 されて水平状態になるとともに、キーボードの非使用時には回動連結部を介レて両 ュニッ卜が近接する方向に回動されて重ね合わせた状態になる折畳可能なキ一ボ 一ドにおいて、  7. A pivot connection is provided between the first keyboard unit and the second keyboard unit, and when the keyboard is used, both units are pivoted in the direction away from each other via the pivot connection to be horizontal. When the keyboard is not used, when the keyboard is not used, the foldable keyboard is turned in the direction in which the two units approach each other via the turning connection portion and are superimposed.
前記第 1キーボードュニットは、第 1ベース板と、第 1ベ一ス板上で水平方向に 回動可能に配設された第 1支持板に複数のキースィツチが配列された第 1キ一ュ ニットとを有し、  The first keyboard unit includes a first base plate and a first key plate in which a plurality of key switches are arranged on a first support plate that is rotatably arranged in a horizontal direction on the first base plate. With a knit,
前記第 2キーボードュニットは、第 2ベース板と、第 2ベース板上で水平方向に 回動可能に配設された第 2支持板に複数のキースィツチが配列された第 2キ一ュ ニヅトとを有し、 前記回動連結部は、前記第 1ベース板と第 2ペース板とを回動可能に支持する支 持軸と、支持軸に対して摺動可能に挿嵌されるとともにギア歯部が形成された摺動 部材とを有し、 The second keyboard unit includes a second base plate, and a second kite in which a plurality of key switches are arranged on a second support plate that is rotatably disposed on the second base plate in a horizontal direction. Has, The rotation connecting portion has a support shaft rotatably supporting the first base plate and the second pace plate, and is slidably inserted into the support shaft and has gear teeth. And a sliding member,
前記第 1支持板の一側に配設されるとともに所定の円弧面が形成され、その円弧 面に前記ギア歯部に嚙合する第 1ギア歯が形成された第 1ギア部材と、  A first gear member disposed on one side of the first support plate and having a predetermined arc surface formed thereon, and the first gear tooth formed on the arc surface to engage with the gear tooth portion;
前記第 2支持板の一側に配設されるとともに所定の円弧面が形成され、その円弧 面に前記ギア歯部に嚙合する第 2ギア歯が形成された第 2ギア部材とを備えたこ とを特徴とする折畳可能なキーボード。  A second gear member provided on one side of the second support plate and having a predetermined arc surface formed thereon and having second gear teeth formed on the arc surface to be engaged with the gear teeth portion; A foldable keyboard characterized by the following.
8 . 前記第 1ベース板と第 1キーユニットとの間、 又は、 第 2ペース板と第 2キ —ュニヅ卜との間に配設され、第 1ベース板又は第 2ベース板に対して、第 1キ一 ュニット又は第 2キーュニットを所望の回動位置でロックするロック機構を備え たことを特徴とする請求の範囲 7に記載の折畳可能なキ一ボード。  8. Arranged between the first base plate and the first key unit or between the second pace plate and the second key unit, with respect to the first base plate or the second base plate, 8. The foldable key board according to claim 7, further comprising a lock mechanism for locking the first key unit or the second key unit at a desired rotation position.
9 . 前記口ック機構は、前記第 1ギア部材又は第 2ギア部材における円弧面に形 成されたロック溝と、前記第 1ベース板又は第 2ベース板に設けられ口ヅク溝に係 止するロック片とから構成されることを特徴とする請求の範囲 8に記載の折畳可 能なキーボード。  9. The hook mechanism is engaged with a lock groove formed on an arc surface of the first gear member or the second gear member, and with a hook groove provided on the first base plate or the second base plate. 9. The foldable keyboard according to claim 8, wherein the foldable keyboard is constituted by:
1 0 .前記第 1キーュニットの第 1支持板は所定の回動支点で第 1ベース板にて回 動可能に配置されるとともに、第 1支持板の一側には回動支点を中心とする回転半 径に合致する円弧面が形成され、  10.The first support plate of the first key unit is rotatably arranged on the first base plate at a predetermined rotation fulcrum, and one side of the first support plate is centered on the rotation fulcrum. An arc surface matching the radius of rotation is formed,
前記第 1ギア部材の円弧面は、前記第 1支持板の円弧面と同一の曲率半径を有す ることを特徴とする請求の範囲 7に記載の折畳可能なキーボード。  8. The foldable keyboard according to claim 7, wherein the arc surface of the first gear member has the same radius of curvature as the arc surface of the first support plate.
1 1 .前記第 2キ一ュニットの第 2支持板は所定の回動支点で第 2ベース板にて回 動可能に配置されるとともに、第 2支持板の一側には回動支点を中心とする回転半 径に合致する円弧面が形成され、  11. The second support plate of the second unit is rotatably arranged on the second base plate at a predetermined rotation fulcrum, and one side of the second support plate is centered on the rotation fulcrum. An arc surface is formed that matches the radius of rotation
前記第 2ギア部材の円弧面は、前記第 2支持板の円弧面と同一の曲率半径を有す ることを特徴とする請求の範囲 7に記載の折畳可能なキーボード。  8. The foldable keyboard according to claim 7, wherein the arc surface of the second gear member has the same radius of curvature as the arc surface of the second support plate.
1 2 .第 1キーボードュニヅトと第 2キーボードュニットとの間に回動連結部を設 け、キ一ボードの使用時には回動連結部を介して両ュニットが離間する方向に回動 されて水平状態になるとともに、キーボードの非使用時には回動連結部を介して両 ュニツトが近接する方向に回動されて重ね合わせた状態になる折畳可能なキーボ —ドにおいて、 1 2 .A pivot connection is provided between the first keyboard unit and the second keyboard unit, and when the keyboard is used, both units are pivoted away from each other via the pivot connection. When the keyboard is not in use, both sides are In a foldable keyboard in which the units are pivoted in the direction of approach and become superposed,
前記第 1キーボードュニットは、第 1ベース板と、第 1ベース板上で水平方向に 回動可能に配設された第 1支持板に複数のキースィツチが配列された第 1キーュ ニットとを有し、  The first keyboard unit includes a first base plate, and a first key unit in which a plurality of key switches are arranged on a first support plate that is rotatably disposed on the first base plate in a horizontal direction. And
前記第 2キーボードュニヅトは、第 2ベース板と、第 2ベース板上で水平方向に 回動可能に配設された第 2支持板に複数のキースィツチが配列された第 2キーュ ニットとを有し、  The second keyboard unit includes a second base plate, and a second key unit in which a plurality of key switches are arranged on a second support plate that is rotatably disposed on the second base plate in a horizontal direction. Has,
前記回動連結部は、前記第 1ペース板と第 2ベース板とを回動可能に支持する支 持軸と、 支持軸に対して摺動可能に揷嵌された摺動部材とを有し、  The rotation connecting portion includes a support shaft rotatably supporting the first pace plate and the second base plate, and a slide member slidably fitted on the support shaft. ,
前記第 1支持板の一側に配設された第 1支持部材と、  A first support member disposed on one side of the first support plate,
前記第 2支持板の一側に配設された第 2支持部材と、  A second support member disposed on one side of the second support plate;
前記摺動部材と第 1支持部材とをリンクする第 1リンク部材、及び、摺動部材と 前記第 2支持部材とをリンクする第 2リンク部材とを有するリンク機構とを備え たことを特徴とする折畳可能なキーボード。  A first link member for linking the sliding member and the first support member, and a link mechanism having a second link member for linking the sliding member and the second support member. Foldable keyboard.
1 3 . 前記第 1ベース板と第 1キーユニットとの間、 又は、 第 2ベース板と第 2キ 一ュニヅトとの間に配設され、第 1ペース板又は第 2ベ一ス板に対して、第 1キー ュニヅト又は第 2キ一ュニットを所望の回動位置でロックするロック機構を備え たことを特徴とする請求の範囲 1 2に記載の折畳可能なキーボード。  13. It is disposed between the first base plate and the first key unit, or between the second base plate and the second key unit, and is provided for the first pace plate or the second base plate. 13. The foldable keyboard according to claim 12, further comprising a lock mechanism for locking the first key unit or the second unit at a desired rotation position.
1 4 .前記口ヅク機構は、前記第 1支持部材又は第 2支持部材における円弧面に形 成された口ヅク溝と、前記第 1ベース板又は第 2ベース板に設けられ口ック溝に係 止するロック片とから構成されることを特徴とする請求の範囲 1 3に記載の折畳 可能なキーボード。  14. The mouthpiece mechanism is provided with an opening groove formed on an arc surface of the first support member or the second support member, and an opening groove provided on the first base plate or the second base plate. 14. The foldable keyboard according to claim 13, comprising a locking piece to be locked.
1 5 .前記第 1キーュニットの第 1支持板は所定の回動支点で第 1ベース板にて回 動可能に配置されるとともに、第 1支持板の一側には回動支点を中心とする回転半 径に合致する円弧面が形成され、  15.The first support plate of the first key unit is rotatably arranged on the first base plate at a predetermined rotation fulcrum, and one side of the first support plate is centered on the rotation fulcrum. An arc surface matching the radius of rotation is formed,
前記第 1支持部材には、前記第 1支持板の円弧面と同一の曲率半径を有する円弧 面が形成されていることを特徴とする請求項の範囲 1 2に記載の折畳可能なキ一 ボード。 The foldable key according to claim 12, wherein the first support member has an arc surface having the same radius of curvature as the arc surface of the first support plate. board.
1 6 .前記第 2キーュニットの第 2支持板は所定の回動支点で第 2ペース板にて回 動可能に配置されるとともに、第 2支持板の一側には回動支点を中心とする回転半 径に合致する円弧面が形成され、 16.The second support plate of the second key unit is rotatably arranged on the second pace plate at a predetermined rotation fulcrum, and one side of the second support plate is centered on the rotation fulcrum. An arc surface matching the radius of rotation is formed,
前記第 2支持部材には、前記第 2支持板の円弧面と同一の曲率半径を有する円弧 面が形成されていることを特徴とする請求の範囲 1 2に記載の折畳可能なキーボ ード。  The foldable keyboard according to claim 12, wherein an arc surface having the same radius of curvature as the arc surface of the second support plate is formed on the second support member. .
1 7 .第 1キ一ボードュニットと第 2キーボードュニットとの間に回動連結部を設 け、キーボードの使用時には回動連結部を介して両ュニッ卜が離間する方向に回動 されて水平状態になるとともに、キーボードの非使用時には回動連結部を介して両 ュニットが近接する方向に回動されて重ね合わせた状態になる折畳可能なキ一ボ 一ドにおいて、  17.A pivotal connection is provided between the first keyboard unit and the second keyboard unit, and when the keyboard is used, both units are pivoted in the direction away from each other via the pivotal connection unit to be horizontal. When the keyboard is not used, when the keyboard is not used, the foldable keyboard is turned in the direction in which the two units approach each other via the turning connection portion so as to be overlapped.
前記第 1キーボードュニットは、第 1ベース板と、第 1ペース板上で水平方向に 回動可能に配設された第 1支持板に複数のキ一スィツチが配列された第 1キーュ ニットとを有し、  The first keyboard unit includes a first base plate, and a first key unit in which a plurality of switches are arranged on a first support plate that is rotatably arranged on the first pace plate in a horizontal direction. Has,
前記第 2キーボードュニットは、第 2ペース板と、第 2ベース板上で水平方向に 回動可能に配設された第 2支持板に複数のキースィッチが配列された第 2キ一ュ ニットとを有し、  The second keyboard unit is a second unit in which a plurality of key switches are arranged on a second pace plate and a second support plate disposed rotatably in a horizontal direction on the second base plate. And
前記回動連結部は、前記第 1ペース板と第 2ベース板とを回動可能に支持する支 持軸を有し、  The rotation connecting portion has a support shaft that rotatably supports the first pace plate and the second base plate,
前記第 1ペース板と第 1キーユニットとの間、及び、第 2ペース板と第 2キーュ ニヅトとの間に配設され、第 1ペース板及び第 2ベース板に対して、第 1キ一ュ二 ット及び第 2キーュニットを相互に独立して所望の回動位置で保持する保持機構 を備えたことを特徴とする折畳可能なキーボード。  The first key plate is disposed between the first pace plate and the first key unit and between the second pace plate and the second key unit, and is disposed between the first pace plate and the second base plate. A foldable keyboard comprising a holding mechanism for holding a unit and a second key unit independently at a desired rotation position.
1 8 . 前記保持機構は、  1 8. The holding mechanism is
前記第 1支持板の一側に配設されるとともに所定の円弧面が形成され、その円弧 面に複数の第 1口ック溝が形成された第 1支持部材と、  A first support member provided on one side of the first support plate and having a predetermined arc surface formed thereon, and a plurality of first opening grooves formed on the arc surface;
前記第 1ベース板に設けられ、 前記第 1口ック溝に係止する第 1ロック片と、 前記第 2支持板の一側に配設されるとともに所定の円弧面が形成され、その円弧 面に複数の第 2口ック溝が形成された第 2支持部材と、 前記第 2ベース板に設けられ、前記第 2ロック溝に係止する第 2ロック片とを備 えたことを特徴とする請求の範囲 1 7に記載の折畳可能なキーボード。 A first lock piece provided on the first base plate and locked in the first opening groove; and a predetermined arc surface provided on one side of the second support plate and having a predetermined arc surface, A second support member having a plurality of second opening grooves formed on a surface thereof; 18. The foldable keyboard according to claim 17, further comprising: a second lock piece provided on the second base plate and locked in the second lock groove.
1 9 .前記第 1支持部材には前記各第 1口ック溝に対応する位置に目盛りが設けら れ、前記第 2支持部材には前記第 2口ック溝に対応する位置に目盛りが設けられて いることを特徴とする請求の範囲 1 8に記載の折畳可能なキーボード。  19.The first support member is provided with a scale at a position corresponding to each of the first mouth grooves, and the second support member is provided with a scale at a position corresponding to the second mouth groove. 19. The foldable keyboard according to claim 18, wherein the keyboard is provided.
2 0 .前記第 1キ一ュニッ卜の第 1支持板は所定の回動支点で第 1ペース板にて回 動可能に配置されるとともに、第 1支持板の一側には回動支点を中心とする回転半 径に合致する円弧面が形成され、  20. The first support plate of the first unit is rotatably arranged on a first pace plate at a predetermined rotation fulcrum, and a rotation fulcrum is provided on one side of the first support plate. An arc surface matching the center radius of rotation is formed,
前記第 1支持部材の円弧面は、前記第 1支持板の円弧面と同一の曲率半径を有す ることを特徴とする請求の範囲 1 8に記載の折畳可能なキーボード。  19. The foldable keyboard according to claim 18, wherein the arc surface of the first support member has the same radius of curvature as the arc surface of the first support plate.
2 1 .前記第 2キーュニツ卜の第 2支持板は所定の回動支点で第 2ベース板にて回 動可能に配置されるとともに、第 2支持板の一側には回動支点を中心とする回転半 径に合致する円弧面が形成され、  21. The second support plate of the second key unit is rotatably arranged on the second base plate at a predetermined rotation fulcrum, and one side of the second support plate is centered on the rotation fulcrum. An arc surface corresponding to the rotating radius is formed,
前記第 2支持部材の円弧面は、前記第 2支持板の円弧面と同一の曲率半径を有す ることを特徴とする請求の範囲 1 8に記載の折畳可能なキーボード。  19. The foldable keyboard according to claim 18, wherein the arc surface of the second support member has the same radius of curvature as the arc surface of the second support plate.
2 2 . 前記保持機構は、 2 2. The holding mechanism is
前記第 1支持板の一側に配設されるとともに所定の円弧面が形成された第 1支 持部材と、  A first support member disposed on one side of the first support plate and having a predetermined arc surface formed thereon;
前記第 1ベース板に設けられ、前記第 1支持板の円弧面に当接する第 1制動部材 と、  A first braking member provided on the first base plate and in contact with an arc surface of the first support plate;
前記第 2支持板の一側に配設されるとともに所定の円弧面が形成された第 2支 持部材と、  A second support member disposed on one side of the second support plate and having a predetermined arc surface formed thereon;
前記第 2ベース板に設けられ、前記第 2支持板の円弧面に当接する第 2制動部材 とを備えたことを特徴とする請求の範囲 1 7に記載の折畳可能なキーボード。  16. The foldable keyboard according to claim 17, further comprising: a second braking member provided on said second base plate and in contact with an arc surface of said second support plate.
2 3 .第 1キ一ボードュニヅトと第 2キーボードユニットとの間に回動連結部を設 け、キーボードの使用時には回動連結部を介して両ュニットが離間する方向に回動 されて水平状態になるとともに、キーボードの非使用時には回動連結部を介して両 ュニッ卜が近接する方向に回動されて重ね合わせた状態になる折畳可能なキ一ボ 一ドにおいて、 前記回動連結部は、前記第 1ベース板と第 2ベース板とを回動可能に支持する支 持軸を有し、 23.A pivot connection is provided between the first keyboard unit and the second keyboard unit, and when the keyboard is used, both units are pivoted away from each other via the pivot connection to be horizontal. In addition, when the keyboard is not used, a foldable keyboard that is turned in the direction in which the two units approach each other via the turning connection portion so as to be overlapped, The rotation connecting portion has a support shaft that rotatably supports the first base plate and the second base plate,
前記第 1キーボードュニットは、第 1ベース板と、第 1ベース板上で水平方向に 回動可能に配設された第 1支持板に複数のキースィツチが配列された第 1キ一ュ ニットとを有し、  The first keyboard unit includes a first base plate, and a first unit in which a plurality of key switches are arranged on a first support plate disposed rotatably in a horizontal direction on the first base plate. Has,
前記第 2キ一ボードュニットは、第 2ベース板と、第 2ベース板上で水平方向に 回動可能に配設された第 2支持板に複数のキ一スィツチが配列された第 2キ一ュ ニットとを有し、  The second key unit comprises a second base plate and a second key plate in which a plurality of key switches are arranged on a second support plate disposed rotatably in a horizontal direction on the second base plate. With a knit,
前記第 1支持板は第 1ベース板上に配設された第 1回動軸を介して水平方向に 回動されるとともに、前記第 2支持板は第 2ベース板上に配設された第 2回動軸を 介して水平方向に回動されることを特徴とする折畳可能なキ一ボード。  The first support plate is horizontally rotated via a first rotation shaft provided on the first base plate, and the second support plate is provided on a second base plate provided on the second base plate. A foldable key board that is horizontally rotated through two rotation shafts.
PCT/JP2003/007028 2002-06-04 2003-06-03 Foldable keyboard WO2003104961A1 (en)

Priority Applications (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU2003241974A AU2003241974A1 (en) 2002-06-04 2003-06-03 Foldable keyboard
US10/508,490 US20050212772A1 (en) 2002-06-04 2003-06-03 Foldable keyboard
EP03730804A EP1510909A4 (en) 2002-06-04 2003-06-03 Foldable keyboard
US11/003,685 US20050099396A1 (en) 2002-06-04 2004-12-06 Foldable keyboard

Applications Claiming Priority (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2002-163440 2002-06-04
JP2002163440A JP2004013351A (en) 2002-06-04 2002-06-04 Collapsible keyboard
JP2002169724A JP3972739B2 (en) 2002-06-11 2002-06-11 Foldable keyboard
JP2002-169724 2002-06-11
JP2002-172691 2002-06-13
JP2002172691A JP2004021395A (en) 2002-06-13 2002-06-13 Foldable keyboard
JP2002172841A JP2004021405A (en) 2002-06-13 2002-06-13 Foldable keyboard
JP2002-172841 2002-06-13

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/003,685 Continuation US20050099396A1 (en) 2002-06-04 2004-12-06 Foldable keyboard

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2003104961A1 true WO2003104961A1 (en) 2003-12-18

Family

ID=29740942

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2003/007028 WO2003104961A1 (en) 2002-06-04 2003-06-03 Foldable keyboard

Country Status (5)

Country Link
US (1) US20050212772A1 (en)
EP (1) EP1510909A4 (en)
CN (1) CN1656437A (en)
AU (1) AU2003241974A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2003104961A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20070159465A1 (en) * 2006-01-10 2007-07-12 Samuel Choi Span and angle adjustable keyboard for an abnormally big body size user
JP5083078B2 (en) * 2008-07-11 2012-11-28 ソニー株式会社 Keyboard and keyboard manufacturing method
KR20100033622A (en) * 2008-09-22 2010-03-31 삼성전자주식회사 Portable terminal for multimedia
WO2012006136A1 (en) * 2010-07-07 2012-01-12 Cervantes Mobile Compact keyboard and cradle
US8941979B2 (en) * 2012-03-16 2015-01-27 Blackberry Limited Foldable keyboard
TWI464767B (en) * 2012-10-04 2014-12-11 Wistron Corp Keyboard and method for assembling the keyboard to portable electronic device
CN113882871A (en) * 2021-10-20 2022-01-04 内蒙古黄陶勒盖煤炭有限责任公司 Stride firm support frame of thing formula operation

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH07175562A (en) * 1993-12-17 1995-07-14 Alps Electric Co Ltd Keyboard input device
JPH10240409A (en) * 1997-02-28 1998-09-11 Toshiba Corp Electronic equipment and keyboard device
JP3082055U (en) * 2001-01-26 2001-11-30 詮泰科技股▲分▼有限公司 Foldable input device

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB2285770B (en) * 1994-01-18 1997-05-21 Silitek Corp Keyboard
US6151012A (en) * 1995-11-16 2000-11-21 Bullister; Edward Multifunctional portable computing device with special housing

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH07175562A (en) * 1993-12-17 1995-07-14 Alps Electric Co Ltd Keyboard input device
JPH10240409A (en) * 1997-02-28 1998-09-11 Toshiba Corp Electronic equipment and keyboard device
JP3082055U (en) * 2001-01-26 2001-11-30 詮泰科技股▲分▼有限公司 Foldable input device

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP1510909A4 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP1510909A1 (en) 2005-03-02
EP1510909A4 (en) 2005-06-22
US20050212772A1 (en) 2005-09-29
CN1656437A (en) 2005-08-17
AU2003241974A1 (en) 2003-12-22

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP1703702B1 (en) Hinged portable radio communication equipment with a double action hinge
EP2214384B1 (en) Portable terminal having projecting function
KR101442665B1 (en) Mobile electronic device
JP5611743B2 (en) Cover mechanism for switchgear
WO2003104961A1 (en) Foldable keyboard
JP4537930B2 (en) Horizontal rotation mechanism for portable devices
JP4495077B2 (en) Structure and electronic device
CN101277321B (en) Mobile terminal
TW200418061A (en) Foldable keyboard
JP3972739B2 (en) Foldable keyboard
JP2004021395A (en) Foldable keyboard
US20050099396A1 (en) Foldable keyboard
WO2003104962A1 (en) Foldable keyboard
US20050105952A1 (en) Foldable keyboard
CN101150817A (en) Mobile communication terminal for multimedia services
JP2004013343A (en) Collapsible keyboard
JP2004013340A (en) Collapsible keyboard
JP2004013354A (en) Collapsible keyboard
JP2004013351A (en) Collapsible keyboard
JP2004021416A (en) Foldable keyboard
JP2004013336A (en) Collapsible keyboard
JP2004013342A (en) Collapsible keyboard
JP6850855B1 (en) Keyboard device
JP2004021405A (en) Foldable keyboard
JP6808005B1 (en) Keyboard device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NI NO NZ OM PH PL PT RO RU SC SD SE SG SK SL TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VC VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IT LU MC NL PT SE SI SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 10508490

Country of ref document: US

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2003730804

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 20038122642

Country of ref document: CN

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 11003685

Country of ref document: US

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2003730804

Country of ref document: EP